Banner Financial Aid / User Guide / 8.14.1

Banner Financial Aid / User Guide / 8.14.1
Banner Financial Aid
User Guide
Release 8.14.1
May 2012
Banner®, Colleague®, PowerCAMPUS®, Luminis® and Datatel® are trademarks of Ellucian or its affiliates and are registered in the U.S. and
other countries. Ellucian, Advance, DegreeWorks, fsaATLAS, Course Signals, SmartCall, Recruiter, MOX, ILP, and WCMS are trademarks of
Ellucian or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.
©1991 - 2012 Ellucian. All rights reserved. The unauthorized possession, use, reproduction, distribution, display or disclosure of this material or
the information contained herein is prohibited.
Contains confidential and proprietary information of Ellucian and its subsidiaries. Use of these materials is limited to Ellucian licensees, and is
subject to the terms and conditions of one or more written license agreements between Ellucian and the licensee in question.
In preparing and providing this publication, Ellucian is not rendering legal, accounting, or other similar professional services. Ellucian makes no
claims that an institution's use of this publication or the software for which it is provided will insure compliance with applicable federal or state
laws, rules, or regulations. Each organization should seek legal, accounting and other similar professional services from competent providers of
the organization’s own choosing.
Prepared by: Ellucian
4375 Fair Lakes Court
Fairfax, Virginia 22033
United States of America
Revision History
Publication Date
Summary
May 2012
New version that supports Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1 software.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
Chapter 1
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Application summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Module integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Financial Aid system process flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Naming conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Applicant processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Applicant processing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Need Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Need Analysis online recalculation process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Requirements Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Requirements Tracking process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Budgeting process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Packaging and Disbursement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Packaging process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
iii
Athletics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Funds Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Funds Management process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Electronic Data Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Electronic Data Exchange process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
History and Transcripts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
History process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Financial Aid Common Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31
Common Functions process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Student System Shared Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Student System Shared Data process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Short-Term Credit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Short-Term Credit process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36
Student Employment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
Student Employment process flow narrative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
Loan Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
Manual Loan process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Return of Title IV Funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
Return of Title IV Funds process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
iv
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Financial Aid Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Forms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Chapter 2
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Audit logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Viewing logging records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Logging archive and purge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Data Load procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Understanding Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
EDE ISIR Data Load process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
CSS PROFILE Data Load process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Setting up rule and validation forms for Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Preparing the data to load into Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Default file names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Running the Data Load process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Additional Data Load topics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
Dataload Pt 1 (RCBTPxx, RCPCTxx) temporary tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39
Common Matching algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41
Pell processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Pell setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Detail Code Control Form - Student (TSADETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Fund Management (RFRMGMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Aid Period Validation (RTVAPRD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Period Base Data (RORPRDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52
COD Entity ID Rules (RORCODI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Packaging Options (RPROPTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRASCH). . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
v
Academic Year Rules (RORACYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62
Applicant Pell Grant (ROAPELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Budget Component Validation (RTVCOMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63
Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules (RBRPBGR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Federal Rules Inquiry (RPIFEDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Pell procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Batch Pell Awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Override a Bachelors Degree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Manual adjustments to Pell grants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Why and how to lock Pell grants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) and Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) . . . . 2-67
Financial Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Batch Posting Rules (RORPOST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Updating award amounts to agree with actual disbursement amounts . . . . . . . 2-74
Reducing an award for Pell paid at another school in the same aid year . . . . . 2-76
Handling less-than-half time for Pell more efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Controlling when the Pell calculation process is run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Setup procedure for multiple Pell fund codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) for Pell processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) for Pell processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82
Pell Edit/Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-84
Pell processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89
Load Calculation Routine (UCLRTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92
Pell Calculation Routine (UCPRTN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
Pell grant award calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97
100% Pell grant disbursement calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105
TEACH grant processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
TEACH awarding and disbursing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108
TEACH grant setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-110
EDE correction logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-111
vi
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Processing EDE corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Methodology specific changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112
Setting a student’s dependency codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
Overriding the student's dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-113
EFC proration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114
Estimated vs official contributions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-115
Recalculate Need Analysis Indicator functionality updates . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
FM Need Analysis solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-116
Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-117
Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-118
Job submission vs. servlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Processing flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-124
Period based processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-125
Period creation and setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-126
Period processing vs. term based processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-137
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) - period processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138
Requirements tracking procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
Requirements tracking implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-140
Budgeting procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Budget implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
Aid year budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-143
Period based and algorithmic budgeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144
Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP) processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-163
SAP forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-164
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
vii
SAP processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-170
Process flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173
Sample rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174
Funds Management procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Funds Management implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176
Fund balance reconciliation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Calculating fund balances - setting and using
overcommitment levels in packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178
Packaging and disbursement procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Packaging implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179
Packaging/simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-182
Packaging process definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Initialization process (run as part of RPEPCKG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Simulated packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Actual packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Using NSLDS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-183
Award validation after receipt of NSLDS data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
Modifying existing Stafford, Direct or Perkins awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-185
Default/refund information and financial aid eligibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
Validating awards against defaults/refunds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-186
Validating disbursements against defaults/refunds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Using NSLDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-187
Applicant Student Loan Data Inquiry (RNINSLD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-188
Award forms (RPAAWRD)/(RPAAPMT)/(ROARMAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-189
Output population selection with financial aid Dataload Part 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Banner Financial Aid Fund Specific Packaging options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-190
Banner Financial Aid Global Packaging options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-197
Factors determining whether an online/batch award is packaged . . . . . . . 2-199
Manually scheduling awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-202
viii
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Adding periods to an award schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-203
Award by period procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-204
Updating awards when locked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-205
Identifying students needing new or revised award letters . . . . . . . . . . . 2-206
Banner Financial Aid Global Disbursement options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-207
Banner Financial Aid Fund Specific Disbursement options . . . . . . . . . . 2-210
Disbursement validation edits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-219
Other disbursement considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226
Regulatory compliance for Stafford disbursements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226
Disbursement edits for loans to match edits for other funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-226
Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227
Loan authorization to net returned amounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227
Using enrollment disbursement edits for funds in memo status . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227
Recognition of pell payment cell to disbursement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227
Part-Time proration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-227
Memos processed after scheduled disbursement date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229
VA Chapter 30 - prior to the 2010-2011 aid year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-229
Voiding excess payments for students no longer eligible. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-230
Disbursement validation reject messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-230
Disbursement reports generated by disbursement process . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231
Final Disbursement - optional processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231
Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231
“Listener” mode online processing performance enhancement
using Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-231
What is the difference between Oracle Pipes and Oracle Advanced Queuing? . . 2-232
Configuring supported processes to use Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing . . . . 2-233
Starting and stopping “listener” mode Processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-236
Configuring time-out for “listener” mode processes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-237
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
ix
Default/refund processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238
Levels of default/refund administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238
Sources of default/refund information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-238
Title IV refund/repayment process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239
Pell grant award and disbursement processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-239
State grant award processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-241
Resources, contracts, and exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242
Contracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-242
Exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-243
Excluding contracts and exemptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-244
Maintaining resources and calculation in unmet need . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-246
Loan processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249
Manual loans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249
Disbursing manual loan checks through Banner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-249
U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250
Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-250
Detail Code Control Form - Student (TSADETC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251
Funds Management (RFRMGMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-251
Packaging Options (RPROPTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-252
Class Code Translation (RPRCLSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
Certification Initials Validation (RTVCINT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
Loan Status Validation (RTVLNST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
Lender Base Data (RPRLNDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
Loan Period Base Data (RPRLPRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-253
Loan Options (RPRLOPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-254
Lender/Disbursing Agents Rules (RPRLNDA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-256
First-year, first-time borrower loan rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-256
Crosswalk Validation (GTVSDAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-258
Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-258
Award/Package Maintenance (RPAAWRD)/(RPAAPMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-259
Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-259
RPAELAP fields updated by RPRELAP process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-261
x
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Loan Parent Inquiry (RPILPAR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-263
Unmatched COD Records (RPAUCOD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-264
Electronic Loan Appl Extract (RPRELAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-265
Batch Control (RPIBATC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266
RPAELAP fields updated by the RPRELAX process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266
Electronic Loan Response Upload (RPRELRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-266
RPAELAP fields updated by the RPRELRU process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-267
Disbursement/Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-268
Hold/Release Process (RPRHDRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269
Electronic transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-269
EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-270
Disbursement form field population . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-272
Loan reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275
CommonLine loan adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-275
Electronic loans as certification requests in common response file . . . . . . . . . 2-277
Alternative loans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278
Alternative loan processing flow. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-278
Global Institutional Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
Fund Management (RFRMGMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
Loan Options (RPRLOPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
Loan Period Base Data Rules (RPRLPRD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-279
Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280
Electronic Loan Application (RPAELAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-280
Electronic Loan Appl Extract (RPRELAX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
Electronic Loan Response Upload (RPRELRU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
Electronic Loan Load/EFT Posting Processes (RPEFTL/RPREFTP) . . . . . . . 2-281
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
Disbursement/adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-281
Hold/Release Process (RPRHDRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282
Electronic transfer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282
EFT/Disbursement Roster Upload (RPREFTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-282
Electronic Payment Receipt (RPAEPMT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-283
EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
xi
RPAELAP fields populated by RPREFTP process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284
Electronic Loan Disbursement (RPAELDB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-284
Disbursement form field population . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-285
Disburse to student account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287
Loan adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-287
Loan reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
Loan Proceeds Aging Report (RPRLNAG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-288
Loan Funding Exception Report (RPRLNEX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-289
Loan Summary Report (RPRLSUM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-289
Direct lending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
Financial Aid common functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
Aid year default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-292
User-defined data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293
Batch posting process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-293
Processing holds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-306
Repeat coursework processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-308
Part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-308
Part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-309
Part 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-310
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-311
Display and maintenance of student enrollment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320
Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-320
Calculating enrollment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-323
Rescheduling disbursement date using periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
Using parentheses in selection statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
Hints for RORRULE form use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-329
Student employment procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-330
Student employment implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-330
xii
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Algorithmic packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-332
Algorithmic packaging features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-333
Related fund features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-336
Sample algorithmic packaging rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-338
Columns defined on the Temporary Packaging Need Table (RPTNEED) . . . . . 2-360
Functions defined in the rpkalgr package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-363
COD TEACH Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-364
Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-365
Additional examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-369
Scholarship and athletics processing by period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-374
Potential Athletic Grant Defaults (RAAPAGD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-375
Sport Aid by Period (RAASPTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-375
Team Sport Period Aid (RAITMTM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Donor and Scholarship Demographics (RFADSCD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Scholarship Period Information (RPASTRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Athletic Aid Type Validation (RTVAATP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Financial Aid Sport Validation (RTVFASP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Grades to Donor Validation (RTVGRDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Scholarship Source Validation (RTVSSRC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-376
Reviewed Validation (RTVREVW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Thank You Letter Validation (RTVTYLT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Third Party Contract Rules (RPRCONT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Exemption Rules (RPREXPT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Resource Code Validation (RTVARSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Athletic Grant Period Roll (RAPAGRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Athletic Aid Discrepancy Rpt (RARATAD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-377
Financial Aid Self-Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-379
Unsecured access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-379
Secured access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-379
Set up Financial Aid on the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-381
Financial Aid Self-Service web pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-382
Web Snapshot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-444
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-444
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
xiii
Web Snapshot system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-444
Using the Web Snapshot system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-446
Creating and updating Web Snapshot Panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-449
Chapter 3
Interfaces
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Student Employment module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Banner Human Resources requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Banner Financial Aid requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Setting up student employment forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Setting up applicant forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Awarding work study funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Tracking non-work study awards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Referring students to positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Authorizing students to work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Example #1 – One position for all departments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Example #2 – One position for each department . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Using payroll feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Entering earnings without payroll feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Making payroll corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Terminating a Student From a Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Banner Human Resources requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Testing of student employment payroll feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Accounts Receivable module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Setting up detail codes for financial aid disbursement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Setting Up Aid Year, Term, Period for Financial Aid. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Disbursing financial aid funds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Running financial aid disbursement process (online and batch) . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Billing and payments for financial aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Processing disbursements, authorizations, and memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Billing parameters and financial aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Financial aid disbursement process and A/R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Campus Loan Manager (CLM) module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Section overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
xiv
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Organization of material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Release requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
CLM components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
Banner components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Functional overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
CLM to Banner accounting feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Installation and setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Banner System -- Assign CLM loan fund numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Banner System -- Assign coding scheme translations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Banner -- Setup general ledger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
CLM System -- Assign accounting distribution rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
General procedure for the Banner to CLM disbursement feed . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34
Banner to CLM enrollment interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35
CLM to Banner accounting feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
CLM (Plus system) operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Banner operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Online operations and screen formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Banner batch operations and reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
Banner Enrolled Borrower Verification . . . . . . . . . . (NBA809) . . . . . . . . 3-43
Banner Finance Accrual Accounting Feed . . . . . . . . (NBB229) . . . . . . . . 3-46
Banner Finance Cash Accounting Feed . . . . . . . . . (NBD029) . . . . . . . . 3-48
CLM Interface Accounting Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMIA) . . . . . . . 3-50
CLM Interface Disbursement Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMID) . . . . . . . 3-53
CLM Interface Enrollment Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMIE) . . . . . . . 3-58
General Module enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
PIN maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Partial data masking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-61
Chapter 4
Reports and Processes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Naming conventions (reports and processes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
xv
Report and process descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Athletic Grant Term Roll Process . . . . . . . . . . . . (RAPAGRL). . . . . . . 4-5
Athletic Aid Discrepancy Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RARATAD) . . . . . . . 4-7
Applicant Budget Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RBRABUD) . . . . . . 4-9
Applicant Budget Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RBRABUD) . . . . . . 4-15
Period Budget Grouping Process
Period Budget Recalc Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . (RBRPBGP) . . . . . . 4-21
. . . . . . . . . . . . . (RBRPBRC) . . . . . . 4-25
Financial Aid EDE Data Load Part 1 Process . . . . . . (RCBTPxx) . . . . . . . 4-28
FA CSS Dataload Pt 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RCPCTxx) . . . . . . . 4-33
Financial Aid Data Load Table Deletes Process . . . . . (RCPDTMP) . . . . . . 4-37
Copy IM Data to FM Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RCPIMFM) . . . . . . . 4-40
Financial Aid Data Load Part 2 Process . . . . . . . . . (RCPMTCH) . . . . . . 4-42
Financial Aid Data Load Part 3 Process . . . . . . . . . (RCRTPxx) . . . . . . . 4-45
ISIR Correction/Request Process . . . . . . . . . . . . (REBCDxx) . . . . . . . 4-54
CAL MIS Extract Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERCALX) . . . . . . 4-59
COD Print Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERCDxx) . . . . . . . 4-64
2010-2011 Correction Error Report
. . . . . . . . . . . (RERCExx) . . . . . . . 4-73
ISIR Corr/Request Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERCRCR) . . . . . . 4-75
COD Extract Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (REREXxx) . . . . . . . 4-91
Grant File Import Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERFIxx) . . . . . . . 4-101
Grant COD Miscellaneous Report . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERGRNT) . . . . . . 4-105
COD Import Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERIMxx) . . . . . . . 4-119
COD 3.0e File Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERIM3E) . . . . . . . 4-124
COD Import/Export Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERIMEX) . . . . . . . 4-125
ISIR Print Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RERISxx) . . . . . . . 4-138
Grant Origination Creation Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RERORxx) . . . . . . . 4-151
Fund Balance Roll Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RFPFBRL) . . . . . . . 4-155
Account Balance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RFRABAL) . . . . . . . 4-159
Fund Budget Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RFRBUDG) . . . . . . 4-162
Fund Description Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RFRFUND) . . . . . . 4-165
Simulation Fund Balance Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RFRSBAL) . . . . . . . 4-168
Applicant Comments Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RHRCOMM) . . . . . . 4-170
Applicant Comments Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RHRPCOM) . . . . . . 4-173
Authorization Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RJRAUTH) . . . . . . . 4-176
Pay Period Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RJRDPPR) . . . . . . 4-179
Payroll Load Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RJRLOAD) . . . . . . . 4-182
Payroll Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RJRPAYE) . . . . . . . 4-187
xvi
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Earnings Control Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RJRSEEC) . . . . . . . 4-190
Award/Tracking Letter Indicator Reset Process . . . . . (RLRLETR) . . . . . . . 4-195
Need Analysis Logging Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RLRLOGG) . . . . . . 4-197
Need Analysis Calculation Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RNEINxx) . . . . . . . 4-199
FM Need Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RNPFMxx) . . . . . . . 4-202
Need Analysis Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RNRNAxx) . . . . . . . 4-203
Transfer Monitoring Application Creation Process . . . . (RNRTMAC) . . . . . . 4-205
Transfer Monitoring Extract Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RNRTMNE) . . . . . . 4-210
Transfer Monitoring Import Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RNRTMNI) . . . . . . . 4-214
Verification Discrepancy Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RNRVRFY) . . . . . . 4-217
Automatic Rule Compilation Process
. . . . . . . . . . (ROOGSQL) . . . . . . 4-222
Update Batch Post Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (ROPPCAT) . . . . . . 4-223
Financial Aid New Year Roll Process
. . . . . . . . . . (ROPROLL) . . . . . . 4-225
SAP Assignment Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (ROPSAPR) . . . . . . 4-231
Financial Aid Term Roll Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . (ROPTERM) . . . . . . 4-233
User-Defined Data Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (ROPUSER) . . . . . . 4-234
Audit Log Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORALOG) . . . . . . 4-235
Basic Applicant Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORAPLT) . . . . . . . 4-240
Archive/Purge Applicant Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . (RORARCH) . . . . . . 4-245
Batch Posting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORBPST) . . . . . . 4-247
Calculated Values Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORCALC) . . . . . . 4-256
Financial Aid E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (ROREMAL) . . . . . . 4-260
FISAP Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORFSxx) . . . . . . . 4-263
Grade Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORGRDE) . . . . . . 4-286
Automatic Group Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORGRPS) . . . . . . 4-289
Financial Aid HS/Admission Data Posting . . . . . . . . (RORHSDP) . . . . . . 4-292
Logging Archive/Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORLOGA) . . . . . . 4-296
Financial Aid Registration Report
. . . . . . . . . . . . (RORREGS) . . . . . . 4-302
Rules Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RORRPRG) . . . . . . 4-307
Disbursement Print Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBDDRV) . . . . . . 4-308
CLM Interface Accounting Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMIA) . . . . . . . 4-309
CLM Disbursement Feed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMID) . . . . . . . 4-311
CLM Interface Enrollment Extract . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBLMIE) . . . . . . . 4-315
Packaging Print Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPBPDRV) . . . . . . 4-317
Disbursement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPEDISB) . . . . . . . 4-319
Packaging Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPEPCKG) . . . . . . 4-326
Pell Calculation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPEPELL) . . . . . . . 4-332
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
xvii
Web Applicant Info Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPPINFO) . . . . . . . 4-336
Web Applicant Info Purge Process . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPPPINF) . . . . . . . 4-338
Award Roll Process
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRAROL) . . . . . . 4-340
Applicant Disbursement Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRADSB) . . . . . . 4-344
Award and Disbursement Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRAWDB) . . . . . . 4-348
Applicant Award Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRAWRD) . . . . . . 4-352
Award Cancellation Process Report . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRCNCL) . . . . . . 4-360
Direct Loan Compare Extract Process . . . . . . . . . . (RPRCPxx) . . . . . . . 4-363
Disbursement Schedule Date Update . . . . . . . . . . (RPRDDUP) . . . . . . 4-366
Promissory Note Manifest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRDLPM) . . . . . . 4-368
Disclosure Statement Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRDSPT) . . . . . . 4-375
Direct Loan Flat-File Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRDUxx) . . . . . . . 4-380
EFT/Disbursement Roster Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPREFTL) . . . . . . . 4-394
EFT Posting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPREFTP) . . . . . . . 4-397
Electronic Loan Application Process . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRELAP) . . . . . . . 4-399
Electronic Loan Application Extract
. . . . . . . . . . . (RPRELAX) . . . . . . . 4-412
Electronic Loan Change Transaction Extract
. . . . . . (RPRELCT) . . . . . . . 4-418
Electronic Loan Response Upload . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRELRU) . . . . . . 4-422
Grant Calculation Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRGRNT) . . . . . . 4-425
Hold/Release Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRHDRL) . . . . . . 4-427
Loan Proceeds Aging Report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRLNAG) . . . . . . 4-430
Loan Funding Exception Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRLNEX) . . . . . . 4-432
Direct Loan Record Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRLORC) . . . . . . 4-437
Loan Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRLSUM) . . . . . . 4-445
Promissory Note Printing Program . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRPNPT) . . . . . . 4-451
Simulation Award Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRSAWD) . . . . . . 4-464
Financial Aid Student Billing Payment . . . . . . . . . . (RPRSBPR) . . . . . . 4-466
Short-Term Credits Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRSTCR) . . . . . . 4-470
Title IV Funds Return Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRTIVC) . . . . . . . 4-472
Return of Title IV Funds Withdrawal Calculation . . . . . (RPRTIVI) . . . . . . . . 4-479
Title IV Recipient Withdrawn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRTIVR) . . . . . . . 4-485
VA Benefits on FAFSA Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRVABN) . . . . . . 4-491
Validate Award Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRVAWD) . . . . . . 4-493
Disbursement Validation Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RPRVDIS) . . . . . . . 4-497
Applicant Requirements Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RRRAREQ) . . . . . . 4-501
Exit Interview Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RRREXIT) . . . . . . . 4-506
xviii
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
Data Discrepancies Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (RSRDSCP) . . . . . . 4-515
Financial Aid Enrollment Hours
. . . . . . . . . . . . . (RSRENRL) . . . . . . 4-519
Appendix A 2012 - 2013 New Aid Year Checklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
New Year Start-Up Checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Financial Aid New Year Roll Process (ROPROLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Common Functions Module (*RESCOMN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-6
Data Management Module (*RESDATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Need Analysis Module (*RESNEED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-9
Requirements Tracking Module (*RESTRACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-12
Budgeting Module (*RESBUDG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-14
Funds Management Module (*RESFUND) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Packaging And Disbursement Module (*RESPACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-19
Loan Processing Module (*RESLOAN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-25
Electronic Data Exchange (EDE) Module (*RESEDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-26
Student Employment Module (*RESEMPL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-27
Athletic Module (*RESATHL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-28
Schedule A — System validation and rules form reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-29
Schedule B — Delivered system required data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-31
Index
May 2012
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
xix
xx
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Contents
May 2012
1
System Overview
This chapter introduces you to Banner Financial Aid. The following is a list of the sections
in this chapter and a brief description of their contents.
• The Application Summary section provides a description of the application and the
problems it resolves. It also describes the application’s place in Banner as well as
identifying database and hardware environments.
• The Functions section describes the key functions of Banner Financial Aid.
• The Module Integration section explains the interaction of Banner Financial Aid
functions.
• The Financial Aid System Process Flow section diagrams the Banner Financial Aid
process.
Application summary
The Banner series of software products assist with the task of resource management by
supporting the integrated flow of information throughout your institution. This tradition
continues with the Banner Financial Aid product.
Handling the daily activities of the financial aid office, Banner performs tracking,
budgeting, need analysis and packaging. Meeting the demands for information, Banner
Financial Aid contains the following integrated components: applicant record creation,
requirements tracking, student budget assignment, need analysis, and packaging. Also
included are funds management, disbursement, award history, direct lending, electronic
data exchange (EDE), reporting, loan processing, Transfer Monitoring, Financial Aid
Self-Service, return of Title IV fund information, and Athletics.
Banner Financial Aid places your financial aid office at the forefront of technology
through its use of Oracle®—the advanced relational database management system from
Oracle Corporation and SQL—the standard for database access. By combining this
technology with rule-based architecture and the capability for distributed processing,
Banner creates an information environment that you can tailor to meet your unique
requirements without extensive technical support.
This combination gives you the advantages of an easy-to-use query language and report
writer, and direct access to strategic decision support information.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-1
Functions
Banner Financial Aid performs the following functions via its integrated modules:
• Applicant Processing
• Need Analysis/Verification
• Requirements Tracking
• Budgeting
• Packaging and Disbursement
• Athletics
• Funds Management
• Electronic Data Exchange
• History and Transcripts
• Financial Aid Common Functions
• Student System Shared Data
• Short-Term Credit
• Student Employment
• Loan Processing
• Return of Title IV Funds
• Financial Aid Self-Service
All modules can be tailored to your institution by using Banner’s rule-based architecture
to define validation codes and processing rules.
Module integration
1. Applicant Processing accepts records created through several processes including
ISIR data loads, CSS Profile Loads, Pell Electronic Data Exchange, and manual
creation through the Record Creation/Need Analysis forms.
2. Need Analysis/Verification performs calculations that determine the contribution
applicants are expected to make towards their expenses. The verification process
validates certain information provided on an aid application against the same data
from other documents.
1-2
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
3. Requirements Tracking monitors the request for and receipt of certain documents
which are often required so that applications can be fully processed.
4. Budgeting maintains data on the applicant’s cost to attend the institution.
5. Packaging and Disbursements matches an applicant’s need with available funds to
determine an appropriate package for the applicant and records disbursement of the
funds.
6. Athletics monitors Athletic Award levels by sport and student and maintains
scholarship and donor information.
7. Funds Management maintains data related to financial aid funding sources.
8. Electronic Data Exchange allows institutions to share information electronically with
the central processor and COD.
9. History and Transcripts maintains historical data on the applicant through the
Transfer Monitoring Process.
10. Financial Aid Common Functions are general functions that support all of the other
financial aid processes such as; Financial Aid Holds, Standards of Academic
Progress, Student Messages, Audit Logging, and User Defined Data.
11. Student System Shared Data shares information with the institution’s Student
Information System (that being the Banner Student or another student system).
12. Short-Term Credit creates and maintains short-term loans.
13. Student Employment establishes job referrals, authorizations, placements, and tracks
compensation limits for students employed by the institution.
14. Loan Processing allows for the creation and processing of loan applications for
Electronic Loans, Direct Loans, or Manual Loans.
15. Return of Title IV Funds assists you in complying with the Title IV regulations for
federal financial aid. Title IV features involve the Accounts Receivable, Student, and
Financial Aid products.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-3
Financial Aid system process flow
1-4
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Naming conventions
The names of all Banner forms are seven characters in length and use the following
convention.
Position Locations:
R
1
O
2
A
3
I
4
N
5
S
6
T
7
Note
The letters W, Y, and Z have been reserved for the first two characters of
all client-developed forms and reports.
For client-developed new applications built to co-exist with Banner
applications, W, Y, and Z is used as the first character.
For client-developed forms, reports, tables, or modules used within an
Banner application, the system identifier is used as the first character
(i.e., R = Financial Aid, etc.), and W, Y, and Z is used as the second

character.
Position 1: Identifies the primary system owning the report as:
A
F
G
N
P
R
S
T
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Advancement
Finance
General
Position Control
Human Resources
Financial Aid
Student
Accounts Receivable
If W, Y, or Z appears as the first character of the form name, refer to Note (above).
Position 2: Identifies the primary module owning the form as:
A
B
C
E
F
H
J
L
N
O
May 2012
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
=
Athletics
Budgeting
Record Creation
Electronic Data Exchange (EDE)
Funds Management
History and Transcripts
Student Employment
Logging
Need Analysis
Common Functions
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-5
P
R
S
T
=
=
=
=
Packaging and Disbursements
Requirements Tracking
Student System Shared Data
Validation Form/Table
If W, Y, or Z appears as the second character of the form name, refer to Note (above).
Position 3: Identifies the type of form as:
A
B
I
R
T
V
=
=
=
=
=
=
Application Form
Base Table
Inquiry Form
Rule Table
Temporary Table
Validation Table
Positions 4 - 7: Identifies the unique four-character abbreviation of the form name.
For example, the derivation of ROAINST (Institutional Options Form) is:
R
O
A
INST
=
=
=
=
Financial Aid
Common Functions
Application Form
Institutional Options
Applicant processing
The Applicant Processing module contains the forms that you use on a regular basis for
the day-to-day processing of student financial aid information. All of the forms in this
module also exist in other modules in Banner Financial Aid.
Forms
The following forms can be found within the Applicant Processing module:
1-6
Applicant Status
ROASTAT
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Need Analysis
RNANAxx
Need Analysis Processing
RNAPRxx
Need Analysis Document Verification
RNAVRxx
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
May 2012
Student Loan Data System
RNASLxx
NSLDS Transfer Monitoring Application
RNATMNT
Need Analysis Result
RNARSxx
Applicant Requirements
RRAAREQ
Applicant Budget
RBAABUD
Applicant Period Budget
RBAPBUD
Award Maintenance
RPAAWRD
Applicant User Defined Data
ROAUSDF
Applicant Non-Year User Defined
ROANYUD
Financial Aid Enrollment
ROAENRL
Applicant High School and Admission Data
ROAHSDT
Summary Academic History Inquiry
RSIHIST
Basic Student Information Inquiry
RSISTDN
Admissions Application Inquiry
RSIAPPL
Account Detail Review Inquiry
RSIAREV
Degrees and Other Formal Awards Inquiry
RSIDEGR
Housing Information Inquiry
RSIHOUS
Prior College Inquiry
RSIPCOL
High School Inquiry
RSIHSCH
Test Score Inquiry
RSITEST
Veteran Certification Inquiry
RSIVETN
Third Party Contract Inquiry
RSICONT
Billing Exemption Inquiry
RSIEXPT
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-7
Applicant processing flow
• Applicant Status (ROASTAT)
The Applicant Status form displays applicant information such as general financial
aid status information, satisfactory academic progress data, admissions status
information, financial need data, and award data.
• Financial Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN)
The Financial Aid Record Maintenance form enables you to review and change
most of the important aspects of a student’s financial aid record from one central
form. Specifically, it displays and updates the following parts of a student’s record:
• award detail
• applicant processing status
• enrollment
status
• satisfactory academic progress
• admissions
status detail
• budget components
• other resources
• coded and non-coded tracking requirements
• Pell Grant status • need analysis information.
• Need Analysis (RNANAxx)
You can view, enter, and maintain all core financial aid application information on
the Need Analysis form. The information on this form is specific to the aid year
and applicant. It is presented and stored in MDE independent format.
• Need Analysis Processing (RNAPRxx)
Use the Need Analysis Processing form to view and process both (Federal
Methodology) FM and (Institutional Methodology) IM calculations for a specified
aid year. The form allows you to view the data and process data changes for both
calculations, side-by-side. Once data is loaded and modified (if required), this form
can be used to perform need analysis (either FM using the Banner FM Need
Analysis product, IM using INAS, or both) and receive new need analysis results.
This form also allows you to perform need analysis calculations after making
simulated data changes and to save both the data changes and the need analysis
results, if desired. RNAPRxx maintains many of the characteristics of the Need
Analysis form (RNANAxx), including the ability to perform need analysis, to add a
need analysis record manually, and to utilize Pell Corrections functionality.
• Need Analysis Document Verification (RNAVRxx)
Use the Need Analysis Document Verification form to verify the data that exists in
the student's application record with physical tax forms and other documents
submitted by the student. This form includes student application and verification
records, as well as parent application and verification data.
1-8
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Student Loan Data (RNASLxx)
You can view and maintain National Student Loan Data System (NSLDS)
information on the Student Loan Data System form. Load the NSLDS data from
files received through the Electronic Data Exchange (EDE) process or from the
Applicant Data Reporting Service from the Department of Education.
• NSLDS Transfer Monitoring Application (RNATMNT)
Use RNATMNT to enter the names of students who need to be added to or
removed from the NSLDS Monitoring List or request Financial Aid History
records (NSLDS). Data entered on this form is used by the Transfer Monitoring
Extract Process (RNRTMNE) to create the Transfer Monitoring School Inform File
and Financial Aid History request file, which are sent to NSLDS.
• Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx)
Use the Need Analysis Result form to view, enter, and edit the results of the
calculations of a student’s Federal Methodology (FM), Pell EFC, and Institutional
Methodology (IM) contributions. You can load the results from electronic
applications or you can manually enter the results or you can manually enter the
results from a hard copy ISIR. You can also change the results to reflect
professional judgement where permitted and protect those changes from system
updates by setting the corresponding Lock field to Y.
• Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ)
Use the Applicant Requirements form to assign tracking requirements to a financial
aid applicant for a specified aid year. A tracking group can be used to assign the
applicant to a general group of tracking requirements. You can also assign a set of
non-standard requirements to the applicant. The Promissory Notes section enables
you to prevent the disbursement of student loan funds to students who have not yet
signed their promissory note for the period.
• Applicant Budget (RBAABUD)
Use the Applicant Budget form to assign a set of budget components to a financial
aid applicant for a specified aid year. You can also use RBAABUD to assign an aid
year budget group to a student and an aid period. The aid period defines the portion
of the aid year that the student will be in attendance.
• Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD)
Use the Applicant Period Budget form to assign a set of budget components based
on the budget group for each period in the applicant’s aid period. The component
amounts may be pre-defined or calculated using algorithmic rules to customize the
amount assigned based on user defined criteria.
You can also use RBAPBUD to assign an aid period, period based budget group(s),
and a Pell Budget to a student.
• Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD)
Refer to the Award Maintenance form to maintain packaging information for an
applicant.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-9
• Applicant User-Defined Data (ROAUSDF)
Refer to the Applicant User-Defined Data form to view the user-defined fields for
an applicant.
• Applicant Non-Year User Defined Data (ROANYUD)
Refer to the Applicant Non-Year User Defined Data form to view the non-year user
defined fields for an applicant.
• Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL)
Use ROAENRL to maintain Banner Financial Aid hours and display Banner
Student hours.
• Applicant High School and Admission Data (ROAHSDT)
Use ROAHSDT to enter the information necessary to record whether the student
meets TEACH Grant eligibility requirements, as well as specific Ability-to-Benefit
eligibility information for the student.
• Student System Shared Data menu
The Student System Shared Data module allows you to integrate Banner Student
with Financial Aid. This option permits you to view forms that contain information
concerning recruiting, admissions, registration, general student information,
housing, accounts receivable, and academic history.
Need Analysis
In the Need Analysis module, the student’s financial need is determined by subtracting the
student’s Federal Methodology (FM) or Institutional Methodology (IM) Estimated Family
Contribution (EFC) from the student’s packaging budget. You have the ability to define
which methodology is used in the calculation of the student’s need, and a transaction log
maintains a record of all changes.
Forms
The following forms are included within the Need Analysis module. For more information
about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
1-10
Need Analysis
RNANAxx
Need Analysis Processing
RNAPRxx
Supplemental Need Analysis
RNASUxx
Country Coefficient Validation
RTVCCOE
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Need Analysis Result
RNARSxx
Applicant Override
RNAOVxx
Applicant Need Analysis Application Inquiry
RNIAPPL
Applicant Student Loan Data Inquiry
RNINSLD
Calculated Need Analysis Detail Inquiry
RNINAIQ
Miscellaneous Results Inquiry
RNIMSxx
Need Analysis Global Policy Options Rules
RNRGLxx
Applicant Status
ROASTAT
Applicant Pell Grant
ROAPELL
Need Analysis Document Verification
RNAVRxx
Application Purge
RNAPURG
Student Loan Data System
RNASLxx
NSLDS Transfer Monitoring Application
RNATMNT
Need Analysis online recalculation process flow
narrative
• Financial Aid Application Current Record
Each financial aid applicant may have multiple application records from different
sources, one of which will always be marked current. The current record is always
used for need analysis calculations. If a Federal Methodology (FM) record exists
(which will be marked as the current record) and an Institutional Methodology
(IM) record exists, then need analysis will be run for both, assuming the proper
options are chosen on ROAINST. The FM calculation is performed using the
Banner FM Need Analysis product while the IM is performed by the College
Scholarship Service (CSS) Institutional Need Analysis System (INAS).
• Need Analysis Policy Options
Both FM and IM need analysis policy options are delivered with default values
within the system. If you would like to change the default values, you may do so
for all students on the Need Analysis Global Policy Option Rules form
(RNRGLxx). In addition, individual student overrides for both methodologies can
be made on the Applicant Override (RNAOVxx) form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-11
• Pell Calculation
A Pell Award calculation can be run after the need analysis calculation is
completed. The Pell calculation determines the amount of the student’s Pell award,
checks the validity of the award, and packages the award in the student’s award
package.
When running the Need Analysis Calculation online from a form, the Pell
calculation will be called automatically under certain conditions. When running
need analysis (RNPFMxx for FM or RNEINxx for IM) from Job Submission, the
Pell calculation is not automatically run. Pell batch calculations can be done by
running the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL).
• Need Analysis Results
Need Analysis Results can be seen online on both the Need Analysis Result form
(RNARSxx) and the Calculated Need Analysis Detail Inquiry form (RNINAIQ). In
addition, both types of need analysis calculations produce a printed report.
Requirements Tracking
The Requirements Tracking module permits you to define an unlimited number of
documents or statuses that students need to submit or complete. These requirements
control whether a student is eligible to be packaged or receive a payment of aid. This
module provides you with the following features:
• Requirement Definition – defines an unlimited number of application requirements
• Grouping of Students – places students with similar characteristics into groups and
assigns the same requirements to all students in the same group
• Mass Entry – allows entry of information about multiple documents/requirements
for multiple students on one screen
• Letter Generation – provides the ability to print letters to students informing them
of the documents/requirements they need to submit or satisfy
The use of period based tracking is available. Please refer to the Period Based Processing
chapter in this User Guide for further detail.
Forms
The following forms are included within the Requirements Tracking module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
1-12
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Applicant Requirements
RRAAREQ
Applicant Requirements Inquiry
RRIAREQ
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Applicant Requirements Mass Entry
RRAMASS
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Applicant Immediate Process
ROAIMMP
Financial Aid Selection Rules
RORRULE
Requirements Tracking Group/Requirements Rules
RRRGREQ
Message Rules
RORMESG
Group Inquiry
ROIGRPI
Requirements Tracking Validation
RTVTREQ
Requirements Tracking Group Validation
RTVTGRP
Requirements Tracking Status Validation
RTVTRST
Requirements Tracking process flow narrative
• Financial Aid Application Current Record
Each financial aid applicant may have multiple application records from different
sources, one of which will always be marked current. If a Federal Methodology
(FM) record exists (which will be marked as the current record) and an Institutional
Methodology (IM) record exists, then both records, along with other information
from other Banner systems, may be used to determine whether additional
documents need to be supplied by the applicant. If only an FM record exists with
multiple sequences, only the current record, along with other information from
other Banner systems, will be used to determine whether additional documents
need to be supplied.
• Create Applicant Requirement Records
Applicant requirement records can be established in several ways. When applicants
are loaded into Banner Financial Aid through data load, they are usually also run
through the Requirements Tracking Batch Group Assignment Process.
This process places the applicants into Requirements Tracking groups according to
user-defined criteria. Each group has a set of requirements associated with it, which
are then assigned to each applicant that falls into the group. Applicants can also be
individually assigned to Requirements Tracking groups online, either manually or
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-13
automatically. Individual requirements can be manually assigned to applicants
online as well. Systematically, requirements can also be assigned through batch or
online grouping, batch posting, awarding of a fund, mass entry or individually, and
through entrance and exit interview processing.
• Requirement Tracking Group Codes and Rules
The Financial Aid Office establishes the Requirement Tracking Group codes and
rules that associate specific groups with specific sets of tracking components.
• Applicant Requirement Records
Applicant Requirement Records contain information about outstanding and
satisfied requirements, including the date the requirement was established, the last
date and action taken against the requirement, whether the requirement is required
by the Packaging, Disbursement and/or Memo processes, and the fund code of a
specific fund or period to which the requirement is linked.
• Additional Documents Required
The Financial Aid office establishes policies regarding which additional documents
are required from certain applicants. The rules governing which applicants are
assigned requirements are set up online, and users can monitor an applicant’s
progress toward fulfilling these requirements at any time.
• Other Processes Can Proceed
Requirements are categorized as necessary for certain processing in three specific
functional areas: Packaging, Memoing, and Disbursement. When all requirements
that are mandatory in one of the functional areas have been met, processing in that
area can proceed.
• Send Requirements Tracking Notifications to Applicants
After applicants have been assigned requirements, the Financial Aid office sends
letters to each applicant with unsatisfied requirements, advising them that certain
documents need to be supplied. These letters can be created through the Letter
Generation portion of Banner. In addition, an e-mail message can also be sent,
notifying the student to access Banner Self-Service and view any outstanding
requirements that may be needed.
• Applicant Documents
After being notified of the request for documents, applicants send those documents
to the Financial Aid office.
• Post Satisfied Requirements
Receipt of the documents from applicants is entered online. The status of the
requirement is changed to satisfied, if the requirement has been properly met.
1-14
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Budgeting
The Budgeting module calculates and assigns cost of attendance values to each applicant
based on budget types established by the institution (for example; tuition, fees, room and
board, etc.). This module provides you with the following features:
• Aid Year Budgeting
• Budget component assignment – assigns a pre-defined set of budget
components and values to applicants according to their budget group for the
aid year.
• Budget averaging – creates a budget which is a weighted average of two or
more budgets using the mixed budgeting feature.
• Multiple budgets – assigns a Pell Budget plus one additional budget.
• Transaction Log – maintains an online log of all budget changes when the
appropriate tables and columns have been activated for logging.
• Period Based Budgeting
• Budget component assignment – assigns a pre-defined set of budget
components based on the budget group for each period in the applicant’s aid
period. The component amounts may be pre-defined or calculated using
algorithmic rules to customize the amount assigned based on user defined
criteria.
• Budget categories – multiple budget components may be defined or
calculated separately and combined into a category for presenting to the
applicant. For example, separate components may be used for Housing and
Meals and combined into a single category of Room and Board to display in
Self-Service.
• Multiple budgets – an applicant may have a Pell budget, a budget based on
FM EFC methodology, and a budget based on IM EFC methodology. The
Packaging Process will select the appropriate budget based on the EFC
methodology for the fund on Packaging Group Fund Rules (RPRGFND).
• Simulated Budgeting – permits you to design and run what-if budgeting
analysis.
• Budget Recalculation Process - provides the ability to recalculate the budget
components for an applicant without re-assigning a student to a new budget
group.
• Transaction Log – maintains an online log of all budget changes when the
appropriate tables and columns have been activated for logging.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-15
Forms
The following forms can be found within the Budgeting module. For more information
about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
Aid Year budgeting
Applicant Budget
RBAABUD
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Applicant Immediate Process
ROAIMMP
Aid Year budgeting control
1-16
Budget Component Rules
RBRCOMP
Financial Aid Selection Rules
RORRULE
Budget Group/Type Rules
RBRGTYP
Message Rules
RORMESG
Budget Inquiry
RBIBUDG
Group Inquiry
ROIGRPI
Budget Group Validation
RTVBGRP
Budget Type Validation
RTVBTYP
Budget Component Validation
RTVCOMP
Aid Period Rules
RORTPRD
Aid Period Validation
RTVAPRD
Period Base Data
RORPRDS
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Period budgeting
Applicant Period Budget
RBAPBUD
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Applicant Immediate Process
ROAIMMP
Applicant Budget by Period
RBIABPR
Period Budget Category Inquiry
RBIPBCT
Period Budget Simulation
RBRSIMR
Period budgeting control
May 2012
Period Budget Detail Rules
RBRPBDR
Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules
RBRPBYR
Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules
RBRPBGR
Algorithmic Budgeting Rules
RBRABRC
Algorithmic Support
RORALGS
Financial Aid Selection Rules
RORRULE
Period Budget Group Validation
RTVPBGP
Period Budget Type Validation
RTVPBTP
Period Budget Component Validation
RTVPBCP
Budget Component Category Validation
RTVBCAT
Algorithmic Budgeting Rule Validation
RTVABRC
Message Rules
RORMESG
Aid Period Rules
RORTPRD
Aid Period Validation
RTVAPRD
Period Base Data
RORPRDS
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-17
Budgeting process flow narrative
• Financial Aid Application Current Record
Each financial aid applicant may have multiple application records from different
sources, one of which will always be marked current. If a Federal Methodology
(FM) record exists (which will be marked as the current record) and an Institutional
Methodology (IM) record exists then both records, along with other information
from other Banner systems, may be used to determine budget information. If only a
FM record exists with multiple sequences, only the current record, along with other
information from other Banner systems, will be used to determine budget
information.
• Create Applicant Budget Records
Applicant Budget records can be established in several ways. When applicants are
loaded into Banner Financial Aid through data load, they are usually also run
through the Budgeting Batch Group Assignment Process (RORGRPS) for Aid Year
budgeting or the Period Budget Grouping Process (RBRPBGP) for Period Based
budgeting.
These processes place the applicants into Budgeting groups according to userdefined criteria. Each group has a set of budget components associated with it,
which are then assigned to each applicant that falls into the group. Applicants can
also be individually assigned to Budgeting groups online, either manually or
automatically. Individual budget components can be manually assigned to
applicants online as well.
• Budget Components
Budget Components are the individual line items for which the Financial Aid office
establishes costs. Examples of budget components are; tuition, books and supplies,
and commuting costs. Period Based Budgeting allows you to use Algorithmic rules
to gather specific budget component amounts on an individual student basis.
• Budgeting Group Codes and Rules
The Financial Aid Office establishes the Budgeting Group codes and rules that
associate specific groups with specific sets of budget components.
• Applicant Budgets
Applicant Budgets reflect the approximate costs that an applicant will incur by
attending the institution. These costs are different for different categories of
students - on-campus vs. off-campus, graduate vs. undergraduate, and so on. If you
are processing using Aid Year budgeting, an individual applicant can have at most
two different budgets – one for Pell Grants and a second for non-Pell programs. If
you are processing using Period Based Budgeting, an individual applicant can have
a budget used for Pell grant processing, a budget for using Federal (FM) EFC
processing, and a budget for using Institutional (IM) methodology processing.
1-18
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Other Financial Aid Processes
Other functional areas within Banner use the applicant budgets developed within
the Budgeting module to determine the financial need that an applicant has, and the
appropriate aid that will meet that need.
• Budget Information Can be Included in Award Notifications to Applicants
Letters that are sent to applicants detailing their financial aid awards can optionally
include a section dealing with the applicants’ budgets, which are drawn from this
module. These letters can be created through the Letter Generation portion of
Banner. In addition, an e-mail message can be sent to a student, informing them to
view their student cost of attendance on Banner Self-Service.
Packaging and Disbursement
The Packaging and Disbursement module provides a flexible automatic packaging
function that allows an unlimited number of ways individual or groups of applicants may
be packaged. The following processes are included in the Packaging and Disbursement
module:
• User-Defined Packaging – permits applicants to be assigned into an unlimited
number of packaging groups, which have a unique set of user-defined packaging
formulas
• Algorithmic Packaging - permits you to use Algorithmic rules to automatically
package students in accordance with your institution’s awarding philosophy. The
rules allow the use of mathematical expressions as part of the awarding rules and
logic for a particular fund within a packaging group based upon data elements in
the Banner system.
• Simulated Packaging – permits you to design and run what-if packaging analysis
• Letter Generation – allows you to produce an unlimited number of different types
of award letters
• Transaction Log – maintains an online log of all packaging changes
Forms
The following forms are included within the Packaging and Disbursement module. For
more information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in
Banner.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-19
Packaging and Disbursement
Packaging Maintenance
RPAAPMT
Award Maintenance
RPAAWRD
Scholarship Period Information
RPASTRM
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Fund Award Inquiry
RPIFAWD
Fund Award Period Inquiry
RPIFTRM
Award Acceptance Mass Entry
RPAMACC
Award Offer Mass Entry
RPAMOFF
Resource Maintenance
RPAARSC
Applicant High School and Admission Data
ROAHSDT
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Applicant Immediate Process
ROAIMMP
Contracts and Exemptions Payment Inquiry
RPIARPY
Applicant Award by Period
RPIATRM
Disbursement Results
ROIDISB
Packaging and Disbursement control
1-20
Financial Aid Selection Rules
RORRULE
Algorithmic Packaging Rules
RPRALGR
Financial Aid CIP Code Rules
RPICIPC
State Advanced/Honors Program Codes
RPISAHP
Packaging Group Fund Rules
RPRGFND
Default Packaging Rules
RPRDEFR
Packaging Rules
RPRPCKR
Exemption Rules
RPREXPT
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Third Party Contract Rules
RPRCONT
Packaging Options
RPROPTS
Audit Grading Mode
RPRAUDT
Packaging Group Fund Source Maximums Rules
RPRFSRC
Packaging Group Fund Category Maximums Rules
RPRFCAT
Group Inquiry
ROIGRPI
Class Code Translation
RPRCLSS
Financial Aid Degree Rules
RPRDEGR
Financial Aid Major Rules
RPRMAJR
Algorithmic Packaging Rule Code Validation
RTVALGR
Award Status Validation
RTVAWST
Fund Category Validation
RTVFCAT
Packaging Group Validation
RTVPGRP
Resource Code Validation
RTVARSC
Packaging process flow narrative
• Financial Aid Application Current Record
Each financial aid applicant may have multiple application records from different
sources, one of which will always be marked current. If a Federal Methodology
(FM) record exists (which will be marked as the current record) and an Institutional
Methodology (IM) record exists then both records, along with other information
from other Banner systems, may be used in the packaging process to determine
funds awarded to a student. If only a FM record exists with multiple sequences,
only the current record, along with other information from other Banner systems,
will be used to determine funds awarded to a student.
• Assign Applicants to Packaging Groups (required if using automated
packaging)
Applicants can be assigned to Packaging groups in several ways. When applicants
are loaded into Banner through data load, they are usually also run through the
Packaging Batch Group Assignment Process (RORGRPS). This process places the
applicants into Packaging groups according to user-defined criteria. Applicants can
also be individually assigned to Packaging groups online, either manually or
automatically.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-21
• Packaging Group Codes and Rules
The Financial Aid Office establishes the Packaging group codes and rules that
associate specific groups with specific sets of packaging components.
• Packaging and Fund Rules
Packaging and Fund rules define how and when awards to applicants will be made.
These rules include awarding rules, funds management rules, gap equity and selfhelp packaging rules, algorithmic rules, and exemption and third-party contract
rules.
• Applicant Budgets
The Packaging process uses the applicant budgets, in conjunction with the Need
Analysis results, to determine the financial need that an applicant has and the
appropriate aid that will meet that need.
• Need Analysis Results Record
Packaging uses the Expected Family Contribution, in conjunction with the
applicant’s budget, to determine the contribution an applicant and family can make
toward meeting financial need.
• Packaging Process
The Packaging process determines an award package for each applicant based on
rules within the Packaging module, data from other modules within Financial Aid
(unsatisfied requirements, packaging holds, and so on), and federal financial aid
rules.
• Applicant Award Package
The Applicant Award Package consists of award amounts from various funds and
an award schedule by period and a schedule of when the amounts will be disbursed.
• Additional Need
If, after the automatic Packaging process is performed, additional need remains for
an applicant, manual packaging can be performed to attempt to meet the need.
• Manual Packaging
Manual packaging can be performed online at any time for an applicant (that is,
before or after automatic packaging).
1-22
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Send Award Notifications
Send Award Letters/E-mail messages to applicants after determination of partial or
final awards. In addition to financial aid awards, Award Letters can optionally
contain other messages related to the budget or awards. An e-mail message can
direct student to Banner Self-Service for viewing awards and accepting the award
package.
• Post Applicant Acceptance/Rejection
Applicant responses to award letters can be updated manually online. Students can
optionally accept awards via Banner Self-Service.
Athletics
Use the Athletics module to maintain athletic, scholarship, and donor information.
Through this module, you have the ability to:
• Set up and track scholarship information by period.
• Enter default potential values for grants by Sport Code.
• Maintain donor and scholarship demographic information.
• Select specific types of thank you notes donors will receive.
• Select specific groups whose grades will be reported to donors.
• Track specific team sport information by period.
Forms
The following forms can be found within the Athletics module. For more information
about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
Athletics
May 2012
Potential Athletic Grant Defaults
RAAPAGD
Sport Aid by Period
RAASPTM
Team Sport Period Aid
RAITMTM
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-23
Athletics control
Athletic Aid Type Validation
RTVAATP
Financial Aid Sport Validation
RTVFASP
Athletic Grant Period Roll (RAPAGRL)
Use this process to roll athletic grant period information on RAASPTM from one period to
the next.
Athletic Aid Discrepancy Rpt (RARATAD)
Use this report to display the discrepant information between the actual fund/resource
amounts and the reported amounts on RAASPTM. This report should be used to
determine if a student’s award information has been updated since this information was
originally reported to Athletics.
Third Party Contract Rules (RPRCONT)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RPRCONT to indicate if a contract should be counted
for Athletic reporting purposes.
Exemption Rules (RPREXPT)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RPREXPT to indicate if the exemption should be
counted for Athletic reporting purposes.
Resource Code Validation (RTVARSC)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RTVARSC to indicate if the resource should be
counted for Athletic reporting purposes.
Funds Management
The Funds Management module defines and monitors an unlimited number of funds, fund
types, and fund associated eligibility rules for purposes of awarding and disbursing
financial aid. This module provides you with the following features:
• Packaging Options - provides the ability to set packaging options by aid year and
fund
• Disbursement Options - offers the ability to set disbursement options by fund and
aid year
1-24
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Fund Comments, Budget Rules, Detail Code Rules - allows comments by fund,
linking awarding to students COA and linking disbursement to actual charges the
student incurs.
• Applicant Requirements – allows application requirements to be associated with
individual funds assigned to the student’s tracking record when the fund is
packaged
• Fund Messages – permits messages that are unique to a specific fund to be printed
in the award letter
• Awarding and Disbursement Schedules - allows award schedules, by aid period or
by fund and aid period and disbursement schedules by aid period or by fund and
aid period
• Fund Award and Disbursement Rules - allows for user defined awarding and
disbursement rules by fund
Forms
The following forms are included within the Funds Management module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
May 2012
Fund Management
RFRMGMT
Funds Management
ROAMGMT
Fund Budget Inquiry
RFIBUDG
Federal Fund ID Inquiry
RFIFFID
Federal Rules Inquiry
RPIFEDR
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
RFRDEFA
Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
RFRASCH
Financial Aid Selection Rules
RORRULE
Fund Base Data
RFRBASE
Financial Aid Repeat Course Checking
RFRRPCC
Donor and Scholarship Demographics
RFADSCD
Fund Source Code Validation
RTVFSRC
Financial Aid Fund Type Validation
RTVFTYP
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-25
Grades to Donor Validation
RTVGRDD
Reviewed Validation
RTVREVW
Scholarship Source Validation
RTVSSRC
Thank You Letter Validation
RTVTYLT
Funds Management process flow narrative
• Define Basic Fund Data
Basic fund data includes fund type, funding source, and other fund information
which is established by the Financial Aid Office on the Financial Aid Fund Type
Validation (RTVFTYP), the Fund Source Code Validation (RTVFSRC), and the
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) forms.
• Standard Award & Disbursement Schedules
Standard awarding and disbursement schedules for each aid period are set up on the
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA) form.
• Create Fund Aid Year-Specific Data
Aid Year-specific fund records contain information about monies available to be
awarded, packaging options, disbursement options, messages, and comments. This
is defined on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form.
• Create Fund-Specific Award and Disbursement Schedule
If the standard award and disbursement schedule is not applicable to the fund for
any specific aid period, a customized fund award and disbursement schedule is
created on the Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRASCH) form.
• Create Fund Awarding Rules (optional)
Awarding rules specific to the fund are created on the Financial Aid Selection
Rules (RORRULE) form.
• Packaging Process
The rules established in the Funds Management are used extensively in the
Packaging process.
• Create Fund Disbursement Rules (optional)
Disbursement rules specific to the fund are created on the Financial Aid Selection
Rules (RORRULE) form.
1-26
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Electronic Data Exchange
The Electronic Data Exchange module enables you to perform the following functions:
• Applicant Record Creation – Load ISIRs into the Banner Financial Aid System
• Online Need Analysis – Use online need analysis verification forms to log data
changes to an applicant’s record.
• ISIR Correction/Request Processing – Create data files for transfer to the Central
Processor.
• COD Processing – Creates data files for transfer to COD using information from
the Banner Financial Aid database.
• Data File Generation – Send data files generated by Banner Financial Aid to the
EDE Central Processor.
Forms
The following forms can be found within the Electronic Data Exchange module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
May 2012
ISIR Correction/Request
REACORR
Batch Control
RPIBATC
COD Document Control
REICODD
Miscellaneous Results Inquiry
RNIMSxx
Grant Origination Acknowledgement
REAORxx
Grant Disbursement/Acknowledgement
READIxx
TEACH Grant Agreement to Serve
RPATATS
Rejection Code Validation
RTVRJCT
Summary Statement of Account Inquiry
REISSOA
Detail Statement of Account Inquiry
REIDSOA
Data Request Record
RERRDRQ
Multiple Reporting Record Inquiry
REIRMRR
COD Year to Date Grant Summary
REIYTDS
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-27
COD Year to Date Grant Origination
REIYTDO
COD Year to Date Grant Disbursement
REIYTDD
COD Grant Reconciliation
REIRECN
NSLDS Transfer Monitoring Application
RNATMNT
COD Identifier
REASTID
COD Entity ID Rules
RORCODI
Applicant High School and Admission Data
ROAHSDT
Unmatched COD Records
RPAUCOD
Financial Aid CIP Code Rules
RPICIPC
State Advanced/Honors Program Codes
RPISAHP
Electronic Counseling Status
RPILECS
Ability-to-Benefit Test Score Rules
RORTESC
Ability-to-Benefit Test Administrators Rules
RORTADM
Ability-to-Benefit Test COD Rules Inquiry
ROIATBT
Electronic Data Exchange process flow narrative
• Student Signs ISIR or Initiates Corrections
The student signs the electronic SAR (ISIR) and returns it to the school. Or, the
student initiates the corrections and sends the information directly to the Central
Processor.
• Process the ISIR through Banner and Create a Corrections Batch
• Ensure that rules for EDE Correction logging are established.
• Make the necessary data changes on the RNANAxx, RNAVRxx, RNAOVxx
and RNARPxx forms.
• Run the Need Analysis Logging Rpt (RLRLOGG) to move the data from the
temporary log tables to the permanent log tables.
• Review corrections on the ISIR Correction/Request (REACORR) form.
Corrections can be deleted from this form manually.
1-28
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Run the ISIR Corr/Request Process (REBCDxx) to extract the corrections
and to create the data file. The flat file consists of EDE corrections and
requests for ISIRs.
• Transfer the data file from Banner to your PC. You must download the data
file to a PC in order to transmit the information electronically to the CPS
through EdConnect.
• School using Federal SAIG Network
The school uses the SAIG Network to load revised ISIRs.
• Central Processor
The Central Processor responds to ISIR requests and transmits corrected ISIRs for
the students after successfully processing your corrections. If the CPS rejects an
ISIR Request, it will return the transaction to you, along with codes indicating the
reason for the rejection.
• Create EDE Files
Change the name of the ISIR file to xxxxesar.tap and load the ISIR file to the
correct Banner directory so that it can be processed by the programs that will load
the data into the Financial Aid database.
• FILECAT on PC (optional)
Use the File Concatenation Process (FILECAT) to combine multiple ISIR files into
one file for uploading to Banner.
• Banner Data Load Process
Run the Data Load process to load financial aid applicant records into Banner from
external sources.
• Create FAFSA/NSLDS Record
An NSLDS record is created for each student for whom an ISIR record is received.
In addition, a group of students can be selected using the NSLDS population
selection option in the dataload process.
• Create ISIR Record
In addition to the current EDE record, an ISIR record, which cannot be changed, is
created in the database. The ISIR record is the official notification, delivered by
EDE, to the school about students’ Expected Family Contribution (EFC) and
eligibility for Federal Aid.
• Print Revised ISIR (optional)
You can print valid ISIR records directly from Banner using the RERISxx process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-29
History and Transcripts
The History and Transcripts module maintains student financial aid records online for use
in packaging, and audit functions. This module provides you with the following features:
• NSLDS Transfer Monitoring and FAH Requests– Applicant history of funds
awarded at your institution as well as other institutions.
• Provides for the ability to enter Pre-Banner Award History.
Forms
The following forms are included within the History and Transcripts module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
NSLDS Transfer Monitoring Application
RNATMNT
Pre-Banner Award Summary
RHAPBAW
Fund Sequence History Inquiry
RHIAFSH
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Tip
Student Financial Aid history may also be viewed on the Student Loan

Data (RNASLxx) form.
History process flow
• Enter/Convert Pre-Banner Award Summary Data
Historical data that exists in any pre-Banner Financial Aid that is needed for
printing on financial aid transcripts should either be run through a conversion
process, or entered manually online.
• Enter Applicant Comments
Free-form applicant comments are maintained in the History module.
• Create NSLDS Transfer Monitoring and FAH Requests
Financial Aid Common Functions
The Financial Aid Common Functions module maintains frequently used financial aid
functions. This module provides you with the following features:
1-30
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Data Management – allows the entry of rules to control the loading of student and
financial aid records into the database from external sources
• Common Function Controls – includes features such as: processing additional Pell
Grants, establishing and maintaining financial aid record holds, displaying student
summary information, creating and maintaining user-defined fields, FISAP annual
report processing, displaying the management audit log, maintaining standards of
academic progress, and setting institutional options
• Form Call Sequencing (Quick Flow) – Allows the definition and execution of a
series of functions in a predefined order
Forms
The following forms are included within the Financial Aid Common Functions module.
For more information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in
Banner.
May 2012
General Person Identification
SPAIDEN
Person Name/ID Search
ROAIDEN
FISAP Person Maintenance
ROAFSAP
Aid Year Inquiry
ROIAIDY
Group Inquiry
ROIGRPI
Data Log Inquiry
ROIILOG
Logging Activity Inquiry
ROILOGA
Message Code Inquiry
ROIMESG
SAR ID Inquiry
ROISARI
Financial Aid Period Code Inquiry
ROITERM
Periods Inquiry
ROIPRDS
Saved Output Review
GJIREVO
Applicant Common Functions
*RESAPPLCT
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Applicant Status
ROASTAT
Applicant Pell Grant
ROAPELL
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-31
1-32
Applicant Non Year User-Defined Data
ROANYUD
Applicant User-Defined Data
ROAUSDF
Applicant Holds
ROAHOLD
Applicant Data Log Inquiry
ROIALOG
Applicant Data Log Application
ROAALOG
Applicant Immediate Process
ROAIMMP
Applicant Comments
RHACOMM
Applicant Summary
ROASMRY
Applicant Messages
ROAMESG
Applicant High School and Admission Data
ROAHSDT
Financial Aid Enrollment
ROAENRL
Applicant Status Inquiry
ROIASIQ
Applicant Mail
RUAMAIL
Financial Aid Common Functions Control
*RESCOMNCM
Global Institution Financial Aid Options
ROAINST
U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options
ROAUSIO
Section Unavailable for Aid
ROASECT
Financial Aid Repeat Course Exclusion
RORRPCX
Logging Control
ROALOGC
Miscellaneous Validation Rules Inquiry
ROIMVAL
Academic Year Rules
RORACYR
Project Based Parameter Setup
RORPARM
Miscellaneous Parameters
RORMPRM
Data Log Rules
RORDATA
Supplemental Log Data Rules
RORDSUP
Message Rules
RORMESG
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
May 2012
Batch Posting Rules
RORPOST
SAP Translation Rules
RORSTRF
Aid Period/Period Rules
RORTPRD
Period Base Data
RORPRDS
Aid Period Validation
RTVAPRD
Comment Category Code Validation
RTVCCOM
Hold Type Validation
RTVHOLD
ISIR Comment Code Validation
RTVICMT
Message Code Validation
RTVMESG
Batch Posting Type Indicator Validation
RTVPTYP
Rejection Code Validation
RTVRJCT
Satisfactory Academic Progress Validation
RTVSAPR
Non Year User-Defined Variables Description
RORNYVD
User-Defined Variables Description
RORUSER
E-Mail Letter Rules
RORELTR
E-Mail Letter Format Rules
RORELTF
E-Mail Letter Module Validation
RTVELTM
Ability-to-Benefit Test Score Rules
RORTESC
Ability-to-Benefit Test Administrators Rules
RORTADM
Ability-to-Benefit Test COD Rules Inquiry
ROIATBT
Data Management
*RESDATA
Financial Aid Suspended Records Maintenance
RCRSUSP
Data Source Rules
RCRDTSR
Interface Data Translation Rules
RCRTPTR
Name Translation Rules
GORNAME
Common Matching Rules
GORCMRL
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-33
Common Matching Source Rules
GORCMSC
Data Source Code Validation
RTVINFC
Common Matching Source Code Validation
GTVCMSC
QuickFlow Sequence
*RESCOMNCA
QuickFlow
GUAQGFLW
QuickFlow Definitions
GUAQUIK
QuickFlow Code Validation
GTVQUIK
Common Functions process flow narrative
Common Functions tables, forms, reports and batch processes are utilized by all other
Financial Aid modules. Common Functions support other modules' processes, but don't
clearly fit into any one other module.
Examples of Common Functions tables are the Applicant Status Table (RORSTAT), which
is the base table in which applicant data is stored; the Regular Pell Grant Schedule Table
(RORPELL), which contains a matrix of values used in Pell Grant award and
disbursement calculations; and the Applicant Satisfactory Academic Progress Table
(RORSAPR), which details applicants' academic progress.
Student System Shared Data
The Student System Shared Data module integrates Banner Student with Financial Aid.
This option permits you to view information in the following modules:
• Recruiting
• Admissions
• Registration
• Housing
• Accounts Receivable
• Academic History
1-34
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Forms
The following forms are included within the Student System Shared Data module. For
more information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in
Banner.
Summary Academic History Inquiry
RSIHIST
Basic Student Information Inquiry
RSISTDN
Admissions Application Inquiry
RSIAPPL
Account Detail Review Inquiry
RSIAREV
Degrees and Other Formal Awards Inquiry
RSIDEGR
Housing Information Inquiry
RSIHOUS
Prior College Inquiry
RSIPCOL
High School Inquiry
RSIHSCH
Test Score Inquiry
RSITEST
Veteran Certification Inquiry
RSIVETN
Third Party Contract Inquiry
RSICONT
Billing Exemption Inquiry
RSIEXPT
Student System Shared Data process flow narrative
Through the Student System Shared Data module, Banner Student data is shared with the
Financial Aid system. This module consists of inquiry-only forms that contain information
that the Financial Aid system requires for processing.
This data is available through these shared views, instead of through direct access in order
to enable institutions that use Banner Financial Aid as a standalone product to access the
data from their Student Systems.
Short-Term Credit
The Short-Term Credit module allows you to build history files on a student’s short period
loans.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-35
Forms
The following forms are included within the Short-Term Credit module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
Short-Term Credit Detail
RPASTCD
Short-Term Account Maintenance
RPRSTAM
Short-Term Credit Inquiry
RPISTCI
Certification Initials Validation
RTVCINT
Repayment Source Validation
RTVRPSR
Short-Term Credit process flow narrative
• Short-Term Credit Account
Short-Term Credit Accounts are established online, and include such data as;
budgeted loan amounts, amounts requested, approved and repaid, and account
comments (RPRSTAM).
• Short-Term Credit Request
Short-Term Credit Requests are recorded by student ID, and include such data as;
amounts requested, approved and repaid, repayment source, and comments
(RPASTCD).
• Determine Loan Eligibility
After Short-Term Credit has been requested, the Financial Aid Office must
determine whether the applicant is eligible for the loan (RPASTCD).
• Student Receives Short-Term Credit
Once the Financial Aid Office has determined the eligibility of the applicant and
the loan amount, this information is recorded online (RPASTCD).
• Student Repays Short-Term Credit
Data is maintained regarding how and when the student repays the short-term loan
(RPASTCD).
1-36
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Student Employment
The Student Employment module performs the referral, placement, hours submission, and
tracking functions for student employees. This module provides you with the following
features:
• Work Authorization - allows processing of the student’s work location,
employment dates, rate of pay, and authorized hours and earnings
• Work Referrals - allows processing of student work referrals for multiple jobs
• Mass Entry of Time - allows the mass entry of earnings for adjustments or initial
entry of earnings
• Departmental Time Reports - permits submission and monitoring of the student’s
hours worked
Forms
The following forms are included within the Student Employment module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
May 2012
Student Employment Authorization
RJASEAR
Student Employment Referral
RJASERF
Student Employment Mass Entry
RJASEME
Student Employment Work History
RJISEWH
Student Employment Control
*RESEMPLCM
Student Employment Default Rules
RJRSEDR
Payroll Load Control
RJRPAYL
Placement Rules
RJRPLRL
Placement Base Data
RJAPLBD
Job Title Base Data
RJRJOBT
Job Title Requirements
RJRJREQ
Referral Status Validation
RTVRFST
Employment Authorization Status Validation
RTVAUST
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-37
Student Employment process flow narrative
• Placement Rules
Placement rules define the Position, Allocation, Employee Class, Chart of
Accounts code, and Organization code with which a Placement code is
associated (RJRPLRL).
• Payroll Employee Class and Payroll Position
The Employee Class code and Position code associated with a Placement code
are either obtained from Banner Human Resources, or are free-format, unvalidated
data elements (RJRPLRL).
• Finance Chart of Accounts
The Chart of Accounts code associated with a Placement code is either obtained
from Banner Finance, or is a non-enterable data element (RJRPLRL).
• Finance or Payroll Organization
The organization code associated with a Placement code is either obtained from
Banner Finance, Banner Human Resources, or is a free-format unvalidated data
element (RJRPLRL).
• Create Referrals
Position referrals are created for each employed student by Placement code
(RJASERF).
• Create Employment Authorizations
Student Employment Authorizations are created for each employed student by
Fund and Placement code. The authorizations obtain data from multiple tables
(see diagram) and update the Student Employment Work History table
(RJASEAR).
• Employment Default Rules
These rules are used in the creation of position referrals and contain starting and
ending dates for Authorizations and Payments, Pay Rate, and Authorization
Status (RJRSEDR).
• Applicant Awards, Work History, and Payroll Earnings
These data elements are used in the creation of position referrals (RJASERF).
• Payroll Load Process
This process updates Financial Aid student employment data with actual payroll
earnings and produces the Payroll Load Process (RJRLOAD).
1-38
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• Payroll Load Rules
These rules are used during the Payroll Load Process and identify the payroll(s)
that should be interfaced to the Financial Aid student employment module
(RJRPAYL).
• Payroll Calendar Rules and Payroll Base History
These rules are used to create the Payroll Load rules. The Calendar rules define
beginning and ending Pay Dates and Check Date, and valid combinations of
Payroll Year, Payroll ID, and Payroll Number. The Base History table defines
the Payroll Disposition indicator. (RJRPAYL)
Loan Processing
This module enables you to process Direct Loans, CommonLine Loans, and Manual
Loans.
Banner Financial Aid clients who process Pell grants, TEACH grants, and Direct Loans
must process the files as Common Origination and Disbursement (COD). Refer to the
Banner Financial Aid COD Handbook for information on the entire COD Process.
Refer to the Banner Financial Aid Electronic Loan Handbook for complete information
on CommonLine Loan processing.
Forms
The following forms are included within the Loan Processing module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
Direct Loan Processing
May 2012
Direct Loan Origination
RPALORG
Batch Control
RPIBATC
COD Document Control
REICODD
Direct Loan Corrections
RPADLCR
Promissory Note
RPAPROM
Loan Electronic Counseling Status
RPILECS
Direct Loan Cash Drawdown
RPACASH
Direct Loan Account Summary
RPIDLAS
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-39
COD State Codes Rules
RTVCDST
COD Nation Codes Rules
RTVCDNT
Loan Parent Inquiry
RPILPAR
Unmatched COD Records
RPAUCOD
Electronic Loan Processing
Electronic Loan Application
RPAELAP
Student Lender History Data
RPASLND
Loan Disbursement
RPALDSB
Change Transaction Record Request
RPACTRR
Electronic Payment Receipt
RPAEPMT
Electronic Loan Disbursement
RPAELDB
Loan Parent Inquiry
RPILPAR
Batch Control
RPIBATC
Electronic Counseling Status
RPILECS
Manual Loan Processing
Loan Application
RPALAPP
Loan Disbursement
RPALDSB
Loan Parent Inquiry
RPILPAR
Loan Control
1-40
Loan Period Base Data
RPRLPRD
Lender Base Data
RPRLNDR
Lenders/Disbursing Agents Rules
RPRLNDA
Loan Options
RPRLOPT
Class Code Translation
RPRCLSS
Federal Rules Inquiry
RPIFEDR
Loan Status Validation
RTVLNST
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
Certification Initials Validation
RTVCINT
COD State Code Rules
RTVCDST
COD Nation Codes Rules
RTVCDNT
Manual Loan process
• Student Returns Completed Application
• Determine Award Amount
The loan amount is determined based on need.
• Create/Update Loan Information
The loan information is created and maintained on the Loan Application
(RPALAPP) form. This form is used to create a loan application, review eligibility
and admissions data, establish references for the applicant, view the application
information, modify the loan period and disbursement schedules, and certify the
loan.
• Manually Record Check
When received from the lender, the loan check is manually recorded and a
summary of all loan activity for the student is reviewed using the Loan
Disbursement (RPALDSB) form.
• Generate Memos, Authorizations, Payment Records
Run the Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) to generate memos, authorizations, and
payment records pertaining to amount of deferred financial aid available, amount
of financial aid available to be disbursed, and the schedule for disbursement.
Return of Title IV Funds
The Return of Title IV Funds module assists you in complying with the Title IV
regulations for federal financial aid. The Title IV module the Accounts Receivable,
Student, and Financial Aid products and enables you to do the following.
• Identify Title IV institutional change, such as aid year, and manual refund detail
codes.
• Record authorizations from students to authorize the use of Title IV aid to pay off
non-allowable charges, prior year minor institutional charges, and/or hold excess
Title IV aid for future use.
• Allow application of payments to pay off only allowable charges, or to pay off all
charges based on user authorization. You can also choose to apply payments so that
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-41
they will only pay off charges for terms within an aid year, with parameter to
control future terms within the aid year.
• Identify original charges as required for the return calculation.
• Define break periods within the period of enrollment.
• Identify Title IV recipients who have fully withdrawn, or are no longer in
attendance.
• Determine the enrollment period and the point in the period that enrollment
terminated.
• Determine a student’s institutional charges, Title IV aid, and percentage of
enrollment period completed in order to calculate the Title IV repayment.
• Determine the amount of Title IV aid that should be returned to the Title IV
programs by the institution and/or student, or post-withdrawal disbursed to the
student.
• Refund Title IV credits.
Forms
The following forms are included within the Return of Title IV Funds module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
Return of Title IV Funds Calculation
RPATIVC
Return of Title IV Funds Calculation Inquiry
RPITIVC
Return of Title IV Funds process flow
• Run the Title IV Recipients Withdrawn Process.
Determine students who have withdrawal records by running the Title IV
Recipients Withdrawn (RPRTIVR) process.
• Calculate the Title IV fund amount to be returned to students.
• Batch Process: Calculate the Title IV fund amount to be returned to students
by running the Title IV Fund Return Calc (RPRTIVC) process.
• Online Process: Calculate the Title IV fund amount to be returned to an
individual student by using the Return of Title IV Funds Calculation
(RPATIVC) form.
Both the batch and online process use a Simulation and Calculate and Save mode.
Use the Simulation mode to review the results. Use the Calculate and Save mode to
create a Return of Title IV Funds record.
1-42
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
• (Optional) Review calculations for all students by running Return of Title IV
Funds With (RPRTIVI) process.
• (Optional) Review individual student records using the Return of Title IV
Funds Calculation Inquiry (RPITIVC) form.
• Update the student’s award based on the results of the Return of Title IV
Calculation.
• Run the Disbursement Process to update the paid amounts for affected funds.
• The business office returns the money to the appropriate Title IV funds.
Financial Aid Self-Service
This module functions with the Financial Aid Self-Service product. The Web Processing
rules tab on the ROAINST form provides you with several options for the type of
information you can display in Self-Service. The Award for Aid Year page in Self-Service
provides several tabs with information that may be displayed; options are provided
through the Web Processing rules for displaying these tabs as well as the data that is
displayed.
You have the ability to display text (including variables) to pull applicant specific data
based on rules using the Web Text validation, rules, and tab forms in Banner. The text may
be defined to display on specific tabs on the Award for Aid year in Self-Service.
You also have the ability to require an applicant to complete Terms and Conditions prior to
the acceptance of awards. You establish a tracking requirement which is satisfied when the
Terms and Conditions are accepted. You may also create questions and define answers for
the applicant to complete and can also stipulate that a specific answer will stop the
applicant from moving forward with the electronic award process and accepting/declining
awards in Self-Service.
You can print an Award letter using the Award information in Self-Service. Additionally,
you may also choose the option to print the Terms and Conditions along with the award.
The ROREMAL process provides you the capability of sending an e-mail using a
population selection so you may provide a notice that awards are ready to review or
changes to awards have been made.
You can also inactivate lenders who are no longer participating in the FFEL program. You
have the ability to select a lender for display in Self-Service. You can use a form to store
the lenders for a student by program (Stafford, Parent PLUS, Graduate PLUS). You may
provide the ability for an applicant to select a lender if one does not exist for the applicant
in Self-Service; the information submitted can be used by the Electronic loan application
process (RPRELAP).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-43
Historical retention of Award Letters: If you have licensed the Banner Document
Management System, the capability exists using the AX Report Management option to
have the Award Letters produced through Letter Generation or merged into Word, and
visible from the Financial Aid Award forms similar to viewing Requirement documents
scanned and visible on Requirements Tracking.
Forms
The following forms are included within the Financial Aid Self-Service module. For more
information about a specific form, select Help > Online Help from that form in Banner.
1-44
Web Applicant Reported Information
RPAINFO
Award Maintenance
RPAAWRD
Package Maintenance
RPAAPMT
Financial Aid Record Maintenance
ROARMAN
Applicant Requirements
RRAAREQ
Resource Maintenance
RPAARSC
Student Lender History Data
RPASLND
Financial Aid Self-Service Control
*RESWEBCM
Global Institution Financial Aid Options
ROAINST
Fund Management
RFRMGMT
Funds Management
ROAMGMT
Fund Base Data
RFRBASE
Third Party Contract Rules
RPRCONT
Exemption Rules
RPREXPT
Message Rules
RORMESG
Lender Base Data
RPRLNDR
Miscellaneous Parameters
RORMPRM
Web Question and Answer Rules
RORWBQA
Web Tab Rules
RORWTAB
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
May 2012
Web Text Rules
RORWTXT
Web Variable
RORWVAR
Resource Code Validation
RTVARSC
Award Status Validation
RTVAWST
E-Mail Letter Module Validation
RTVELTM
Hold Type Validation
RTVHOLD
Message Code Validation
RTVMESG
Packaging Group Validation
RTVPGRP
Requirements Tracking Validation
RTVTREQ
Web Question Validation
RTVWEBQ
Web Text Rule Code Validation
RTVWTXT
Web Variable Validation
RTVWVAR
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
1-45
1-46
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
System Overview
May 2012
2
Processing
This section discusses topics and procedures of interest in Financial Aid processing.
Concepts discussed in this chapter include:
• Audit logging
• Banner Financial Aid Fund Specific
Packaging options
• Data Load procedures
• Awards and Disbursements
• Pell processing/procedures
• Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing
• TEACH grant processing
• Default/refund processing
• EDE processing/correction logging
• Resources, contracts, and exemptions
• Methodology specific changes
• Loan processing
• Student Dependencies
(codes and overrides)
• Electronic transfer
• EFC proration
• Financial Aid common functions
• Contributions (estimated vs. official)
• Repeat coursework processing
• Need Analysis
• Display and maintenance of student
enrollment
• Period based processing
• Financial Aid Selection Rules
(RORRULE)
• Requirements tracking procedures
• Student employment procedures
• Budgeting procedures
• Algorithmic packaging
• Satisfactory Academic Progress
(SAP) processing
• COD TEACH Calculation
• Funds Management procedures
• Scholarship and athletics processing
by period
• Packaging and disbursement procedures
• Self-Service
• Using NSLDS
• Web Snapshot system
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-1
Audit logging
Audit logging provides the ability for users to view a history of their data changes, the date
the change occurred, and the user ID of the person who made the change. This may
include inserts, updates, deletions, or a combination of these activities. This is
accomplished using database triggers on all tables within the Banner Financial Aid
module which will then log these changes when made by a user on a form, a batch process,
or any other means in which the data in the table is updated.
Note
All triggers are disabled as part of any Financial Aid release to prevent
unnecessary logging entries when table changes have been made as part

of the release.
The institution has the ability to decide which tables and which columns within the table
they want to log changes, as well as the type of change to be logged (i.e., insert, update, or
delete). This is accomplished by setting indicators on the Logging Control (ROALOGC)
form.
Logging will not be activated for a table until the Active? checkbox is selected.
The scripts that add entries to the underlying Logging Control Base Table (ROBLOGC)
have the ROBLOGC_ACTIVE_IND column set to N. You must check the Active? indicator
for the table to enable logging on that table.
Any table that is able to be logged will automatically display in the query of this form.
You are not able to insert or delete tables on this form. You may, however, activate a table
for logging by checking the box under Active?. In addition, you may specify if you want
the insert, or update, or deletion of data to this table logged or any combination of these
activities. Finally, on the first window you may choose to activate all columns on this table
for logging by checking the checkbox Activate All Columns. If you choose not to
activate all columns for logging, the second window of ROALOGC will display all
columns in the table your cursor was located on in the first window. The second window
allows you to turn logging on or off, per column, by checking the Log? Indicator for those
columns you choose to log for this table.
Note
EDE Correction Logging is done using a different logging process.
Information on EDE correction logging is found under the section EDE

Correction Logging.
Viewing logging records
The Logging Activity Inquiry (ROILOGA) form allows you to view your logged data.
This form opens in Query Mode. Use the form’s first window to query on any field except
2-2
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Name. Fields 1 - 12 display the identifying data(Key) in the row of the table in which
the data was changed.
For example, when an offer amount for an award is changed on one of the Award forms,
the fund code for the award updated will be in field 1 for the table RPRAWRD if logging
is checked for the table RPRAWRD to log changes to the offer amount.
The form’s second window displays the exact column name that was changed, what it was
prior to the change, and current value.
Note
This includes inserts and deletions, assuming you set it up this way on

ROALOGC.
You may also query on any of the fields on the second window to narrow your search.
If your institution has selected to log validation, control, and rule tables, which are not
related to student specific data, you may query the logging records on the Logging
Activity Inquiry (ROILOGA) form, by entering the table name and executing the query.
For example, if logging was activated for the RFRASPC table, which is the table
containing Fund specific data on the Funds Management (RFRMGMT) form, you would
enter the table RFRASPC in the Table: field for the appropriate aid year and execute
query to view changes made to the data existing in the table.
Logging archive and purge
The Logging Archive/Purge Process (RORLOGA) archives and/or purges records from
the Data Log Activity Master Table (RORLOGM) and the Data Log Detail Table
(RORLOGD). When you execute this process, all of the logging activity data existing in
the RORLOGM and RORLOGD tables, with an activity date prior to the date entered in
the Process Activity Date parameter, is copied to temporary copies of the same tables —
the Archive Data Log Activity Master Table (ROALOGM) and the Archive Data Log
Detail Table (ROALOGD). Once the data has been transferred to the archive tables, you
can use Oracle’s EXPORT process to back-up the data. This also allows you to import the
data at some point in the future with Oracle’s IMPORT process, if the need arises.
Refer to the RORLOGA process in the Reports and Processes chapter for additional
details.
Data Load procedures
This section discusses the steps you must follow to run the Data Load process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-3
Understanding Data Load
The Data Load process loads financial aid applicant records into Banner Financial Aid
from external sources via electronic media. This information is stored in temporary Oracle
tables (loaded by the RCPCTxx or RCBTPxx processes), which are then used by the
RCPMTCH (Financial Aid Data Load Part 2) and RCRTPxx (FA Dataload Part 3)
programs to complete the Data Load process.
The xx in the last two positions of the program name indicates the aid year for which the
program is designed. The RCBTP12 program, for example, is written specifically for the
2011 - 2012 financial aid year. These programs are year-specific because financial aid
application record formats change annually. The names of the underlying financial aid
tables are not year-specific, however; columns are merely added to these tables as
necessary on a year-to-year basis.
Data Load is divided into three mandatory steps:
1. Loading Data into Temporary Tables (through RCPCTxx or RCBTPxx)
2. Performing Match Process (RCPMTCH)
3. Loading Data into Production Database (RCRTPxx)
EDE ISIR Data Load process flow
1. Set Up Rule and Validation forms (Annually)
Enter requirement codes and statuses on the Data Source Code Validation
(RTVINFC) form for the EDE source to allow Banner to post documents indicating
that a federal application has been received.
• Use the Interface Data Translation Rules (RCRTPTR) form to convert codes on
incoming federal application records to valid Banner values if your school will load
all application records.
• Enter values and rules on Banner General Common Matching forms used for
matching incoming application records to existing person records in Banner.
• Establish the matching source and parameter set on Data Source Rules
(RCRDTSR) form for the aid year and data source used for the processing of
individual records from the Financial Aid Suspended
• Financial Aid Suspended Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form.
• Set fields on the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form that
control the dataload process or that act as default values during the load.
2-4
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
2. Prepare Incoming files for Data Load
Use the File Concatenation Process (FILECAT) to combine multiple EDE files
downloaded via the EdConnect software into one file for uploading to Banner.
Note
You cannot use the FILECAT process with files in XML format.

Rename the file to the default name that is recognized by Banner processes.
3. Load Records to Temporary Tables (RCBTPxx)
The RCBTPxx process loads incoming EDE ISIR files to a set of temporary tables.
The temporary tables accommodate files for more than one aid year and for more than
one data source.
4. Match Incoming Records to Existing Banner Records (RCPMTCH)
The RCPMTCH process uses the matching rules established on the Banner General
Common Matching forms to compare incoming EDE records to existing General
Person records in the production database. The process identifies New records, those
that have an existing Match, and those that have potential matches or matching errors.
During this process, you may place unmatched New records in a Hold status to prevent
them from loading to the production tables until a matching General Person record
exists in Banner.
5. Load Records to Production Database (RCRTPxx)
This step loads New and Matched status records from temporary tables to production
tables and deletes corresponding records from temporary tables. You may run
RCRTPxx in batch, or initiate the load for individual records as the records are
matched, on the Financial Aid Suspended Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form
(See Step 7).
6. Resolve Records on the Financial Aid Suspended Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP)
form.
Review each Suspended, Duplicate, and Error record on the RCRSUSP form. Initiate
Common Matching rules to determine whether the record is New or Matched or if
potential matches exist. You may access selected Banner Student processing forms to
assist in suspense resolution. If a match is determined, use the Select ID button in the
Data Load Record Block to update the ID and determine the match status. Select the
Load button to load individual New and Match records to the production tables via the
RCRTPxx process. If applicable, use the online Delete Record feature on RCRSUSP
to remove individual records from the temporary tables.
7. Load Records to Production Database (RCRTPxx)
You must run RCRTPxx again if you did not load files individually after identifying
them as Matched or New on the RCRSUSP form. This loads the files you marked from
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-5
temporary tables to production tables and deletes the corresponding records from
temporary tables. This process is run as described in step 5 above.
Note
It is important to run steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 as close together as possible.
This decreases the chance of someone adding new students online,
which would make the New status, as determined by RCPMTCH,
incorrect. If the record is a duplicate, change only one entry to avoid

Oracle errors in RCRTPxx.
8. Delete Temporary Suspense Tables (RCRDTMP) (optional)
Use RCPDTMP to delete files from the temporary database tables at the end of a
completed aid year if you used the option to assign a status of Hold to records that did
not have a matching record in the production database. In addition, you can delete
temporary files individually during daily processing from the RCRSUSP form (see
Step 5). You may use the Delete Temporary Records option for immediate deletion, or
set the Delete Record indicator on RCRSUSP and run the RCPDTMP process to
batch delete the selected records.
CSS PROFILE Data Load process flow
1. Set Up Rule and Validation forms (Annually)
Enter requirement codes and statuses on the Data Source Code Validation form
(RTVINFC) for the CSS source to allow Banner to post documents indicating that a
CSS PROFILE application has been received. Use the Interface Data Translation
Rules form (RCRTPTR) to convert codes on incoming applications to valid Banner
values if your school decides to load all incoming application records. Enter values
and rules on Banner General Common Matching forms used for matching incoming
application records to existing person records in Banner. Establish the matching
source and parameter set on the Data Source Rules form (RCRDTSR) for the aid year
and data source used for the processing of individual records from the Financial Aid
Suspended Record Maintenance form (RCRSUSP). Set fields on the Institution
Financial Aid Options form (ROAINST) that control the data load process or that act
as default values during the data load.
2. Load Records to Temporary Tables (RCPCTxx)
The RCPCTxx process loads incoming CSS PROFILE files to a set of temporary
tables. The temporary tables accommodate files for more than one aid year and for
more than one data source.
3. Match Incoming Records to Existing Banner Records (RCPMTCH)
The RCPMTCH process uses the matching rules established on the Banner General
Common Matching forms to compare incoming CSS PROFILE records to existing
General Person records in the production database. The process identifies New
records, those that have an existing Match, and those that have potential matches or
2-6
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
matching errors. During this process, you may place unmatched New records in a
Hold status to prevent them from loading to the production tables until a matching
General Person record exists in Banner.
4. Load Records to Production Database (RCRTPxx)
This step loads New and Matched status records from temporary tables to production
tables and deletes corresponding records from temporary tables. You may run
RCRTPxx in batch, or initiate the load for individual records as the records are
matched, on the Suspended Records Maintenance form (RCRSUSP) (see Step 7).
5. Resolve Records on the Financial Aid Suspended Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP)
form.
Review each Suspended, Duplicate, and Error record on the RCRSUSP form. Initiate
Common Matching rules to determine whether the record is New or Matched or if
potential matches exist. You may access selected Banner Student processing forms to
assist in suspense resolution. If a match is determined, use the Select ID button in the
Data Load Record Block to update the ID and determine the match status. Select the
Load button to load individual New and Match records to the production tables via the
RCRTPxx process. If applicable, use the online Delete Record feature on RCRSUSP
to remove individual records from the temporary tables.
6. Load Records to Production Database using RCRTPxx
You must run RCRTPxx again if you did not load files individually after identifying
them as Matched or New on the RCRSUSP form. This loads the files you marked from
temporary tables to production tables and deletes the corresponding records from
temporary tables. This process is run as described in step 5 above.
Note
It is important to run steps 4, 5, 6, and 7 as close together as possible.
This decreases the chance of someone adding new students online,
which would make the New status, as determined by RCPMTCH,
incorrect. If the record is a duplicate, change only one entry to avoid

Oracle errors in RCRTPxx.
7. Delete Temporary Suspense Tables (RCRDTMP) (optional)
Use RCPDTMP to delete files from the temporary database tables at the end of a
completed aid year if you used the option to assign a status of Hold to records that did
not have a matching record in the production database. In addition, you can delete
temporary files individually during daily processing from the RCRSUSP form (see
Step 5). You may use the Delete Temporary Records option for immediate deletion, or
set the Delete Record indicator on RCRSUSP and run the RCPDTMP process to
batch delete the selected records.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-7
Setting up rule and validation forms for Data Load
Step 1
Build the Interface Data Code Validation (RTVINFC) form.
The Interface Data block is not aid year-specific. Select the Source Code (such as EDE or
CSS) and enter a tracking requirement code in the Code Requirements field. Banner uses
this value to update the student’s tracking requirement record when the first application
record for that source is loaded into Banner. You can enter a second requirement (such as
an institutional application) in the Supplemental Requirements field. Enter the tracking
requirement status that you want to post with the tracking requirement in the Status
Requirements field.
You must populate the Recruiting Source and Contact Type fields. This data is required
for Part 3 of Data Load (RCRTPxx) to complete successfully, even though you may not
create recruiting records. If you create recruiting records with RCRTPxx, the Recruit
Prospect information (SRARECR) form is populated.
The Aid Year Specific Rules block is optional. If your tracking requirement is different
each year, you may enter an Aid Year Code for each year and source combination you
want to define. Associate an aid-year-specific tracking requirement with each entry. If you
choose to enter aid-year specific requirements, the tracking entries on the Interface Data
Block are ignored.
Step 2
Build the Interface Data Translation Rules (RCRTPTR) form.
This form allows you to convert specified data values in the temporary tables to
institutional values during Data Load. The four tables that are recognized by Banner are
MRTL (Marital), MAJR (Major), SBGI (prior schools attended), and CITZ (Citizenship).
Data Load processing requires MRTL, MAJR, and SBGI Table Name, Data Value, and
Converted Code field entries. CITZ is an optional entry. The form is completed for each
application Source Code (EDE, CSS) in use at your school.
Data Value is the value for the field that comes in from the Data Load file. The
Converted Code field contains the desired value you want the incoming data to be when
posted to Banner. The Converted Code must match values already defined in a
corresponding Banner validation table. Description automatically populates when you
enter the converted code.
When the incoming data field contains a blank value, enter an asterisk (*) in the Data
Value field with its associated Converted Code value. If a data value exists, but is not
listed in the corresponding validation form, or if you choose to convert all data to one
value, you must enter the word Default in the Data Value field for its associated
Converted Code value.
When building this form, there must be a minimum of two entries for each MAJR, and
SBGI. These two values are an asterisk (*) and the word Default in the Data Value field.
Even though students do not provide data for major or prior schools attended on the
FAFSA, or the CSS PROFILE, Banner Data Load still requires at least the default and (*)
2-8
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
entries for the MAJR and SBGI tables. A Default entry is not required for the MRTL or CITZ
tables.
Sample EDE record data values are as follows.
Table Name
Data Value
Converted Value
MAJR
*
Value for undeclared major - STVMAJR
MAJR
DEFAULT
Value for undeclared major - STVMAJR
MRTL
*
Value for single - STVMRTL
MRTL
1
Value for single - STVMRTL
MRTL
2
Value for married - STVMRTL
MRTL
3
Value for single or separated - STVMRTL
SBGI
*
Institution’s School Code - STVSBGI
SBGI
DEFAULT
Institution’s School Code - STVSBGI
CITZ
*
Value for U.S. Citizen – STVCITZ
CITZ
1
Value for U.S. Citizen - STVCITZ
CITZ
2
Value for U.S. Citizen - STVCITZ
CITZ
3
Value for Non-Citizen - STVCITZ
Step 3
Build the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
Codes in various fields on this form serve as global controls for the dataload process, or
are used as defaults, as application records are loaded. You must define the following
fields in this step: Start Date and Year, End Date and Year, Primary Application
Source, Application Received Date Indicator, Tracking Established Status, Source
for Application Received Date (if you load both EDE ISIR and CSS Profile records)
Default Aid Period, Current Term Code, Current Period, Initial SAP Code, Update
Transaction Number and EFC, Use EFC Proration, and the Application Source
Codes on the Defaults window (if you load CSS Profile records).
Step 4
Build the User-Defined Variables Description (RORUSER) form.
Note
This step is optional and is for CSS PROFILE only.

If you contract with CSS for students to complete optional questions on the PROFILE
application, you may load up to 30 responses to User Defined fields for the student. Select
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-9
a range of fields on the RORUSER form. Enter the CSS Profile question number and a
description for each question that students will complete. Once the data is loaded, you can
view the results on the Applicant User-Defined Data (ROAUSDF) form.
Step 5 Define the Common Matching Source Code Validation (GTVCMSC)
form.
Enter a Matching Source code (name) and a Description on the Common Matching
Source Code Validation form (GTVCMSC) for the set of rules that you want to use when
matching the records for an application data source during Financial Aid Dataload Part 2
(RCPMTCH) and during online matching when resolving suspended records. You may
define a common matching source code for each data source (EDE, CSS), or you may
choose to define one common matching source code for all data sources. Each data source
code can have multiple rules that determine if the record already exists in the database.
Step 6
Build the Common Matching Source Rules (GORCMSC) form.
Set up default information for a Matching Source code on the Common Matching Source
Rules (GORCMSC) form.
Select the Person value for the Match Type field to match against person records in
Banner.
Specify forms in the Option Display Rules Block to which the user can navigate using the
Details button on the Common Matching Entry (GOAMTCH) form to see more detailed
information about possible matched records.
Note
The Use for Online Common Matching, Default Address Type,
Default Telephone Type, and Default E-mail Type fields on the
GORCMSC form are applicable to a Common Matching Source Code that
will be used for creating records on the various %IDEN forms such as
SPAIDEN; they are NOT applicable to a Common Matching Source Code
that will be used to match records from the RCRSUSP form after a
Financial Aid Data Load. If you elect to create person records for new
applicants or to update existing person records during Data Load, Banner
will use only the Address, Telephone, and E-mail types defined in the

parameters of Data Load Part 1 (RCBTPxx or RCPCTxx).
Step 7
Build the Common Matching Rules (GORCMRL) form.
Create rules for your Common Matching Source Codes on the Common Matching Rules
form (GORCMRL) and give each rule a priority. Banner accesses your rules in priority
order. If the Priority 1 rule finds a match, or finds no potential matches, the record is
matched or new respectively and processing stops. If the Priority 1 rule finds potential
matches, the procedure goes to the next priority and executes the rule to attempt to find
matched records. For this reason, the Priority 1 rule should have the most restrictive
criteria.
2-10
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Select the Create Required Rules button to use default data elements (elements marked as
required for matching by checking the Required Element field on the Common Matching
Data Dictionary (GORCMDD) form). The GORCMDD form is populated and delivered
by with the system. The only data element delivered as a required element is
SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME.
Select additional data elements to use in matching by using the Column List of Values
from the GORCMDD data element listing that will make up each rule.
In the Length field, indicate the number of characters to compare during the matching
process (for fields not defined as a code in Banner). If the Allow Negative Length field is
checked for a selected data element on the Common Matching Data Dictionary form
(GORCMDD), you may enter a negative number for comparison. For example, enter 10 to
read the first ten characters of the Last Name; enter –4 to read the last four characters of
the Social Security Number.
The algorithm that controls Common Matching uses a combination of primary and
secondary matches (see the complete algorithm in the Additional Data Load Topics
section below). You should use the Social Security Number along with other criteria, such
as birth day and an item from the address, in your rules to achieve optimum matches. Also,
you should test your choice of Match on Null Data option. A simple rule that uses only
Last Name – Match on Null Data = No (Required Element for the rule) and SSN – Match
on Null Data = Yes could find an incorrect student. The primary match on Last Name
would find the student, and SSN would be considered a match if the SSN is null in Banner
but not null in the incoming data load record.
This form allows you to copy previously created rules in the Copy Rules To window. You
also may add specific matching procedures for matching components that are not within
Banner General tables (i.e., matching on high school data for Banner Student) in the
Matching Procedures window.
Step 8
Build the Name Translation Rules (GORNAME) form — Optional.
Use the GORNAME form to build common translations between the first and middle
names you receive in Data Load files and the first and middle names stored in the Banner
General Person record (SPRIDEN). The RCPMTCH routine uses entries on this form to
assist in the matching of the first and middles names on records in the temporary tables. If
the normal match routine comes up with a first name mismatch, the process goes to the
GORNAME rules to attempt a match. If there is an exact match between the primary
columns on this form, the match exists and this record passes the first name match
requirement. If there is no record present on this form that exactly matches the first name
in the temporary tables, there is no match and the record fails the first name match. The
listing also is used when the Common Matching process is started from the RCRSUSP
form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-11
Some first name translations are delivered with Banner. You may enter additional
translations. See the examples below.
Bob
Robert
Harold
Hal
Rebecca
Becky
Note
The translations work both ways. You do not need to create one record
associating, for example, William with Will and a second record
associating Will with William. One record with the combination will

suffice.
Step 9
Create a Parameter Set for Online FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx).
Note
If you are processing both EDE and CSS records, you must define a
parameter set for each data source.

Build a default parameter set for each application data source (EDE, CSS) to control FA
Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx) when you run the process online from the Financial Aid
Suspended Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form.
On the Job Parameter Set Rule (GJRJPRM) form, enter RCRTPxx in the Process field.
Define a parameter set name that includes the application data source name (i.e.,
1112_EDE_RCRTPxx, 1112_CSS_RCRTPxx) in the Parameter Set field and enter a
Description.
Access the Default Parameter Value Validation (GJAPDFT) form. Enter RCRTPxx in the
Process field and the saved parameter set name created on the Job Parameter Set Rules
(GJRJPRM) form in the Parameter field. Create user-defined values appropriate for the
data source for all required parameters. After the annual parameter set is created for a data
source, each user who has permission to load records to Banner from RCRSUSP must
copy the parameter set to his/her own user name. Use the copy feature on the GJAPDFT
form for this purpose. Banner validates the User ID, parameter set name, and job when
RCRTPxx is run from RCRSUSP.
Step 10
Build the Data Source Rules (RCRDTSR) form.
Use this form to establish the Common Matching Source Code and RCRTPxx parameter
set to use when you process records from the Financial Aid Suspended Record
Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form. You need to create an entry for each application Source
Code (EDE, CSS) at your school. Enter the Aid Year, application Source Code (EDE or
CSS), Common Matching Source Code, and the saved Parameter Set name for Data
Load Part 3 (RCRTPxx). You may use the same Common Matching Source Code rule
2-12
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
set for each entry, but you must have separate parameter sets saved if your schools loads
both EDE and CSS records.
Preparing the data to load into Banner
Incoming application files from all sources must be loaded to the $DATA_HOME/
finaid directory for Unix or DATA$HOME for VMS, or
BANNER_FINAID_DATA_HOME for NT. The incoming file must be renamed to match
what the processes are expecting. This step must be completed every time there is a
new input file to load to Banner.
Input names for the RCBTPxx (EDE ISIR) and RCPCTxx (CSS PROFILE) processes
are shown below. The xxyy in each filename represents the aid year for which the load
is performed.
Default file names
For FA EDE Dataload Pt 1 (RCBTPxx), the default filename is:
Input File
Filename
EDE ISIR
xxyyesar.tap
For FA CSS Dataload Pt 1 (RCPCTxx), the default filename is:
Input File
Filename
CSS PROFILE
xxyycssd.xml
Once you complete Data Load, you may want to save the input file under some other name
and archive it. This way, the next time a file is loaded, it will not overwrite your previous
input file.
File Concatenation Process (FILECAT)
You can use the File Concatenation Process (FILECAT) for Data Load files. You can view
the complete list of files that you concatenate with this process in the Reports and
Processes Chapter. You cannot use FILECAT with XML formatted files.
FILECAT combines multiple ISIR files downloaded via the federal software into one file
(per processing year) for uploading to the Banner environment. The following is an
overview of the installation and usage of FILECAT.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-13
Copy the file filecat.exe from the filecat directory of the release CD to the directory
where files downloaded via the federal software reside. This may be any directory you
choose.
Warning
Do not rename the files that are downloaded via the federal software.

Start the program by typing filecat at the DOS prompt in the directory where you installed
the utility. Enter the names of the ISIR files you want to add to the xxxxESAR.tap (for
example, where xxxx = 1112) file to be uploaded to Banner. You may process as many
ISIR files as you wish.Filecat syntax is:
filecat -i file1 [file2...fileN] [-e ext] [-o outfile] [-v] [-a]
where:
• -i list of input files (wildcards are allowed)
• -e extension of file to be output first
• -o output file name (default is filecat.out)
• -v enable verbose output mode
• -a append rows to output file instead of overwriting
You can type filecat without parameters to get detailed instructions for its use.
Warning
When using the -i parameter, the list of files to concatenate should be
separated by a space, not a comma.
If you double click the file from Windows Explorer or Run it from the
windows Start Menu, the text displays too briefly for it to be read. If the
program is not run from within a DOS window, you will not see the output
messages generated by the program.
If you run the program from the Windows Start Menu and include
command line parameters, it will run successfully. However, you will not
see any output messages, so you will not receive confirmation that the

run was successful.
FILECAT permits any input filenames (including the * wildcard -- for example, Sara*).
You can create any output filename, though the output filename defaults to filecat.out if
not specified. Use the -a parameter to append new files to an existing file; otherwise, it
creates or overwrites the specified output filename.
If you use the -a parameter and the output file does not already exist, you receive an
appropriate error message. The process determines the record length of the output file
from the first input file it encounters, matching the input filename mask. If subsequent
files have a different record length, it displays an error message and quits.
2-14
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
For example, if you specify filecat -i 1112* as the input file(s), and 1112cssd.dat and
1112esar.dat both exist in the directory, an error message displays when you hit the
1112esar.dat file because its length differs from 1112cssd.dat. Conversely, if you
use filecat -i 1112e* and 1112esar.dat, 1112esar.001, 1112esar.002,
1112esar.003 all exist in the directory, all four files concatenate into the output file.
Each time you run the process, a new subdirectory is created and all processed files are
moved into it. This prevents you from accidently reloading the same file. The format of
the subdirectory name is \processed_cyymmddhh24miss. The output file remains in
the original tapedata directory.
For example:
1. filecat - i 1112esar*
Since the -o filename was not specified, it defaulted to filecat.out file. It moved
processed files to processed_20110620103501.
2. filecat -i ytdo12op.* -o filecat.out -a
Appended to current data in filecat.out.
3. filecat -i ytdo12op.* -a
Appended to current default file (filecat.out). If the data should be appended to
another file, you will need to specify with the -o filename.
4. filecat -i 1112esar* -o esar.tap
This creates a new output file of 1112esar.tap.
5. filecat -i ytdo120p* -o filecat.out.
This overwrites the existing data in filecat.out file.
Warning
You must exercise care in determining which ISIR files are to be added to
the output file (filecat.out) xxyyESAR.tap. Be sure that only files
that have not been previously uploaded to Banner are added to the file. 
After the xxyyESAR.tap file is created, transfer this file to your Data Load directory in
Banner by using an option in your transfer utility (for example, FTP) that will not change
the original file structure.
Running the Data Load process
This section covers each step of the dataload process. It includes explanations of process
parameters and a discussion of each operation.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-15
Step 1
Run the FA EDE Dataload Pt 1 (RCBTPxx) process.
The FA EDE Dataload Pt 1 (RCBTPxx) process for Federal data (EDE) records loads
incoming files to temporary tables. These temporary tables, which are duplicates of the
Oracle tables where the production data is stored, contain fields that convert data from the
flat-file format to the Oracle format when discrepancies exist.
For example, a temporary person file name is ROTPERS, while the actual table name is
SPBPERS. The temporary table contains the exact fields of the actual table plus fields that
are needed to convert the birth date to the proper format.
The data in some of these temporary tables is then compared against the data in the
production database to ensure that the information can be loaded to the correct person if
they already exist in the database, or to create a new person if the student does not yet have
a record at the institution. This is Step 2, Performing the Match Process.
Note
A listing of the temporary tables is included in the Additional Data Load

Topics section below.
The RCBTPxx parameters are:
Parameter
Value
01
Aid Year Code
Appropriate Aid Year Code for RCBTPxx version
02
Data Source Code
EDE only
03
Data Delivery Method
D
04
Generated ID/
Use SSN Indicator
G
Generated ID
S
Use SSN as ID (Default)
Recalculate Need
Indicator
Y
Recalculate Need (Default)
N
Don’t Recalculate Need
06
Address Type Code
Valid Address Type Code as listed on the STVATYP
form
07
Telephone Type Code
Valid Telephone Type Code as listed on the STVTELE
form
08
Starting Record
Number
Record number for the restart process (Default = 0)
05
2-16
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Parameter
Value
09
Student Email Address
Type
Email Type Code as listed on the GTVEMAL form
10
Parent Email Address
Type
Email Type Code as listed on the GTVEMAL form
Explanations of selected RCBTPxx parameters follow:
04
Generated ID/
Use SSN Indicator
G
Generated ID
S
Use SSN as ID (Default)
The Generate ID/Use SSN Indicator enables Banner to generate an ID for a new person, or
use the SSN (social security number) as the ID. When this parameter is set to S, the
Student ID will be created using SSN; when this value is G, the RCBTPxx process will
assign a temporary generated ID to each record loaded to the temporary tables. The
temporary ID becomes permanent for students loaded as New. The temporary ID is
replaced with the generated ID in the Banner database if a match is achieved with an
existing record.
05
Recalculate Need
Indicator
Y
Recalculate Need (Default)
N
Don’t Recalculate Need
When this parameter is set to Y, all applicant records will be created with their Recalculate
Need Indicator set to Y, indicating that need will be recalculated the next time you run the
batch Need Analysis process after the records have been loaded.
Note
If a school chooses to set the Parameter 05 Recalculate Need Indicator to
N, the federal student Need Analysis record will reflect the information
imported on the ISIR with no changes. Schools that load federal ISIR and
CSS Profile records should set Parameter 05 to Y to flag the records for a
Need Analysis calculation. This will produce a Need Analysis Report with
both the ISIR and PROFILE information listed for each student. (Review
set up of Need Analysis Global Policy Options.) Schools that choose to
run the Institutional Methodology (IM) need analysis calculation in batch
should review Need Analysis documentation carefully to understand

differences in assumptions when a recalculation is done.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-17
To run the RCBTPxx process, access the Process Submission Controls (GJAPCTL) form
and enter the required parameters. You can proceed in one of two ways:
1. Select the Submit radio button in the Submission Block and select the Save button to
submit the job, or
2. Select the Hold radio button in the Submission Block and press the Save button to
hold the job. Note the sequence number. If you select the Hold option, you must have
access to the job submission directory to complete job processing.
Note
As a general rule, you should confirm that each Data Load process is
complete before running the next process.

Note
When inserting the name into the temporary table (ROTIDEN), the
following prefixes and suffixes are removed to assist with the matching

process.
• Specific prefixes are: Dr., Dr, Mr., Mr, Miss, Ms., Ms, Mrs., Mrs,
Prof., Prof.
• Specific suffixes are: Jr., Jr, Sr., Sr, III, IV, Ph.D, PhD, CPA, MD,
RN, Esq., Esq, DVM.
Step 2
Run FA CSS Data Load Part 1 (RCPCTxx).
The FA CSS Data Load Part 1 (RCPCTxx) process takes incoming CSS PROFILE data in
XML format and loads it to the temporary Oracle tables. This data is then available for use
by the remaining steps of the Data Load process.
RCPCTxx parameters (CSS PROFILE data only) include:
Parameter
Value
01
Aid Year Code
Appropriate Aid Year Code for RCPCTxx version
02
Data Source for CSS
CSS only
03
Generated ID/
Use SSN Indicator
G
Generated ID
S
Use SSN as ID (Default)
Recalculate Need
Indicator
Y
Recalculate Need (Default)
N
Don’t Recalculate Need
Permanent Address
Type Code
Valid Address Type Code as listed on the STVATYP
form
04
05
2-18
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Parameter
Value
06
Permanent Telephone
Type Code
Valid Telephone Type Code as listed on the STVTELE
form
07
Student Email Address
Type Code
Student e-mail Type Code as listed on the GTVEMAL
form
08
Mailing Address Type
Code
Mailing Type Code as listed on the STVATYP form
09
Parent Email Address
Type
Parent e-mail Type Code as listed on the GTVEMAL
form
Explanations of selected RCPCTxx parameters follow:
03
Generated ID/
Use SSN Indicator
G
Generated ID
S
Use SSN as ID (Default)
The Generate ID/Use SSN Indicator enables Banner to generate an ID for a new person, or
use the SSN (social security number) as the ID. When this parameter is set to S, the
Student ID will be created using SSN; when this value is G, the RCPCTxx process will
assign a temporary generated ID to each record loaded to the temporary tables. The
temporary ID becomes permanent for students loaded as New. The temporary ID is
replaced with the generated ID in the Banner database if a match is achieved with an
existing record.
Note
The use of Generated IDs is strongly recommended because of the
possibility of CSS data records not containing SSNs. If you choose to use
SSNs for RCPCTxx and RCPMTCH, the students will be generated with
an ID of 0 and marked as “New" or "Hold". If marked as "New", these
students appear on the errs.lis output file of RCRTPxx and gets into
suspense on RCRSUSP, where you have the opportunity to create an ID

for the students.
04
May 2012
Recalculate Need
Indicator
Y
Recalculate Need (Default)
N
Don’t Recalculate Need
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-19
When this parameter is set to Y, all applicant records will be created with their Recalculate
Need Indicator set to Y, indicating that need will be recalculated the next time you run the
batch Need Analysis process after the records have been loaded.
Note
If a school chooses to set the Parameter 04 Recalculate Need Indicator to
N, the federal student Need Analysis record will reflect the information
imported on the ISIR with no changes. Schools that load federal ISIR and
CSS Profile records should set Parameter 04 to Y to flag the records for a
Needs Analysis calculation. This will produce a Need Analysis Report
with both the ISIR and PROFILE information listed for each student.
(Review set up of Need Analysis Global Policy Options.) Schools that
choose to run the Needs Analysis calculation in batch should review
Need Analysis documentation carefully to understand differences in

assumptions when a recalculation is done.
To run the RCPCTxx process, access the Process Parameter Entry form (GJAPCTL) and
enter the required parameters. You can proceed in one of two ways:
1. Select the Submit radio button in the Submission Block and select the Save button to
submit the job, or
2. Select the Hold radio button in the Submission Block and press the Save button to
hold the job. Note the sequence number. If you select the Hold option, you must have
access to the job submission directory to complete job processing.
Note
As a general rule, you should confirm that each Data Load process is
complete before running the next process.

Note
When inserting the name into the temporary table (ROTIDEN), the
following prefixes and suffixes are removed to assist with the matching

process.
• Specific prefixes are: Dr., Dr, Mr., Mr, Miss, Ms., Ms, Mrs., Mrs,
Prof., Prof.
• Specific suffixes are: Jr., Jr, Sr., Sr, III, IV, Ph.D, PhD, CPA, MD,
RN, Esq., Esq, DVM.
Step 3
Run the Financial Aid Dataload Part 2 (RCPMTCH) process.
Note
Before running this step, verify that you have created matching rules on

the Common Matching Rules (GORCMRL) form.
2-20
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The RCPMTCH process is the matching step of Data Load. RCPMTCH performs a
comparison between the student data in the temporary tables (ROTIDEN, ROTPERS,
ROTADDR, ROTEMAL) and student person (General Person) data that already exists in the
database. RCPMTCH follows matching rules set up on the Common Matching Rules
(GORCMRL) form for the Data Source Code that you enter for the RCPMTCH Common
Matching Source Code (parameter 06).
As part of the matching process, all non-code fields used in matching are changed to upper
case, compressed to remove all spaces, and all special characters are removed. This occurs
with both the data in the Financial Aid temporary tables as well as the data in Banner.
You also can use the Name Translation Rules (GORNAME) form for matching situations
such as Bob – Robert. This process uses the name search fields to determine if a student is
new, or if the student truly exists on the database with the name entered in a slightly
different manner each time.
The result of this process is a status code that is posted to each student record in the
temporary tables. The status code assigned to a record determines whether this record is
ready to be loaded directly to the database, needs manual review and intervention, or is in
a hold status.
Below is a listing of all status codes used and their definitions. Each record in the
temporary ID table (ROTIDEN) is updated with one of the following statuses:
May 2012
Status
Comment
D
Duplicate. This name and/or ID has a match within the temporary file
indicating multiple records for the same person.
E
Error. This record encountered an error that would prohibit a determination
of a New or Matched status. See the Error listing below for information.
M
Matched. Based on the rules defined for the Common Matching Source
Code, this record matches a record on the production table database and has
a Need Analysis record for the aid year being processed.
N/H
New. No match was found for this record. It is a new person. If a school
chooses to define new students with a status of Hold, then the new student
will not be processed in step 3 (RCRTPxx) until the status is changed.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-21
Status
Comment
R
Matched student. Based on the rules defined for the Common Matching
Source Code, this record matches a record on the production table database
but no Financial Aid record (RORSTAT) exists for the current year.
A
Matched student. Based on the rules defined for the Common Matching
Source Code, this record matches a record on the production table database
with a Financial Aid record (RORSTAT) for the current year, but no Need
Analysis record (RCRAPP1) for the current year.
S
Suspend. This indicates at least one record where some of the fields match
the record being entered, but not all, or there is more than one record that
matches all the rules. A record will also be Suspended with an error code if
determined as new but the ID or SSN exists in the production database.
Status
Comment
*
This is a database problem and must be corrected for the problem student
before attempting to process this student in Step 3 (RCRTPxx).
Warning
The RCRTPxx program that follows RCPMTCH only
processes records with a status of N, M, A, or R. Records
with other statuses stay in the temporary files until
deleted using RCPDTMP, or until the statuses are
manually changed using the RCRSUSP form and you
rerun the RCRTPxx Process. Statuses that you have
updated during RCRSUSP record resolution can be
changed if the RCPMTCH process is run again before
records resolved on RCRSUSP are loaded to the

permanent tables using RCRTPxx.
The RCPMTCH parameters are:
2-22
Parameter
Value
01
Aid Year Code
Appropriate aid year
02
Data Source Code
Valid Source Code on the RTVINFC form
03
Generate ID/Use SSN
Indicator
G
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Generate IDS Use SSN as ID (Default)
May 2012
Parameter
Value
04
N
New
H
Hold
I
Sort by IDN Sort by Name (Default)
T
Sort By Temporary PIDM
Value for New Students
05
Sort Order Indicator
06
Common Matching Source
Code
Valid Source Code on the GTVCMSC form
Explanations of selected RCPMTCH parameters follow:
04
Value for New Students
N
New
H
Hold
This is the status code that is posted to all students who do not appear to match anyone in
the production database. Part 3 of the Data Load process loads all students with a status
code of N, but Data Load does not load students with a status code of H. This option is
available for those institutions that do not desire to have the Data Load process create new
students (person records) in the production database. Records with a status of H (Hold)
remain in the temporary tables until the records match a person record in the database and
their status is updated appropriately, or until the delete from temporary tables process is
run (RCPDTMP) in batch or for the individual record.
06
Common Matching Source
Code
Valid Source Code on the GTVCMSC form
Banner starts the Common Matching Application Programming Interface (API) using the
rules defined for the Common Matching Source Code entered for this parameter.
To run the RCPMTCH process, access the Process Submission Controls (GJAPCTL) form
and enter the required parameters.
You can proceed in one of two ways:
1. Select the Submit radio button in the Submission Block and select the Save button to
submit the job, or
2. Select the Hold radio button in the Submission Block and press the Save button to
hold the job. Note the sequence number. If you select the Hold option, you must have
access to the job submission directory to complete job processing. Banner prompts
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-23
you for a User ID, a password, and the previously mentioned sequence number (the
job submission one-up number).
This job produces an rcpmtch_seqno.lis file. Print this file to capture the results of the
process. This file contains five reports:
• Financial Aid Data Load Matching Process - Parameters. This report lists the job
submission parameters used to run the job. The Common Matching Source Code
• Data Load Match Process – All Records. All records in the temporary tables for the
aid year and Data Source will be listed with the status returned from the matching
procedure (status E = Error, D = Duplicate, M = Match-M, A = Match-A,
R = Match-R, * = Dup PIDMs, S = Suspense, N = New, H = New-Hold), the rule
priority if matched, the error code if an error was encountered, and a message
regarding the status.
• Data Load Match Process - Duplicate Record. This report lists all people appearing
on the temporary tables two or more times. Note that this report is the only report
for all data source codes (see RTVINFC). Other reports are only for the data source
code (infc code) selected in parameter number two of this job.
• Data Load Match Process – Summary of Totals. This report lists Data Load
matching process totals by status and error code. Valid error messages that appear
on this report are listed below.
• Data Load Match Process - Control Summary.This report lists the parameters, job
number, report file name, and the number of pages.
Valid error messages that appear on the Data Load Match Process – Summary of Totals
report are:
2-24
Error
Description
13
ID and SSN not equal
21
ID or SSN is null
22
Last name or First name is null and SSN is null
23
City is null
25
SSN exists on temporary tables 2 or more times
26
ID exists multiple times
27
ID exists in the database
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Error
Description
28
SSN exists in the database
29
Missing Last Name
30
Missing First Name
The RCPMTCH process also creates an rcpmtch_seqno.log file.This log file contains
information that will be helpful to the technical staff if a problem running this process is
encountered.
Once the matching process is complete, the data for those students that the process has
determined are either a match, or new students, must be loaded to the production database.
This is Data Load, Part 3 (RCRTPxx).
Step 4
Run FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx)
This step loads applicant information from temporary tables to permanent tables, creates
person records for New student records, and completes the necessary conversions using
the codes established in the RCRTPTR form.
Note
RCRTPxx loads all records designated as New or Matched by
RCPMTCH. The process also loads all records designated by you as
New or Matched on the RCRSUSP form.
It is important to run the RCPMTCH and RCRTPxx steps as close
together as possible. This decreases the chance of someone adding new
students online, which would make the New status, as determined by

RCPMTCH, incorrect.
RCRTPxx process parameters include:
May 2012
Parameter
Value
01
Aid Year Code
Appropriate Aid Year for RCRTPxx version.
02
Data Source Code
Valid Data Source Code on the RTVINFC form.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-25
Parameter
Value
03
1.
Load all as current.
2.
If first record from primary MDE, load as
current record, else load as non-current record
3.
If first record from primary MDE, load as
current, else do not load
4.
Load as non-current record
5.
Do not load records, but print discrepancy
report
6.
Replace existing CSS PROFILE record
7.
Do not replace existing CSS PROFILE record
Y
Print Discrepancy Report to report changes in
NSLDS summary data
N
Do not print the NSLDS Discrepancy Report
Load Option for Need
Analysis
04
Not used at this time
05
NSLDS Print Option
06
07
Need Analysis Print Option Y
Print Need Analysis Discrepancy Report
N
Do not print Need Analysis Discrepancy
Report
Y
Create Banner Student Recruiting records
N
Do not create Banner Student Recruiting
records
Recruiting Option
Note: The Major field on the STVMAJR form must
be checked for the converted major code in the
Converted Value field on the RCRTPTR form to
be considered a valid major. A valid major is
necessary if you want to create recruitment
records using this parameter.
08
2-26
Recalc Need Analysis
Option
Y
Set Recalc Need Analysis indicator to Y
N
Set Recalc Need Analysis indicator to N
09
NSLDS Output Application General area for which the Selection ID was
ID
defined for NSLDS output
10
NSLDS Output Selection
ID
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Code that identifies the sub-population to be
updated by NSLDS
May 2012
Parameter
Value
11
NSLDS Output Creator ID
ID of the person who created the sub-population
rules for NSLDS
12
ISIR Creation Option
Y
Create ISIR records
N
Do not create ISIR records
Load VA Data to Resource
Table
Y
Load VA Data to Resource Table
N
Don’t Load VA Data
Process Indicator
B
Process Batch
O
Process Online
13
14
15
Temporary PIDM
Blank when running in batch
16
Update Postal Address
Y
Update Postal Address
N
Don’t Update Postal Address
Y
Update Telephone Number
N
Don’t Update Telephone Number
Y
Update E-mail Address
N
Don’t Up-date E-mail Address
Update Social Security
Number
Y
Update Social Security Number
N
Don’t Update SS Number
20
Name Type Code
Name type to be used for new students.
21
Address Source Code
Address source to be used for new addresses.
17
18
19
Update Telephone Number
Update E-mail address
Explanations of selected RCRTPxx parameters follow:
03
May 2012
Load Option for Need
Analysis
1.
Load all as current.
2.
If first record from primary MDE, load as
current record, else load as non-current record
3.
If first record from primary MDE, load as
current, else do not load
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-27
4.
Load as non-current record
5.
Do not load records, but print discrepancy
report
6.
Replace existing CSS PROFILE record
7.
Do not replace existing CSS PROFILE record
Note
Data Load options 6 and 7 are the only valid options if you enter CSS
PROFILE for the Data Source Code parameter.

Students without current application records for this year - the status is N (New), R (match
found, but no RORSTAT record for the current year), or A (match found, but no RCRAPP1
record for the current year) - are loaded as current application records, regardless of the
load option.
Students with a locked Need Analysis record are loaded as non-current, regardless of the
load option that you select.
All new ISIR records with accompanying NSLDS data contain an NSLDS Transaction
Number. If the Transaction Number on the new NSLDS/ISIR record is greater than the
NSLDS Transaction Number of the Current NSLDS record in Banner, the process loads
the new NSLDS record as the Current NSLDS record and changes the Current record
indicator on the previous Current record to Non-current. No NSLDS records are ever
loaded as non-current. The records are either loaded as current or not at all.
You can print a Discrepancy Report for options 1 - 5, provided that you enter a Y value for
the subsequent Print Option parameter.
05
NSLDS Print Option
Y
Print Discrepancy Report to report changes in
NSLDS summary data
N
Do not print the NSLDS Discrepancy Report
The Sequence Number on the NSLDS records is independent of the Sequence Number on
the RCRAPPx records. The sequence number on the NSLDS record is not unique by
source. For example, the second NSLDS record to be loaded for a student would be
sequence number 2 even if the first record was from a different source (that is, Manual).
• Since award validation must use current NSLDS data (if applicable) and you can
choose to not load the need analysis data from the ISIR, the NSLDS Data Match
Indicator is also stored as part of the NSLDS record. The Match Indicator is stored
2-28
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
in RCRLDS4_MATCH_IND for this purpose.
The value of this field is displayed in the Federal Match Indicators window of the
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form in the NSLDS field, as well as in the
NSLDS Match field in the NSLDS Summary window of the Student Loan Data
(RNASLxx) form. These fields display the match status for the current NSLDS
record.
• A separate NSLDS Discrepancy Report is created to report changes in NSLDS
Summary Data.
Whenever a student is listed on the NSLDS Discrepancy Report, an NSLDS Override
Flag is printed if the student has any overrides for the aid year - either the NSLDS
Override or the Fund/Period Specific NSLDS Override. Review in a timely manner those
students with new NSLDS records and overrides to ensure that the overrides still apply.
If Parameter 03 Load Option (for Need Analysis) is set to a value of 5 (do not load
records, but print the discrepancy report), the Print Option parameter is automatically set
to Y, and the Recruiting and Recalc Need Analysis parameters are set to N.
09
NSLDS Output Application
ID
General area for which the Selection ID was
defined for NSLDS output
10
NSLDS Output Selection ID
Code that identifies the sub-population to be
updated by NSLDS
11
NSLDS Output Creator ID
ID of the person who created the sub-population
rules for NSLDS
The preceding NSLDS population selection parameters are optional.
NSLDS information entered via Data Load informs you as to whether a student is in
default. This information may affect the award process. If you use Early Decision, your
school may package awards before you receive NSLDS information. Creating an NSLDS
population selection allows you to re-validate previously processed awards based on
NSLDS information received after packaging.
When the first NSLDS record is loaded for a student for the year, or when a new NSLDS
record is loaded, Banner has the capability to capture the student’s PIDM in a population
selection ID so that you can run the Validate Award Process (RPRVAWD) to verify that the
previously packaged award is still valid.
12
May 2012
ISIR Creation Option
Y
Create ISIR records
N
Do not create ISIR records
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-29
A printed or electronic ISIR is only valid if the information matches the data at the CPS
for a given transaction number. To maintain a true ISIR database in a manner that
preserves the original content, Banner loads EDE records to the RCRAPP1 through
RCRAPP4 and RCRESAR tables with an INFC Code (source code) of ISIR and EDE. The
ISIR records are frozen as ISIR transactions. This option is controlled by the ISIR
Creation Option (Parameter 12).
15
Temporary PIDM
Blank when running in batch
16
Update Postal Address
Y
Update Postal Address
N
Don’t Update Postal Address
Y
Update Telephone Number
N
Don’t Update Telephone Number
Y
Update E-mail Address
N
Don’t Up-date E-mail Address
Y
Update Social Security Number
N
Don’t Update SS Number
17
18
19
Update Telephone Number
Update E-mail address
Update Social Security
Number
Parameter 15 - Temporary PIDM is used only when RCRTPxx is run from the RCRSUSP
form. Leave the parameter blank for batch processing.
If an incoming record is matched to an existing person record in the production database,
RCRTPxx loads all financial aid data from the incoming record. RCRTPxx does not
update populated fields on an existing person record. RCRTPxx updates the Postal
Address, Telephone Number, and/or E-mail Address if you answer Y to parameter 16,
17 or 18 and there is no record for the Address, Telephone, or E-mail type that you
specified in your Data Load Part 1 parameters. Social Security Numbers are updated on an
existing person record if it is blank and you enter Y for RCRTPxx parameter 19.
If no person record in the production database matches the incoming record, records exist,
RCRTPxx will create a person record for the student using data from the record in the
temporary tables, and will insert all financial aid data. (See section on New vs. Existing
Person below for additional discussion.)
Once RCRTPxx loads a record to the production database, all data for that record is
removed from the temporary tables.
To run the RCRTPxx process, access the Process Submission Controls (GJAPCTL) form
and enter the required parameters. You can proceed in one of two ways:
2-30
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Press the Submit radio button in the Submission block and press the Save button to
submit the job
• Press the Hold radio button in the Submission block and press the Save button to
hold the job. Note the sequence number. If you select the Hold option, you must
have access to the job submission directory to complete job processing. You are
prompted for a User ID, a password, and then the sequence number from above
(job submission one-up number).
RCRTPxx output includes the following reports:
Note
If there is no data for the reports, the file and output are suppressed.

• Report Control Information (rcrtpxx_jobseqno.lis). This report lists the
parameters used when Data Load Part 3 was run and the totals for the number of
records processed, the number of ISIR records added, the number of NSLDS
records added, duplicate transaction information, the number of Financial Aid
records (RORSTAT) created, the number of records not loaded as current, due to a
locked Need Analysis, the number of records not loaded when load option 3 was
used, and the number of Oracle and/or API errors encountered.
• Student listing (rcrtpxx_jobseqno_apps.lis). This report lists the records
processed, if the Need Analysis was load as the current record, if NSLDS data was
loaded as the current record, and identifies duplicate transactions.
• Discrepancy report (rcrtpxx_jobseqno_need.lis). If you selected the Need
Analysis Print option, this report displays discrepancies between the new record
being loaded and the existing current Federal record.
• NSLDS Discrepancy report (rcrtpxx_jobseqno_nslds.lis). If you selected
the NSLDS Print option, this report displays discrepancies between existing and
new NSLDS information.
• Errors – Students Not loaded or errors encountered loading data
(rcrtpxx_jobseqno_errs.lis). If errors were encountered during Data Load
part 3, the name, ID, match status, and the error received are listed. If the record
could not be loaded, the Match status for the record is updated to Suspense with an
error code of 31 - Record not created. Failed Data Load Part 3. If the record was
created but not all data could be inserted, the error listing the data is provided; i.e.,
the process was able to create the ID and biographical information for the record,
but could not insert the address due to missing data.
Step 5 Review the records on the Financial Aid Suspended Records
Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form.
Records that are assigned a status of Suspend, Hold, Duplicate, *, or Error during
Financial Aid Dataload Part 2 (RCPMTCH) display on the Financial Aid Suspended
Records Maintenance (RCRSUSP) form; records assigned a status of Match or New
during the RCPMTCH process do not appear on the form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-31
Only status codes of Duplicate, Error, Hold, and Suspense may be resolved from the
RCRSUSP form. If the status code is an asterisk (*), there is a data integrity problem with
this student that needs to be resolved prior to loading this student (a duplicate PIDM
exists). The status cannot be updated from an (*) on the RCRSUSP form. If the status code
is E, which means that a required field is null, you can correct the data in the temporary
table (top section) on this form and you can update the status.
You should work directly from the output report from the RCPMTCH process as it lists all
the students in the Suspense file and the status code of each. To have this report you must
print a copy of the Data Load Match Process – All Records report.
The Data Load Record block of the RCRSUSP form displays data for a record in the
temporary tables, including a temporary ID assigned during FA CSS Data Load Part 1
(RCBTPxx, RCPCTxx). The ID may be the Social Security Number from the incoming
record or a temporary generated ID depending on your parameter choice during Dataload
Pt 1 (RCRTPxx, RCPCTxx). The RCPMTCH status and any associated error codes also
display. Error code descriptions are printed in the Data Load Match Process – All Records
report and display on RCRSUSP as part of the Error field. The Match Results Window on
RCRSUSP displays student data that exists in the production database once you have
selected a record as an actual match for the one displayed in the Data Load Record Block.
While on the RCRSUSP form, select the Match button to access the Common Matching
Entry (GOAMTCH) form. From GOAMTCH, use the Common Matching functionality to
examine existing or potential matching records in the production database to resolve
suspended records. To utilize the Common Matching process, scroll to a record in the Data
Load Record Block on RCRSUSP, and press the Match icon or perform the Next Block
function. This will open the Common Matching Entry (GOAMTCH) form. Information
from the record in the temporary table will display in the Data Entry window. Press the
Duplicate Check icon to display a matching record (Match tab) or a listing of potential
matching records (Potential Matches) tab. If there are no records that match the rules that
you established on the Common Matching Rules (GORCMRL) form, you will receive an
alert message.
If no match is found on GOAMTCH, and your school is loading New records, enter the
code of N in the Override field on the RCRSUSP form. The Status field is updated to New.
If you are using the status of Hold at your school, and you do not achieve a match on a
record with a Hold status, leave the status as H for matching later.
If Banner displays a single matching record under the Match tab, information displays
according to the data elements present in your rules (i.e., If City is a data element in your
rule, and an address (of any address type) exists in the database that matches the one in the
temporary table, the matching address information displays. If no address data elements
are in your rule, no address information will display in the match fields.) If you are
presented with a list of potential matches, the same student may appear in the listing more
than once if you are using multiple priority rules and the student meets more than one of
your rules.
2-32
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
When reviewing a single matched record or multiple matching records, you may check
additional detail in the All Addresses field. You also may access selected Banner forms
by pressing the Details button on the GOAMTCH form. The Match Priority and Match
Results fields will indicate the rule used for matching and the portions of the rule that
were met, or not met. It is important to study the Common Matching algorithm to
understand what constitutes a match.
Once a matching record is confirmed, press the Select ID button on the GOAMTCH form
to return the data for the matching record to the Match Results Block of the RCRSUSP
form. Banner displays data items consistent with your rule. The address that displays on
RCRSUSP is for the address type that you specified in your Data Load Step 1 parameters,
or the most recent address in the Banner database, if no address exists for the type
specified during Data Load. Press the Select ID button on RCRSUSP, and Banner
automatically updates the match status and replaces the temporary ID in the Data Load
Record Block with the ID that exists in the production database. Save the record to finalize
the matching process.
A Duplicate status indicates that a student has two or more records in the temporary tables
at the same time. These may be from a single data source (EDE) or from multiple data
sources (EDE and CSS). Examine the records and select one for Common Matching. If
your school loads all records, select the duplicate with the earliest transaction number first.
After performing a Common Matching search, and achieving a match or entering a status
of New on the first record, you should load the record to Banner. If you have only one
more record for the student, you should achieve a match status the next time you run the
matching process in batch or online. If you have more than one duplicate remaining, you
must repeat the matching and loading processes until all records are loaded to the
production database.
If you make a mistake in changing a student’s status and wish to return to the original
status code, you have two options. Re-run the RCPMTCH process for all students, or prior
to committing the status, change the Override status code to “-” for that student. When
you save the record, it will revert back to the original status code.
Note
Changing the status code on the form only works if you have not left the
RCRSUSP form (Exit or Clear form Rollback) since making the initial
change. Once you leave the form, the changes are saved and the Match
and New records no longer appear on the RCRSUSP form. Match and
New records continue to appear on the form until you perform an Exit or a

Clear form Rollback.
Once a record is assigned a Match or New status, you must load the record to the Banner
database using the FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx) process. You may select the Load
button on the RCRSUSP form to run RCRTPxx immediately, which loads the record to the
permanent tables. You must have permission to run RCRTPxx and must have a parameter
set established in your user name to run the online process. Once you load the record, or
leave the record after assigning a New or Match status, the record no longer appears on the
RCRSUSP form. If you do not want to use the online load process, or if you forget to load
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-33
the record immediately after updating the status to Match or New, you may run FA
Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx) in batch (see Step 6 below).
Warning
If you elect to run FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx) in batch after resolving
records on the RCRSUSP form, do not run Financial Aid Dataload Part 2
RCPMTCH again prior to running RCRTPxx. RCPMTCH returns your
New and Match status codes to those originally assigned to the temporary

records.
The Suspended Records Maintenance form also includes functionality to delete selected
records from the temporary tables. You may check the Delete Record field on a selected
record to flag the record for deletion according to your institutional Data Load policy.
Once the flag is set, you may select Delete Temporary Records on the Options menu of
the RCRSUSP form. This removes all flagged records for the aid year and data source
displayed in the key block of RCRSUSP. If you do not use the online delete option, you
may run the FA Data Load Table Deletes (RCPDTMP) process in batch using parameter
choices to delete records flagged on the RCRSUSP form. Records flagged for deletion
continue to appear on RCRSUSP until the record is deleted or until the Delete Record
field is unchecked.
Note
The online Delete Temporary Records Process does not check for the

User ID before deleting flagged records.
Step 6
Run the RCRTPxx process
This step is a repeat of Step 4. You should run batch RCRTPxx immediately after
resolving suspended records if you do not choose to load the records to the production
database individually from the RCRSUSP form. This moves those corrected records to the
production database for processing, and will reduce the chance of another user creating a
duplicate record in Banner for the same student.
It is critical that you repeat the RCPMTCH process and the RCRTPxx process until all
records in the temporary tables that can be resolved are resolved. These are iterative
processes and can be run over and over again until there are no longer any records in the
temporary tables that need to be moved.
Step 7
Run the FA Data Load Table Deletes (RCPDTMP) process
The FA Data Load Table Deletes (RCPDTMP) process, which is used to delete records
from the temporary tables, may be run in batch, or the process may be run on-line from the
RCRSUSP form. The batch process can delete all records in the temporary tables for a
selected Aid Year and INFC Source Code. The process also can delete all records where
the Delete Record field is checked on the RCRSUSP form. To delete records on-line from
RCRSUSP, you would check the Delete Record field to flag selected records. Then you
would select the Delete Temporary Records selection on the Options menu. This deletes
flagged records for the Aid Year and Source Code displayed in the RCRSUSP key block.
2-34
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
If you choose to delete selected records using either the on-line or the batch process, all
other records remain unchanged in the temporary tables.
Parameters for the RCRDTMP process are:
Parameter
Value
01
Aid Year Code
Appropriate Aid Year
02
Data Source Code
Valid Data Source Code
03
Delete Flagged Records
Only
Y
Delete Flagged Records Only
N
Delete All Records
Note
Parameter 01 and 02 are required if parameter 03 is set to N. However,
these parameters are not required if parameter 03 is set to Y.
If parameter 03 is set to Y and neither 01 or 02 is populated, the process
deletes all records where the ROTIDEN_DELETE_FLAG = Y, without
regard to the Aid Year code or INFC code. However, if either, or both, 01
and 02 are populated and 03 = Y, then the process use the combination of
the parameters to delete the correct flagged records. When parameter 03
is set to Y, records that are not flagged for deletion on RCRSUSP remain
in the temporary tables.
On the Process Submission Controls (GJAPCTL) form, enter the required
parameter for RCPDTMP. You can proceed in one of two ways:
Select the Submit radio button in the Submission block and select the
Save button to submit the job
Select the Hold radio button in the Submission block and select the Save
button to hold the job. Note the sequence number. If you select the Hold
option, you must have access to the job submission directory to complete
job processing. You are prompted for a User ID, a password, and the
sequence number from above (job submission one-up number).
This process produces a rcpdtmp_seq.lis file. You should print or
save this file to capture the results of the process.
The RCPDTMP Process also creates an rcpdtmp_seqno.log file. This
log file contains information that will be helpful to the technical staff if you
encounter a problem running this process. (As a general rule, you should
always review the output from any job prior to starting the next process.)
Note
You must decide when you need to run the RCPDTMP process to delete

records from the temporary tables:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-35
• If your school is diligent in the act of resolving all suspended records from
Data Load to Data Load, and you are loading all New student records to the
database, the RCRSUSP form should be empty after each Data Load. You
would not need to run the RCPDTMP Process.
• If you are using the RCPMTCH status of Hold to keep records in the
temporary tables until a matching person record exists in the production
database, you would run RCPDTMP only at the end of the financial aid
processing year. You would use the Aid Year and INFC Source Code
parameters for the batch process to remove records for the completed aid
year from the temporary tables.
• If you are loading only selected records into the production database (for
example, the latest transaction when two records with the same EFC exist in
the temporary tables), you may choose to flag records for deletion on
RCRSUSP and use the on-line Delete Temporary Tables option or the
batch process parameter to Delete Flagged Records Only.
Warning
Once data is deleted from the temporary tables, it is lost. If you
accidentally delete all data it could mean re-running the Data Load
Process for a particular file or for the particular aid year. This might
include records that already have been loaded to the production
database.

Additional Data Load topics
The following sections discuss additional topics related to Data Load.
Loading and storing of ISIR records
The Institutional Student Information Record (ISIR) is the Department’s official
notification to your school about a student’s Expected Family Contribution (EFC) and
eligibility for Federal aid. This electronic ISIR record along with NSLDS information is
delivered to your school through EDE. You must maintain these original ISIRs along with
the NSLDS information for audit purposes and you may need to print them for internal or
student use.
To maintain these records, your school needs to support a database of ISIRs in a manner
that preserves the original content. A printed or electronic ISIR is only valid if the
information matches the data at the CPS for a given transaction number. However, a
school may want to change information on the original ISIR, and to facilitate this Banner
provides an option during data load to create two records from the original ISIR data.
To maintain a true ISIR database, you have the option to load EDE ISIR records with
source codes (INFC Code) of ISIR and EDE. Those transactions with a source code of
ISIR are never updated, maintaining the original ISIR transaction information. Those
records with a source code of EDE may be changed. Parameter 12 of FA Dataload Part 3
2-36
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
(RCRTPxx) determines whether or not an ISIR record is created. When this parameter is
set to Y (Yes), both an EDE and ISIR source record may be created at the time of data
load. The Current Record Indicator on records with a source code of ISIR is always N.
Occasionally, the processing center (CPS) sends duplicate transactions for students.
Historically, this has been because CPS sent the original ISIR transaction with incorrect
information as a result of a processing problem. Also, this occurs when a student submits a
correction to their name directly to CPS and a second transaction ‘01’ record with a new
SAR ID is received.
Banner may load these duplicate EDE and ISIR records depending on the parameter
options used for FA Dataload, Part 3 (RCRTPxx). For both sources of records, the
sequence number associated with the transaction is incremented by one each time a
duplicate transaction is loaded. The ISIR and EDE record with the highest transaction
number (and if a duplicate transaction, the highest sequence number) is the most recent
sent by CPS. A listing of all transactions from all sources for a student can be viewed on
the Applicant Need Analysis Application Inquiry (RNIAPPL) window. Also, the
Applicant Listing produced by RCRTPxx will identify duplicate transactions with an
asterisk (*) for the source ISIR. A count of duplicate ISIRs is also included in the Control
Totals for the process.
Depending on parameter choices during Data Load, it is possible that an EDE record will
be created without a corresponding ISIR record. It is also possible that the ISIR record can
be created without the EDE record. For this reason, the sequence numbers for EDE
records and ISIR records may not correspond. However, whenever you are reviewing
records, either EDE or ISIR, the transaction with the highest transaction number and, if
there are duplicate transactions, the highest sequence number is the most recent.
Selections for the Load Option, Print Option, Recruiting Option, and Recalc Need
Analysis Option parameters in FA Dataload, Part 3 (RCRTPxx) are only applied to those
students who already have a financial aid application record for the current year.
For students without a current year record, EDE source records are always loaded to the
database. They are updated as the current EDE record and the Recalc Need Analysis flag
set according to the value selected for this parameter in FA EDE Dataload Pt 1
(RCBTPxx). The value for Parameter 03, Load Option for Need Analysis is disregarded
for these new application records. For example, if the option for Parameter 03 was to load
all records as non-current, the process only loads non-current records for students with
existing aid year information. Whether a record with a source code of ISIR is created
depends on the option for Parameter 12 in FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx). NSLDS
information is always loaded unless it is a duplicate transaction without any
changes.NSLDS data is stored in non-updateable records in the RCRLDS4 – RCRLDS7
tables. ISIRs and NSLDS records each have a unique Transaction Number and the two
may be different. Since NSLDS data is printed on the ISIR, Banner maintains a record of
which NSLDS transaction record came in on which ISIR transaction. The NSLDS
transaction number associated with the ISIR is stored in RCRAPP4_NSLDS_TRAN_NO.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-37
NSLDS documentation indicates the transaction number will be incremented whenever
data changes exist. However, schools on occasion may receive updated information on an
NSLDS record without a new transaction number. Banner loads duplicate NSLDS
transaction numbers, incrementing the sequence number, if there is a change to any
information on the new NSLDS record. The current NSLDS record is the one with the
highest transaction and, if there are duplicate transactions, the highest sequence number.
NSLDS detail information is viewed on the Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) window. A
listing of all NSLDS records for a student is accessible from this window as well as by
going directly to the Applicant Student Loan Data Inquiry (RNINSLD) form.
FA Dataload Part 3 (RCRTPxx) output reports duplicate NSLDS transactions in the
Student Summary listing with an asterisk (*) in the NSLDS-current column for the source
EDE. A count of people who had NSLDS data added with duplicate transactions is
included in the Report Control Totals (rcrtpxx_nn.lis). Also, there is an option to
print an NSLDS Discrepancy Report.
ISIR records may be printed using the ISIR Print Process (RERISxx). Using Parameter 7
(Banner ID Trans No), when you enter only a Banner ID then the process prints the ISIR
with the highest transaction number and sequence number. If an optional Transaction
Number is entered along with the Banner ID, then the ISIR with that transaction number
and highest sequence number is printed. Enter a Banner ID, Transaction Number and
Sequence Number to print specific ISIRs.
New Person versus Existing Person
If a person record exists in Banner at the time of Data Load, FA Dataload Part 3
(RCRTPxx) does not update fields on that person record except for fields specified in
RCRTPxx parameters 16, 17, 18, 19. If no person record exists, and you decide to load
New records, a new person record is created with data from the incoming record as shown
below:
Any element with an asterisk (*) on the following tables must have a Banner Conversion
Value on the Interface Data Translation Rules (RCRTPTR) form.
Identification Information (SPRIDEN, ROTIDEN Tables)
Identification Number
Last Name
First Name
Middle Initial
Person Information (SPBPERS, ROTPERS Tables)
2-38
Gender Indicator
SSN
Marital Status*
Birth Date
Title
Citizenship
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Address Information (SPRADDR, SPRTELE, ROTADDR Tables)
Address Type Code
State Code
Telephone Number
Street Line 1
ZIP/Postal Code
Start Date of Residence
City
Area Code
Recruiting Information (SRBRECR, RCTRECR Tables)
Desired Entry Term
Level Code
Department Code
Degree Code
Major Code*
Financial Aid Applicant Status Information (RORSTAT, ROTSTAT Tables)
Financial Aid Satisfactory Academic Progress Information (RORSAPR, ROTSAPR
Tables)
Financial Aid Application Information (RCRAPP1, RCRAPP2, RCRAPP3, RCRAPP4,
RCRTMP1, RCRTMP2, RCRTMP3, RCRTMP4, RCRESAR, RCTESAR Tables)
Financial Aid National Student Loan Data System (RCRLDS1, RCRLDS2, RCRLDS3
Tables)
Dataload Pt 1 (RCBTPxx, RCPCTxx) temporary tables
The RCBTPxx process for Federal data (EDE) records and the RCPCTxx process for CSS
Profile data records load incoming files to temporary tables. These temporary tables,
which are duplicates of the Oracle tables where the production data is stored, contain
fields that convert data from the flat-file format (EDE) and XML format (CSS) to the
Oracle format when discrepancies exist.
For example, a temporary person file name is ROTPERS, while the actual table name is
SPBPERS. The temporary table contains the exact fields of the actual table plus fields that
are needed to convert the birth date to the proper format.
Temporary tables and their matching production tables used during this Data Load step
include:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-39
2-40
Temporary Table
Production Table
Name/ID Information Table (ROTIDEN)
Name/ID Information Table (SPRIDEN)
Basic Person Information Table
(ROTPERS)
Basic Person Information Table
(SPBPERS)
Address Information Table (ROTADDR)
Address Information Table (SPRADDR)
Telephone Table (SPRTELE)
Recruiting Data Table (RCTRECR)
Recruiting Data Table (SRBRECR)
Recruiting Source Table (RCTRSRC)
Recruiting Source Table (SRRRSRC)
Recruiting Contact Table (RPTCONT)
Recruiting Contact Table (SORCONT)
Application Table (RCRTMP1)
Application Table (RCRAPP1)
Application Table (RCRTMP2)
Application Table (RCRAPP2)
Application Table (RCRTMP3)
Application Table (RCRAPP3)
Application Table (RCRTMP4)
Application Table (RCRAPP4)
Application Table IM data (RCRTMP5)
Application Table IM data (RCRIMP1)
User-Defined IM Data Table (RCRTMP6)
User-Defined IM Data Table (ROBUSDF)
ISIR Table (RCTESAR)
ISIR Table (RCRESAR)
NSLDS Table (RCTLDS4)
NSLDS Table (RCRLDS4)
NSLDS Table (RCTLDS6)
NSLDS Table (RCRLDS6)
NSLDS Table (RCTLDS7)
NSLDS Table (RCRLDS7)
E-Mail Table (ROTEMAL)
E-Mail Table (GOREMAL)
Satisfactory Progress Table (ROTSAPR)
Satisfactory Progress Table (RORSAPR)
Student Status Table (ROTSTAT)
Student Status Table (RORSTAT)
NSLDS ACG Payment (RCTLDSA)
NSLDS ACG Payment (RCRLDSA)
NSLDS SMART Payment (RCTLDSS)
NSLDS SMART Payment (RCRLDSS)
NSLDS TEACH Payment (RCTLDST)
NSLDS TEACH Payment (RCRLDST)
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The following permanent tables -- though used in this Data Load step - have no temporary
table equivalent:
Report/Process Definition Table
GJBJOBS
Process Run Parameter Table
GJBPRUN
Population Selection
GLBEXTR
Population Selection Base Table
GLBSLCT
Common Matching Rules
GORCMSR
Institutional Description Table
GUBINST
Code Conversion Table
RCRTPTR
Log Table (current record change)
ROBALOG
Institutional Options Table
ROBINST
Application User-Defined Data Table
ROBUSDF
Tracking Requirement Table
RRRAREQ
Data Code Validation Table
RTVINFC
Tracking Requirement Code Table
RTVTREQ
Tracking Requirement Status Table
RTVTRST
User-Defined Variable Description Table
RORUSER
Interface Data Aid Year Rule Table
RCRINFC
Common Matching algorithm
• The Common Matching procedure allows for the processing of multiple rules.
Define priority numbers for each rule indicating the sequence in which to process
the rules. Assign your strictest rule as the first priority (i.e., #1).
• The Common Matching procedure processes each rule in order, separately and
completely.
• The first step is to perform primary matching for the rule. This step defines the
population on which the rest of the processing (secondary match) is performed. If
no match occurs during the primary match, the external record is considered new.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-41
• The second step is to perform the secondary matching processing against the
results of the primary match. If the secondary match determines an exact match on
only one record, the external source record is considered a match. If more than one
record is matched to the criteria, the external source record is considered in
suspense. The external source record is considered in suspense if data matches part
of the criteria of the rules but does not match all the criteria.
• If the results of the rule are new or match, the results are returned to the calling
process. No other rules are processed.
• When all the rules have been processed, the Common Matching procedure
examines the results and returns the results to the calling process. The Match Status
(new, matched, or suspense) is returned as well as a results message providing the
elements that were matched, not matched, or missing as a result of processing the
rule.
• Online only. If a record is determined as a match using one rule, but as a suspense
using one or more additional rules, the record’s match status is set to match but you
can view the potential match records as well.
Field Length values
Whenever a length is specified on a rule on the Common Matching Rules (GORCMRL)
form, a comparison is made using the rule length of the fields. For example, using the last
name, the comparison is between the rule lengths of the last name on the external source to
the rule length of the last name in Banner. If the rule length is 5, the first five characters of
the external source last name are compared to the first five characters of the Banner last
name. You can enter a negative length for ID and SSN/SIN/TFN fields to reverse the
order to last to first; i.e., enter a –5 for the length of SSN/SIN/TIN, the last 5 characters of
the external source are compared to the last 5 characters of the Banner SSN/SIN/TIN.
Example
Last Name length:4
First Name length:3
SSN/SIN/TFN length:-4
Patricia Longnecker, 555116789
The first 4 characters of the last name are used: LONG
The first 3 characters of the first name are used: PAT
The last 4 characters of the SSN/SIN/TFN are used: 6789
2-42
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Primary Match logic
The primary match uses the Last Name/Non-person name
(SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME), which is a required data element for Common
Matching. If the First Name (SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME) or Middle Name
(SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI) are specified data elements in a rule, these elements are used as
part of the primary match for name as well. In addition, if ID (SPRIDEN_ID) and/or SSN/
SIN/TFN (SPBPERS_SSN) are specified data elements in a rule, these elements are used
as part of the primary match.
The Common Matching process uses the Entity indicator established for the Source on
the Common Matching Source Rules (GORCMSC) form to determine the records to select
in Banner.
• A match type indicator of P selects person records: GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE = P
selects records from SPRIDEN where the SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND = P.
• A match type indicator of C selects non-person records: GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE =
C selects records from SPRIDEN where the SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND = C.
• A match type indicator of B selects person and non-person records:
GORCMSC_ENTITY_CDE = B selects records from the SPRIDEN where
SPRIDEN_ENTITY_IND = P or C.
Either Step 1 or Step 2 below must be true for a record to pass the primary match. If the
External record fails the primary match, the match status is marked New.
Step 1 — If the SSN/SIN/TFN is defined for the Source and rule priority number,
retrieve all records from Banner with a matching SSN/SIN/TFN.
• SSN/SIN/TFN data element is defined as part of the rule and
SPBPERS_SSN = External source SSN/SIN/TFN.
Step 2 — If First name and/or Middle names are defined for the Source and rule
priority number, combine with Last name criteria and retrieve all records from
Banner with a matching Name.
Note
When matching non-person records, the First and Middle names should

not be included as part of the rule.
Step 2A —The following must be true:
• SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME must equal the last name on the
External source for the specified length.
Note
If the Source is defined to match non-person records and
SPRIDEN_SEARCH_LAST_NAME is not like the non-person name from the
External Source, the matching algorithm checks to see if a matching

record exists on the GORNPNM alias table.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-43
Step 2B — One of the following must be true:
• First Name data element is not defined
or
• First Name data element is defined for the rule and
SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME is equal to the External source
First Name for the specified length.
Note
If the SPRIDEN_SEARCH_FIRST_NAME is not like the First name from the
External Source, the matching algorithm checks to see if a matching
record exists on the GORNAME alias table if the Source is defined to

match person records.
Step 2C — One of the following must be true:
• Middle Name data element is not defined.
• Middle Name data element is defined for the rule and
SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI is equal to the External source Middle
Name for the specified length.
Note
If the SPRIDEN_SEARCH_MI is not like the Middle name from the External
Source, the matching algorithm will check to see if a matching record
exists on the GORNAME alias table if the Source is defined to match

person Records.
Step 3 — If ID is defined for the Source and rule priority number, retrieve all
records from Banner with a matching ID.
• ID data element is defined as part of the rule and SPRIDEN_ID =
External source ID.
Secondary Match logic
The secondary match compares the data elements defined for the Source and rule priority
number for all records returned by the primary match process. The goal of this match is to
find an exact match between the External Source record and an Banner record.
When comparing a data field with a Yes value in the Match on Null Data Yes or No?
field on the GORCMRL form, a null value may exist either in Banner or the external
source. If a null value exists either in Banner or the external source for the data element,
the data element is considered as matched.
When the Match on Null Data Yes or No? field is No, if the field is null in either Banner
or the incoming record for the data element, it is not considered during the matching
process and a message will be returned that data is missing in the Match Status.
For an External Source record to be considered a match, the following conditions must be
true:
2-44
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
This step is repeated for each of the data elements for the rule and one condition must be
true for each:
• Data element is not defined.
• Data element Match on Null Data is Y or R and the Banner value is equal to the
External source value for the specified length.
or
• Data element Match on Null Data is Y and Banner value is NULL.
or
• Data element Match on Null Data is Y and External Source value is null.
When the data being matched is part of a logical unit (an address), the logical unit is
matched separately and completely. For example, when matching on city and zip code, the
city and zip code must be associated with one address.
Exception: For an External Source record to be considered new when the record has
already passed the primary match, all non-name data elements must be determined as not a
match and none of the non-name elements may be null.
Examples of matching algorithm and results
If all required data elements are missing, the record will be suspended.
Last name = Required
First Name = Required
DOB Day = Required
DOB Month = Required
DOB Year = Required
City = Required
Banner values: Mildred Jones, DOB = 08/17/1957, City = Topeka
External values: Mildred Jones
The external record passes the primary match because the first and last names match.
However, since all other data elements are missing (i.e., null) from the external source (not
matched, but are null), the record is suspended.
In this example, the external record passes the primary match as the first and last name
matches against 2 Banner records. These 2 records are then used in the secondary match.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-45
Rule 1
Rule 2
Last name = R
Last Name = R
First name = Y
First Name = Y
SSN = Y
DOB = Y
DOB = Y
City = Y
City = Y
Zip code = Y
Zip code = Y
Banner values:
1) Alberta Rockville, 330229101, Largesse, 06259, 05/01/1985
2) Alberta Rockville, no SSN, Pomfret, 19355, no DOB
External values:
Alberta Rockville, 330229101, Largesse, 06259, no DOB
The external record passes the primary match because the first and last name matches at
least one Banner record with the same first and last name. Using Rule 1 and the matching
algorithm, the external record matches against Banner record 1. It will suspend against
Banner record 2. Using Rule 2, the external record suspends against Banner record 1 as
well as Banner record 2. Since an exact match was found, the algorithm returns a match.
In this example, the external record passes the primary match, which usually means that
the match status will be ‘Suspense’ at a minimum. However, in this case, because none of
the non-name/SSN fields match, the external record is set as ‘New’.
Rule 1
Rule 2
Last Name = R
Last Name = R
First Name = R
First Name = R
SSN = Y
DOB = Y
DOB = Y
City = Y
City = Y
Zip = Y
Zip = Y
2-46
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Banner values:
Tomasso Dalimonte, SSN = null, DOB = 06/02/78, City = Marikesh,
Zip = 11233
External values:
Tomasso Dalimonte, SSN = null, DOB = 09/07/59, City =
Woodstock, Zip = 06281
The external record passes the primary match because the first and last names match.
Normally, this would mean that the record would be suspended at a minimum. However,
because the DOB, City and Zip code fields specifically do not match (i.e., none of them
are null), the record’s match status is set to New. This is the only exception to the basic
matching algorithm.
Pell processing
Introduction
The Higher Education Opportunity Act (HEOA) of 2008 authorized the awarding of up to
two Federal Pell Grants within an academic year. This User Guide addresses the 3 phases
of this implementation process:
• Phase 1 - Issued in the 8.4.2 Release (June 2009), allows up to 200% of a
scheduled Federal Pell Grant award within an academic year.
• Phase 2 - Issued in the 8.7 Release (April 2010), addresses the ability to assign a
Summer term (now known as period) to more than one aid year for the purposes of
awarding and disbursing Two Pell Grants in an Award Year, the ability to assign
Pell awards based on what aid year the award is most advantageous to the student.
A second Pell scheduled award will be granted if at least one credit is being taken
in the next academic period.
• Phase 3 - Issued in the 8.8 Release (July 2010), addresses the Pell award
calculation based on earned hours, as well as the impact of crossover periods on
database packages and Title IV refunding.
Note
The HEOA of 2008 with specific regard to Pell, consists of two topics:
Topic 1: The ability to allow up to two Pell scheduled awards within the
same academic year. This is the equivalent of up to 200% of Pell
awarding and disbursement.
Topic 2: The ability to award and disburse a Pell grant for a crossover
period. The crossover period is dictated on an aid period level and/or a
student by student level. The crossover period analyzes the most
advantageous Pell award based on the comparison of current and future
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-47
year need analysis records or current and previous year need analysis
records. The setup for current and future year or current and previous
year crossover is based on institutional needs and is explained further in

the following sections.
Year Round Pell Discontinued - 8.11.0.1
Year Round Pell has been discontinued starting with the 2011-2012 aid year. A student
may no longer receive a second Pell award (Pell award > 100%) within a single aid year.
The logic in the Pell Process has been disabled for aid year end year > 2011.
Refer to the corresponding Release Guide(s), as necessary, for further detail.
Pell setup
The Pell Setup section provides information regarding fields that need to be populated,
how values in these fields affect Pell processing, the formula used to calculate Pell, and
how fields affect both the awarding and disbursement of Pell.
Pell procedures
The Procedures section addresses topics such as multiple Pell processing, controlling
when the Pell Calculation Process is run, locking Pell, handling less than half-time Pell
more efficiently, updating award amounts to agree with actual disbursement amounts, and
automatically scheduling remaining Pell eligibility to future periods.
Pell process
The Process section offers information on the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) and
the Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) as it relates to Pell. This chapter also demonstrates
how Pell Grant awards and Pell Grant disbursements are calculated and includes examples
of calculations.
Pell setup
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE)
Establish a Pell fund code (or multiple codes) as a federal grant fund. The Pell fund code
requires the following settings for the Fund Source, Fund Type, and Federal Fund ID
fields. Multiple Pell codes are allowed for institutions with multiple campuses if
necessary.
• Set the Fund Source field to a federal fund source type.
2-48
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Set the Fund Type field to a grant fund type.
• Set the Federal Fund ID field to Pell.
For additional information about the RFRBASE form, refer to the Fund Base Data
(RFRBASE) form information in Banner Financial Aid Online Help.
Detail Code Control Form - Student (TSADETC)
Ask Student Accounts personnel to establish grant fund detail codes for Pell funds. The
detail code created on this form is then assigned to the appropriate Pell fund code on the
RFRBASE form. If you use multiple Pell fund codes, you will need multiple detail codes,
as the fund codes and detail codes require a one-to-one relationship.
Fund Management (RFRMGMT)
Enter fund data and options for the Pell fund code(s) that you established on the Fund Base
Data (RFRBASE) form. This involves the entry of information in the Aid Year Specific
Information blocks on the first 3 windows of the form.
Aid year specific data - Packaging Options window
Complete packaging option fields that are applicable to COD, as follows.
1. Award Maximum - Enter the maximum loan that could be made to any student
during the combined periods of the aid year (For example: The Pell limit for the
2011-2012 aid year is $5,550).
2. Award Minimum – Schools generally enter $.00 as the minimum to allow small
award amounts in the event of a Return of Title IV calculation or in the event that the
Pell Award needs to be reduced to zero.
3. Automatic Packaging – This field must be checked to automatically package Pell
through batch or online processing.
4. Automatic Scheduling – This box must be checked to enable the system to create a
Pell disbursement schedule when Pell is added to the student’s award package.
5. Automatic Acceptance – Check this box if you want to ensure that Pell offers are
automatically placed into Accepted status. If this box is not checked the Pell will be
accepted once a SAR is received. Once a valid SAR Certified date is entered on
ROAPELL, the offered Pell grant will be accepted. Pell awards cannot be manually
accepted.
6. Override Need Check this box.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-49
7. Replace EFC - Do not check this box.
8. Reduce Need - Check this box. A check in this box reduces any remaining unmet
need automatically.
9. Loan Process - Do not check this box.
10. Need Analysis - Check this box to require a need analysis record before you package
the award.
11. Equity Fund - Check this field to reduce the student's equity level when you use
equity packaging. The system packages equity funds first to reduce the equity level
(the system packages non-equity funds after the equity funds regardless of the priority
assigned for the funds on the RPRGFND form).
12. Count for NCAA - Check this box to indicate you can count this fund for NCAA
regulations. The Fund Aid Year Specific Table (RFRASPC) contains the
RFRASPC_NCAA_IND field. Banner does not perform any processing of this data. It is
available for use in conjunction with your institutionally-defined rules and reports.
13. Award Letter - Check this box if you want a change to the offered amount of a Pell
award to reset the award letter indicator in the student’s RORSTAT record. You can
use this indicator with population selection to identify those students that need new or
revised award letters.
14. Round Award - Set this field to 001 so that the automatic packaging process
(RPEPCKG) rounds the award to the nearest dollar.
15. Round Schedule - Set this field to RD=Round Dollars to round the disbursement
schedule to the nearest dollar.
16. Memo Credit - Set this field to None if you do not want to apply disbursements as a
memo credit on the student’s account for the Pell fund. Otherwise, select Offered to
allow disbursements to memo when the award is in an offered status. Select Accepted
to allow disbursements to memo when the award is in an accepted status.
17. Disburse - Select the System option to allow the system to disburse the fund.
Aid year specific data - Disbursement Options window
1. Check the Use Attending Hours box if you wish to calculate the enrollment load for
disbursement based on hours that the student is attending and the course has begun.
2-50
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
(See the Open Learning Handbook for more information on Open Learning and
Attending Hours)
Note
The Disbursement Load Options on the Disbursement tab are not
applicable to Pell since Pell Grants pay based on the Pell Grant Payment

Schedule Grid.
2. Use Disbursement Enroll Edits for Memo - Check this field to allow the
application of the disbursement enrollment edits to be applied to funds in memo
status.
3. Recoup When Award Reduced - Check this field to recoup aid from the account
when the award amount is less than the amount which has already been paid. The
disbursement process places a negative payment amount on the student account for
the difference.
4. The If Ineligible Before Cut-off Date and If Ineligible After Cut-off Date fields
determine the course of action if the student receives a payment for an award in a
specific period and the student becomes ineligible for the award after it is paid. Set
these fields to the appropriate option for your institution. Cut-off dates are set on the
RPROPTS form.
Disbursement Locks window
The Period code field on the Disbursement Locks tab has been modified to allow the entry
of Pell crossover periods. In the past, if the term was not associated with the Financial Aid
Processing year on STVTERM, you could not enter the term. Now, if you have setup the
period on RORPRDS as a crossover period, the period can be entered.
Aid Period Validation (RTVAPRD)
Access this form to review the single and multiple period aid period combinations. In the
Pell Full Year Percent column enter the maximum percentage of the student’s scheduled
Pell award that a student could potentially receive if enrolled full time during each period
of the aid period. There may be multiple aid periods with percentages ranging up to 200%,
but no entry may exceed 200%.
To support Two Pell Grants in an Award Year processing, the following field has been
added to the Aid Period Validation form:
Note
This field is informational only so users know what aid periods have been

defined as crossovers.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-51
Field
Description
Pell Crossover
Pell aid period indicator. If checked, the aid period is used for
Pell processing and will contain a crossover period when set
up on RORTPRD.
Examples:
Semester based
• Fall, Spring, Summer would use 150% for the Pell Full Year Percentage
• Summer, Fall, Spring, Summer would use 200% for the Pell Full Year Percentage
Quarter based
• Fall, Winter, Spring, Summer would use 133.334%
• Summer, Fall, Winter, Spring, Summer would use 166.667%
Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
The new Period Base Data (RORPRDS) form is used to create and maintain the definition
of a Period. This new form’s function is similar to that of the STVTERM form, in that it is
used to define a code, description (short and long), start and end dates, and the aid year
used for financial aid processing. The ability to define the crossover aid year is also
provided (for those periods which represent a crossover period). The code used to define
the period allows up to15 characters for a descriptive code plus a 30 character (long)
period description.
Note
With the Banner Financial Aid 8.9 release, the RPRCRSS form has been
made obsolete. A period which is a crossover will be defined on
RORPRDS. Processing, which previously referenced RPRCRSS, have
been modified to use the crossover definition from RORPRDS. Please
ensure you create a Pell crossover period that will replace the previous

definition on RPRCRSS.
A Pell crossover period must be created for each aid year Pell is eligible to be awarded.
For the 2011 Summer, using the crossover aid period to determine the student’s most
advantageous award is required. To do so, each Pell eligible student must have a period
created that is deemed a crossover. When creating this period, make sure to create your
base year and crossover year definitions in the Base Data block of the RORPRDS form.
Example
• A student has a Fall/Spring/Summer aid period for the 1011 aid year with a 1,000
EFC.
2-52
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Student school does not have a valid 1112 ISIR on file.
• Student received full time Pell for the Fall and Spring periods.
• The student is full time for summer and working on their 25th credit hour.
• The 2nd scheduled award would be awarded at the appropriate value for their EFC.
The institution would need to create the appropriate 1112 crossover period in RORPRDS
and create a Pell aid period in RORTPRD.
Once this student has a RORSTAT record created for 1112, the institution would have to
enter the appropriate Pell crossover period in ROAPELL either manually or through the
use of batch posting. This is necessary because the student may:
• Have a lower EFC for the 1112 aid year compared to that of the 1011 aid year,
therefore the most advantageous award would pertain to 1112.
• The student may not be Pell eligible in 1112 as of now, but may become eligible
before the Pell Cutoff Date (RPROPTS) deadline.
• The student may have their EFC reduced (i.e. Professional Judgment) making them
eligible for a higher Pell award for the crossover period.
For institutions that do not have standard academic year calendars, with specific regard to
periods, ensure that you add the appropriate summer period in either the standard aid
period (when applicable) or by creating a crossover period to be included in the Pell aid
period.
Example
• For the 0910 aid year, the student’s aid period was Fall/Spring/Summer.
• For the 1011 aid year, the student’s aid period was Fall/Spring.
• A Pell aid period was created using the 0910 Summer as the crossover period,
which now displays in the Pell Aid Period field on the ROAPELL form for 1011.
During the 1011 aid year, the academic program decides to offer a Summer period
which is financial aid eligible. The institution must now change the standard aid
period to include Fall/Spring/Summer. Once this is done, the institution must also
create a Pell aid period for that summer period to crossover into the 1112 aid year.
This will ensure the student’s most advantageous award for the summer of the 1011
aid year will be calculated against the 1011 ISIR and 1112 ISIR.
For further assistance with period creation, please refer to the Period Based Processing
chapter in this User Guide.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-53
COD Entity ID Rules (RORCODI)
The COD Entity ID Rules (RORCODI) form establishes the COD processing
relationships between the Attending ID, Reporting ID, Source ID, Federal Pell ID, and
Direct Loan School Code.
Effective with the 2006-2007 processing year, relationships for all IDs used in COD
processing are maintained on the RORCODI Form. You can no longer make changes to
these relationships on the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
Two Pell Grants in an Award Year enhancement
To support Two Pell Grants in an Award Year and period processing, the following
changes were made to the Options tab and the Credit Hours tab.
Options tab
The edit on the Default Aid Period field has been removed to allow an aid period defined
as a Pell crossover aid period on RTVAPRD to be used as a default aid period. The
associated error message has also been removed. The list of available aid period codes has
been changed back to reference the periods from the Aid Period Validation (RTVAPRD)
form.
Credit Hours tab
A Crossover Period field has been added to the Credit Hours tab of this form. A check will
automatically appear in this field if the period entered in the Period column has been
defined on RORPRDS as a crossover period for the aid year in the key block of
ROAINST.
The Period code field on the Credit Hours tab has been modified to allow the entry of Pell
crossover periods. If a period has been defined as a crossover period on RORPRDS, it can
be entered on the Credit Hours tab for the corresponding Crossover Aid Year defined on
RORPRDS.
If an invalid period is entered, the following error message is displayed:
Invalid Period; press LIST for valid Periods.
2-54
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
For the enrollment load routine to calculate the proper Pell award and/or disbursement,
each period must be listed for the aid year. The Pell crossover periods must also be listed
for each aid year that includes the crossover period.
Note
The crossover field in this tab is not updatable from this form. A check

mark in this field is delivered from the period setup in RORPRDS.
U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options
(ROAUSIO)
Institutional Defaults tab
Enter the Main Campus Entity ID and the Title IV Destination Number assigned to
your institution in the appropriate fields. The RORCODI Form maintains COD
relationships for all IDs used in COD processing. If you use an EDE Service Agent, enter
the code in the Service Agent Code field.
Enter the primary Pell Fund Code to be used if there is more than one Pell code listed on
RFRBASE and the applicant is not assigned to a campus that has a unique Pell fund
associated with it.
Grant and EDE Options tab
Check the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation box only if you want to prevent the Pell
Calculation Process (RPEPELL) from automatically running from forms that initiate the
Pell Process for all students at the institution. This may be appropriate if your institution is
Graduate level only or you do not wish for Pell awards to post until a later date.
Note
Even when the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation box is checked, the
RPEPELL process will run when the student is in a Population Selection
used to run RPEPELL in batch from the Process Submission Controls
(GJAPCTL) form or when RPEPELL is run from the ROAIMMP form. 
Check the Pell Reduced Eligibility Ind if you want to automatically create Pell
origination records when the Pell eligibility for a student is reduced (not required). Banner
will automatically create the origination records for any increase in eligibility, as this is
required.
If you check the Cash Monitoring or Reimbursement indicator, the institution must pay
Pell funds to the student account prior to sending in the request for payment from COD. If
there is a check in this field, the COD extract process will report the payment period start
date with the disbursement record (READIxx), upon extracting the record.
If your school is participating in the Department of Education’s Just in Time program for
Pell for this aid year, check the Just in Time or Advance Pay for Pell Indicator field.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-55
You can also check this field if your school wishes to follow the JIT rules for Pell for the
aid year as far as reporting the expected Pell payment and requiring the receipt of an
acknowledgement back prior to allowing Banner to disburse the Pell funds.
If you check the Just in Time or Advance Pay for Pell Indicator field, enter the number
of days prior to the scheduled disbursement date in the Just in Time or Advance Pay for
Pell Indicator Number of Days field to allow the disbursement record to be extracted.
Based on the value in the Just in Time or Advance Pay for Pell Indicator Number of
Days field, the REREXxx Process allows a Just in Time school’s Pell funds to be
extracted. The REREXxx Process picks up these records to submit for funding prior to
payment. Valid values are 0 - 7.
The Alternate Pell Schedules Used field is used by the Pell Calculation Process
(RPEPELL) to identify students who require the use of the Alternate Pell Schedules for
determination of their Pell award. Students who qualify for the Alternate Pell Schedules
will receive a lower maximum Pell Grant in some of the payment cells on the schedule.
Because these reductions are not consistent across the impacted cells, a different schedule
is used. Check this field to identify students who require the Alternate Pell Schedules for
determination of their Pell award. Also check this field if you wish to use both the
Alternate Pell and the Regular Pell schedules. When the field is unchecked, only the
regular Pell Schedule will be used to calculate Pell awards.
Note
The Alternate Pell Schedules Used field has been disabled - beginning
with the 2007-2008 and 2008-2009 aid years.

Check the Use Pell Less than Half Time Calculation box if you wish to automatically
calculate a less than half time Pell Cost of Attendance. For processing using Aid Year
Budgeting, check the Use for < 1/2 Pell indicator for the components to be included in the
less than half-time Pell budget. For processing using Period Based Budgeting, check the
Use For < 1/2 Pell indicator for the components on the Components tab of RBRPBYR.
Campus Defaults tab
The values displayed on the Campus Defaults Tab are those associated with the selected
Attending ID.
Check the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation field only if you wish to prevent the Pell
calculation for the designated campus and you did not check this box on the Institutional
Defaults window.
For additional information about the ROAUSIO form, refer to the U.S. Specific Institution
Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) form information in Banner Financial Aid Online
Help.
2-56
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Packaging Options (RPROPTS)
Main window
Options on the first window affect all funds, but certain options are necessary for Pell
awarding. The Use Estimated Enrollment field and Default Estimated Enrollment
options, if checked, are used if the selected enrollment option in the Grant Options
window is not defined for a period.
The Enrollment Option for Disbursement field is used by other funds and is used by the
Pell process if the disbursement enrollment options are not populated on the Grant Options
Window for any period.
Enrollment Cutoff Date Rules window
The Period on the Enrollment Cut Off Date Rules window has been modified to allow the
entry of Pell crossover periods. If the period already exists in another aid year and it is a
crossover period, the cutoff date used in the other aid year will be automatically populated.
Crossover periods must be added for the RPEPELL process to determine the most
advantageous award.
The following fields have been added to the Enrollment Cutoff Date Rules window:
Field
Description
Period description
Period description
Crossover Period
Crossover period. If the period entered is a crossover period,
the crossover period indicator will display as checked.
Grant Options window
The RPROPTS form allows you to select options that control how certain packaging and
disbursement options function. Crossover periods must be added here to be used by the
RPEPELL process to determine the most advantageous award. The Pell crossover periods
must also be listed for each aid year that includes the crossover period.
The Grant Options Window contains a Pay Grant if Disbursement Amount Differs
from Award Amount option. Since the Pell calculation is done both at the time of
awarding and at the time of disbursement, it is possible that the award amount and the
calculated disbursement amount (the amount the RPEDISB process calculates for Pell)
will not be equal. For example, if a student was awarded with a Default Estimated
Enrollment of Full Time and the student enrolled Half Time, the award amount and
calculated disbursement amount would be different. When these two amounts differ you
have the option to (N)ever disburse under such circumstances, (A)lways disburse the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-57
calculated disbursement amount (RPEDISB amount), or disburse the (L)esser of the award
amount and calculated disbursement amount.
If you choose to not use the Pell Less than Half Time Calculation you should populate
the Default Less Than Half Time Pell COA with the standard less-than-half time Pell
COA used by the majority of an institution’s less-than-half-time students. This amount
should be a full year COA as the Pell Payment Schedule uses the full year COA. The
RPEPELL process will use this COA when referencing the Pell Payment Schedule Value
for a student who has been identified as less than half time. If this field is null, the Pell
process will use the Full-time Pell COA.
The Pell Crossover Cutoff Date was added to indicate the date after which summer
crossover Pell awards will no longer be automatically calculated by the Pell process. The
cutoff date is defined by the Department of Education each year.
If the Pay Pell If System EFC and SAR EFC Are In Same Payment Cell field is not
checked, the disbursement process requires the SAR EFC and System EFC to be exactly
the same number for payment to occur. If you do check this field, the disbursement
process recognizes the payment cell, so that when these numbers vary within the 100 point
range of the cell, the disbursement process treats the EFC numbers as equal values.
Check the Delete Pell Award if Zero box if you want Pell awards to be deleted from the
database if the award is reduced to 0 by the Pell calculation. The award will be deleted
only if no locks, origination, memo, authorization, or paid amounts exist. If the award has
disbursement activity on the student account it will not be deleted to preserve the
appropriate audit trail.
Check the Use NSLDS for Pell box if you wish to use current year Pell payments reported
on the Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) form from other schools. The Pell process will
award Pell based on the calculated remaining percentage of the scheduled annual award.
Grant Options window - Enrollment Options
The Enrollment Options section contains an unlimited number of period records that you
enter in the Period field.
The Grant Award Enrollment Option allows you to select which type of enrollment you
would like the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) to use for the period. This is a drop
list with the following values: A = Adjusted Hours, B = Billing Hours, E = Expected
Enrollment, I = Est. ISIR/FAFSA Enrl, 1=Full Time, 2=3/4 Time, 3=1/2 Time, 4=Less
Than 1/2 Time, (None). In addition, specific logic is applied when calculating eligibility
for a second scheduled Pell award in an award year. See the Earned Hours logic section
for this information.
• For the Adjusted Hours and Billing Hours the process searches for Financial Aid
Adjusted and Billing Hours (RORENRL_FINAID_ADJ_HR and
RORENRL_FINAID_BILL_HR) first. If the Financial Aid Adjusted and Billing
Hours do not exist, the process will use the Adjusted or Billing hours calculated
2-58
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
from the Student registration table (SFRSTCR).
If the school uses Attending Hours functionality for disbursement, the Use
Attending Hours (RFRASPC_ATTENDING_HR_IND) must be checked for the
appropriate fund codes on the Fund Management Form (RFRMGMT) or the Funds
Management Form (ROAMGMT). The fund code may also utilize the +/- Days for
Attending Hours (RFRASPC_DISB_NO_DAYS) functionality to indicate a
disbursement prior to of after the Attend Date. If Attending Hours functionality is
used, the process searches for the Attending Adjusted and Billing Hours
(RORATND_FINAID_BILL_HR and RORATND_FINAID_ADJ_HR) first. If the
Financial Aid Adjusted and Billing Hours do not exist, the process will use the
Adjusted or Billing hours calculated from the Student Attendance Date View
(ROVSATD).
• The Expected Enrollment for the year is the enrollment status value in the
Expected Enrollment Status - Full Year field on the RNANAxx form. Starting in
2011-2012, this field no longer exists on the FAFSA and must be maintained by the
school (manually or through batch posting). Prior to 2011-2012, it was initially
populated during dataload with the value the student indicated on the FAFSA and
could be updated manually or through batch posting).
• The “I” – Estimated ISIR/FAFSA Enrl option historically used the student
reported estimated enrollment for the term from the FAFSA. Since this information
is no longer collected on the FAFSA, institutions wishing to use this option must
populate these fields.
The Grant Disburse Enrollment Option allows you to select which type of enrollment
you would like the Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) to use for the period. This is a drop
list with the following values: A = Adjusted Hours, B = Billing Hours, E = Expected
Enrollment, I = Est. ISIR/FAFSA Enrl, 1=Full Time, 2=3/4 Time, 3=1/2 Time, 4=Less
Than 1/2 Time, (None). (Refer to the preceding information concerning Adjusted Hours,
Billing Hours, and Expected Enrollment option.) In addition, specific logic is applied
when disbursing a second scheduled Pell award in an award year. See the Earned Hours
logic section for this information.
If you choose to use the estimated enrollment from the ISIR/FAFSA in column two or
three, use the Grant ISIR Term field to indicate which ISIR/FAFSA terms correspond
with the term. The drop list of ISIR/FAFSA terms include: Summer term (pre Fall), Fall
semester/quarter, Winter quarter, Spring semester/quarter, and Summer term (post Spring).
Since this information is no longer collected on the FAFSA, institutions wishing to use
this option must populate these fields.
In the past, when disbursing Pell, any period enrollment could be less than half time and
still be paid. However, with Two Pell Grants in an Award Year, at the point in time when
you are disbursing a second Pell award, enrollment must be at least ½ time. RPEDISB has
been updated to verify that a student is enrolled at least ½ time prior to disbursing Pell
funds from a second Pell award within an aid year.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-59
The Period on the Grant Options window has been modified to allow the display of Pell
crossover periods. Once a period has been entered in the Enrollment Cut Off Date Rules
window, it will automatically display on the Grant Options window. You have to update
the Grant Award Enrollment Option, Grant Disbursement Enrollment Option and the
Grant ISIR Term.
For additional information about the RPROPTS form, refer to the Packaging Options form
(RPROPTS) information in Banner Financial Aid Online Help.
Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD)
This form enables you to specify the periods that you want to associate with an aid period.
The Pell Full Year Percent designation from RTVAPRD displays on this form.
The Pell Crossover indicator has been added in the Aid Period Base Information to
display if an aid period has been defined as a crossover.
Item
Field
Description
RTVAPRD_PELL_CROSSOVER_
IND
Pell Crossover
Pell Crossover indicator. If checked,
this aid period applies to Pell crossover
awards.
This form also allows crossover summer periods when the Crossover indicator is checked
for the period on RORPRDS.
Standard aid periods, as well as Pell Aid Periods, will have to be set up on RORTPRD.
Examples:
Trailer School
10-11 Standard Aid Period - Fall, Spring, Summer
11-12 Pell Aid Period - Summer, Fall, Spring, Summer
11-12 Standard Aid Period - Fall, Spring, Summer
Header School
10-11 Standard Aid Period - Summer, Fall, Spring
10-11 Pell Aid Period - Summer, Fall, Spring, Summer
11-12 Standard Aid Period - Summer, Fall, Spring
2-60
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Aid Period/Period Code Rules
The Crossover indicator has been added in the Aid Period/Period Code Rules section. The
Period Code in the Aid Period Rules section has been modified to allow crossover summer
periods when the period has been defined as a crossover for the aid period.
If the period entered is a crossover period, the crossover indicator will display as being
checked.
Item
Field
Description
ROBPRDS_CROSSOVER_IND
Crossover
Crossover; if checked, this period is a
crossover period for the aid year.
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRDEFA)
Enter a percentage in the Grant Award Percent column for each period in the aid period
displayed. Entry represents the portion of the Pell Full Year Percent designation from the
RTVAPRD form that a student could receive if enrolled in the period. The total of all
percentages must be greater than or equal to 100% and less than or equal to 200%.
Example 1: A student enrolled for Fall/Spring/Summer – Fall 50%, Spring 50%,
Summer 50%. The student could get 50% of the 100% scheduled for this period on
RTVAPRD in any of these periods if enrolled for an appropriate number of hours and
the total award has sufficient funds remaining from prior periods. The initial award
will be scheduled for 50% Fall and 50% spring. Up to 50% for Summer will be
awarded only if sufficient unused funds exist after Fall and Spring have been awarded
or if a student qualifies for a second scheduled Pell award for the award year.
Example 2: A student enrolled for Spring Only – Spring 100%. The student could get
100% of the 50% scheduled for this period on RTVAPRD.
Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRASCH)
Use the RFRASCH form to enter award and disbursement schedules for a specific Pell
fund code.
Enter a percentage in the Grant Award Percent column for each period in the aid period
displayed. Entry represents the portion of the Pell Full Year Percent designation from the
RTVAPRD form that a student could receive if enrolled in the period. The total of all
percentages must be greater than or equal to 100% and less than or equal to 200%.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-61
Example 1: A student enrolled for Fall/Spring/Summer – Fall 50%, Spring 50%,
Summer 50%. The student could get 50% of the 100% scheduled for this period on
RTVAPRD in any of these periods if enrolled for an appropriate number of hours and
the total award has sufficient funds remaining from prior periods. The initial award
will be scheduled for 50% Fall and 50% spring. Up to 50% for Summer will be
awarded only if sufficient unused funds exist after Fall and Spring have been awarded
or if a student qualifies for a second scheduled Pell award for the award year.
Example 2: A student enrolled for Spring Only – Spring 100%. The student could get
100% of the 50% scheduled for this period on RTVAPRD.
Academic Year Rules (RORACYR)
The RORACYR form is used to define the academic years by academic level. The
academic year hours will be used during Pell processing to determine if a student qualifies
for a second scheduled award based on the number of credit hours in the institutions
academic year. If the institution defines their academic year as 24 credits hours and the
student is starting at least the 25th credit hour, they will be evaluated for a second
scheduled award.
Key block
The following items are contained in the key block:
• KEYBLCK_ACAD_YEAR
• DISPLAY_ROBACYR_DESC
The following fields are updateable in the key block of the RORACYR form:
Rules block
The following items are included in the Academic Year Rules block:
• RORACYR_AIDY_CODE
• RORACYR_LEVL_CODE
• RORACYR_HOURS
• RORACYR_WEEKS
Note
Currently, the RORACYR_WEEKS field is not being used in Pell processing.

This field is intended for future use.
• RORACYR_COMMENT
2-62
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Applicant Pell Grant (ROAPELL)
The ROAPELL form allows you to view and enter specific information related to Pell,
including the entry of a Pell aid period when a crossover period is not part of the standard
aid year.
To support Two Pell Grants in an Award Year processing the following items have been
added to the ROAPELL form:
Field
Description
Pell Aid Period
Pell aid period. If no Pell Aid Period is defined for a student
(RORSTAT_APRD_CODE_PELL), standard Pell processing will
occur. The use of the Pell Aid Period is only necessary when a
student is attending a crossover period. If a student is going to
attend a crossover period, the Pell Aid Period must be defined
in the aid year that does not include the standard period. For
example, if you normally define the summer as a trailer, the
student would be in a Fall, Spring, Summer aid period for 1011. However, for 11-12 you need to define a Pell Aid Period
which includes the trailing summer period for the Pell process
to properly determine the most advantageous award. When
entering the Pell Aid Period, the Pell process will not
automatically run after being saved. You will have to run the
Pell process in batch or on-line from ROAIMMP.
Note
The Aid Period Description (RTVAPRD_DESC) corresponding to the
student’s PELL Aid Period Code (RORSTAT_APRD_CODE_PELL) will be
displayed at the right of the list icon.
The Aid Period Description (RTVAPRD_DESC) corresponding to the
student’s Aid Period Code (RORSTAT_APRD_CODE) will be displayed at

the right of the item.
Note
RTVAPRD_DESC corresponding to the RORSTAT_APRD_CODE will be
displayed at the right of the item.

The Pell aid period code can only be manually inserted into the ROAPELL form or via the
use of Batch Posting Process (RORBPST).
Budget Component Validation (RTVCOMP)
For Aid Year Budget processing, check the Used for Alt Pell field to select the value of
this component for the calculation of alternate Pell low tuition and fees. This amount is
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-63
used in the determination of whether the student is eligible for the Alternate Pell
Schedules and, if so, the correct amount of the Alternate Pell award.
Note
Alternate Pell Schedule functionality has been disabled - beginning with

the 2007-2008 and 2008-2009 aid years.
Check the Used for <½ Pell box to select the value of this component for the automatic
calculation of a less than half-time Pell cost of attendance. If you checked the Use Pell
Less than Half Time Calculation box on ROAUSIO, the Banner Pell process (RPEPELL
via UCPRTNB) uses these components and posts the calculated budget on the ROAPELL
form.
Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR)
For Period Based Processing, check the Pell indicator on the Budget Types tab for the
budget type that will be used to identify a Pell budget. The EFC indicator for this budget
type must be set to (N)one. On the Budget Components tab, check the Use For
< 1/2 Pell indicator to select the value of the component for the automatic calculation of a
less than half-time Pell cost of attendance. If you checked the Use Pell Less than Half
Time Calculation box on ROAUSIO, the Banner Pell process (RPEPELL via UCPRTN)
uses these components and posts the calculated budget on ROAPELL form.
Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules (RBRPBGR)
Assign the budget type defined to identify the Pell budget for each period budget group
eligible for Pell consideration. On the Pell tab for these groups, create the Full-time/FullYear cost of attendance to be used for awarding Pell. Amounts or algorithmic budgeting
rules should reflect the full-time/full-year amount for each component.
Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP)
If a student is in a crossover period, the Immediate Pell Calculation will be run for both aid
years that contain the crossover period. For example, Pell Calculation is run for 10-11 on
ROAIMMP and the student has both a 10-11 and 11-12 EDE record with the same
crossover period in each aid period. The process will compare the crossover period
between the two years and award the most advantageous Pell grant for that period.
Federal Rules Inquiry (RPIFEDR)
Access this form to review the federal rules for Pell delivered with the system.
2-64
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Pell procedures
Batch Pell Awards
The Pell award may be awarded online, or in batch, by the RPEPELL Process. See the Pell
Processing section for how the award is calculated.
Batch grouping to assign budget groups and components does not initiate the Pell award
process. The RPEPELL process must be run to assign Pell Awards to any students who
were assigned budgets using the batch process (RORGRPS or RBRPBGP). RPEPELL
automatically runs online to account for EFC recalculations, budget and aid period
changes and after changes are made to FAFSA data that would impact the Pell award if the
Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation is not checked on the Grant and EDE Options tab of
ROAUSIO or, if applicable, on the Campus Defaults tab. You can run RPEPELL for all
students or you can run the process using a population selection.
Override a Bachelors Degree
Check the Post Bachelor’s Degree Pell Override field in the Pell and Loan tab of the
Award Maintenance tab of the award form (RPAAPMT and RPAAWRD) to award Pell
Grants to Teacher Certification and other students with a previous Bachelor's degree who
may qualify for Pell under federal regulations.
Manual adjustments to Pell grants
Once awarded, if you need to make any manual changes to the Pell award you will need to
access the Award Schedule tab (RPAAPMT and RPAAWRD). You may only change the
award amount, not the distribution percent. Keep in mind the distribution percent takes
into consideration the aid period and the period award percents. Once you change an
award manually you will get a dialogue box requesting you confirm your changes. Once
you have committed your manual changes you must lock the award so that it is not
recalculated if the RPEPELL Process is run on this student again.
Why and how to lock Pell grants
In the past schools manually adjusted Pell awards to account for Pell received at another
school. Once the manual change was complete, you would lock the record. Banner now
allows the use of NSLDS data to dynamically calculate the correct Pell award. So locking
the record is no longer necessary for this purpose.
Also schools used locks when manually awarding summer periods, but now the Pell
calculation correctly awards a summer session without manual modifications, or the need
for locks. Locks are still available in Banner Financial Aid for exception cases.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-65
Lock types
There are 2 types of locks in Banner — the Y lock and the E lock.
• A Y (always pay) value in the Lock field locks the award and pays what has been
awarded, without exception.
• An E (adjust for lower enrollment status) value in the Lock field pays the amount
awarded unless the student's enrollment drops at the time of disbursement; if
enrollment drops, the amount calculated at the time of disbursement is paid.
Warning
If you make a manual change to an award and place an E lock on the
award, make sure that you have also manually changed the enrollment
on the Award Schedule - Options tab (RPAAPMT and RPAAWRD) to
correspond with the new award. This is necessary because with an E
lock, the Disbursement Process checks the enrollment level at the time of
disbursement and compares this to the enrollment level at the time of
awarding when determining if enrollment has dropped and if it should pay
the calculated disbursement amount or the award amount. So if you make
a manual change and use an E lock, make sure that you manually adjust
the enrollment level to correspond with the manually adjusted award

amount.
Fund locks
A fund lock is placed on the Award Maintenance - Locks/Indicators tab of the award form
Award Schedule tab (RPAAPMT and RPAAWRD) in the Lock field. If you place a Y or an
E lock in this field and will apply to all period awards within the aid period. See the
preceding text for information on using a Y or E type lock.
Period locks
A period lock is placed on the Award Schedule - Options tab (RPAAPMT and
RPAAWRD) in the Period Lock field. A Y or an E lock may be placed in this field and
will apply to only the period for which the lock has been placed. The period lock allows
you to lock one period in the aid period, but not another. For example, if you have a
student who attends a Fall/Spring aid period and is undergraduate Fall and graduate
Spring, you can award the Fall as an undergraduate and lock the award, correctly update
the spring grade level to graduate, and allow the process to remove the Pell award for the
Spring only.
Note
Both fund and period locks may be used for all funds, however the E type
lock works only for Pell funds. In addition, at this time, period locks on

non-Pell funds work the same as fund locks.
2-66
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Lock functionality
• Packaging (RPEPCKG) and Pell Awarding (RPEPELL) do not update awards with
a fund lock of Y or E for Pell and non-Pell funds.
• Packaging (RPEPCKG) and Pell Awarding (RPEPELL) do not update awards with
a period lock of Y or E for Pell and non-Pell funds.
• Disbursement (RPEDISB) for non-Pell Funds always pay the locked value for a
fund or period lock.
• Disbursement (RPEDISB) for Pell with a fund or period lock of Y always pay the
locked value.
• Disbursement (RPEDISB) for Pell with a fund or period lock of E adjust
downward if the enrollment has dropped from the time the Pell was awarded.
Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) and Award
Maintenance (RPAAWRD)
The RPAAPMT and RPAAWRD forms display and maintain packaging information for an
applicant. The forms have been updated to add the Crossover Pell Award, Crossover Aid
Year and Pell Aid Period, enhanced Award Lock functionality, new Post 9/11 Pell
Eligibility indicator, and the Additional Eligibility Indicator.
Award Maintenance tab
The form will allow an update of the award Status (RPRAWRD_AWST_CODE) field for a
fund where:
1. The award Lock (RPRAWRD_LOCK_IND) field is Y (lock and always pay the locked
amount) or E (adjust for lower enrollment status) or the Period Lock
(RPRATRM_LOCK_IND) field is Y or E
and
2. The Allow Award Status Updates When Locked
(ROBINST_UPD_LOCKED_AWARD_IND) field on the ROAINST Form is checked for
the aid year.
You cannot update any of the other fields when the award is locked.
All occurrences of the warning message:
*WARNING* Fund Award record locked; only lock indicator updateable were
changed to: *WARNING* Fund Award record locked.
All occurrences of the warning message:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-67
*WARNING* Fund Award Period record(s) locked; only lock indicator updateable
were changed to: *WARNING* Fund Award Period record(s) locked.
Summary tab
The following fields display on the Award Maintenance - Summary tab to support
Crossover Pell processing:
Field
Description
Crossover Pell Award
Crossover Pell Award. If the Pell award in the currently
displayed aid year has a crossover period defined, then the Pell
Award amount from the Pell award defined in the crossover aid
year and crossover period will display.
(DISPLAY_CROSSOVER_AMT)
Crossover Aid Year
Crossover aid year. A value will only display if the student has
a period which is a crossover period in the crossover aid year.
(ROBPRDS_AIDY_CODE_CROSS)
Pell Aid Period
Pell aid period (RORSTAT_APRD_CODE_PELL)
Processing Note: When a Crossover Pell Award amount appears for the aid year, the
amount will be deducted from the student’s EFA. However, the period amount for the
award is part of the Crossover Aid Year and will be displayed in the applicable period in
that aid year.
For the Crossover Aid Year, the Crossover Pell Award amount will not be deducted from
the EFA for the student.
Example
For the 09-10 aid year the student is attending Fall, Spring, Summer. On STVTERM,
the summer period is part of the 09-10 Financial Aid Process Year. Student’s
scheduled Pell award for 09-10 is 5,350. For the 10-11 aid year the student’s
scheduled Pell award is 5,550. Since the 10-11 summer period would result in a higher
Pell award (2,775 versus 2,675), the 10-11 award would be given to the student.
09-10 would be as follows:
• Crossover Pell Award = 2,775
• Crossover Aid Year = 1011
• Offered: This would include the total awards, resources and crossover pell award.
Also, the 2,775 amount would be reflected in the amount of unmet need.
2-68
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
10-11 would be as follows:
• Crossover Pell Award would be null
• Crossover Aid Year would be null
• Offered: Even though the Pell amount awarded would be 8,325 (assuming the
student was in summer, fall, spring aid period), only 5,550 would be counted here
and in the unmet need.
In addition, if a student has two summer crossover periods in their aid year, the earlier aid
year Crossover Pell Award and Crossover Aid Year will be displayed on RPAAWRD/
RPAAPMT/ROARMAN.
Example
1011 has summer crossover with 0910 and 1112. The data on 1011 RPAAWRD/
RPAAPMT/ROARMAN will display Crossover Pell Award and Crossover Aid Year
from 0910.
Pell and Loan tab
The Pell and Loan tab displays the Post 9/11 Pell Eligibility indicator and the Additional
Eligibility Indicator.
Additional Eligibility Indicator (RORSTAT_ADDL_PELL_ELIG_IND)
The Pell process will automatically set this indicator to checked if the student is receiving
a second scheduled Pell award for the aid year. This indicator is then used to communicate
to COD that the student is eligible to receive a second scheduled award (the AEI tag will
be set to True if checked and False if not checked).
Post 9/11 Pell Eligibility indicator (RORSTAT_POST_911_PELL_ELIG)
Current legislation allows an otherwise eligible student whose parent or guardian died as a
result of U.S. military service in Iraq or Afghanistan after September 11, 2001, may be
eligible to receive increased amounts of Title IV student financial assistance. Students are
eligible for this increased aid, providing the student was:
• Less than 24 years of age when the parent or guardian died.
or
• 24 years of age (or older) and was enrolled at an institution of higher education at
the time of the parent or guardian’s death.
For those students who are eligible for additional financial assistance (according to the
rules above) and have been confirmed by the Department of Defense (DoD), you should
check the Post 9/11 Pell Eligibility indicator. For students whose Pell Expected Family
Contribution (EFC) is within Pell eligible limits, the school must also treat the students as
having a zero EFC for the awarding of Direct Lending (DL) and other campus-based
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-69
programs. Students who meet these standards require that you manually process their Post
9/11 financial assistance on an individual basis.
When a RORSTAT record is created for a student for the aid year, the
RORSTAT_POST_911_PELL_ELIG value from the latest aid year end year for which the
student has a RORSTAT record will be passed in.
Warning
The Department of Education has stated that the Central Processing
System (CPS) will not recalculate a student’s EFC when the student’s
record matches the DoD file. Schools should not make any changes to
the student’s CPS record to adjust the EFC. The fact that the DoD flag is
“Y” and the student is receiving Pell is enough for COD to accept these

records.
Processing Post 9/11 Students who do not have a Pell eligible EFC (IASG):
Warning
It is extremely important that you do not check the Post 9/11 Pell Eligibility
for students who do not have a Pell eligible EFC (IASG) at this time
because Banner does not currently support IASG processing. If you do,
Pell will be awarded and will be permitted to be disbursed. However, Pell
Grant origination will not allow the origination to be created so nothing will
be sent to COD. If you need to award and pay these students, you can do
so but once functionality is delivered to support IASG, these students may
need to have Pell reversed and properly awarded using the IASG process
that will be developed. This should have very minimal impact on users

because there are very few IASG recipients across the country.
Student Eligibility for the 2009-2010 award year
If an otherwise eligible student is Federal Pell Grant (Pell Grant) eligible with a Pell
eligible EFC and the student is post 9/11 Pell eligible, the student’s eligibility for all Title
IV aid must be based on an EFC of zero and not on the EFC calculated by the CPS.
On a regular basis, the DoD identifies and reports those individuals who have lost a parent
or guardian as a result of military service in Iraq or Afghanistan. The Department of
Education uses this information in an attempt to match those individuals (identified in the
DoD file) with current applicant data (via FAFSA records). When a match is identified,
the student’s calculated EFC is evaluated (from the highest CPS transaction). If that EFC
is greater than zero, the school the student attended during 2009-2010 is notified that it
must make an adjustment to the student’s financial aid package.
Additionally, the financial aid administrators at the schools listed on the student’s FAFSA
are also contacted, first by telephone and then with a follow-up e-mail. If the student’s
EFC is already zero, an e-mail notification is sent only to alert the school that, while there
2-70
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
is nothing that must be done for the 2009-2010 Award Year, the student’s eligibility may
change in future award years.
Note
The Department of Education does not recalculate a student’s EFC when
the student’s CPS record matches the DoD file. In addition, a school
should not make any changes to the student’s CPS record to adjust the
EFC. Instead, the school should award the student the types and
amounts of Title IV aid for which the student is eligible, based upon an
EFC of zero. In the phone call and e-mail to schools, the Department of
Education will provide a contact name and number for handling unique
2009-2010 circumstances (subsidized and unsubsidized loans, late
disbursements, student not enrolled for the full year, Return of Title IV

aid).
As part of ongoing Department of Education dialog with schools with students eligible for
this special 2009-2010 benefit, a password-protected file is provided, containing the
student’s identifying information, including the student’s date of birth and the parent or
guardian’s date of death.
Based on this information, the Secretary of Education will send a personal letter to each
student for whom a match was made, regardless of EFC. The Secretary’s letter will
acknowledge the loss of the student’s parent or guardian and provides the student with
information about a possible increase in eligibility for Title IV aid. The letter also includes
additional information about the program’s provisions and advises the student to contact
their financial aid administrator for more information.
This process, as described for the 2009-2010 Award Year, will continue through
processing of the DoD file received in September 2010. Institutions that have Post 9/11
Pell Eligibility students can use the Post 9/11 Pell Eligibility indicator to award maximum
Pell for 2009-2010.
Department of Education Eligibility Processing for
2010-2011 and beyond
Beginning with the 2010-2011 Award Year, this increased aid may include assistance from
the new Iraq and Afghanistan Service Grant Program (IASG).
Financial aid benefits available and provided under this statute for students with a
calculated Pell Grant eligible EFC for the 2010-2011 (and future Award Years) are treated
in the same manner as that described for the 2009-2010 Award Year,. That is, all Title IV
aid is to be awarded using a zero EFC. However, beginning with the 2010-2011 Award
Year, students who are otherwise Pell Grant eligible (undergraduate, etc.), but whose EFC
is not Pell eligible, may receive the new IASG equal to the amount of the maximum Pell
Grant for the award year, adjusted for enrollment status.
Note
For these students, all other Title IV aid must be based on the EFC
calculated by the CPS.
May 2012

Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-71
Going forward, the Department of Education has implemented an automated process for
the 2010-2011 Award Year. This new process notifies schools when a match is made
between a CPS record and that from the DoD file. Processing allows the Department of
Education to evaluate DoD data whenever a student submits or corrects a FAFSA.
Additionally, with each monthly DoD file, the Department of Education will evaluate all
CPS records. If a DoD/CPS match is noted, a new CPS transaction is generated for the
student. In either case, the resulting ISIR includes the new “DoD Match Flag”, associated
comment code 298, and the parent or guardian’s date of death. The DoD Match Flag is
printed with the other ISIR match flag information and can be used by schools to identify
affected students. The School uses the flag and date of death (parent or guardian), along
with the student’s calculated EFC, to determine whether the student is eligible for a zero
EFC for all Title IV aid or for an IASG.
As in the 2009-2010 Award Year, the Secretary of Education will send a personal letter
and additional program related information to each student for whom the match is made.
As before, the letter informs the student of their possible increase in eligibility for Title IV
aid. The student is also advised to contact their financial aid administrator for more
information.
Note
If the student had previously received a letter from the Secretary of
Education, this subsequent correspondence does not include a letter from
the Secretary, but does include the additional program related

information.
Financial Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN)
This form is used to review and update important aspects of a student’s financial aid
record. The ROARMAN form has been modified to display the Pell Aid Period, Crossover
Aid Year and Crossover Pell Award information for a student in addition to the normal aid
period. These new fields will allow you to tell if the student is receiving Pell funds from a
crossover term that is not part of the Financial Aid process year.
Summary block
The following displays on three fields the ROARMAN Summary block to support
Crossover Pell processing:
2-72
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Description
Pell Aid Period
Pell aid period (RORSTAT_APRD_CODE_PELL)
Crossover Aid Year
Crossover aid year. A value will display if the student has a
period which is a crossover period in the crossover aid year.
(ROBPRDS_AIDY_CODE_CROSS)
Crossover Pell Award
Crossover Pell Award. If the Pell award in the currently
displayed aid year has a crossover period defined, then the Pell
Award amount from the Pell award defined in the crossover aid
year and crossover period will display.
(DISPLAY_CROSSOVER_AMT)
Batch Posting Rules (RORPOST)
The RORPOST form allows you to batch post specific data in many different areas. Two
Pell Grants in an Award Year processing is supported by the following:
• The AP posting code allows you to post Pell Aid Period for a population of
students.
• The Code to Post field validation for the AP posting code allows the posting of
both Pell crossover aid period codes and standard aid period codes to the student’s
Pell aid period.
• The Status or Period Code field validation will accommodate Pell crossover
periods, as applicable.
• The following posting codes may select valid Periods including Pell crossover
periods:
May 2012
Posting Code
Description
DD
Scheduled Disbursement Date
MD
Memo Expiration Date
TL
Period Lock
RFT
Fund Period Specific Requirements
RFTS
Fund Period Req Status
RFTA
Fund Period Req/Access Ind
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-73
• The following posting codes may select valid Term/Period codes not including Pell
crossover periods:
Posting Code
Description
S
Satisfactory Academic Progress
SL
SAP Code Lock / Unlock
HT
Hold Code/Period
RT
Period Specific Requirements
RTS
Period Req Status
RTA
Period Req/Access Ind
PNA
Fund Period Promissory Note/Access Ind
Updating award amounts to agree with actual
disbursement amounts
Use the procedure that follows if your institution needs to update the Pell awards to more
accurately reflect the Pell disbursement amounts.
The Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) may be re-run with the same enrollment option
as disbursement to more accurately reflect what has been paid. This allows any unused
eligibility to be awarded to the student for the period(s) that follow.
1. Run the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) with a set awarding enrollment option
on the Packaging Options form (RPROPTS). Set the Pell Award Enrollment Option
on the Pell Options window to default Full Time, use Est. ISIR/FAFSA, etc.
2. Run Disbursement (RPEDISB) with a set enrollment option for disbursement. Set the
Pell Disbursement Enrollment Option on the Pell Options window of the
Packaging Options form (RPROPTS) to Adjusted Hours, Billing Hours, etc.
3. Institution’s Drop/Add period is over, enrollment is stable.
4. Institution changes the Pell Award Enrollment Option on the Packaging Options
(RPROPTS) form to match the Pell Disbursement Enrollment Option for a given
period.
5. Institution runs RPEPELL. Now that enrollment is pulled from the same place for
both awarding and disbursement, this allows for any unused Pell to be awarded to the
student in a following period.
2-74
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The above procedures allow for the following.
A student is assigned a Fall/Spring/Summer aid period and the Pell award percent is
50/50/50 on either the RFRDEFA or RFRASCH form for the Pell fund. In this example,
the aid period Pell percentage listed on RTVAPRD is set at 150%.
• The Pell Award Enrollment Option on the Packaging Options form is set to Default
Full Time. The Pell Awarding Process awards $2,775 Fall, $2,775 Spring and
$2,775 Summer.
• The student subsequently is enrolled half-time for Fall. The Disbursement
Enrollment Option for Pell on the Packaging Options form is set to Adjusted
Hours, so Disbursement uses Adjusted Hours. The Disbursement results are: Fall,
part time, $1,388; Spring, full time, $2,775; and Summer, full time, pays remaining
eligibility of $1,387 from the first scheduled award and $1,388 from the next
scheduled award (assuming the Pay Pell If Disbursement Amount Differs From
Award Amount field is set to Always or Lesser). This example assumes that the
student is taking at least one credit hour in the next academic period to be eligible
for a 2nd scheduled award.
Note
Institutions that do not have a need to have award amounts match
disbursement amounts may stop here. Schools that would like awards to
more accurately reflect what is disbursed and show an award for summer

may proceed.
• Update the Pell Awarding Enrollment Option on RPROPTS to Adjusted Hours
(same as disbursement). Re-run RPEPELL, which awards Fall $1,388, Spring
$2,775, and Summer $2,775. This example assumes that the student is taking at
least one credit hour in the next academic period to be eligible for a 2nd scheduled
award.
Warning
Keep in mind that awarding and disbursement are snapshots of
information at a point in time. Institutions must decide the best time for
their institution to take these snapshots. For example an institution may
setup Fall, Spring and Summer awarding for Pell using estimated Full
Time enrollment. After drop/add for the Fall period, change the Fall Pell
enrollment option to Adjusted Hours and re-run Pell (RPEPELL). After
drop/add for the Spring period is over, adjust Pell awarding enrollment
option to Adjusted Hours and re-run Pell. The same changes could be
made for Summer. Also factor in if your institution freezes enrollment or
not. Note: Some institutions may opt to change both Fall and Spring
award options at the same time after drop/add for Spring and prior to the

start of the Summer awarding cycle.
The award amount and the disbursement amount should now match unless the EFC, COA,
or enrollment has changed between running the disbursement process and Pell. This is
why it is important to check your school’s enrollment freeze process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-75
The above process only changes the award amounts. The disbursement process will
disburse funds per prior period-actual disbursement amounts. In other words, this allows
the awarding process to allocate funds to the Summer period in the above example, but the
disbursement process would pay the correct amount as long as RFRDEFA/RFRASCH is
set up correctly and the Pay Pell If Disbursement Amount Differs From Award
Amount field on the RPROPTS field is set to A - Always disburse or L - Lesser.
When identifying records, the Pell Awarding Process uses fund and period award locks. It
does not adjust awards with the lock set to Y or E, nor period awards set to a Y or E. These
were manual changes and the process will not overwrite such changes. Keep in mind
disbursement will still pay based on lower enrollment and reallocate funds to a Summer
period if the lock is set to E. This allows the correct amount to be disbursed while still
maintaining an audit trail of the manual changes you made to a Pell award.
Reducing an award for Pell paid at another school in
the same aid year
This functionality is similar to that used for Stafford loan funds. The only difference is that
Pell uses percentages to determine the current institution’s award amount.
For example, a student has Pell eligibility at their prior school of $900. The student was
paid $450 at the prior school (450 / 900 = 50%). The student used 50% of their Pell
eligibility for the year. The new school does a professional judgment and the student now
has Pell eligibility of $4050. At the new school the student would be eligible for the 50%
not used at the prior school (100% - 50% = 50%). The student could receive up to $2025
($4050 X 50%).
A check in the Use NSLDS for Pell field indicates that NSLDS Pell award information is
used in the calculation of Pell awards. The Pell award is reduced by any NSLDS Pell
Scheduled award percentages received at other schools in the Pell Calculation Process
(RPEPELL) and the Disbursement Process (RPEDISB).
Once the Use NSLDS for Pell field is checked, the RPEPELL Process checks to see if any
of the school codes listed in the in the School Code field of the Pell Payment Data
window of the RNASLxx form matches the Pell ID at either the institution or campus
level. If a match exists, the Pell award is calculated without factoring in the Pell award
percentage. If a match does not exist, the assumption is that another school has paid a
portion of the student Pell amount and the Pell calculation adjusts the Pell award
downward to account for the percentage received at the other school.
Note
The RNASLxx form has been updated to allow the Pell Percent
Scheduled Used field so that a maximum of 200% can be entered on a

Manual record.
2-76
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Handling less-than-half time for Pell more efficiently
Previously, the Pell calculation used existing Default Less Than Half Time Pell COA on
the RPROPTS form and the Less Than Half Time COA field on the ROAPELL form
when calculating Pell awards for students who were enrolled for less-than-half-time status
in a period. These amounts were manually calculated and updated by the user on the
Packaging Options (RPROPTS) and Applicant Pell Grant (ROAPELL) forms,
respectively.
The calculation of Pell less-than-half-time budgets has been automated through the
addition of a Use for < ½ Pell field on the Budget Components Validation form
(RTVCOMP) for Aid Year Budget processing or on the Period Budget Aid Year Rules
form (RBRPBYR) for Period Based Budget processing. With this indicator, you can
specify which budget components from a student’s full time Pell budget should be
included in the calculation of their less-than-half-time COA.
If no components are identified on the Budget Components Validation form (RTVCOMP)
or Period Budget Aid Year Rules form (RBRPBYR) as applicable, and the Use New Pell
Less than Half Time Calculation indicator is not checked on the ROAINST form, the
process continues to look at the values on the Applicant Pell Grant form (ROAPELL),
Less Than Half Time COA, and then Default Less Than Half Time Pell COA on the
Packaging Options form (RPROPTS).
Warning
The Pell Less than Half Time COA is not updated if the student’s Pell
award is locked with a value of Y or E. The same applies to a period lock

of Y or E.
If you choose to have the system dynamically calculate the Less than Half Time COA
the system enters this value into the Less than Half Time COA on ROAPELL. Any
manual updates to this field are overwritten by the RPEPELL process, once you have
indicated to use the dynamic calculation of Pell less than half-time Cost of Attendance. If
a different Cost of Attendance is needed for the applicant, you must make updates to the
actual budget for the type defined for Pell processing using the Applicant Budget
(RBAABUD) form for Aid Year Budgeting or Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD)
form for Period Based Budgeting.
If the indicator for Use Pell Less Than Half Time Calculation is not set (unchecked) on
the U.S. Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) form, the dynamic calculation by
the system for determining the less than half-time cost of attendance will not occur, even if
budget components have been defined to be used for the less than half-time Pell
calculation.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-77
Controlling when the Pell calculation process is run
You can set an indicator to prevent the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) from
executing automatically, either for an individual student, a group of students, a campus, or
an institution.
For example, you might want to run RPEPELL for continuing students, but delay running
the process for new students for a period of time. In this example, use a population
selection and the Batch Posting Process (RORBPST) to check/uncheck the Prevent
Automatic Pell Calculation indicator. For an individual student, you may check/uncheck
the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation indicator on the Applicant Status (ROASTAT)
form.
Additionally, Pell processing may be controlled at the campus level. Some schools may
have a campus that is strictly Graduate and therefore does not need Pell to run for that
campus. The Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation indicator is updated for individual
campuses through the Campus Defaults tab on the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAUSIO) form.
Finally, for a non-U.S. school you may choose to turn Pell off for the entire institution by
checking the indicator in the Grant and EDE Options tab on the U.S. Specific Institution
Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) form.
The information that follows describes how the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation
indicator will impact the running of the Pell process if checked.
ROASTAT student level prevent automatic Pell calculation is
checked:
• the student will not be picked up in a batch run for RPEPELL
• the forms will not automatically run RPEPELL for this student
• running a Needs Analysis calculation will not run RPEPELL for this student
• if the student is in a population selection used with a batch run of RPEPELL, the
process will calculate Pell for the student
• RPEPELL can be run directly from ROAIMMP or RPAAWRD for the student
ROAINST campus level prevent automatic Pell calculation is
checked:
• the students in this campus will not be picked up if RPEPELL is run in batch
without a population selection
• the forms will not automatically run RPEPELL for students in this campus
• running a Needs Analysis calculation will not run RPEPELL for students in this
campus
2-78
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• if a student from this campus is in a population selection used with a batch run of
RPEPELL, the process will calculate Pell for the student
• RPEPELL can be run directly from ROAIMMP or RPAAWRD for students in this
campus and the process will calculate Pell for them.
ROAINST institutional level prevent automatic Pell
calculation is checked:
• all students will not be picked up if RPEPELL is run in batch without a population
selection
• the forms will not automatically run RPEPELL for any student
• running a Needs Analysis calculation for any student will not run RPEPELL
• if a student is in a population selection used with running RPEPELL in batch, the
process will calculate Pell for the student
• RPEPELL can be run directly from ROAIMMP or RPAAWRD for any student and
the process will calculate Pell for them.
Setup procedure for multiple Pell fund codes
1. Set up separate Pell funds on RFRBASE.
2. Set up the default Pell code in the Pell Fund Code field on the Institutional Defaults
tab of the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) form.
3. Identify which campuses have a Pell fund code different from the default and
populate the correct campus with the corresponding Pell code in the Pell Fund Code
field on the Campus Defaults tab of the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAUSIO) form.
4. Create and review carefully any special award schedules for Pell on RFRASCH.
Note
Keep in mind if a student is assigned multiple Pell fund codes within an
aid year, the default award schedule is used. Review RPEPELL and

RPEDISB documentation.
5. Once students are assigned to a specific campus and RPEPELL is re-run, the process
automatically awards the correct Pell fund code for each period for the student.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-79
6. Disbursement does not determine which Pell fund code is assigned as this is done in
awarding (RPEPELL). Remember that if a student changes campuses, you must
re-run RPEPELL to get the new campus Pell fund code to award.
Note
If you setup multiple Pell fund codes on RFRBASE you must go back to
prior years and populate the ROAUSIO form with the Pell Fund code used
for those years in the Institutional Defaults tab. This is necessary because
RFRBASE is not an aid year specific form. Otherwise if you attempt to
recalculate Pell for the prior years you will get the following error

message: Cannot Determine Default Pell Fund Code.
Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) for Pell
processing
The following functionality is included with Pell/Multiple Pell fund codes.
Option to delete zero Pell awards.
Previously, once a Pell award existed for a student, the RPEPELL process would not
remove the award records from Banner, even if a recalculation resulted in a zero dollar
award amount.
The Delete Pell Award If Zero field in the Pell Options window of the RPROPTS form
now allows you to have RPEPELL delete awards if the awards are reduced to zero by
RPEPELL. This option controls the deletion of award records when a Pell award is
reduced to zero -- whether a school uses a single Pell code or multiple Pell fund codes.
If the option is checked and the Pell award record is reduced to zero AND the following
are all true:
• the award memo amount is null,
• the authorized amount is null,
• the paid amounts are null,
• the award is not locked,
• the award has no period locks set,
• no Origination record was created for the award,
then the award records on the award forms (RPRAWRD, RPRATRM, RPRADSB) are
deleted for that award. Otherwise, the award records remain in Banner.
Note
There is one exception to the Delete Pell Award If Zero checkbox. Even
when this new indicator is checked (delete $0 Pell awards), if a $0 Pell
award is created as a result of an NSLDS default, then the $0 Pell award
2-80
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
remains on the student’s award. This allows you to override on a
period-by-period basis the NSLDS default, if appropriate.

Recognizing co-existence of multiple Pells for same student
simultaneously.
The RPEPELL process recognizes the co-existence of multiple Pell funds on the same
student at the same time. The RPEPELL process combines the totals of any funds where
the Federal Fund ID is PELL. This means that if a student has two different Pell awards on
their account simultaneously, the RPEPELL process totals the awards together for
determining the correct amount for each period as well as for the entire year.
Multiple Pell award fund codes may exist for a student in an aid year. However, for any
period within that aid year, no more than one of those Pell awards will be allowed to have
a non-zero offer amount.
If multiple Pell Fund codes exist, the process to determine the appropriate Pell fund code
to be assigned follows the same hierarchy to be used when determining which Pell rules to
use when originating Pell records. This hierarchy is as follows:
1. Look to the General student record (SGBSTDN) to see in which campus the student
is enrolled.
2. If a Pell fund code has been added to the Campus Defaults tab of ROAUSIO for the
student’s campus, use that Pell fund.
3. If that campus does not have a Pell fund code defined on the Campus Defaults tab,
use the default Pell fund.
4. If the school does not define a default Pell fund code on the Institutional Defaults tab
of ROAUSIO, and there are multiple Pell funds, Pell is not awarded. Instead, an error
message prints to the log file indicating that the Pell fund to be used cannot be
determined.
5. However, if there is only one Pell fund defined on RFRBASE, the Pell process will
award that fund to all students who are eligible for Pell.
The above allows for students who have applied for admission but have not yet been
admitted to a campus to be awarded the default Pell. Once the student has been admitted to
a specific campus and RPEPELL is re-run, the Pell fund code for the assigned campus is
awarded and the default Pell fund code is zeroed out. If the Delete Pell Award If Zero is
set to Y, the default fund is removed.
Locked records
Fund or period locks still prevent changes to Pell award records. If a period lock exists, the
periods that are not locked may be awarded a different Pell fund code, which will result in
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-81
a $0 award amount for the locked period for the new Pell fund code. The non-zero award
for the locked period remains under the prior Pell fund code.
Rounding 0ption
If only one Pell fund code exists, the rounding option selected for that fund code on
RFRMGMT is utilized. If multiple Pell fund codes exist, the rounding option selected is
the rounding option on RFRMGMT for the default Pell fund code from ROAUSIO.
Offered or auto accepted
Offered or Auto Accept status is reviewed on a period-by-period basis per the fund code
rules setup on RFRMGMT for the Pell Fund Code awarded for that period.
Award schedules
If only one Pell fund code exists, the RFRASCH schedule from that fund code is used if it
exists -- otherwise RFRDEFA. If multiple Pell fund codes exist for the aid period, the
RFRASCH schedule is used for the default Pell Fund Code on ROAUSIO -- otherwise
RFRDEFA.
Award change letter indicator
If no Pell previously existed on the student award, but one or more is now being created
and any of the Pell fund codes for this student have award letter indicators set to Y, the
RORSTAT Award Letter flag is set to Y.
If a Pell award previously existed for the student, and the new total award amount for all
Pell fund codes is different from the previous total award amount for all Pell funds, and if
any previous or new fund codes has the award letter indicator set to Y, the Award Letter
flag is set to Y.
Finally, if the Pell award previously existed for the student, but the Pell award now rejects,
and any of the fund code award letter indicators is set to Y, the student Award Letter flag is
updated to Y.
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) for Pell processing
The RPEDISB process has been modified to determine if a Pell aid period has been
specified for a student. If it has, the disbursement process will use that aid period for
processing Pell awards.
The process also checks against RORTPRD to determine if an existing period award is
still valid for the student's aid period. The validation for Pell funds has been modified to
2-82
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
use the Pell aid period code rather than the student’s aid period code, as long as one is
present.
The disbursement process also requires that students accept changes in the Accounts
Receivable module. If the Disburse If Charges Not Accepted indicator
(RPBOPTS_USE_AR_IND) on the Packaging Options Form (RPROPTS) is unchecked, the
load calculation will return 0 hours if changes are not accepted, resulting in the aid not
being disbursed.
Disbursement functionality for Pell / Multiple Pell fund codes is as follows.
Recognizing multiple Pell funds
The process combines the total of any funds with a Federal Fund ID of PELL. This means,
for example, if a student has two different Pell awards on their account simultaneously, the
process totals the awards for determining the correct amount for each period as well as for
the entire year.
Note
The Disbursement Process does not try to determine the correct Pell fund
to use for the student based on which campus he attends, but instead
pays whichever Pell fund code is awarded for the student for that period.

RPEPELL determines which Pell fund to use, not RPEDISB.
Back out of memo, authorizations, and disbursements
Support for multiple Pell funds requires that the same student cannot have two different
Pell funds in any state of payment (memo, authorization, or paid) in the same period
simultaneously. It is possible, however, that a student may be having aid reversed or
backed out at the same time the school wants to disburse a different Pell fund.
The disbursement process backs out memos, authorizations, and disbursements for Pell
awards whose period award has been reduced to zero, regardless of any Pell disbursement
option settings on RPROPTS. Pell awards with a zero period offer amount are processed
before Pell awards with non-zero period offer amounts. This ensures that disbursements
back out correctly, prior to attempting disbursement on the new Pell award.
For the disbursement process to work correctly, schools that disburse aid awards by fund
must include all Pell funds in the same run of the disbursement process. This permits the
back out of memo, authorization, and payment amounts for period awards that have been
reduced to zero, so that new, non-zero period award amounts can disburse.
Use disbursement enrollment edits for memo option
For Pell Processing -- regardless of how the Use Disbursement Enrollment Edits for
Memo field is set -- the RPEDISB process treats the Use Disbursement Enrollment
Edits for Memo as (checked) Y for Pell. This prevents Pell from overawarding when
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-83
memoing, authorizing, and disbursing. This is done for one Pell fund code as well as
multiple Pell fund codes. When no registration records exist for a student for a particular
period, the disbursement process will create a memo for Pell using the period's Pell Award
Enrollment options which are set up on the RPROPTS form.
RPEDISB process reports
The Disbursement Reports use the Award Fund Code for all reports for all funds. This
allows each Pell fund code to be listed separately on the reports.
Disbursement Results (ROIDISB)
The ROIDISB form allows you to see disbursement processing errors by period. To
support Two Pell Grants in an Award Year processing, the Period field in the KEYBLCK
has been modified to allow the entry of Pell crossover periods as applicable. If a period
has been defined as a crossover period for the aid year in the key block, you are permitted
to enter it. Otherwise, you will receive an error message, as in the past, indicating that the
period exists but is not valid for the aid year.
Pell Edit/Error messages
With the addition of Two Pell Grants in an Award Year, various edit and error messages
have been added and modified within the Banner coding. The following is a list of edit/
error codes along with their resolution to assist institutions with correcting data issues.
Edit/Error Code(s)
Resolution
Pell fund to be used cannot be determined Setup error with Pell fund codes. Either no fund codes have
or error selecting Pell fund from RFRBASE a Federal Fund ID of “Pell” on RFRBASE, or multiple Pell
or no Pell fund codes defined on RFRBASE fund codes have been set on RPRBASE but a default Pell
fund code has not been entered on ROAINST/ROAUSIO
for the aid year.
Error selecting aid year specific fund info
The Pell fund code has not been set up on RFRMGMT for
the aid year.
Error selecting standard award schedule
not found
No RFRDEFA default award schedule has been set up for
the student's aid period and the aid year being processed.
Error periods not equal input, RFRASCH,
or RFRDEFA
The periods created on the RFRASCH Fund Award
Schedule or RFRDEFA Default Award Schedule do not
match the periods set up on RORTPRD for the aid period
and aid year.
2-84
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Edit/Error Code(s)
Resolution
Pell calculation; RFRASCH/RFRDEFA
grant pct missing
The Grant Percent field was not entered on the award
schedule created on RFRASCH or RFRDEFA. This percent
value must be entered for Pell awards to be calculated.
Disbursement period not in aid period
Attempting to disburse Pell for a period which is no longer
part of the student's aid period. The aid period for the
student was changed, but the Pell award was not
recalculated to remove periods which are not part of the new
aid period. Run the Pell award process to delete the period
which is no longer part of the aid period.
Error selecting fund disburse schedule or A disbursement schedule must be set up on RFRASCH
error selecting standard disburse schedule Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules for the aid
year, aid period, Pell fund code or on RFRDEFA Default
Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules for the aid year
and aid period.
RFRDSCH exceeds 20 scheduled
disbursements or RFRDEFD exceeds 20
scheduled disbursements
Although the RFRASCH and RFRDEFA forms allow
unlimited numbers of disbursements in the disbursement
schedules, COD will allow a maximum of 20. The number
of scheduled disbursements must be decreased to 20.
Error selecting next year award schedule
If calculating a Pell award including a crossover summer
period, valid award schedules must exist for the crossover
aid year. Add the missing award schedules on RFRASCH or
RFRDEFA and rerun the Pell process.
Error calculating next year less than half
time COA or Error selecting COA for less
than half time
If calculating a Pell award including a crossover summer
period and the enrollment for the summer period is less than
half time, data must be set up correctly on the RPROPTS
Packaging Options, RBRCOMP Budget Component Rules,
and RTVCOMP Budget Component Validation forms for
the crossover aid year.
Warning: cannot process > 15 periods in
aid period
Due to limitations in COBOL, internal processing tables
must be hard-coded with a specific number of entries.
Period processing is currently set to 15 periods in the
process. You must limit the number of periods in any aid
period to 15 or the Pell award may be processed incorrectly.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-85
Edit/Error Code(s)
Resolution
At least one term fails SAP validation on all For each period being processed, the Pell calculation checks
terms in aid period fail SAP validation
the most recent Satisfactory Academic Progress term record
for the student. This information can be found on the
Eligibility Status tab of the ROASTAT Applicant Status
form. If the status (RTVSAPR) on the SAP record is set to
Prevent Packaging, and the Which Aid is a value which
includes Pell awards, that term will fail SAP validation and
will not be awarded. If one or more of the terms in the
periods in the student's aid period fail this validation, the
message “At least one term fails SAP validation” will be
returned. If all of the terms in the student’s aid period fail
this validation, the message “All terms in aid period fail
SAP validation” will be returned.
At least one period fails NSLDS/Banner
validation on all periods in aid period fail
NSLDS/Banner validation
These messages include Default, Overpayment and
Aggregate Limit validation results. For Default and Refund
validation, the Pell calculation checks the NSLDS Match
Indicator found on the RNASLxx Student Loan Data form
and RNARSxx Need Analysis Result form. A value of 1
(Default), 2 (Overpayment), or 4 (Both Default and
Overpayment) can result in one of the above messages. For
Aggregate Limits validation, the Pell calculation checks the
Exceeds Subsidized Limits and Exceeds Combined Limits
values on the Aggregate and Perkins Loan tab of the
RNASLxx form. A value of E (Exceeds) can result in one of
the above messages.
Note: These errors can be overridden by the user.
• A value of D (Default tests) or A (All tests) entered in the
NSLDS Override field on the RNARSxx form (Federal
Match Indicators tab) will override a Default error and
allow the Pell to be awarded for all periods.
• A value of D (Default tests) or A (All tests) entered in the
NSLDS Override field of the Award Schedule window of
the RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT forms will override the
Default error for an individual period.
• A value of O (Overpayment tests) or A (All tests) entered
in the NSLDS Override field on the RNARSxx form
(Federal Match Indicators tab) will override an
Overpayment error.
2-86
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Edit/Error Code(s)
Resolution
• A value of O (Override tests) or A (All tests) entered in
the NSLDS Override field of the Award Schedule
window of the RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT forms will
override the Overpayment error for an individual period.
• A value of L (Limit tests) or A (All tests) entered in the
NSLDS Override field on the RNARSxx form (Federal
Match Indicators tab) will override an Aggregate Limit
error and allow the Pell to be awarded for all periods.
• A value of L (Limit tests) or A (All tests) entered in the
NSLDS Override field of the Award Schedule window of
the RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT forms will override the
Aggregate Limits error for an individual period.
To allow the user to access the award on the RPAAWRD or
RPAAPMT forms to override these errors for a period, the
Pell award will be created with a zero award in some or all
periods even when the above errors are returned.
Default aid period cannot be a Pell aid
period
The default aid period listed on the ROAINST form cannot
be the same aid period used as a Pell aid period. These aid
period codes must always remain different.
Term code, aid year on STVTERM must
match the key block aid year or have a
matching entry in period base data
(RORPRDS)
The period codes entered must have a matching period
created on RORPRDS, which consists of the base aid year
and crossover aid year.
Pell processes
This section provides you with a description of each process and report that is associated
with calculating Pell. It is important to remember that the Pell award is calculated both at
the time of awarding and at the time of disbursement. These two calculations are then
compared, and based on your option in the Pay Pell If Disbursement Amount Differs
From Award Amount field in the Pell Options window of the Packaging Options form
(RPROPTS), determines how much Pell to disburse to the student. The options for this
field are as follows.
Never — will not disburse any Pell Funds if the award amount and the calculated
disbursement amount differ.
Lesser Amount — will pay the lesser of the award amount or the calculated
disbursement amount.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-87
Always Disburse — will always pay the calculated disbursement amount.
Essentially the calculation is the same at the time of awarding as it is at the time of
disbursement, but the process uses enrollment as a separate option for awarding and
disbursement. The process may or may not be calculating with different enrollment levels
since the calculation is dependent on your Pell Award Enrollment Option and Pell
Disbursement Enrollment Option in the Pell Options window of the Packaging Options
form (RPROPTS).
2-88
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
For example, many standard full-time schools may choose to award with a default of Full
Time, yet will only disburse with Billing or Adjusted Hours. Review the options for your
institution and review the preceding Updating Award Amounts to agree with Actual
Disbursement Amounts section. This section discusses how to change your enrollment
options at specific times of the year to ensure that both awarding and disbursement
ultimately utilize the same enrollment option.
Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL)
The Pell Calculation process performs the following functions:
• Calculates a Pell award based on the Pell Grant Payment Schedule table
(RORPELL). Pell awards are calculated outside of the normal Packaging process,
due to their special requirements.
• This process uses the enrollment option for awarding on the RPROPTS form. The
Attending Hours will be calculated for the number of hours which the student is
attending if Use Attending hours has been indicated on the RFRMGMT form.
• Online, the Pell Awarding process is performed whenever the Pell EFC, the Pell
budget, the estimated enrollment level, or the aid period changes for an applicant
— unless the Prevent Pell Calc field is checked on the ROAINST or ROASTAT
form.
• In batch mode, all applicants with records on the Applicant Status table
(RORSTAT) will be processed.
• The Pell award may be auto-accepted on RFRMGMT, or may be accepted once a
SAR is received. Once a valid SAR Certified date is entered on ROAPELL, the
offered Pell grant will be accepted. A Pell award cannot be accepted manually.
• If the student has reached 100% of the scheduled Pell award for the aid year both
Banner and NSLDS (assuming the Use NSLDS for Pell option is checked on
RPROPTS) data are checked, the student’s enrollment status is checked to
determine if the student is at least ½ time and the Pell Award Percent is checked to
see if it supports more than 100%. If the student is not enrolled (or is not expected
to be enrolled) at least ½ time for the period or the Pell Award Percent is not
greater than 100%, the process does not award beyond the 100% scheduled award
for the aid year and places a 0 award in the applicable period.
• If the student is enrolled at least half-time and the Pell Award percent is greater
than 100%, the process awards the second scheduled Pell award based on the
enrollment status. Due to changes in federal regulations, beginning with the
2011-2012 aid year, a second Pell will no longer be awarded to any student
regardless of enrollment.
• Once the RPEPELL process has awarded the student beyond 100% of the
scheduled award, the Additional Eligibility Indicator
(RORSTAT_ADD_PELL_ELIG_IND) field is set to Y.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-89
• When a Pell origination record is created by RERORxx, or manually on
REAORxx, the Additional Eligibility Indicator (RORSTAT_ADD_PELL_ELIG_IND)
is used to set the value of the Additional Eligibility Indicator
(REBPAYV_ADDL_ELIG_IND). This will alert COD upon the extraction of the
record, that this student is eligible for a second scheduled award.
• A parameter has been added to GJAPDEF to allow the process to be executed for
two aid years simultaneously. This prevents the process from having to be run two
separate times for comparing the most beneficial award between two aid years.
• The Next Aid Year Code is an optional parameter 08. If entered, it must be a valid
and active aid year. The RPEPELL process first performs the Pell calculation for
Aid Year Code for a student, and immediately performs a Pell calculation for Next
Aid Year Code for the same student until all students have been processed. This
will facilitate the process of calculating the most advantageous Pell summer
crossover period awards. Always use the “lower” aid year in the Aid Year Code
parameter and the “higher” aid year in the Next Aid Year parameter. Example:
1011 should be used in the Aid Year Code Parameter and 1112 should be used in
the Next Aid Year Code parameter.
• The Pell specific aid period will be used for calculating Pell awards rather than the
standard aid period code, if a Pell specific aid period exists for the student.
Note
Parameters are automatically created by the forms that call this process
(RBAABUD, RNANAxx, RNAOVxx, RNARSxx, RNASUxx, RNAVRxx,
ROAIMMP, ROAPELL), or are created manually through the GJAPCTL

form.
The RPEPELL process has been modified to automatically process both aid years when
executed from online forms whenever a crossover period is part of the student’s aid period
or Pell aid period. This ensures that the most advantageous Pell amount is awarded.
Processing Modifications
When the RPEPELL process is being run from the forms, either automatically from the
budget or need analysis forms, due to changes in data, from the Applicant Immediate
Process Form ROAIMMP, or when using RPEPCKG with Calculate Pell Award
parameter = Y:
• If the student being calculated has an aid period which contains a summer
crossover period
AND
• The period also exists in that student’s Pell aid period for the crossover aid year,
RESULT
The student’s Pell award will be calculated in both aid years.
2-90
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Under these conditions, the calculation for the earlier aid year (the one with the earliest aid
year end year), will be calculated first, followed by the next aid year.
The earliest aid year end year will be processed first regardless of whether the institution
treats summer as a trailer or header.
Examples
Trailer School
Example
0910 Aid Period is Fall 2009, Spring 2010, Summer 2010
1011 Pell Aid Period is Summer 2010, Fall 2010, Spring 2011, Summer 2011
User goes to RPAAWRD for 1011 and chooses Pell Calculation from the options
menu.
The Pell calculation is automatically run for 0910 then for 1011 because the 0910 Aid
Period includes a period that crosses over with 1011.
Header School
Example
1011 Aid Period is Summer 2010, Fall 2010, Spring 2011
0910 Pell Aid Period is Summer 2009, Fall 2009, Spring 2010, Summer 2010
User goes to RPAAWRD for 1011 and chooses Pell Calculation from the options
menu.
The Pell calculation is automatically run for 0910 then for 1011 because the 1011 Aid
Period includes a period that crosses over with 0910.
Students whose aid period does not contain a summer crossover period will only be
calculated for the aid year matching the key block of the form which is performing the
Pell calculation. Additionally, if a need analysis record does not exist for the student in
the second aid year, the Pell calculation will not be performed.
Note
Batch processing for crossover aid years has not been modified. The
Parameter 08 - Next Aid Year Code will continue to be used to determine
whether or not to calculate the next year award for students. Parameter
validation has been added to RPEPELL for Parameter 08 - Next Aid Year
Code. This is done to ensure that Next Aid Year Code must be
ROBINST_AIDY_CODE that corresponds to +1 of the

ROBINST_AIDY_END_YEAR from Parameter 01 – Aid Year Code.
Refer to the Reports and Processes Chapter of this User Guide for further information
regarding the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-91
Load Calculation Routine (UCLRTN)
The following changes have been made in the UCLRTN process to support Two Pells in
an Award Year processing:
• If a Pell specific aid period exists for the student, it will be used for calculating
loads for Pell awards rather than the standard aid period code.
• To correctly calculate the second Pell award for a student within an aid year, the
Pell calculation needs to know in which period(s), if any, a student is enrolled in
any credit hours beyond the standard credit hours for the academic year defined for
his program. For example, his program requires 24 credit hours in a standard
academic year. The student takes 12 (FT) in Fall, 9 (3/4 time) in Spring, and 6 (1/2
time) the following summer. Since the student takes his 25th credit hour in summer
and is enrolled at least half-time, he qualifies to receive part of a second Pell award
for the aid year.
• Enrollment Hours (if available) are calculated using Earned Hours:
Use of earned hours when calculating Pell
For each period in the student’s aid period, the rokmisc_period.f_calc_
earned_hours function will be used to find the earned hours
(shrtgpa_earned_hours) for the student and period.
Earned hours are derived as follows:
• If the period has ended earned hours are used. If earned hours are not available the
process uses 0.
• If awarding and the period being calculated has not ended, hours are based on the
RPROPTS settings for the period
• Earned hours are not used to calculate any individual period amount, the settings
from RPROPTS are always used to determine the amount. Earned hours are only
used to determine if a student qualifies for a second scheduled award.
If the total hours (earned or RPROPTS setting hours) plus the calculated hours for the
current period exceed the standard academic hours for the year, the student will be
awarded from the second Pell award. Otherwise, period award will be limited to the
remainder of the first Pell award.
Disbursement calculation:
For each period in the student’s aid period, the rokmisc_period.f_calc_
earned_hours function will be used to find the earned hours
(shrtgpa_earned_hours) for the student and period.
• Hours will continue to be calculated based on disbursement options for the period
being disbursed.
2-92
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• For the period being disbursed, the process looks at prior terms in the Pell Aid
Period and gathers earned hours as follows:
• If the prior period has ended, it uses earned hours
• If the prior period has not ended, it uses hours based on RPROPTS setting
• If total hours (earned or RPROPTS setting hours) for preceding periods plus the
calculated hours for the current period exceed the standard academic hours for the
year, the student will be paid from the second Pell award. Otherwise, period
disbursement will be limited to the remainder of the first Pell award.
Example
1011
• RORACYR is set to 24 credit hours for an academic period.
• RPROPTS is set to award based on adjusted hours for each period and is set to
disburse based on adjusted hours.
• Student has adjusted hours of 12 and earned 12 credit hours in the Fall 2010 period.
• Student has adjusted hours of 12 for the Spring 2011 period but grades have not yet
been posted so student does not have earned hours for spring.
• Student has adjusted hours of 12 for the Summer 2011 period.
If the Pell calculation were run for this student with the above scenario, the student would
be awarded Pell for Fall and Spring based on Adjusted hours. For the 2nd scheduled Pell
award in the Summer period the student would be awarded a second scheduled award,
based on having 12 earned hours in the Fall + 12 adjusted hours in the Spring (because
earned hours not yet available) + 12 adjusted hours in the Summer; student is taking at
least one credit hour in the next academic period since 12+12+12 = 36). The actual
amount awarded for the 2nd scheduled award is based on 12 adjusted hours (setting on
RPROPTS for period is adjusted).
When the disbursement process is run, the Fall and Spring disbursements will be based on
the adjusted hours. The summer will be based on the earned hours in the Fall + the earned
hours in the Spring + the Adjusted hours in the Summer. So in the example, the Summer
will not disburse because the student has only earned 12 hours to date (spring not yet
available) + only has 12 adjusted hours for Summer (the total does not exceed 24 so
Summer cannot be disbursed because the student is not in at least 1 credit hour for the next
academic period).
Once the student’s spring grades are available, assuming the student earned 12 hours, the
summer would then be disbursed since the student would have 12 earned hours in the Fall
+ 12 earned hours in the spring + 12 adjusted hours in the Summer (student is taking a
credit amount greater than 0 credit hours for the next academic period).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-93
Pell Calculation Routine (UCPRTN)
The following UCPRTN processing supports two Pells in an Award Year:
• The crossover period logic and a calculation to determine the most beneficial aid
year for a crossover summer period.
• The determination of when a student qualifies for a second Pell award within an aid
year.
Note
The calculation of a second Pell award has been removed as of the
2011-2012 aid year.

The maximum possible Pell scheduled award from the RORPELL table is used for
students with the Post 9/11 Pell Override indicator (RORSTAT_POST_911_PELL_ELIG =
‘Y’), indicating a parent or guardian was a member of the US Military who died as a result
of their service in Iraq or Afghanistan after September 11, 2001.
• If this is true, the process uses MAX(RORPELL_AWARD_AMT) from RORPELL for
the aid year under consideration for the scheduled award. This method is repeated
for each period award being calculated, where RORPELL_LOAD is equal to the
student’s enrollment load for the period.
Crossover period logic and calculation to determine most
beneficial aid year
A period which starts before July 1 and ends on or after July 1 is defined as a crossover
summer period. The period award is calculated using the most advantageous aid year. For
each period in the aid period, the routine determines whether or not the period is a
crossover period by checking ROBPRDS_CROSSOVER_IND.
If the period is not a crossover period, processing does not change.
However, if the period is a crossover period, the award is calculated for the current aid
year and an estimated period award is calculated for the summer period using information
from the next aid year, and the summer crossover period is awarded in the most beneficial
aid year of the two. This processing occurs automatically up to a date defined by the
Department of Education each year. This date will be maintained in the Grant Options
window of RPROPTS with a field labeled Pell Crossover Cutoff Date
(RPBOPTS_CROSSOVER_CUTOFF_DATE).
The processing described for most beneficial aid year is performed up to, but not including
that date. If the Pell Crossover Cut Off Date has been reached, Pell awards may no longer
be calculated nor disbursed for that aid year. If running the Pell Calculation Process
(RPEPELL), the message “CURRENT DATE PAST AID YEAR CROSSOVER
CUTOFF; NO PELL CALC.'” will be generated. If running the Disbursement process
RPEDISB, disbursement reject 82 “Pell disbursement not allowed after crossover cutoff
date” will be generated.
2-94
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The estimated next year period award is calculated as follows:
• The routine checks the student’s aid period (RORSTAT_APRD_CODE_PELL which is
defaulted to RORSTAT_APRD_CODE) in the next aid year.
• If the student has a RORSTAT record for the next aid year, and has a non-null EFC
for the next aid year, and has an aid period which contains the same crossover
period being processed in the current aid year, a scheduled Pell award amount is
calculated for the next aid year.
• If the student has a Pell budget in the next aid year, that budget amount is used in
the calculation. Otherwise, the budget is assumed to be the same as the current year
budget.
• After calculating a scheduled award for the next aid year, an estimated period
award for the summer period is calculated using the scheduled award, the period
percent defined for the summer period in the next aid year and aid period, and the
enrollment load for the summer period.
• If the current year calculated summer period award is greater than or equal to the
next year calculated summer award, the summer crossover period is awarded in the
current aid year based on the current year scheduled award. If the next year
calculated summer award is greater than the current year calculated summer award,
the summer crossover period for the current aid year is set to zero, allowing
RPEPELL to award the period in the next aid year when processing is done for that
aid year.
• When RPEPELL calls UCPRTN for the Next Aid Year Parm, for any crossover
period in the aid year, the process will check for the same period in the prior aid
year. If a non-zero Pell award exists in a prior year for the same crossover period,
the assumption will be that the prior aid year had a higher scheduled award and
therefore a higher summer period award in the crossover period. Pell is not
awarded in the next aid year for the crossover period.
Determination of when a student qualifies for a second Pell
award within an aid year
Prior to the 8.7 release, the process determined whether to award more than a single Pell
award within an aid year based solely on the aid period Pell Full Year Percent
(RTVAPRD_PELL_FULL_YR_PCT) being greater than 100%. If the student had used the
first 100% of the scheduled award in earlier periods and had enrolled at least half-time in
the period being processed, the student would be awarded the second Pell award.
With the new regulations, all or part of the second Pell award may be awarded only when
the student is taking at least one credit hour beyond the minimum load required for a
standard academic year as defined by the school in the new Academic Year Rules form.
Currently, the UCLRTN load calculation routine calculates load values for each period in
the student’s aid period. It has been modified to also pass back credit hours for each period
in the aid period. For each period being processed, UCPRTN compares these cumulative
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-95
credit hours to the RORACYR_HOURS defined for the aid year, academic year, and student
level.
For the first period and all subsequent periods during which the cumulative credit or
earned hours (as applicable) for the aid year exceeds RORACYR_HOURS and the student is
enrolled at least half-time, the process starts awarding from the second Pell award after the
first Pell award has been fully awarded.
Transfer students and second Pell award
Prior to the 8.7 release, when calculating whether a transfer student qualified for a second
Pell award, the routine only looked at the percent of the scheduled Pell award which a
student received at prior institutions and factored that value into the student’s Banner aid
period percent, ensuring that the total of awards from prior institutions and Banner did not
exceed 200%.
This calculation has been changed to determine whether the student is attending at least
one credit hour beyond the standard academic year credit load. The routine now calculates
prior institution assumed credit hours and adds them to the total hours attended by the
student at the Banner school.
If the prior institution percent of scheduled award >= 100%, the prior institution’s
assumed credit hours is set equal to the same value as the standard credit hour load for the
student’s academic year and level at Banner school. The first credit hour attending in the
Banner school then makes the student eligible for the second Pell award for the aid year.
If the prior institution’s percent of scheduled award < 100%, the prior institution assumed
credit hours is calculated as if the student was in the same academic year and level as the
Banner institution. These credit hours are then added to the Banner credit hours to
determine whether the student is eligible for the second Pell award.
Regardless of what the prior institution percent of scheduled award is, the total prior year
percent plus the Banner percent of scheduled award is still limited to 200% of a scheduled
award.
Example of the calculation of transfer student credit hours
Student’s prior institution Pell percent = 66.667%. Student’s Banner academic year and
level define an academic year as 24 credit hours.
Prior institution’s assumed credit hours = 16 hours (.66667 x 24). Until the student is
enrolled in at least 9 credit hours at the Banner institution, they will not be eligible for a
second Pell award. As soon as the student is enrolled in at least 9 Banner credit hours, they
will qualify for the second Pell award provided they are enrolled at least half-time for the
period.
Processing of Pell Award and Period locks (RPRAWRD_LOCK_IND, RPRATRM_LOCK_IND)
has not changed. If a Pell award has an award lock or period lock set for the summer
2-96
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
crossover period, the above calculations will not occur and the award amount remains
locked.
Pell grant award calculation
The Pell grant award calculation section provides you with the Pell awarding calculations
and demonstrates the calculations with examples using Banner.
Pell grant calculations are based on the Pell Grant Schedule published by the Department
of Education for determining scheduled awards for the award period. These payment
amounts change for each award year but are always determined by the full-time Cost of
Attendance and Expected Family Contribution grid. The contents of this grid are stored in
the Banner RORPELL table and used in Pell Grant award and disbursement calculations.
Note
Alternate Pell Schedule functionality has been disabled - beginning with

the 2007-2008 and 2008-2009 aid years.
Pell award enrollment is determined by the enrollment option for awarding on the
RPROPTS form. The enrollment is also determined based on the enrollment hours the
student is currently attending if the Use Attending hours indicator has been selected on the
RFRMGMT form.
100% Pell grant award calculation
The Pell grant award is calculated within Banner in the following manner.
1. Maximum dollar award for aid period
(Pell Full Year Pct field on the RTVAPRD form) x (Full-Time, Full Year
Scheduled Amount)
2. Period amount
(Pell Award Percent field for the period on the RFRDEFA or RFRASCH form)
x (period enrollment full year amount x Pell Full Year Pct amount on the
RTVAPRD form)
3. Remaining Pell dollars
Maximum Dollar Award for Aid Period - Prior Period Award(s)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-97
4. Period award
Lesser of Period Amount and Remaining Pell Dollars
Note
Similar logic is applied when awarding beyond 100% of Pell. When the
process get to a period where there is still remaining eligibility for the
100% award, it awards the remaining amount and then an amount from

the second scheduled award not to exceed the Period Amount.
100% Pell percentage awarding example
Aid Period: Fall/Spring/Summer. Pell Full Year Percent field on RTVAPRD = 100%
Pell Award Percent field on RFRDEFA = 50% Fall; 50% Spring; 50% Summer
Student Packaged using Full Time Estimate on RPROPTS
EFC = 0
Full Time Pell = 4050
¾ Pell = $3038
½ Pell = 2025
Maximum $award for aid period:
100% x 4050 = 4050 (a)
Fall Period Award Calculation:
50% x 4050 = 2025 (b)
4050 (a) - 0 = 4050 (c)
lesser of 2025 (b) or 4050 (c) = (d)
d = period award 2025
Spring Period Award Calculation:
50% x 4050 = 2025 (b)
4050 (a) - 2025 = 2025 (c)
lesser of 2025 (b) or 2025 (c) = (d)
d = period award 2025
2-98
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Summer Period Award Calculation:
50% x 4050 = 2025 (b)
4050 (a) - 4050 = 0 (c)
lesser of 2025 (b) or 0 (c) = (d)
d = period award 0
**Total Initial Award for the aid period is $4050 ($2025 for Fall, $2025 for Spring, and $0
for Summer)**
Note
In the case of a second scheduled award, the process would be able to
award 2,025 for the summer period since student at least half time and
assuming student is taking at least one credit hour in the next academic

period.
Example #1 (continued)
Student above actually registers for ¾ Time Fall, Full-Time Spring, & wants to register for
Summer next week. The student is paid Pell based on the adjusted hours and receives
$1519 for Fall & $2025 for Spring
School Changes Awarding Option for Pell on RPROPTS to Adjusted Hours for Fall &
Spring. This will allow any unused Pell from the Fall and Spring periods to be calculated
and awarded for the Summer period. When RPEPELL is performed the Pell Award for the
student is adjusted accordingly.
Maximum $award for aid period:
100% x 4050 = 4050 (a)
Fall Period Award Calculation:
50% x 3038 = 1519 (b)
4050 (a) - 0 = 4050 (c)
lesser of 1519 (b) or 4050 (c) = (d)
d = adjusted period award 1519
Spring Period Award Calculation:
50% x 4050 = 2025 (b)
4050 (a) - 1519 = 2531 (c)
lesser of 2025 (b) or 2531 (c) = (d)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-99
d = adjusted period award 2025
Summer Period Award Calculation:
50% x 4050 = 2025 (b)
4050 (a) - 3544 = 506 (c)
lesser of 2025 (b) or 506 (c) = (d)
d = adjusted period award 506
**Total Adjusted Award for the aid period is now $4050 ($1519 for Fall, $2025 for
Spring, and $506 for Summer)**
Note
The above institution defines their academic year as 24 credit hours. If the
student earned 9 in the fall, 12 in the spring and was taking 6 (half-time) in
the Summer, the student would then be awarded a second scheduled
award for 1,013 for the Summer (506 remaining first scheduled award

and 507 second scheduled award).
Two Pell grants in an award year examples
The examples below refer specifically to the receipt of 200%, but the scenarios would also
hold true for a student who was eligible to receive only 150% (they would only be eligible
for up to ½ the second award since they are only attending three periods instead of four as
used in the examples).
Semester examples
Example 1
Aid period SUMMER/FALL/SPRING/SUMMER = 200%. To make the numbers easier,
let’s assume a Full-time award is $4000. At time of award, expected enrollment for all
periods is Full-time, so student is awarded $8000, $2000 for each period. At time of
disbursement, enrollment is as follows:
Note
The examples also assume that the student has earned the proper hours

to qualify for a second scheduled Pell award.
Summer Full Time award = $2000 - Disbursable
Fall < ½ time award = $500 - Disbursable
Spring Full Time award = $2000 (this period would partially use the first award, and
partially use the second award.) - Disbursable
Summer Full Time award = $2000 - Disbursable
2-100
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Total award paid = $6500. All periods are disbursable, the Fall period which is less
than ½ time is eligible for disbursement, since it is part of the first award.
Example 2
Aid period SUMMER/FALL/SPRING/SUMMER = 200%. FTFY award = $4000. Once
again, $8000 is awarded. At time of disbursement, enrollment is as follows:
Summer Full Time award = $2000 - Disbursable
Fall Full Time award = $2000 - Disbursable
Spring < ½ time = $500- Reject, since it’s part of the ‘second’ award and 'second' Pell
awards can only be disbursed if 1/2 time or greater.
Summer Full Time award = $2000 - Disbursable
Example 3
Aid period SUMMER/FALL/SPRING/SUMMER = 200%. FTFY award = $4000. At the
time of disbursement, enrollment is as follows:
Summer <1/2 time award = $500 - Disbursable
Fall Full Time award = $2,000 - Disbursable
Spring Full Time award = $2,000 ($1,500 first award. $500 second award) Disbursable
Summer ½ time = $1,000 - Disbursable
If above student was < ½ time in second summer then would get $0 (reject since part of
second award)
Example 4
Aid period SUMMER/FALL/SPRING/SUMMER = 200%. FTFY award = $4000. At the
time of disbursement, enrollment is as follows:
Summer < ½ time award = $500 - Disbursable
Fall < ½ time award = $500 - Disbursable
Spring < ½ time award = $500 - Disbursable
Summer < ½ time award = $500 - Disbursable
Would never reach second award in this example.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-101
Example 5
Aid period SUMMER/FALL/SPRING/SUMMER = 200%. FTFY award = $4000. At the
time of disbursement, enrollment is as follows:
Summer ½ time award = $1,000 - Disbursable
Fall Full Time award = $2,000 - Disbursable
Spring Full Time award = $2,000 ($1,000 from first year and $1,000 from second
year) - Disbursable
Summer ½ time award = $1,000 - Disbursable
Example 6 – Transfer student
Student transfers into school in Spring semester. RNASLxx record indicates that student
received 45% of $4,000 = $1,800 Pell award.
Spring Full Time award = $2,000 - Disbursable
Summer Full Time award = $2000 - $200 (remaining first award amount) and $1,800
second award amount - disbursable
Example 7 – Transfer student
Student transfers into school in Fall semester after receiving Pell during summer at prior
school which was part of current academic year at new school. RNASLxx record indicates
that student received 25% of $4,000 Pell award = $1,000
Fall Full Time award = $2,000 - Disbursable
Spring Full Time award = $2,000 ($1,000 remaining first award amount) and $1,000
second award amount - disbursable
Summer < ½ time = $0 - Reject since student into second award amount
Note
If the student was ½ time then would get $1,000, if ¾ time would get
$1,500, if FT would get $2,000.

Additional two Pell grants in an award year examples:
Awarding:
RPROPTS set to ‘A’djusted hours
Example 1
System Date is 12/10/2010. Full time is 12 hours, ¾ time is 9 hours, ½ time is 6 hours.
RORACYR for 1011 = 24 hours
2-102
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Term/
Period
End
Date
Adjusted
Hours
Earned Hours
Summer
8/25/2010
6
6
Fall
12/20/2010
12
Spring
5/25/2011
12
Award Result
1,388 based on ½ time
adjusted hours
6 (two courses ended 2,775 based on full
10/31/2010 and grades time adjusted hours
rolled). Other two
courses end on
12/20/2010 so grades
not yet rolled.
N/A
2,775 (1,387 1st
scheduled award,
1,388 2nd scheduled
award)
Total
Comments
6 earned hours since
Summer ended +
12 adjusted hours
since Fall not yet
ended + 12 adjusted
hours Spring since
Spring not yet ended.
6,938
Example 2
System Date is 01/10/2011. Full time is 12 hours, ¾ time is 9 hours, ½ time is 6 hours.
RORACYR for 1011 = 24 hours
Term/
Period
End
Date
Adjusted
Hours
Earned Hours
Award Result
Summer
8/25/2010
9
6
Fall
12/20/2010
12
9
Spring
5/25/2011
9
N/A
1,388 based on ½ time
adjusted hours
2,775 based on full
time adjusted hours
1,387 based on ¾ time
adjusted hours
Total
Comments
Student cannot get 2nd
scheduled award since
6 summer earned +
9 fall earned +
9 adjusted Spring = 24
(not taking at least one
in next academic
period)
5,550
Example 3
System Date is 12/10/2010. Full time is 12 hours, ¾ time is 9 hours, ½ time is 6 hours.
RORACYR for 1011 = 24 hours
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-103
Term/
Period
End
Date
Adjusted
Hours
Earned Hours
Award Result
Summer
8/25/2010
6
6
Fall
12/20/2010
12
0
Spring
5/25/2011
12
N/A
1,388 based on ½ time
adjusted hours
2,775 based on full
time adjusted hours
2,775 (1,387 1st
scheduled award,
1,388 2nd scheduled
award)
Total
Comments
6 earned hours since
Summer ended +
12 adjusted hours
because Fall not yet
ended + 12 adjusted
hours Spring because
Spring not yet ended.
6,938
Example 4
System Date is 01/10/2011. Full time is 12 hours, ¾ time is 9 hours, ½ time is 6 hours.
RORACYR for 1011 = 24 hours
Term/
Period
End
Date
Adjusted
Hours
Earned Hours
Award Result
Summer
8/25/2010
9
6
Fall
12/20/2010
12
0
Spring
5/25/2011
9
N/A
1,388 based on ½ time
adjusted hours
2,775 based on full
time adjusted hours
1,387 based on ¾ time
adjusted hours
Total
Comments
Student cannot get 2nd
scheduled award since
6 summer earned +
0 fall earned +
9 adjusted Spring = 24
(not taking at least one
in next academic
period)
5,550
Example 5
Taking the above example, if the student were to enroll in 19 hours for the Spring term,
they would be awarded 2,775 because 6 earned + 0 earned + 19 adjusted = 25.
2-104
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
100% Pell grant disbursement calculation
All normal Pell grant calculations are based on the Pell Grant Schedule published by the
Department of Education for determining full-time scheduled awards for the award
period. These payment amounts change for each award year but are always determined by
the full-time Cost of Attendance and Expected Family Contribution grid. The contents of
this grid are stored in the Banner RORPELL table and used in Pell Grant award and
disbursement calculations.
Note
Alternate Pell Schedule functionality has been disabled - beginning with

the 2007-2008 and 2008-2009 aid years.
You will notice that the Pell Disbursement Calculation is very similar to the Pell Awarding
Calculation. The Pell Grant disbursement is calculated within Banner in the following
manner.
1. Full Year Maximum Dollar Amount
(Pell Full Year Percent field on the RTVAPRD form) x (Full-Time Full Year
Scheduled Amount)
2. Period Amount
Pell Award Percent field on the RFRDEFA or RFRASCH form x Full Year
maximum dollar amount per enrollment level = A
3. B = Total paid amount for other periods in aid period (excluding period being
disbursed)
4. Calculated Amount
If A + B > Full Time Full Year award:
Calculated period amount = FTFY award - B
Otherwise
Calculated period award = A
100% Pell percentage disbursement example
Aid Period: Fall/Spring/Summer Pell Full Year Percent field on RTVAPRD = 100%
Pell Award Percent field on RFRDEFA = Fall 50%; Spring 50%; Summer 50%
The sum of the Pell Award Percent fields on the RFRDEFA or RFRASCH form = 100%
Disbursement Option on RPROPTS set to ‘A’djusted Hours
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-105
Enrollment: ¾ Fall, FT Spring, FT Summer EFC = 0
Scheduled Pell: Full Time= 4050
¾ Time = 3038
½ Time = 2025
Fall Period:
1. 100% X 4050 = 4050
2. 50% x 3038 = 1519 = A
3. 0 = B
4. 1519 + 0 is not > 4050
Fall Period Disbursement: $1519.00
Spring Period:
1. 100% x $4050 = 4050
2. 50% x 4050 =2025 = A
3. 1519 = B (prior disbursements)
4. 2525 + 1519 is not > 4050
Spring Period Disbursement: $2025.00
Summer Period:
1. 100% X 4050 = 4050
2. 50% x 4050 = 2025 = A
3. 3544 = B (prior disbursements)
4. 2025 + 3544 is > 4050
Therefore: Calculated period award = FTFY 4050 – (B) 3544 = 506
Summer Period Disbursement: $506
Additional two Pell grants in an award year examples:
Disbursing:
Example 1
Assume RPROPTS set to ‘A’djusted hours; 201120 set to ‘E’:
2-106
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Term/
Period
End
Date
Enrollment
Hours
Summer
Fall
8/31/2010
12/21/2010
9 Adjusted
12 Adjusted
Spring
5/31/2010
12 Expected
Earned Hours
Disbursement Result
6
6 (for a course that
ended 10/31/2010);
6 additional hours not
yet completed
0
2,082
2,775
Run Disbursement process on
12/15/2010 - 2,775 authorized
because 6 earned hours + 9
adjusted hours + 12 expected
hours = 30 hours.
Note: Uses 12 adjusted hours
for fall because period not
yet ended.
Total
7,632
Example 2
Same assumptions:
Term/
Period
End
Date
Enrollment
Hours
Summer
Fall
8/31/2010
12/21/2010
6 Adjusted
9 Adjusted
Spring
5/31/2010
12 Expected
Earned Hours
Disbursement Result
3
6 (for a course that
ended 10/31/2010);
6 additional hours not
yet completed
0
1,388
2,082
Run Disbursement process on
12/15/2010 – 2, 080 authorized
because 3 earned hours +
9 adjusted hours + 12 expected
hours = 24 hours (does not
qualify for second scheduled
award because not over 24
hours; only remaining amount
from first scheduled award.
Note: Uses 9 adjusted hours
for fall because period not
yet ended.
Total
May 2012
5,550
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-107
Example 3
If the disbursement process for the 201120 period in both examples was run after
12/31/2010, whatever earned hours were for 201120 at that time would be used for
acceleration calc instead of the adjusted hours. 201030 and 201110 amounts paid would
not changed unless either RPROPTS changed or their adjusted hours changed. 201120
would still pay based on Expected hours (or adjusted hours if RPROPTS were changed),
but acceleration would now use the Earned hours for 201110, so the actual 201120 paid
amount could be limited if the student no longer qualifies for 2nd Pell.
TEACH grant processing
Introduction
The Teacher Education Assistance for College and Higher Education (TEACH) Grant
program provides funds for graduate and undergraduate students who intend to teach fulltime in high-need subject areas for at least four years at schools that serve students from
low-income families. If the student fails to complete the four-year teaching obligation
within eight years of completing or ceasing their education, the grant will be converted to
an unsubsidized loan. The loan will need to be repaid by the student with interest.
TEACH awarding and disbursing
This section provides you with information about student eligibility requirements for the
TEACH Grant and how you should set up Banner to award and disburse TEACH Grants.
Criteria for awarding and disbursing a TEACH grant
To qualify for a TEACH grant, a student must meet the following criteria:
• Complete a FAFSA
• Meet the general eligibility requirements for federal student aid
• Be enrolled in a program of study designated as TEACH Grant eligible. Eligible
programs are those that prepare a student to teach in a high-need area. For example,
a bachelor’s program with a math major could qualify for a student who intends to
be a math teacher
• Sign a TEACH Grant Agreement to Serve and respond to requests by the U.S.
Department of Education confirming continuing intention to meet the teaching
obligation
• Complete TEACH grant entrance counseling prior to receiving each scheduled
award and complete exit counseling after completing or ceasing attendance.
2-108
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• For undergraduate programs, meet one of the following academic achievement
requirements.
• Score above the 75th percentile on a college admissions test; or
• Graduate from high school with a cumulative GPA of at least 3.25 (on a 4.0 scale)
to receive a grant as a freshman; or
• Have a cumulative GPA of at least 3.25 (on a 4.0 scale) through the most recent
payment period on your college coursework to receive a grant for each subsequent
period
• For graduate programs, meet one of the following academic standards.
• Score above the 75th percentile on a college admissions test; or
• Have an undergraduate cumulative GPA of at least 3.25 (on a 4.0 scale) to receive a
grant in the first period; or
• Have a cumulative GPA of at least 3.25 (on a 4.0 scale) through the most recent
period in the Master’s degree program for subsequent payments; or
• Be a current teacher or be a retiree from another occupation with expertise in a
high-need field, enrolled in a Master’s degree program; or
• Be a former teacher pursuing an alternative route to certification within a Master’s
degree program
The following will be checked to determine if the student is
eligible.
• Completed FAFSA
• U.S. Citizen or an eligible non-Citizen
The following is NOT required for TEACH.
• Does not need to be Pell eligible
• Does not need to be enrolled at a certain enrollment level – student can be enrolled
less-than-half-time and still receive TEACH.
• Verification is not required for TEACH
The following characteristics apply when calculating the TEACH award amount.
• Award amount replaces EFC
• Any amount above EFC must reduce need
• A maximum amount of $4,000 per scheduled award
• A student can receive up to 2 scheduled awards within one aid year. This results in
a maximum of $8,000 per aid year
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-109
• Awards must be split equally among the payment periods in the aid year
• The award amount must be prorated based on enrollment
• A maximum aggregate of $16,000 at the undergraduate level and of $8,000 at the
graduate level
Tip
Federal regulations allow an institution to award and disburse up to two
scheduled TEACH awards within an aid year. With the current maximum
award amount of $4,000, that means a student could receive up to $8,000
within an aid year. If your institution wants to award a second TEACH
Grant within the aid year, use the Federal Limits Award override on the

award forms to award the fund.
The following criteria are checked at the time of disbursement to verify the calculated
amount is still correct for the student and to verify the following additional eligibility
criteria.
• Enrolled in a TEACH eligible program of study
• Enrolled in a TEACH eligible degree program
• Has completed an Agreement to Serve
When a student receives a TEACH grant, for the grant to not be converted to an
unsubsidized loan after the student ceases attendance, they must complete the following
service agreement.
• Within eight years of completing their program, teach for at least four years as a
highly qualified teacher at a Title I school in one of the following specified subject
areas.
• Mathematics
• Science
• Foreign Language
• Bilingual Education
• Special Education
• Reading Specialist
• Other “High Need” fields
TEACH grant setup
For specific setup procedures, please refer to the COD Handbook.
2-110
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
EDE correction logging
Banner Financial Aid allows changes to need analysis data to be stored in a special log
table that is used for submitting ISIR corrections to the Central Processing System (CPS).
Storing this information creates an audit trail of the changes that have been made on the
student’s EDE record. To log EDE corrections, there are three separate controls that must
be set:
• The first level is the institutional level. EDE correction logging must be activated
by checking the appropriate option on the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAUSIO) form for the aid year.
• The ROAUSIO option controls the default value for the EDE Correction switch in
the key block section of the Need Analysis (RNANAxx) form. This switch must
also be set to Yes to log changes for Pell EDE.
If you do not wish to log the changes, this flag must be set to N each time upon
entering the RNANAxx form.
Note
For example, if you set the default value on ROAINST = Y, and you do not
wish to log changes for a particular student, set the flag = N in the key
block of RNANAxx. However, if the value on ROAINST = N, no EDE

changes will be logged.
• The third level is the individual field level. This is the EDE Correction indicator
on the Data Log Rules (RORDATA) form for the field that is being changed.
Warning
This is system delivered data and should not be changed by the user.

Under this method of logging EDE corrections, the form stores the changes in temporary
tables and you must run RLRLOGG to move the data from the temporary log tables to the
permanent log table (ROBALOG). Once this process is completed, the changes can be
viewed on the Applicant Data Log form (ROIALOG), the Data Log Inquiry form
(ROIILOG) or the Applicant Data Log Application form (ROAALOG).
The date/time stamp on the audit log record is the date and time that the information was
changed.
Warning
Setting on RORDATA are delivered each year, according to which fields
can have changes reported and those that cannot. It is recommended

that users do not alter any settings on the RORDATA form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-111
Processing EDE corrections
Once you have completed the logging process by running RLRLOGG, EDE corrections
pending submission to the Central Processing System (CPS) can be displayed on the ISIR
Correction/Request (REACORR) form. Unnecessary corrections can be deleted here and
missing or incorrect Pell IDs can be changed. The actual data that you send to the CPS
cannot be changed on this form. The ISIR Request window of the REACORR form can be
used to request Institution Changes and Housing Code changes. The REBCDxx process
provides options for what type of changes you want to submit.
The ROAALOG form can also be used to flag EDE corrections that have been previously
extracted that for some reason must be resubmitted. By setting the Resend checkbox on
this form, this EDE data will again be logged as a correction and extracted to be sent the
next time the REBCDxx process is run.
REBCDxx will create an output file; CORRxxIN.DAT will that will be submitted to CPS
for processing. The file will contain corrections, institutional changes, and housing
changes. Once the REBCDxx process has completed and the correction file created, you
must use a transfer utility that will not change the contents of the file to move the file to
your PC for submission to CPS.
Review the Reports and Process chapter for information on the parameter options that are
available for the REBCDxx process.
Methodology specific changes
Methodology-specific changes as handled on the Applicant Override window of the
Applicant Override (RNAOVxx) form are as follows. Regardless of your preferred
methodology (IM or FM), you can override the IM or FM formulas. Both columns are
always displayed and you can select any combination. If both methodologies are selected,
you will get the same results as if you had just made the change once on the Need Analysis
(RNANAxx) form, which by default affects all formulas.
Most fields in the Applicant Override block of the Applicant Override (RNAOVxx) form
provide individual student overrides to the INAS Institutional Methodology (IM). That is,
the value of the override field controls how INAS performs some of its IM calculations.
However, three of these overrides allow the user to change, at the individual student level,
how the Banner FM Need Analysis product performs the Federal Methodology or FM
calculation. These three include: Budget Duration, FM Dependency, and the ability to
calculate a parental contribution (PC) for an independent student. Regardless of whether
the override is set for the FM or IM, however, the need analysis process must be run for
the override to take effect and cause a change in the need analysis results.
2-112
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setting a student’s dependency codes
The Dependency override field will directly change the student’s dependency status as
stored in the Banner database. There are two database fields that identify a student's
dependency status:
• RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS field can contain a value from 1 to 8 where
1 = Independent, 2 = Dependent, 3 = (Not used), 4 = Independent (documentation
needed), 5 = Independent due to professional judgement, 6 = Dependent due to
prior year data, 7 = Dependent rejected, and 8 = Independent rejected.
• RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE field can contain a D for dependent or an I for independent.
For example, if you enter an I for the FM Student Dependency field on the Applicant
Override form, Banner will set RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS to 1 and
RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE to I for the FM need analysis. If you enter a D on the RNAOVxx
form for the FM Student Dependency override, Banner will set
RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS to 2 and RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE to D for the FM need
analysis.
As long as the Dependency override field on RNAOVxx is not null, the student’s
dependency status will be set to the dependency override value for the affected need
analysis regardless of how the student answered the dependency status questions. If the
FM Student Dependency override is null and the computed dependency loaded during the
EDE data load is not based on professional judgement, the FM Need Analysis will
determine the student’s FM dependency status based on the applicant’s responses to the
dependency questions on the FAFSA. By the same token, if there is no IM Student
Dependency override present and the computed dependency status loaded from a Profile
record is not a 5 or 6, indicating professional judgement, the INAS IM dependency status
will be based on the applicant’s responses to the dependency questions on the Profile
application.
This is performed at Data Load time, after need analysis, and when dependency is changed
on the override form. These are the only ways to set or change a dependency status.
Overriding the student's dependency
Most Financial Aid forms display a student's dependency status as either I for independent
or D for dependent. However, there are two database fields that contain a student's
dependency status. The value in RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS is a number from 1 to 8 or
null. Financial Aid always converts the number to the more common I or D. The value
stored in the field RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE is a D for dependent students and an I for
independent students. If you want to use the student's dependency status in a selection
statement to identify dependent students (which is done frequently), you could write a
statement such as:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-113
RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS is (2,6,7) OR
RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS is null
Or you could use the following statement:
RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE = D
The RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE field is set to I when
RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS equals a 1, 4, 5, or 8. The RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE is
set to D when
RCRAPP2_C_DEPEND_STATUS equals a 2, 6, 7, or null.
EFC proration
There are two ways to perform an adjustment to the EFC for students not attending a
standard nine-month academic year. One method is to change the student’s FM or IM
budget duration on the Applicant Override (RNAOVxx) form and perform a new need
analysis calculation. If an FM budget duration override is entered, the FM Need Analysis
will then calculate a new PC and SC using strict Federal Methodology rules for a student
attending more or less than the standard nine-month school year.
Another method is to have Banner perform a proration based on the percent of year for the
student's aid period. This option is activated/deactivated on the U.S. Specific Institution
Financial Aid Options (ROAUSIO) form. If this option is activated, Banner multiplies the
student’s PC and SC by the percent of year for the student’s aid period (displayed and
updated on the Applicant Budget [RBAABUD] form). For example, a student attending
only 50% of the year will have his PC and SC halved. Since this method of EFC proration
may not meet strict Federal Methodology rules, you should use your own interpretation of
Department of Education regulations when selecting a method for prorating EFC.
Warning
When selecting a method of EFC proration, you should use one method
or the other. For example, if you plan to adjust any student's budget
duration as an override, then your institutional option should be set to not
perform system EFC proration. You should never use both methods at the
same time. This would result in double proration which will always be

wrong.
Note
The use of EFC proration from the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAUSIO) form is no longer permitted for aid years beyond
1011, due to regulatory updates. The Use EFC Proration indicator
(ROBINST_TFC_PRO_IND) is no longer displayed starting with the

2010-2011 aid year.
When Banner performs an EFC proration, it takes the stored contributions in the
RCRAPP4 table, multiplies them by the percent of year for the student’s aid period, and
2-114
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
stores the new values in fields in the RCRAPP2 table. Using this approach, the RCRAPP4
values always represent the full 100% results and the RCRAPP2 values always represent
the prorated results. The contributions displayed on the Need Analysis form (RNARSxx)
are the prorated values from the RCRAPP2 table. The contributions displayed on the
Calculated Need Analysis Detail Inquiry (RNINAIQ) form are the full 100% values from
the RCRAPP4 table.
If you use system EFC proration, you should always lock the SC and PC whenever you
manually adjust either contribution with professional judgement, even if you don’t think
you will ever perform a new need analysis calculation. This is because changing the
student's aid period can also change the contributions. If the contributions are not locked
and the student's aid period changes, then Banner EFC proration will be applied to the old,
unadjusted contributions. If the contributions are locked, changing the student's aid period
will not prorate the contributions.
Values are placed in the RCRAPP4 table during Data Load and by need analysis. Even if
the option to perform EFC proration is checked, it cannot be done unless there are
RCRAPP4 values to prorate. To use system EFC proration with manually created records,
you must perform a need analysis calculation after the need analysis information is
entered.
Estimated vs official contributions
When the Need Analysis calculation encounters any of the federal reject conditions, the
corresponding contributions are labeled as Estimated rather than Official results. Federal
regulations prohibit the disbursement of Title IV funds to students until their need has
been computed based on official results. There is no such prohibition against packaging
with estimated results. Banner Financial Aid includes a user-defined option (RPROPTS)
to control whether to permit students to be packaged when their contributions are
estimated rather than official. There is no similar option for disbursement. The following
rule could be used to prevent the disbursement of a non-Title IV fund to students with
estimated contributions:
((RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE = I AND
RCRAPP2_C_1_CTRB_OFFL_EST = 1) OR
(RCRAPP2_MODEL_CDE = D AND
RCRAPP2_C_PAR_1_CTRB_OFFL_EST = 1 AND
RCRAPP2_C_1_CTRB_OFFL_EST = 1)) AND
RCRAPP1_CURR_REC_IND = Y
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-115
Recalculate Need Analysis Indicator
functionality updates
The Recalculate Need Analysis Indicator (Recalc) is set to Y when a current record has
been changed, or when the Date of Birth (DOB) has been changed. The Recalc field
displays in the Applicant Status Summary window of many forms throughout Banner. The
Need Analysis Calculation field on the Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP) form
displays a Current Status value of Waiting if the Recalc field is set to Y for the ID and aid
year. The Current Status indicator for the Need Analysis Calculation field is blank if the
Recalc indicator is set to N.
Because you can change a record and then move this record to a non-current record
without running need analysis, changing this same record back to a current record sets the
Recalc indicator to a Y because need analysis has not been run since changes were
committed to this record.
For this reason, Banner sets the Recalc indicator to Y every time a current record is
changed on the RNAOVxx form. A DOB change may impact the bottom line need
analysis results in some cases. Therefore, a change to this field also sets the Recalc
indicator to Y. This field is also set depending on the parameters used during Data Load.
FM Need Analysis solution
Beginning with the 2011-2012 aid year, the system will no longer support the INAS
integration to Banner for Federal Methodology (FM) - including Estimated Federal
Methodology (EFM). In its place, the FM Need Analysis calculation will be used for
Federal Methodology and Estimated Federal Methodology. The Institutional Methodology
(IM) calculation will continue to be provided by the College Board through INAS.
These changes are being implemented through either of two Need Analysis options:
• Off-Premise - This Software-as-a-Service (SaaS) component will be offered as a
managed service. For this option, there are no specific hardware or software
requirements, and you will no longer need to implement patches and upgrades
specifically for the FM Need Analysis calculation.
• On-Premise - This option requires local management and is similar to your current
implementation but requires additional setup (both hardware and software) for the
hosted INAS component. For this option, additional server-class hardware and
software is required.
2-116
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Benefits
This FM Need Analysis calculation and deployment model provides the following
benefits:
• Direct involvement with the Department of Education to deliver calculation logic
to customers more quickly.
• One regulatory posting (in February) can be eliminated annually.
• Updates and defect resolutions can be delivered more quickly.
• Clients can adopt the changes as they occur without having to make upgrades.
• The burden on customer IT staff is reduced because upgrades and defect patches
related to FM need analysis are no longer applied on site.
Architecture
The following diagram illustrates the components of the Off-Premise solution:
The components are used as follows:
• The EFC Calculation Web service exposes the processing logic used to calculate
the EFC.
• The XML configuration file identifies the award year to be used for calculating
the EFC.
• The EFC Processor loads the EFC Calculations component for the award year
being calculated.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-117
• The EFC Calculations component evaluates eligibility criteria, selects the
appropriate calculation formula, and calculates the federal EFC for a given student
record. Different EFC Calculations components are used for different award years.
If your institution chooses the On-Premise solution, installation and maintenance
replicates that of standard releases.
For institutions interested in making a change from the On-Premise solution to the
Off-Premise solution (or vice versa), please contact your Account Manager.
Security
The EFC Calculation Web service is protected via HTTP basic authentication. All
information is encrypted via Secure Socket Layer (SSL) between the client and the server.
Only data that is required by the calculation is transmitted through this process. Personally
identifiable information (PII) such as names, addresses, and Social Security numbers are
not transmitted. The only transmitted data that might be considered PII are the student and
parent birth dates, which are required in the calculation.
All data resides on the client database. No information is stored at the Off-Premise site.
Prerequisite
The Off-Premise solution requires outbound network connectivity (TCP 443) from the
Banner Job Submission server and iAS with OC4J 10.1.3.x to the Off-Premise, service
fm1.sungardhe.com and fm2.sungardhe.com, via the Internet. The new agent can be
configured to use a proxy server. This connectivity allows Banner Financial Aid to
communicate to the EFC Calculation Web service.
Setup
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
The Need Analysis Calculation Option (ROBINST_FM_IM_FLG) determines which
methodology is used to calculate the EFC. Based on institutional need, the choices are:
F (Federal Methodology), I (Institutional Methodology), or B (Both [Default]).
Project Based Parameter Setup (RORPARM)
This form has been included to allow you to configure institution specific data to perform
Federal Methodology Need Analysis Calculations. The RORPARM form was designed to
accept entry of group-based parameter data.
2-118
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Description
Group Name
Group name.
Parameter
The group parameter
Data
The data associated with the group parameter.
Description
Description of the parameter.
Active
Indicates the parameter is active.
Parameter configuration
BATCH_SIZE
The BATCH_SIZE parameter, working in conjunction with THREAD_SIZE parameter, is
used to optimize performance of the FM Calculation batch process, running from Process
Submission Controls (GJAPCTL) form. It is recommended that these initial settings not
be modified unless instructed to do so by the Banner Financial Aid ActionLine.
DEBUG
When running the FM Calculation process online, any errors that occur will be displayed
as a pop-up window on the form. By default, these error messages will be shown in full
text and unedited. This parameter can be set to N to minimize the number of error
messages.
ONLINE_REPORT
By default, the Need Analysis Report option is set to N. Set this option to Y if you want to
generate the Need Analysis Report when calculating need online.
SERVLET_URL
By default, the online FM Calculation process is configured to run using a servlet running
on the Oracle Application Server (OAS). This servlet must be configured and installed at
each institution. Once installed, the servlet’s URL must be entered and saved (in place of
the default string, “<URL IS UNIQUE TO EACH INSTITUTION>”). The value entered
should use the following format, “http://<hosting_computer>:<port_number>/
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-119
rnpfmxx/ FmCalxx”. A valid URL could be: http://
mal0500374.corp.sct.com:8888/rnpfmxx/FmCalxx
Note
To perform correctly, the value of the SERVLET_URL parameter must be
provided by your institution for all aspects of the Federal Methodology

Need Analysis Calculation.
Tip
The FmCalxx portion of the above URL is case sensitive.

THREAD_SIZE
Maximum concurrent threads used in the RNPFMxx process. Refer to parameter
BATCH_SIZE for details.
USE_JOBSUB
By default, the online FM Calculation is configured to run using a Servlet. As an option,
your institution can run the FM Calculation via the Banner job submission server. To run
the online FM Calculation through Banner job submission, set this parameter to Y.
WS_ENDPOINT
By default, the FM Calculation Web Service is supplied as a managed service. For
institutions that have opted to provide the Web Service locally (On-Premise), the
institution URL to the On-Premise Web Service must be updated here.
WS_ENDPOINT_ONLINE
By default, the FM Calculation Web Service is supplied as a managed service. This is the
web service URL for online FM calculations.
XML_DUMP
The information transmitted between the FM Calculation Client and the Web Service is
passed using XML. By default, the XML information is not persistent. Data only exists
within the context of the data transmitted between the Client and Web Service and cannot
be viewed. If your institution wishes to see the actual data that was transmitted, update this
parameter to Y. For an FM Calculation that was processed through job submission, the
XML dump can be found in the log file on the job submission server. For online
processing that uses the servlet, the XML dump will be available in the log file located on
the OAS.
Warning
There is a significant system performance trade-off in setting the
XML_DUMP parameter to Y when running through job submission. It is
highly recommended that this option be used only for a very small
population. Once processing is complete (on a job-by-job basis), the
parameter should be returned to the default value of N.
2-120
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing

May 2012
Job submission vs. servlet
The FM Need Analysis Solution provides three ways for the user to run FM Need
Calculations. The three ways include: Batch via job submission, Online via job
submission, and Online via the Servlet. The Servlet method is only available for online
calculations.
When deciding which method to use when calling the online need calculation, there are
several options to weigh regarding environments and resources. The main difference
between the two methods is processing time. If your institution chooses to use the Servlet
method for calling the need calculation, then processing timeframes replicate INAS
calculations timeframes. If the job submission method is used, processing time is typically
increased to 6 to 30 seconds, depending on the institutions environment.
Calculation flow
The diagram below helps to understand the processing flow from Banner Financial Aid
through the call to the EFC calculation. As shown below, the job submission and Servlet
methods serve the purpose of calling and returning the EFC calculation; they do not hold
the code for the calculation. The code itself is housed in either the Off-Premise or
On-Premise solution.
Processing flow
The following sections describe the processing flow for EFC calculations. You can
calculate EFC online through certain forms or with batch processes, just as you have in the
past.
Online processing
You can calculate EFC on the following forms:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-121
RNANAxx
Need Analysis
RNAOVxx
Applicant Override
RNAPRxx
Need Analysis Processing
RNASUxx
Supplemental Need Analysis
RNAVRxx
Need Analysis Document Verification
ROAIMMP
Applicant Immediate Process
FM Need Analysis solution
The following processing occurs when online EFC calculations from a form are performed
using the FM Need Analysis solution.
Note
Even if your institution uses the new FM Need Analysis solution for FM
calculations, you can also use the INAS algorithms for IM calculations if

the ROAINST option is set appropriately.
1. The user calls the need calculation from a Banner Financial Aid form.
2. The FM calculations are performed as follows:
2.1.
The form calls the FM Need Analysis (RNPFMxx) process.
2.2.
The RNPFMxx process calls the EFC Calculation Web service.
2.3.
The Web service calculates the federal EFC for the student.
2.4.
The Web service returns the results to Banner.
2.5.
Banner updates the student records (where applicable).
3. (Optional) If the Need Analysis Calculation Option on ROAINST indicates that your
institution uses both IM and FM calculations, the IM calculations are performed as
follows:
2-122
3.1.
After the RNPFMxx process finishes, it calls the Need Analysis Process
(RNEINxx).
3.2.
RNEINxx calculates the institutional EFC for the student.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3.3.
Banner updates the student records (where applicable).
Note
On the RORPARM form, if the ONLINE_REPORT parameter is set to Y,
then the RNRNAxx.lis report will generate after the conclusion of the
RNPFMxx process. This will occur when calling the need calculation

through either the job submission or the Servlet method.
If your institution uses the job submission method for calling the EFC calculation, then
RNPFMxx.log and .lis output files will appear in your job submission directory. The
.lis file provides the Report Control Information used when running the RNPFMxx
process. The .log file provides any errors associated with running the process.
If the Servlet method is used for calling the EFC calculation, then there is no RNPFMxx
output generated. To view a report of the EFC calculation results, you must set the
ONLINE_REPORT parameter on the RORPARM form to Y.
Batch processing
The following batch processes calculate EFC:
• Need Analysis Process (RNEINxx) uses INAS algorithms for IM calculations.
• FM Need Analysis (RNPFMxx) uses the FM Need Analysis solution for FM
calculations.
Processing flow depends on whether your institution uses FM, IM, or both FM and IM.
This is determined by the Need Analysis Calculation Option on ROAINST.
FM Need Analysis solution
The following processing occurs when batch EFC calculations are performed using the
FM Need Analysis solution.
Note
Even if your institution uses the new FM Need Analysis solution for FM
calculations, you can also use the INAS algorithms for IM calculations if

the ROAINST option is set appropriately.
1. The user executes the FM Need Analysis (RNPFMxx) process.
2. The RNPFMxx process calls the EFC Calculation Web service.
• If the value in Parameter 08 of the RNPFMxx process is N or I, the RNRNAxx
report will generate after the RNPFMxx process concludes. If the value is X, the
RNRNAxx report will not generate.
3. The Web service calculates the federal EFC for the students.
4. The Web service returns the results to Banner.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-123
5. Banner updates the student records (where applicable).
6. (Optional) If the Need Analysis Calculation Option on ROAINST indicates that your
institution uses both IM and FM calculations, the IM calculations are performed as
follows:
6.1.
The RNPFMxx process automatically calls the Need Analysis Process
(RNEINxx) after the RNPFMxx process is complete.
6.2.
The RNEINxx process calculates the institutional EFC for the same population
of students.
6.3.
Banner updates the student records (where applicable).
Processing
FM Need Analysis (RNPFMxx)
The RNPFMxx process uses the previously established web service to make the call to the
EFC service to send the student(s) through for need calculation. The FM Need Analysis
calculation is performed and the results are returned via the established web service.
Banner updates the student records accordingly.
Note
No Personally Identifiable information is included in the Off-Premise
transactions.

If the Need Analysis Calculation Option (ROBINST_FM_IM_FLG) field on the ROAINST
form is set to B, the RNPFMxx process will be executed before running the RNEINxx
process. This maintains consistency with the order in which the processes are run, when
doing online calculations from the Banner forms.
For specific parameter information, please visit the RNPFMxx process in the Reports and
Process chapter of this User Guide.
FM Need Analysis reporting
The existing Report Options parameter (08) has been changed and determines whether to
run the RNRNAxx process after RNPFMxx has completed, rather than producing the
report output in the RNPFMxx.lis file.
When parameter 08 (Report Options) is set to N or I, the Need Analysis Report
(RNRNAxx) will be run, automatically, after RNPFMxx is complete. Also, the value for
parameter 08 (Report Options) will be passed to RNRNAxx for parameter 07 (Report
Options) in that process.
2-124
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Note
If RNPFMxx parameter 08 (Report Options) is set to X (No Report),
RNRNAxx will not be run and no parameter values will be passed to the

RNRNAxx process.
Need Analysis Report (RNRNAxx)
This report has been created as a replacement for the current output provided in the
RNPFMxx.lis file and acts as a separate process that allows you to decide when you
would like to run the report (online or in batch). Additionally, if the process is run during
online calculations, the output will be provided in the jobsub directory.
The report will be automatically generated in batch or online after the RNPFMxx process
is complete. Therefore, this report’s output will contain the most “up-to-date” calculations
for FM.
For specific parameter information, please visit the RNRNAxx report in the Reports and
Process chapter of this User Guide.
Output Format and Printing
The output of this report has been formatted to print in portrait mode while being limited
to no more than two pages.
Two CSS Profile items are included on this report that are not currently found on the
report generated by the FM Need Analysis (RNPFMxx) process:
• CSS ID (RCRAPP4_MDE_ED_NO)
• Country COEFF (RCRAPP2_C_PAR_CNTRY_COEFF)
Labels and data items have been abbreviated (to provide space) and some items that were
originally included on the RNPFMxx output have been removed from RNRNAxx output.
The custodial parent information and the FISAP Total Income items have been removed
from this report.
Period based processing
Introduction
The foundation of the Banner system has always been the Term Code Validation
(STVTERM) form which forced restrictions on system capabilities. Banner Financial Aid
has replaced the concept of Term with Period of Attendance. In most cases, the value for
these fields will be same, but this shift allows more flexibility to define Summer as a
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-125
Header or Trailer for an individual student, and combine mini-terms or sessions to create a
single payment period, including calculating enrollment for the combined terms or
sessions.
Processing within the Financial Aid System uses Period rather than Term with the
exception of capturing term enrollment, Satisfactory Academic Progress, and Resources
which use Term.
Throughout the Banner Financial Aid system, you will see that Period is used rather than
Term for labels, auto-hints, warning and error messages, options, and process parameters.
Periods are processed in sequence number order which is assigned when the Period is
created. For schools who do not have a need to combine terms, Periods will still need to be
created as part of the New Year setup but can be as simple as copying the information
from STVTERM which the Period will correspond to. You have the ability to create
multiple Periods assigning the same term code to assist with identifying specific
enrollment patterns for different cohorts of students.
Note
Return of TIV calculation for processing a period consisting of multiple
terms was not included in the financial aid 8.9 release. The determination
of the length of the enrollment period in the Student system and the
calculation of institutional charges in the A/R system is still done by term.
Therefore, withdrawals, for a combined term, should be done manually.
The Title IV Recipients Withdrawn Process (RPRTIVR), will identify if a
withdrawal record exists for any term which is part of the period entered

as a parameter option.
For institutions not wishing to go forward with period processing, there is a section titled
Period Processing vs. Term Based Processing later in this chapter that will assist your
institution with the minimum period setup required.
Period creation and setup
When setting up the New Aid Year, an additional step is required to create periods for the
new aid year before you create aid periods. Additionally, you will also need to create new
periods if you choose to begin combining terms to create a period and follow the steps
outlined in the new year checklist. This procedure ensures that you have included your
new period in aid periods, award/disbursement schedules, packaging options, credit hour
rules, and loan periods. This means that instead of building an aid period from terms, first,
periods will be associated with the corresponding term(s), and then, aid periods will be
built with periods.
For example, build the following (in order):
1. Periods for the new year, associating terms from STVTERM to the Period.
2. Aid periods on RORTPRD, associating appropriate Periods rather than terms.
2-126
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3. Default award and disbursement schedules (RFRDEFA), associating Periods rather
than terms.
4. Fund specific award and disbursement schedules (RFRASCH), associating Periods
rather than terms.
5. Institutional options (RPROPTS) with Periods rather than terms.
6. Credit Hour rules (ROAINST) with Periods rather than terms.
Note
Cobol processes have a limitation on the number of records which can be
used. Currently, only a maximum of 25 period award records (RPRATRM)
can be handled for a student per aid year. Therefore, when building Aid
Periods and Award/Disbursement schedules, keep in mind that an Aid

Period should not consist of more than 25 Periods.
Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
The Period Base Data (RORPRDS) form is used to create and maintain the definition of a
Period. This form’s function is similar to that of the STVTERM form, in that it is used to
define a code, description (short and long), start and end dates, and the aid year used for
financial aid processing. The ability to define the crossover aid year is also provided (for
those periods which represent a crossover period). The code used to define the period
allows up to15 characters for a descriptive code plus a 30 character (long) period
description.
Period creation
To create a period, you are expected to enter a code in the key block that will be used to
identify the period. Then, you must navigate to the Base Data block to enter the necessary
data to define the period. The sequence number must be unique because the sequence
number will be used to ensure sequential period order. To assist you in determining the
sequence number to assign when creating a period, the Periods Inquiry (ROIPRDS) form
can be viewed by clicking the View Current Periods icon in the Base Data block.
The key block also contains a term code field with a List of Values to STVTERM. When a
value is entered in this field, the period will be created with the same attributes as the term
from STVTERM. For those instances where only one term will exist for the period, this
provides assistance in creating the periods as part of the New Year Setup.
Note
Sequence Numbers for Periods are not aid year specific. Periods are not
aid year specific. Because a period can now be used in more than one aid
year, the sequential order of periods will be used to determine the order

periods are processed.
Once the period’s Base Data has been created, the form’s Period Rules block is used to
define the term (or terms) that will be included in the period. To do so, you are expected to
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-127
select a term that will be used to populate the %TERM_CODE columns in the tables and the
disbursement process to pass to Accounts Receivable. This is done by checking the
Accounts Receivable checkbox, associated with the term’s row.
For example, a period is created which includes three terms. You will need to check the
Accounts Receivable indicator for one of the terms. The term code selected will be the
value passed in the disbursement process to Accounts Receivable as payment for all of the
terms included in the period. The term where the Accounts Receivable indicator is
checked will also be the value used to populate the table name_term_code values when
records are inserted or updated.
You are also expected to select which term will be used for retrieving data from the
Student system (such as the campus, level, and major) by checking the block’s Student
checkbox. The processing logic will look for the record in Banner Student which is equal
to or less than the term code selected for the period.
The Satisfactory Academic Progress checkbox is used to identify which term will be
used in disbursement processing to determine whether or not the student is making
satisfactory academic progress. The processing logic will look for the satisfactory
academic progress term which is equal to or less than the term code selected for the
period.
The initial value of each of these checkboxes is unchecked (No) when a term code is
entered on the form.
Note
At least one term must be selected for each of the required indicators. 
For those who wish to create periods using either a PERIOD that is equal to
STVTERM_CODE or a period with the same attributes:
1. Enter the code in the key block and select the term (from the Term Code LOV) that
will act as the source.
• This copies the term information into the definition of the Period.
2. Navigate to the form’s next block to copy data from STVTERM into the Base Data
and Period Rules blocks.
3. Define the sequence number for the period along with the Academic Year type.
Note
Currently, only the Academic Year of “STANDARD” is allowed.

4. Commit and save your changes.
When the Period Rules are created in this manner, the Accounts Receivable, Student, and
Satisfactory Academic Progress indicators will be populated as being checked (yes).
2-128
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Edits on RORPRDS require the term to fall within the period start and end dates. The logic
is in place to prevent entering incorrect term codes for a period and then attaching them to
aid periods or award/disbursement schedules and then getting assigned to students thus
causing excessive cleanup. Terms and parts-of-terms defined may not fit neatly into your
defined start and end dates of the periods so to accommodate this, start and end dates can
be updated once the initial record is created.
Edits on RORTPRD also prevent building an aid period where the Periods crossover to
ensure students are not getting “double” aid for the same period of time. In the SFA
Handbook defining an Academic Calendar and Terms, it states that a program cannot be
treated as term-based for FSA purposes if the term overlaps within a program. The edits
provided can actually assist in substantiating term based processing by not allowing the
Periods which you will be assigning to the student to overlap.
You can enter a new period and term code in the key block to default the term information
from STVTERM in the Base Data block. Once that information is populated, you can
update the data as needed. Additionally, you can also enter a new period without a term
code in the key block and manually enter all the information in the Base Data block. Either
way allows you to update start/end dates so they don’t overlap in an aid period.
Crossover periods
A period which has been designated as a crossover period on the Period Base Data
(RORPRDS) form can be assigned to an aid period for the aid year or crossover aid year
defined. This allows you to award non-Pell aid from either year. Funds will be awarded
and paid from the aid year associated with student’s award.
When you create a Period whether you will be attaching only one term code or multiple
term codes, you should assign the Aid Year which you normally would use for the
crossover Period. For example, if you normally process the crossover Period as being the
trailer to the Aid Year, assign that Aid Year to the Period and the future Aid Year as the
crossover Aid Year. If you normally process the crossover Period as the header for your
Aid Year, you would assign that as your Aid Year for the crossover Period and the prior
year as the crossover Aid Year.
In the diagram below, period Summer 1011 with an aid year of 1011 and a crossover aid
year of 1112 may be used as either a trailer or a header for an aid period.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-129
When creating aid periods, an edit is in place to verify that periods do not overlap. This
step in the process prevents creating an aid period with multiple periods for the same
student enrollment and overpayment of aid.
Additional edits are in place to prevent assigning a student an aid period which includes a
period that has been assigned to the student in a different aid year. For example, a student
assigned an aid period with the Summer 1011 period for the 1011 aid year would not be
allowed to have an aid period in the 1112 aid year which included the Summer 1011
period. Additionally, an edit to verify that the terms which are included in the period do
not exist as part of a period assigned to the student in another aid year. These edits prevent
the possibility of the student receiving aid from two aid years for the same period of time.
Processing for Pell to evaluate the most beneficial Pell for a crossover period will still
require using the Pell aid period.
Using periods for different cohorts of students
The flexibility of Periods also allows you to establish Periods with different start and end
dates or even some with multiple terms attached for different cohorts of students. The
Periods would then be assigned to aid periods representing the cohort of students allowing
flexibility of assigning different award and disbursement schedules with different dates.
2-130
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
For example, a medical program and dental program use the same term codes but have
different start and end dates.
STVTERM
Term Code:
Start Date:
End Date:
201160 (Summer)
201180 (Fall)
201210 (Spring)
06-JUN-2011
16-AUG-2011
11-JAN-2012
09-AUG-2011
17-DEC-2011
21-MAY-2012
Dental Program Summer/Fall/Spring:
Term Code:
Start Date:
End Date:
201160 (Summer)
201180 (Fall)
201210 (Spring)
06-JUN-2011
09-AUG-2011
11-JAN-2012
15-JUL-2011
10-DEC-2011
21-MAY-2012
Medical Program Summer/Fall/Spring
Term Code:
Start Date:
End Date:
201160 (Summer)
201180 (Fall)
201210 (Spring)
27-JUN-2011
29-AUG-2011
11-JAN-2012
22-AUG-2011
17-DEC-2011
21-MAY-2012
1. Create two Periods for summer, one for Dental Program, and one for Medical
Program:
On RORPRDS, either manually create the Period or copy information from
STVTERM for the 201160 term code.
In the key block, enter the code you want to assign the Period such as 201160D for
the Dental Program and enter the term code 201160. Next block to copy the
information from STVTERM, assign the sequence number and save the record.
Update the start and end dates to reflect the time of enrollment for Summer for the
Dental Program: start
06-JUN-2011 and end 15-JUL-2011 and save.
Create a Summer Period for the Medical Program. In the key block, enter the code
you want to assign the Period such as 201160M for the Medical Program and enter
the term code 201160. Next block to copy the information from STVTERM, assign
the sequence number and save the record. Update the start and end dates to reflect the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-131
time of enrollment for Summer for the Medical Program: start 27-JUN-2011 and end
22-AUG-2011 and save.
2. Create two Periods for Fall, one for Dental Program and one for Medical Program:
On RORPRDS, either manually create the Period or copy information from
STVTERM for the 201180 term code.
In the key block, enter the code you want to assign the Period such as 201180D for
the Dental Program and enter the term code 201180. Next block to copy the
information from STVTERM, assign the sequence number and save the record.
Update the start and end dates to reflect the time of enrollment for Fall for the Dental
Program: start 09-AUG-2011 and end 10-DEC-2011 and save.
Create a Fall Period for the Medical Program. In the key block, enter the code you
want to assign the Period such as 201180M for the Medical Program and enter the
term code 201180. Next block to copy the information from STVTERM, assign the
sequence number and save the record. Update the start and end dates to reflect the
time of enrollment for Fall for the Medical Program: start 29-AUG-2011 and end
17-DEC-2011 and save.
3. In this example, both programs have the same start and end dates for the Spring
Term. There is no need to create separate Periods for Spring. You still must create at
least one Period for Spring.
In the key block, enter the code you want to assign the Period such as 201210 and
enter the term code 201210. Next block to copy the information from STVTERM,
assign the sequence number and save the record.
4. On the Aid Period Validation (RTVAPRD) form, create aid periods of summer/fall/
spring for each of the programs. For our example, one for the Dental program, called
DENSFS (Dental summer/fall/spring), and another for the Medical program, called
MEDSFS (Medical summer/fall/spring). Assign the appropriate percentages.
5. Build the aid periods on the Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD) form associated the
appropriate Periods for the aid period.
• In the key block of RORTPRD, enter DENSFS and next block. Assign the Periods:
• 201160DEN (Summer for Dental program)
• 201180DEN (Fall for Dental program)
• 201210 (Spring)
• In the key block of RORTPRD, enter MEDSFS and next block. Assign the Periods:
• 201160MED (Summer for Medical program)
• 201180MED (Fall for Medical program)
• 201210 (Spring)
2-132
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
6. Build the award and disbursement schedules for each of the aid periods using the
Periods which were assigned. By creating the different Periods and assigning
different aid periods, you can establish different rules for such things as memo
expiration date and disbursement dates.
Fund Management (RFRMGMT)
Disbursement tab
The +/- Days for Attending Hours field allows you to define the number of days prior to
or after the enrollment start date to allow disbursement. When the number of days has
been entered for the fund, the enrollment will be calculated based on the date
disbursement is run +/- the number of days specified. If no value has been entered (for the
number of days), the enrollment will be calculated based on the date disbursement is run.
To allow disbursement to pay the student prior to the student beginning attendance for the
calculated enrollment load, you will enter a positive number. To withhold disbursement
until after the student begins attendance, you will enter a negative number.
Example
For the fund, the number of days entered is 5, to pay five days prior to the attendance start
date.
Attend Date
Number of Hours
10-AUG-2010
6
20-AUG-2010
12
The disbursement process will allow the student to be paid based on 6 hours, 5 days in
advance, 05-AUG-2010, and will allow the student to be paid based on 12 hours, 5 days in
advance, 15-AUG-2010, providing all other criteria is met.
Disbursement Locks Tab
The Term lock on this tab has been changed to Period.
Note
Prior to the Banner Financial Aid 8.9 release, the RFRMGMT form
allowed the term code to be updated. However, with this release and the
creation of the RB_FUND_DISB_LOCK API, updates to period will no

longer be allowed.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-133
Funds Management (ROAMGMT)
ROAMGMT has been modified to now access Fund Budget Inquiry (RFIBUDG) when
you double click on the Fund Code. The buttons previously accessed from a double click
on the fund code, Allocation, Monitor by Year, Monitor by Term, View Term
Summary, and View Term Detail, have been removed because accessing the RFIBUDG
form will provide the information.
Tracking Requirements Button
The Term Eligible indicator has been changed to Period Eligible.
Disbursement Lock Button
The Disbursement Lock window now uses a view to display and query the data based on
the sequence numbers assigned to the periods. Term has been replaced with Period.
Note
Prior to the Banner Financial Aid 8.9 release, the ROAMGMT form
allowed the term code to be updated. However, with this release and the
creation of the RB_FUND_DISB_LOCK API, update to period will no longer

be allowed.
Additional Disbursement Options window
All term references have been replaced with period. Also, a new field has been added to
the form’s Additional Disbursement Options window. This new field allows you to define
the number of days prior to or after the enrollment start date to allow disbursement. When
the number of days has been entered for the fund, the enrollment will be calculated based
on the date disbursement is run +/- the number of days specified. If no value has been
entered (for the number of days), the enrollment will be calculated based on the date
disbursement is run.
To allow disbursement to pay the student prior to the student beginning attendance for the
calculated enrollment load, you will enter a positive number. To withhold disbursement
until after the student begins attendance, you will enter a negative number.
Example
For the fund, the number of days entered is 5, to pay five days prior to the attendance start
date.
2-134
Attend Date
Number of Hours
10-AUG-2010
6
20-AUG-2010
12
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The disbursement process will allow the student to be paid based on 6 hours, 5 days in
advance, 05-AUG-2010, and will allow the student to be paid based on 12 hours, 5 days in
advance, 15-AUG-2010, providing all other criteria is met.
Field
Description
+/- Days for Attending
Hours
Number of days prior to (positive number) or after (negative
number) attending hours start date to disburse fund.
(RFRASPC_DISB_NO_DAYS).
Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP)
The ROAIMMP form has been changed to allow you to select a Period to be used in rules
for Tracking, Budgeting, and Packaging group process (RORGRPS). When a Period is
entered, it will be passed to RORGRPS. The Term field for Group Assignment can still be
used to continue processing any rules which you have written to use
tablename_term_code.
If you have rules for Tracking, Budgeting, and/or Packaging group assignment which use
term_code from a financial aid table, other than Satisfactory Academic Progress
(ROPSAPR), Enrollment (RORENRL, RORATND), or Resources (RPRARSC), you
should still enter the term code to be used in the rules for the Grouping process. Once you
have reviewed and updated any rules necessary to use table name_period, you should
begin entering the Period when running the Grouping process. You may always enter both
the term and the period without causing an issue with the Grouping process. A message
will be provided in the output file which is created to indicate that a term or period has
been entered as a parameter, but is not used by the rules.
Additionally, entering a term when Tracking, Budgeting, or Packaging Group Assignment
is no longer required.
Satisfactory Academic progress will still be referenced by term.
The disbursement process will now use period. Therefore, the Period must be entered
when Authorize or Disburse Available Aid has been selected. The Current Period from
ROAINST will default into the field when entered, but may be updated before the process
is submitted. The period entered must be the period assigned to the student, as part of the
award schedule. The term code, which has been designated with the Accounts Receivable
indicator checked, will be the term code passed to Accounts Receivable.
The Term field has been removed from the Letter Generation block of ROAIMMP. The
term code is not used in Letter Generation processing for pending letters in Financial Aid.
• R – Requirement Code/Status
• This type code will only create a requirement when one does not already
exist. You can no longer use this type code to update an existing
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-135
requirement. A message is provided in the output file if the requirement
already exists for the applicant and no update occurred.
• RA – Requirement/Access Ind
• This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info
Access Indicator for a tracking requirement. The requirement code to update
will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field.
• RF – Fund Specific Requirements
• This type code will only create a fund specific requirement when one does
not already exist. You can no longer use this type code to update an existing
requirement. A message is provided in the output file if the requirement
already exists for the applicant and no update occurred. When this
requirement is created, the Batch Posting process no longer checks that the
fund exists in the applicant’s package.
• RFA – Fund Req/Access Ind
• This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info
Access Indicator for a fund specific tracking requirement. The requirement
code will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field and the fund code
will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 2 field.
• RFS – Fund Req Status
• This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for
both satisfied and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use
Batch Posting to post a status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously
satisfied. If the requirement has the status code being posted, the status will
not be updated. This type code cannot be used to create requirements.
• RFT – Fund Period Specific Reqs
• Provides the ability to create a fund period specific requirement if it does not
previously exist. When this requirement is created, the Batch Posting process
no longer checks that the fund exists in the applicant’s package.
• RFTA – Fund Period Req/Access Ind
• This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info
Access Indicator for a fund and period specific tracking requirement. The
period will be entered in the Period field, the Requirement Code will be
entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field and the Fund Code will be entered
in the Miscellaneous Code 2 field.
• RFTS – Fund Period Req Status
• This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for
both satisfied and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use
Batch Posting to post a status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously
satisfied. If the requirement has the status code being posted, the status will
not be updated. This type code cannot be used to create requirements.
2-136
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• RS – Requirement Status
• This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for
both satisfied and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use
Batch Posting to post a status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously
satisfied. If the requirement has the status code being posted, the status will
not be updated. This type code cannot be used to create requirements.
• RT – Period Specific Requirements
• Provides the ability to create a period specific requirement if it does not
previously exist.
• RTA – Period Req/Access Ind
• This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info
Access Indicator for a period specific tracking requirement. The Period Code
will be entered in the Period field and the Requirement Code to update will
be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field.
• RTS – Period Req Status
• This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for
both satisfied and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use
Batch Posting to post a status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously
satisfied. If the requirement has the status code being posted, the status will
not be updated. This type code cannot be used to create requirements.
Period processing vs. term based processing
With the Banner Financial Aid 8.9 release, institutions are required to create periods
starting with the next aid year setup. For some institutions, this will greatly enhance their
processing. For others, they want to keep the same term based processing that has been in
use in years past. The “period” philosophy will allow your institution to keep term based
processing, but with just one more step in the setup process.
For institutions wishing to create periods and use that functionality, please refer to the
Period Creation and Setup section in the beginning of this chapter.
For institutions wishing to keep the same term based processing as done in years past, this
can be done with the new functionality. The setup steps for creating an aid period remains
the same, with the exception of completing the necessary setup in the RORPRDS form.
The basic theory behind creating periods carries over to terms. An institution can create a
period named Fall and it would only include the Fall term. The information in the Base
Data block of RORPRDS would mimic that of the term data housed in STVTERM.
Example
An institution has an academic calendar that consists of Fall, Spring, and Summer terms.
Prior to the Banner Financial Aid 8.9 release, each of these terms existed in STVTERM
and their corresponding term codes were built into the aid period setup. With the Banner
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-137
Financial Aid 8.9 release, these terms still exist in STVTERM, but they also need to be
built into periods in the Financial Aid module. To do this, the institution would:
1. Enter a name in the Period field (e.g. Fall 2011 or your STVTERM term code)
2. In the Term Code field, click on the LOV button and choose the corresponding term
from STVTERM.
3. Once chosen, perform a next block to get into the Base Data block of the RORPRDS
form. You will notice that the corresponding information from STVTERM loads into
the Base Data and Period Rules blocks on the form.
4. If the period is to match the term code, then no modifications to the data need to
occur, except when creating a Sequence Number and/or creating a Crossover Period.
Note
A Sequence Number is required to distinguish the order of periods when

processing occurs.
5. Once all of the data is entered, save the updates. Your period, which matches the term
data, is now created.
These steps need to be completed for each period that needs to be created to mimic the
terms from STVTERM for the aid year.
For institutions that have a term which can crossover for Pell purposes, you can create a
period that mimics term data as described above. When doing so, you must check the
period as a Crossover and list the Crossover Aid Year in the Base Data block on
RORPRDS.
If your institution chooses to keep its periods with the same naming convention as its term
codes, remember that users will see those term codes displayed in Period fields throughout
the Financial Aid module. Processes have also been changed to use periods instead of term
codes, so it is imperative that users understand that a period has been created using the
same term code naming convention as shown in STVTERM.
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) - period
processing
As the Period concept has changed the architecture of the Financial Aid module, here are
some Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ’s) to assist institutions in processing and setup.
Question: Why was Period processing created?
Answer: The use of periods (enrollment period or period of attendance) lays the
foundation for processing non-standard terms, clock hour and non term programs. The
change also allows for multiple terms to be housed in a single enrollment period or a term
2-138
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
to an enrollment period. Furthermore, this is the framework for the support of BBAY
loans.
Question: Why would an institution need this new functionality if terms already sufficed?
Answer: Federal regulations allow institutions to combine smaller terms which do not
meet the definition of a standard term into a single enrollment/payment period. To support
those schools which want to combine smaller terms such as summer mini sessions or
combine a winter intersession to a fall or spring term, the concept of a period was
established. The same philosophy exists for the permission of a summer crossover.
As stated above, schools have the option of keeping the term code structure, although
period creation is still necessary.
Question: What is the difference between the new “period” concept and an aid period?
Answer: A period will need to be built first in RORPRDS, associating term(s) as needed.
As previously noted, the period name can be the same as the term code.
Once this is complete, aid periods will be built using periods from RORPRDS instead of
terms from STVTERM.
Question: If my academic calendar consists of Fall, Spring, and Summer terms, how
would I correctly build my periods so they do not disburse under one term code?
Answer: A period is a single enrollment/payment period. Therefore, you would create
three individual periods, Fall, Spring, and Summer. Once those periods are created, you
would create an aid period that would consist of those three individual periods. By doing
so, each term will continue to disburse under the term code associated with that period.
Default award and disbursement schedules will still need be built in RFRDEFA.
Question: How are students put into these Periods? Is this a systematic process or a
manual process?
Answer: This is not a manual process. The assignment of periods occurs automatically
when a student is assigned an aid period, which consists of these periods.
Question: If my period consists of multiple terms, will the funds memo or authorize for
the total amount of the fund or the portion dictated by the award and disbursement
schedule?
Answer: The fund will memo or authorize according to the award and disbursement
schedule setup for that period on RFRDEFA and RFRASCH.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-139
Requirements tracking procedures
Requirements tracking implementation
1. Define your tracking requirement codes on the Requirements Tracking Validation
(RTVTREQ) form.
Think about the types of codes (that is, documents/requirements) that you would use
in your office. Examples might include: institutional applications, tax returns,
verification statements, loan applications, and so on.
You may also define tracking requirements to be Period specific which enables you to
create a requirement code that can prohibit a memo and/or disbursement for a specific
period. The period requirement may also be fund specific.
Requirement tracking by period is optional functionality. Institutions can continue
tracking using pre-period philosophies.
The Period Eligible and Match Federal Fund ID fields allow for period based tracking.
The Period Eligible field indicates if the requirement can have a period code
associated with it. If you check this field, you cannot check the Satisfy All, Required
Once, Perkins MPN, and Packaging fields for this record.
Note
If checked, you cannot use the requirement codes for the following fields:
RCRINFC_TREQ_CODE, ROBINST_TREQ_CODE_ENTER_INTV,
ROBINST_TREQ_CODE_EXIT_INTV, ROBINST_TREQ_CODE_APPL,
ROBINST_TREQ_CODE_SAR, RORWEBA_TREQ_CODE,
RPBLOPT_TREQ_CODE, RRRGREQ_TREQ_CODE, RTVINFC_TREQ_CODE,

RTVINFC_TREQ_CODE_SUPP
The Match Federal Fund ID field, if checked, will match the federal fund IDs of the
fund codes rather than the fund codes themselves being equal. If the field is
unchecked, the fund codes must be equal.
Example
If the Match Federal Fund ID is checked for an entrance interview for a Stafford
loan, the entrance interviews for any fund with a federal fund ID of STFD will be
satisfied even though the fund codes are different.
2. Define your tracking requirement status codes on the Requirements Tracking Status
Validation (RTVTRST) form.
The Info Access indicator field has allows you to determine if a requirement will
display in Self-Service based on the status of the requirement. Also, a Long
Description field has been added to allow up to 50 characters for a requirement status
2-140
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
description display in Self-Service. If you enter a value in the Long Description field,
it will display in Self-Service, otherwise the Description field displays.
Think about different codes you would use to establish or satisfy a requirement, or to
track a document through a procedure. Examples might include: received, waived,
established, satisfied, cancelled, received incomplete.
3. Define your tracking groups on the Requirements Tracking Group Validation
(RTVTGRP) form.
Think of all possible groups or combinations of students who may require a different
set of documents. Examples might include variations of graduate vs. undergraduate
documents, selected for verification documents, independent vs. dependent
verification groups, and so on.
4. Develop tracking group requirements for each group on the Requirements Tracking
Group/Requirements Rules (RRRGREQ) form.
Indicate which documents are required for each specific tracking group. You can
change your defaults for a specific code from the defaults you indicated on the
RTVTREQ for the code. These defaults will only be used if Banner brings in the
requirements for the specific student. If the requirement is entered manually and the
manually entered code is not defined in the student's particular tracking group, the
default from the RTVTREQ table will appear.
5. Develop tracking group rules associated with each group on the Financial Aid
Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
Assign criteria for placing applicants into tracking groups. Use the standard Banner
data element dictionary table. Selection criteria may come from Banner Student,
Financial Aid, or any other installed Banner system.
6. Develop specific messages for each tracking code, if desired, on the Message Rules
(RORMESG) form.
Applicant Requirements Inquiry (RRIAREQ)
Use the Applicant Requirements Inquiry Form to view both coded and non-coded
requirements for an applicant without stipulating an aid year. You can sort the data by
Requirement Code, Aid Year, Period Code, or Fund Code. You can also view
requirements which exist in the Applicant Saved Requirements Table (RORSREQ)
from the Applicant Purge Process or the Archive/Purge Process.
Active Tab
The Active Tab lists all active tracking requirements established for the student. The
information is sorted by the sort option specified in the key block.
Saved Tab
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-141
The Saved Tab lists any saved requirements. Saved requirements are those that exist
in the RORSREQ table as a result of the Applicant Purge or Archive Purge process.
This allows you to view any requirements which were kept (once only, unexpired
Perkins MPNs) when the RORSTAT record no longer exists. The key block sort
option does not apply to this tab.
Budgeting procedures
Budget implementation
1. Access the Aid Year Inquiry (ROIAIDY) form to see all the valid aid years defined
on the ROAINST form.
2. Define valid aid periods on the Aid Period Validation (RTVAPRD) form. Decide
what your 100% aid period will be: for example, a nine-month period, a
twelve-month period, or another. The Aid Period defined as 100% for the Full Year
budget will represent the standard academic year; the Pell process will use the budget
defined for the Pell type and the Full Year Budget defined as 100% (Aid Year
Budgeting). Define the percentage of EFC that will apply to the 100% full year. Add
other aid periods with their appropriate percent of full-year and percentages of EFCs.
Note
The use of EFC proration from the U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAUSIO) form is no longer permitted for aid years beyond
1011, due to regulatory updates and therefore the applicant's EFC is not
adjusted based on the EFC percent entered on RTVAPRD. The Use EFC
Proration indicator (ROBINST_TFC_PRO_IND) is no longer displayed

starting with the 2010-2011 aid year.
Note
The aid period code which represents the standard nine-month school
year should always be the one identified as the 100% of year code. Any

other aid period should use this one as its reference point.
3. Define valid periods within aid periods on the Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD) form.
For each aid period you defined in Step 1, you must now define the valid periods
within each aid period. Refer to the Period based processing section in this User
Guide for information on establishing periods for financial aid. You may view existing
periods from the Period Inquiry (ROIPRDS) form.
Note
The Period field of the Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD) form will access a
listing of valid periods for the aid year in the key block, through the List

function.
2-142
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Aid year budgeting
Overview
Aid year budgeting allows you to establish and maintain an applicant’s budget based on
the aid period assigned. You must establish an aid period representing 100% of an
academic year that will be used for Pell processing as well as available to automatically
calculate the percent of full year for aid periods that are either less than or greater than the
full year. Budget components and amounts are assigned for the aid period.
1. Define all valid budget components on the Budget Component Validation
(RTVCOMP) form.
Review all of the possible budget components which you use in budget development.
The default indicator allows you to specify whether the component should be
automatically included in all budget groups when you define components within
groups on RBRCOMP.
If the budget component should be used to determine eligibility for the Alternate Pell
Schedule, check that box (that is, determine low tuition and fees).
Note
Alternate Pell Schedule functionality has been disabled - beginning with

the 2007-2008 and 2008-2009 aid years.
2. Define all valid budget types on the Budget Group Validation (RTVBGRP) form.
Review all of the valid budget types and indicate whether they are Campus,
Institutional, Pell, State, or some other budget. For example, for each budget type,
which Expected Family Contribution should be used, Federal or Institutional?
3. Define all valid budget groups on the Budget Group Validation (RTVBGRP) form.
Think about all the combinations of budget groups you use. Assign a grouping priority
to each budget group.
Note
The lower the number, the higher the priority. You want to assign the
priorities so that the most populated budget group has the highest priority.

Doing so helps in the efficiency of the grouping process.
4. Define the valid budget types within groups on the Budget Group/Type Rules
(RBRGTYP) form.
For each budget type, specify which budget types would be valid (for example, for a
graduate budget, Pell would not be a valid type). The default indicator defines which
of the valid types should be created for students in this group, in addition to the Pell
budget (if Pell is a valid budget type for the group).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-143
5. Define budget components and the amounts associated with them for each budget
group on the Budget Component Rules (RBRCOMP) form.
In this step you first need to define your 100% budgets for each combination of group,
type, and period. Then, if desired, use the Default Prorated Amounts icon to default
the components with amounts based on the aid period’s percent of full-year amounts.
You may use the Add Default Components icon to add components defined as
default on RTVCOMP with a $0 dollar amount.
Note
You can define the components here or the components can be defaulted
with the prorated amounts into the applicant's budget record based on the

aid period.
6. Use the Budget Inquiry form to view the combinations of budgets you have defined.
7. Define the group selection rules for each budget group on the Financial Aid Selection
Rules (RORRULE) form.
8. Using elements from Banner, create selection rules based on the group definition. As
an example, for an undergraduate, in-state, on-campus student, your selection criteria
would look for these characteristics to group the student.
9. Use the Group Inquiry (ROIGRPI) form to view the budget groups which have group
selection rules associated with them and the number of students which have been
assigned to each group.
10. Assign explanatory messages to respective budget group message codes that you
want to display on communications to the applicant on the Message Rules
(RORMESG) form.
Period based and algorithmic budgeting
Overview
A combination of Banner Financial Aid program objects (forms, processes and tables) are
combined to offer period based and algorithmic budgeting. In other words, the ability to
assign a budget group by period.
The budget components/amounts may be different for each group, therefore different for
each period in the student’s aid period for non-Pell budget types. Pell budgets will still be
by aid year reflecting the full-time/full-year budget used for awarding. This allows:
• Budget components and associated amounts to be determined by period.
• The ability to have a component in one period but not in another
2-144
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Budget component amounts can be either defaulted (defined) or calculated. This offers the
ability to:
• Calculate the amount of a budget component using algorithmic rules.
• Assign default values or default algorithmic rule for a component.
The ability to perform budget simulation has also been incorporated into this strategy.
Simulations may be done as a preliminary review (without actually assigning a budget
group to the student) or as a mechanism to compare if changes have occurred that would
otherwise place the student in a different budget group or adjust any of the component
amounts.
Additionally, the ability to recalculate budget components is also available. This allows
you to reflect changes that may impact the student’s budget, such as enrollment changes,
without running the budget grouping process to re-assign the budget group.
As an optional Financial Aid module, this functionality is used to determine the
appropriate budget (aid year vs. period based budgeting). This functionality allows you to
create and define validation, rules, and assign budgets without impacting the processing of
financial aid for your students if you are currently using aid year budgeting.
This optional to implement functionality is activated through the use of an indicator
(Period Budgeting Enabled) found on the Options tab of the Global Institution Financial
Aid Options (ROAINST) form. Once Period Budgeting has been enabled for the aid year,
all processing and forms will use the period budget for the applicants.
Set-up and configuration
Period Budgeting Setup Diagram
Note
This diagram includes a combination of form and table names.
May 2012

Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-145
Applicant Period Budgeting Diagram
Validation forms
Use the following validation forms to define period based and algorithmic budgeting data.
Period Budget Type Validation (RTVPBTP)
Determine and create the appropriate budget types. Period budgeting allows a student to
have more than one non-Pell budget type, such as both an IM and FM budget type. You
will need to establish a Pell budget type for processing Federal Pell grants.
Period Budget Group Validation (RTVPBGP)
Create the appropriate budget groups to categorize applicants with similar budgeting
considerations into the same group.
Note
For those who are making the transition from aid year budgeting to period
budgeting, the same budget group codes may be used in both. Aid year

budgeting and period budgeting are separate functionality.
Period Budget Component Validation (RTVPBCP)
Create the appropriate budget components to be used for establishing an applicant’s
budget.
Period budgeting will use budget categories which allow you to combine multiple budget
components into a single category to present to the applicant in Banner Self-Service.
Therefore, it is necessary that all components are associated with a budget category. If you
will not be combining the component with another, you may use the Create as Category
2-146
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
option prior to saving the record. The Create as Category option, when selected, creates
the budget component code and description, as a Budget Component Category.
Note
For those budget components that you do not wish to combine, use
create as category to simplify creating budget component categories.

Budget Component Category Validation (RTVBCAT)
Create the appropriate budget component categories. Multiple period budget components
may be combined into a single category such as a component of “Tuition” and a
component of “Fees” may be combined into a single category of “Tuition and Fees”. This
allows you to calculate the components separately but display the total of the components
for the category.
Note
These component categories will be used for display in Banner Financial

Aid Self-Service and can be used for letters, web text, etc.
Algorithmic Budgeting Rule Validation (RTVABRC)
Create Algorithmic Budgeting Rule codes if you will be using algorithmic rules to
calculate an amount for a budget component rather than a defined amount.
The algorithmic rule will be assigned to the budget component for the budget group/type.
Rules forms
Use the following rule forms to define period based and algorithmic budgeting data for an
aid year.
Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR)
Establish period budget groups, budget types, budget categories, and budget components
that will be valid for the aid year. Period Budget Aid Year rules can be rolled as part of the
Financial Aid New Year Roll Process (ROPROLL).
Budget Groups tab
Define budget groups which will be used for the aid year.
1. Select an active Group Code that has been defined on the Period Budget Group
Validation (RTVPBGP) form.
2. The Long Description will use the value for the Period Budget Group which has
been defined on the Period Budget Group Validation (RTVPBGP) form but may be
updated to reflect a more user friendly description to present to the student in SelfService. A value of 60 characters may be used to describe the budget group.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-147
• The budget group’s Long Description will be displayed in Self-Service.
3. Assign the Priority order for the budget groups to be used for group assignment.
Note
The lower the number assigned, the higher the priority. You want to
assign the priorities so that the most populated budget group has the
highest priority. Doing so helps in the efficiency of the grouping process. 
4. The Comment field allows you to enter up to 2000 text characters to help describe
the budget group (for internal use only).
Budget Types tab
Define budget types which will be used for the aid year.
1. Select an active Type Code that has been defined on the Period Budget Type
Validation (RTVPBTP) form.
2. Assign the appropriate EFC methodology to be used for the selected budget type. If
the budget type is being defined for Pell, the EFC indicator must have a value of
(N)one.
3. Specify budget type to be used for Pell by checking the Pell indicator checkbox.
4. The Long Description will use the value for the Period Budget Group which has
been defined on the Period Budget Type Validation (RTVPBTP) form but may be
updated to a more user friendly description with a maximum value of 60 characters
that may be used for external processing such as web text, letters, or reports.
5. The Comment field allows you to enter up to 2000 text characters to help describe
the budget type (for internal use only).
Budget Categories tab
Define budget categories which will be used for the aid year. Budget categories provide
the ability to combine period budget components into a category for displaying the
category and combined amount in Banner Self-Service. A budget category must be
defined for each budget component that will be used for the aid year. This provides the
ability to calculate individual components for a student but sum them together into a single
category.
1. Select an active Category Code that has been defined on the Budget Component
Category Validation (RTVBCAT) form.
2. Establish the Print Order for display.
3. The Long Description will use the value for the Period Budget Group which has
been defined on the Budget Component Category Validation (RTVBCAT) form but
2-148
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
may be updated to reflect a more user friendly description to present to the student in
Self-Service. A value of 60 characters may be used to describe the component
category.
Note
The Budget Categories will display the long description and the sum of

the budget components that are associated to the category code.
4. The Comment field allows you to enter up to 2000 text characters to help describe
the budget category (for internal use only).
Budget Components tab
Define budget components which will be used for the aid year.
1. Select an active Component Code that has been defined on the Period Budget
Component Validation (RTVPBCP) form.
2. Assign the appropriate budget Category Code to the component.
2.1.
A Category Code must be assigned.
2.2.
Multiple components can be assigned the same category to present the sum of
the components in Banner Self-Service, letters, web text, etc.
3. Check the Default indicator if the component should be added when assigning the
components to the budget group/type and Add Default Components is selected.
4. Check the Used for < ½ Pell indicator if the component should be used when
determining the Pell budget when the student is less than half-time.
5. A default amount or a default algorithmic rule code can be entered that will allow the
budget component to be created with the value when assigning the components to the
budget group/type either as a default component or, for non-default components,
when manually adding the component to the budget group/type. The default amount
or algorithmic rule code can be entered for the non-Pell budget types and/or the Pell
budget type.
Note
The amount to be used for the Pell budget type should reflect the full year/

full-time amount to be used for the component.
6. The Long Description will use the value for the Period Budget Component which
has been defined on the Period Budget Component Validation (RTVPBCP) form but
may be updated to a more user friendly description with a maximum value of 60
characters that may be used for external processing such as web text, letters, or
reports.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-149
7. The Comment field allows you to enter up to 2000 text characters to help describe
the budget component (for internal use only).
Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules (RBRPBGR)
Establish period budget group rules for the aid year to associate the budget types that are
valid for the group. If the period budget group is associated with a Pell budget type, define
the appropriate components and amounts to be used for the Pell budget on the Pell tab.
Period Budget Group Aid Year rules can be rolled as part of the Financial Aid New Year
Roll Process (ROPROLL).
Types tab
Associate the applicable period budget types with the period budget group for the aid year.
The EFC and Pell indicator values are display only and reflect the values established for
the Type on the Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR) form.
Pell tab
The Pell tab is accessible only when a budget type defined as Pell is associated with the
budget group code for the aid year.
1. Establish the budget components that are to be assigned to the student’s Pell budget
for the group.
2. Establish the full-time/full-year amount for the component or enter the algorithmic
rule code that should be used to calculate the component amount.
Note
Algorithmic rules used for calculating the component amounts for Pell
budgets should return the full-time/full-year amount of the component. 
3. Select the Add Default Components icon to add the period budget components that
have been defined with the default indicator set on the Period Budgeting Aid Year
Rules (RBRPBYR) form. If an amount or an algorithmic rule code for the component
has been defined for Pell, the amount or algorithmic rule code will also be assigned.
Note
Components not defined as being Default or if components are added
manually (without using the Add Default Components icon), any
amounts or algorithmic rule codes associated with the component will

automatically be added and may then be updated as necessary.
The tab’s Copy From block allows you to copy the components defined for the group in
the key block to another group or aid year/group. The group being copied to must be
associated with a Pell budget type prior to copying the components.
2-150
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Period Budget Detail Rules (RBRPBDR)
Establish the budget components for each budget group/non-Pell budget type. The detail
rules establishing the components and amounts/algorithmic rule can be rolled as part of
the Financial Aid New Year Roll Process (ROPROLL).
In the key block, enter the period budget group and non-Pell budget type to establish the
appropriate components and amount.
The budget components and amounts/rules can be defined which are specific to a period
by entering the period in the key-block. If a period is not defined, the budget components
and amounts/algorithmic rules will be used as a default for the budget group and type. In
other words, the period budget grouping process will use a hierarchy to determine the
appropriate components and amounts to assign by first determining if the period being
processed is defined for the group on RBRPBDR:
• If the period is defined, use those components and amounts.
• If the period is not defined, use the components and amounts for the group where
the period is NULL.
Example
School with fall and spring semesters and an optional summer program.
The budget components and amounts are the same for the Undergraduate Dependent
student for both the fall and spring periods however the institution has discounted
tuition charges and required campus fees for students who attend during the summer.
The components and amounts/algorithmic rule to be used for fall and spring are
defined for the Undergraduate Dependent group by leaving the Period null in the key
block of the Period Budget Detail Rules (RBRPBDR) form, allowing the same rules to
be used. The components and amounts/algorithmic rules that will be used when the
student has summer included as part of their aid period will be defined differently by
entering the period associated with summer in the key block for the Undergraduate
Dependent group.
Establish the appropriate budget components and amounts for the period budget group,
type, and optionally period.
Note
The amounts and the algorithmic rules that are assigned to the Period

Budget Group/non-Pell type should reflect the amount for a period.
Select the Add Default Components icon to add the period budget components that have
been defined with the default indicator set to Y on the Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules
(RBRPBYR) form. If an amount or an algorithmic rule code for the component has been
defined for Non-Pell, the amount or algorithmic rule code will also default in.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-151
Add any appropriate components and amounts/algorithmic rules that should also be
included.
Note
Components not defined as being Default or if components are added
manually (without using the Add Default Components icon), any
amounts or algorithmic rule codes associated with the component will

automatically be added and may then be updated as necessary.
The tab’s Copy To block allows you to copy the budget components and amounts/
algorithmic rules to another budget group/type and optionally to a period. The Default
Key Block Values for update icon can be used to reduce the amount of data entry
involved when using the copy feature. When selected, the key block values will be copied
accordingly and you may update the necessary fields prior to selecting the Copy icon.
Algorithmic Support (RORALGS)
The Algorithmic Support (RORALGS) form allows you to define a specific amount to be
returned by an algorithmic rule, based on the applicant meeting the criteria entered as the
value for the keys which will be used as part of the algorithmic rule. If you are using this
form to assist with algorithmic budgeting rules, determine the criteria and amounts to be
entered for calculating the budget component. The Algorithmic Support rules can be
rolled as part of the Financial Aid New Year Roll Process (ROPROLL).
1. For the period budget component that will use the algorithmic support rules,
determine the criteria that must be met for each amount that should be assigned to the
student for the budget component.
2. Enter each of the criteria which must be met as a Key value.
2.1.
Enter the Amount to be assigned to the component when the student meets the
criteria of all the keys associated with the amount.
2.2.
Enter a Comment for the algorithmic support rule and/or for each Key to
provide supporting information.
Example
Develop a list of criteria used to assign values for the Tuition component, based on
enrollment status on the Need Analysis (RNANAxx) form:
2-152
KEY 1 = Component
KEY 2 = Enrollment
status from RNANAxx
AMOUNT to be returned
TUITION
TUITION
TUITION
TUITION
1
2
3
4
4000.00
3000.00
2000.00
1000.00
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Algorithmic Budgeting Rules (RBRABRC)
Use the Algorithmic Budgeting Rules (RBRABRC) form to create rules required for
calculating the component amount to be assigned to the individual student. Algorithmic
budgeting rules can be rolled as part of the Financial Aid New Year Roll Process
(ROPROLL).
1. For the Algorithmic rule code that will be used to calculate the budget component,
enter the sequence number and SQL statement to be used.
1.1.
Multiple sequences should be used to establish all possibilities including a
default as the last sequence should the student not meet any criteria for
calculating the component.
1.2.
Save the SQL statement.
Note
Rules are processed in sequence order.

2. After saving the SQL statement, select the Validate icon to ensure that the SQL
statement’s syntax is correct. All sequences of the rule must be validated for
successful rule execution.
2.1.
Once the syntax is validated, a check will appear in the Validated indicator.
2.2.
If the syntax could not be validated, any and all errors for the Sequence must be
corrected before attempting to Validate again.
Note
The SQL statement's syntax must be validated prior to using the Test
Rule function.

3. Use the Test Rule icon to execute the rule to verify desired/expected results.
Note
You must enter the appropriate values for any of the substitution variables

to be used in the rule.
The Copy To block allows you to copy a rule from one aid year, rule, and sequence
combination to another aid year, rule, and sequence combination, allowing you to transfer
the same rules from one aid year to another aid year, or to copy rule information from one
sequence number to another sequence number.
Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE)
Use the Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form to create Period Budget Group
assignment rules that will be used by the Period Budget Grouping Process (RBRPBGP) to
assign a Period Budget Group to each period or a specific period that is part of the
student’s aid period. The Rule Type of G, Period Budget Group Assignment, must be used.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-153
Period Budget Group Assignment rules can be rolled as part of the Financial Aid New
Year Roll Process (ROPROLL).
Message Code Validation (RTVMESG)
Use the Message Code Validation (RTVMESG) form to associate messages which have
been defined for Period Budget groups for the aid year. Messages associated with Period
Budget groups may be rolled as part of the Financial Aid New Year Roll Process
(ROPROLL).
Fund Management (RFRMGMT) and Funds Management (ROAMGMT)
For any funds that award an amount based on a budget component, the RFRMGMT form
(Budget tab) and ROAMGMT form (Budget Rules tab) are used to associate the
appropriate period budget component and percentage. The amount of the fund awarded
cannot exceed the sum of the period budget component for all periods in the student’s aid
period. Period budget components associated with a fund can be rolled by the Financial
Aid New Year Roll Process (ROPROLL).
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
Use the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form (Options tab) to
establish the period budgeting group that will be used as a default when a student does not
meet the criteria of any period budget group assignment rule. Check the Period
Budgeting Enabled checkbox to enabled the use of period budgeting which is assigned to
applicants for packaging, award validation, and display on forms and in Self-Service.
Note
You can create all validation and rule forms for period budgeting and
assign period budgets to all of your applicants prior to checking the Period

Budgeting Enabled indicator.
The Period Budgeting Enabled indicator tells the system whether to use Aid Year
budgeting (unchecked) or Period based budgeting (checked) for processing, display of
budget information on forms and Self-Service.
Assigning period budget groups
Period Budget Grouping Process (RBRPBGP)
Use the Period Budget Grouping Process (RBRPBGP) to assign a budget group to an
applicant based on the rules established for Period Budgeting Group on Financial Aid
Selection Rules (RORRULE). Period budget groups will be assigned for each period of
the student’s aid period. You can also run the Period Budget Grouping Process for a
specific period.
Once the student has been assigned the budget group for a period, the process will assign
the budget types and associated budget components for all types established for the group.
2-154
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Algorithmic rules assigned to the budget component for the budget group/type will be
executed and the amount returned will be used for the component.
The Period Budget Grouping process will also provide you with the ability to run the
process in simulation mode (without actually assigning the budget group/components to
the student). Because you may wish to run simulated budgeting multiple times, a unique
simulation run name is required with the results of the simulation stored as part of the
table. You will be able to review the results of all simulation runs both online and within
the output produced by the process. As a maintenance feature, simulation runs may be
deleted.
Note
For additional details, refer to Chapter 4, Reports and Processes.

After running the Period Budget Grouping Process, a series of Banner Financial Aid tables
are updated, accordingly:
Budget Run Base Table (RBBBRUN)
The Budget Run Base Table will store the run name when the process is executed. A
Budget Run name of “Actual” is delivered and is system required. When the process is
executed for (A)ctual budgeting, the run name of “ACTUAL” will exist in the Applicant
budget tables representing the actual budget used for processing and display on forms.
When the process is executed in (S)imulation, you must provide a unique run name that
will then be part of all the Applicant budget tables to identify and link all of the results.
Applicant Period Budget Group (RPRAPBG)
The Applicant Period Budget Group table will store the period and the period budget
group assigned for the period along with the appropriate run name used by the process.
The run name of “ACTUAL” identifies the records representing the period budget group
used in processing and on forms for the period.
Applicant Period Budget Type (RBRAPTP)
The Applicant Period Budget Type table will store the period and the period budget types
assigned for the period along with the appropriate run name used by the process. The run
name of “ACTUAL” identifies the records representing the period budget types used in
processing and on forms for the period.
Applicant Period Budget Component (RBRAPBC)
The Applicant Period Budget Component table will store the period, budget type and the
period budget components assigned for the period and budget type along with the
appropriate run name used by the process. The run name of “ACTUAL” identifies the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-155
records representing the period budget components used in processing and on forms for
the period.
Note
Refer to Period Budget Simulation Inquiry (RBRSIMI) and Period Budget
Simulation (RBRSIMR) for further information on viewing the results of a

simulation run of Period Budget Grouping process.
Applicant processing using period based/algorithmic
budgeting
Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD)
The Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD) form provides the ability to change the aid
period, display the budget components and amounts for the aid period, and maintain the
applicant’s budget by period and the applicant’s Pell budget for the aid year.
Applicant Budget tab
The applicant’s aid period is maintained on the Applicant Budget tab. The percent of the
full year budget associated with the aid period from the Aid Period Validation form
(RTVAPRD) is also displayed. You may view the applicant’s budget group, components
and amounts by period by accessing the View Budgets by Period icon or by using the
Options menu to access Applicant Budget by Period (RBIABPR) form.
The Information Access Indicator allows you to allow (checked) or prohibit
(unchecked) display of the applicant’s budget information in self-service. When the
Information Access Indicator is checked, budget information will be displayed in SelfService based on your settings on the Web Processing Rules tab of the Global Financial
Aid Institutional Options (ROAINST) form. Additionally, for period budget processing,
you may select your institutional preference to display either the IM or FM EFC and
budget associated with the methodology type. If the preferred period budget EFC
methodology is IM and no IM budget type exists for the applicant, the FM budget type
will be displayed.
You may delete the applicant’s budget by selecting the Delete Budget icon. When the
Delete Budget icon is selected, all period budget groups, types, and components will be
deleted for all periods in the applicant’s aid period.
Budget Maintenance tab
The applicant’s budget is maintained by period on the Budget Maintenance tab. The aid
period assigned is display only and updated on the Applicant Budget tab. The period
budget groups assigned for the periods in the applicant’s aid period are maintained in the
Group block. Use the next/previous record function to navigate through the period budget
group/periods. A period budget group may be added, removed, or updated for a period.
Once the update is made in the Group Code field, the budget types and components
associated with the period budget group will be added if you are creating/updating the
2-156
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
period budget group or removed if you are removing the period budget group for the
period.
The Lock indicator, when selected, will prevent any updates to the budget group for the
period. Changes may be made to the budget types and budget components when the
budget group is locked including the ability to recalculate the budget components.
The Freeze indicator, when selected, will prevent any updates to the budget group, types,
or components for the period. If you freeze the budget for the period, the budget
components cannot be recalculated by the recalculation process.
Adjustments to the budget components and amounts can be automatically made by
selecting the Calculate icon or by accessing the Applicant Immediate Process
(ROAIMMP) form from the Options menu and selecting the Period Budget
Recalculation option. When the calculation is performed, any algorithmic rules assigned
to the budget components will be executed to ensure the current amount based on the
criteria is assigned. Additionally, any changes to the budget components for the period
budget group and type (and optionally the period) that have been made on the Period
Budget Detail Rules (RBRPBDR) form will be reflected. When the Calculate icon is
selected in the Group block, the calculation will occur for all budget types associated with
the budget group for the period. When the Calculate icon is selected in the Type block, the
calculation will occur for only that budget type and period.
Components and amounts may be added, updated, or deleted by period on the Budget
Maintenance tab. Any manual or batch posted components will not be recalculated.
Note
If an amount is manually changed on a budget component that used an
algorithmic budgeting rule, the algorithmic rule code and sequence
number will be removed because the amount is no longer the result of the

algorithmic rule.
Pell Budget Maintenance tab
The Pell budget (for the period budget group) is created with the full-year/full-time
components and amounts on the Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules (RBRPBGR) form.
The Pell budget will exist for the group assigned for each period in the student’s aid
period. However, the Pell budget that is displayed, accessible for updates on the Applicant
Period Budget (RBAPBUD) form, and used for the Pell calculation and reporting to COD,
will be the group and Pell budget from the earliest period in the student’s aid period. If you
have initially assigned a Fall/Spring aid period, the Pell budget established for the period
budget group assigned for the Fall semester will be used for calculating the student’s Pell
budget and award. If you then changed the aid period to Spring (only), the period budget
group and the corresponding Pell budget assigned for the Spring semester will become the
student’s Pell budget and used for calculating the award.
The Calculate icon when selected will perform a recalculation of the applicant’s Pell
budget and the components and amounts updated based on any algorithmic rules used for
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-157
the budget components or updates made to the Pell budget for the group that have been
made on Period Budget Group Aid Year Rules (RBRPBGR).
Budget components may be added, updated, or deleted. Any updates to amounts or new
components added to the applicant’s Pell budget should reflect the Full-time/Full-year
amount.
Note
If an amount is manually changed on a budget component that used an
algorithmic budgeting rule, the algorithmic rule code and sequence
number will be removed because the amount is no longer the result of the

algorithmic rule.
Changing Aid Periods
Changing an aid period to remove a period that does not have aid in memo, authorized, or
paid status.
On the Applicant Budget Tab, enter the new aid period in the Aid Period field and
save the record. As part of the update, when the new aid period is saved, the period
budget group, type(s), and components associated with the period being removed will
automatically be deleted. If you are changing the aid period from Fall/Spring to Spring
only, the period budget group, type(s), and components for Fall will be deleted.
Changing an aid period to add a period such as Fall/Spring to Fall/Spring/Summer.
On the Applicant Budget Tab, enter the new aid period in the Aid Period field and
save the record. To assign the period budget group to the period being added, Summer
in this example, without re-grouping the applicant for the Fall and Spring periods, you
have the following options:
1. From the Options menu, access the Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP) form,
and select to run the Period Budget Grouping Process for the period being added to
the applicant’s aid period. The Period Budget Grouping Process will assign the period
budget group and associated types and components for the period.
2. Access the Budget Maintenance tab of RBAPBUD. You can manually assign a period
budget group by entering the desired group in the Group Code field and saving the
record. As part of the updates when the group is added, the budget types and
components associated with the group will automatically be added for the period.
Any updates can then be made as necessary.
3. The applicant may be included as part of batch processing run of the Period Budget
Grouping Process (RBRPBGP) using a population selection and entering the specific
period as part of the parameters to assign the period budget group.
2-158
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Eliminating a period budget group when you are unable to remove a period from the aid
period due to funds already paid.
1. Access the Budget Maintenance tab of RBAPBUD. From the Group Code field,
remove the budget group code (clear field) and save the record. This will remove all
budget types and budget components for the period (the period itself will remain).
2. Freeze the period with a null budget group to eliminate the grouping process or
manual updates from assigning a budget group and components.
If a Pell budget had existed for the group/period which was removed and was the earliest
period in the aid period, the Pell budget type will be removed when the budget group is
deleted for the period; therefore, the earliest period where a Pell budget type exists will be
used for Pell processing.
Example
Applicant is in a Fall/Spring aid period with a period budget group of UGINOS for
Fall and UGINIS for Spring. Fall aid was paid and backed out. The Fall period cannot
be removed from the aid period, however the applicant’s budget needs to reflect only
the Spring budget amount.
On the Budget Maintenance tab of RBAPBUD, remove the budget group for the Fall
period. This deletes all budget types for the budget group being removed, including Pell
and the associated components. Check the Freeze indicator to prevent a group from being
assigned or manual entry of a budget type or components for Fall. The student’s period
budget will now reflect only the Spring amounts for non-Pell. The Pell budget associated
with the Spring budget group (UGINIS) will be used to calculate Pell and submitted to
COD.
Applicant Budget by Period (RBIABPR)
The Applicant Budget by Period (RBIABPR) form is an inquiry form used to display the
components/amounts assigned to the student for each period in their aid period. The
information will be displayed based on the EFC method (Federal or Institutional), which is
associated with the budget type. The period budgeting group code assigned for the period
will also be displayed.
Period Budget Category Inquiry (RBIPBCT)
The Period Budget Category Inquiry (RBIPBCT) form is used to display the budget
information for the student using the categories. This will be the information that is
displayed in Self-Service for the student if Display COA Detail indicator on the Web
Processing Rules tab of the ROAINST form has been checked (Yes) and the student’s
Information Access Indicator on the Applicant Budget tab of the RBAPBUD form has
been checked (Yes).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-159
Period Budget Group Detail (RBAPBGD)
The Period Budget Group Detail (RBAPBGD) form displays the period budget group that
has been assigned for each period in the student’s aid period. Only the Lock and Freeze
indicators will allow updates on the form. This form will be accessed from other forms
where the budget group is currently displayed, such as the Applicant Status (ROASTAT)
form.
Applicant Status (ROASTAT)
The Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form includes a line that displays the status of the
Period Budget Group. The budget group assigned to the earliest period in the student’s
aid period will be used with an asterisk displayed, if the student is assigned a different
period budget group in a subsequent period. For example, the student has a Fall/Spring aid
period and assigned UGDEP in the fall and UGIND in the spring. The UGDEP will
display with an asterisk.
When Period Budgeting is enabled (via ROAINST), the Period Budget Group Detail
icon, when selected, will open the Period Budget Group Detail (RBAPBGD) form. This
will allow you to review all periods and budget groups assigned to the student.
The summary block displays the Budget amounts and EFC values for each of the three
potential budget types (FM, IM, Pell). Additionally, the Gross Need and Unmet Need
values will be calculated and displayed for both the FM and IM budget types.
Award Maintenance Forms (RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, and ROARMAN)
The Banner Financial Aid award and maintenance forms, RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, and
ROARMAN allow you to display either the aid year budgeting group or the period
budgeting group in the Budget Group field. If Period Budgeting is not enabled (via
ROAINST), the aid year budgeting group (RORSTAT_BGRP_CODE) will be displayed.
When Period Budgeting is enabled (via ROAINST), the period budget group assigned for
the earliest period in the student’s aid period (RBRAPBG_PBGP_CODE, RBRAPBG_PERIOD)
will be displayed. An asterisk will display if the student is assigned a different period
budget group in a subsequent period. For example, the student has a Fall/Spring aid period
and is assigned UGDEP in the fall and UGIND in the spring. The UGDEP will display
with an asterisk.
An option to view all period budget groups is provided by selecting the Period Budget
Group Detail icon (RBAPBGD) which will only be active when Period Budgeting has
been enabled on ROAINST.
The summary block displays the Budget amounts and EFC values for each of the three
potential budget types (FM, IM, Pell). Additionally, the Gross Need and Unmet Need
values will be calculated and displayed for both the FM and IM budget types.
On ROARMAN, if Period Budgeting has been enabled (via ROAINST), when the Budget
icon is selected, the Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD) form will be displayed. If
2-160
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Period Budgeting has not been enabled (via ROAINST), the Applicant Budget
(RBAABUD) will be displayed.
Group Inquiry (ROIGRPI)
Use the Group Inquiry (ROIGRPI) form, Period Budgeting tab, to display and review
group related data for the specified aid year.
Period Entered
From the Period Budgeting tab, selecting a specific period will display the number of
students assigned to the period budget groups defined for the aid year. The Student Count
= = > Total field will display the number of students assigned a Period Budgeting Group
for the Period defined.
The tab’s Query value will reflect the number of students in the query assigned a Period
Budgeting Group for the Period defined.
The View Student’s option will display the students assigned to the period budget groups
based on the Period entered.
No Period Entered
If no Period is entered on the Period Budgeting tab, the total number of students who have
been assigned to the Period Budget group in any Period for the aid year will be displayed.
The Student Count = = > Total field will display the number of students (non-duplicated)
who have been assigned a Period budget group in the aid year specified.
The tab’s Query value will reflect the number of students in the query assigned a Period
Budgeting Group for the aid year.
The View Student’s option will display the students who have been assigned to the budget
group for any period in the aid year with a designator that the student has been assigned
multiple groups for the aid year.
Period Budget Simulation Inquiry (RBISIMI)
The Period Budget Simulation Inquiry (RBISIMI) form will display all of the simulation
runs of the Period Budget Grouping Process (RBRPBGP).
Period Budget Simulation (RBRSIMR)
The Period Budget Simulation (RBRSIMR) form allows you to display and review the
results of the Period Group Assignment process when run in simulation mode. The
applicant’s current budget information will also be displayed allowing you to review any
differences between the applicant’s current budget assignments and new results from a
simulation run prior to re-budgeting.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-161
When a student record is displayed, you can use the next-block function to display a more
detailed comparison of the student’s actual and simulation run. For the Period, Group,
Type, and Component, the amount for the actual and simulation run will be displayed.
The ability to purge the entire simulation run is provided by selecting the Purge
Simulation Run icon. You also will have the ability to remove an individual record from
the simulation.
Period Budget Recalc Process (RBRPBRC)
Period Budgeting offers you the ability to recalculate the budget components for a student
without re-grouping the student to assign a new budget group. This functionality performs
the necessary changes to components and amounts that you wish to adjust, based on
variables like a student’s actual enrollment level. Recalculation of the budget components
is provided both online and in batch.
The Period Budget Recalc Process (RBRPBRC) will execute algorithmic budgeting rules
to calculate the budget components. The process may be run to calculate components for a
specific period or for all periods assigned to the student’s aid period. You may also define
recalculation for a specific budget type or all budget types or recalculate one or more
specific components.
If a student’s period budget has been frozen, a message will be provided in the output and
no updates will be made to any of the student’s components. Recalculation of a student’s
budget will occur when the budget group is locked.
Self-Service
Once Period Budgeting has been enabled on the Global Financial Aid Institutional
Options (ROAINST) form, the period budgets will display for the student.
• When displaying the Cost of Attendance details, the budget categories will be used
and display in the “Print Order” defined on the Budget Categories tab of the Period
Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR) form.
• When displaying the period budget group to the student, the long description for
the budget group/aid year entered on the Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules
(RBRPBYR) form will be used.
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
Web Processing Rules tab:
• Set the Period Budget Preferred EFC accordingly, as it is possible for the student
to have both FM and IM budget types.
• If the Display COA Detail indicator is unchecked (No), budget status is not
displayed (information text from Web Tailor) and the Cost of Attendance link (via
2-162
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Self-Service) will not be displayed on the Financial Aid Status page. This prevents
the applicant from accessing the Cost of Attendance web page.
Financial Aid Status page
When period budgets are enabled (via ROAINST), the budget group and period will be
displayed for all period’s in the student’s aid period.
The page’s Cost of Attendance link will not be displayed if the Display COA Detail
indicator is unchecked (via ROAINST).
Cost of Attendance page
The Cost of Attendance page is available by accessing the link from the Financial Aid
Status page. The applicant’s period budget information will be displayed if Period
Budgeting Enabled indicator has been checked on ROAINST for the aid year.
Award Overview page
The applicant’s period budget information will be displayed if the Period Budgeting
Enabled indicator has been checked on ROAINST for the aid year.
Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP)
processing
This process focuses on automation to meet the following objectives:
• Reduce the degree of end-user intervention in the SAP process
• Promote integration between student records and financial aid
• Provide functionality to accommodate user-defined SAP policies
This lets you use a group assignment-like process within Banner to assign SAP codes to
student records, along with the automatic posting of a letter code to the GURMAIL Table
for use in Letter Generation. There is also flexibility allowed in the definition for which
fund sources the user can restrict packaging and disbursement activity.
The functionality that is available with the RORRULE form to write both simple and
complex rules lends itself directly to the Satisfactory Academic Progress process. You can
write your own rules for as many different SAP codes as needed in either the expert or
simple mode on the RORRULE form. These rules are used by the SAP process to assign
SAP status codes automatically to the student record.
Satisfactory Academic Progress data is kept on a term-by-term basis and stored in the
RORSAPR table.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-163
SAP forms
The following forms are used in SAP processing.
Satisfactory Academic Progress Validation (RTVSAPR)
The primary sort order on this form is defined with the SAP Status Code Priority field.
This is the same basic format as that on the Group Assignment Validation forms and the
functionality is almost the same, with the lowest number (1- 999) representing the highest
priority. This means that the rules will be analyzed by Banner in the order of their priority
codes.
While this form operates much like the RTVTGRP, RTVBGRP, and RTVPGRP forms, the
output is not a group code, but rather an SAP status assigned to the student for a specific
term. The SAP process does not use the Group Assignment Process of RORGRPS, but
instead has its own unique process - the SAP Assignment Process (ROPSAPR).
When you create a new SAP status code, a priority code with a value of 1 is created as the
default; you can update this field at that time. If you plan on using the ROPSAPR process,
you must assign a priority code to all SAP status codes.
Note
The primary sort on this form is priority code. If no priority code exists, it
will sort on the SAP status code. Those with priority codes will come

before those without.
The Letter Code field is validated against the Letter Code Validation (GTVLETR) form.
This field allows for the association of a letter code to an SAP status and is optional. If the
student is assigned that SAP status, a pending letter is posted to the GURMAIL table
automatically. This only occurs if the SAP status was determined through the SAP
Assignment Process (ROPSAPR) or the SAP status is being updated through Batch
Posting. Pending letters will not be created automatically if a SAP status code is posted
manually, updated manually, or is posted through any other mechanism such as PL/SQL.
Note
Only one pending letter will be created for any specific letter. Until that
letter code has been printed, the same letter will not be posted as pending
for the same aid year. However, other pending letters can be created at

the same time for different letter codes.
The Message Number field for Web and Voice Response access is optional.
The SAP Status Code field, which is six positions in length, provides you with flexibility
in the definition of these codes and allows you to make the codes meaningful. For
example, a PROB1 value might represent the 1st Probation, while PROB2 might represent
the 2nd probation, or you could use P1 and P2. The objective is to provide flexibility to
define an SAP status with more meaning for the user. All related processes and all forms
that store an SAP status have been modified to accommodate this longer field length.
2-164
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The RTVSAPR form contains an options list of Which Aid can be attached to each SAP
status to prevent packaging and/or disbursement activities. These options, which are
available via a drop-down list, include:
• None
• All Aid
• Title IV only
• All Federal Aid
Plus, the additional options of (prevent packaging/prevent disbursement for):
• State only
• State and Federal
• State and Title IV
• Institutional only
• Institutional and State
• Institutional and Federal
• Institutional and Title IV
• Institutional, State, and Title IV
• Institutional, State, and Federal (leaves Other Source code if any funds are defined)
Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE)
On the RORRULE form, the Group Code field becomes SAP Code when the Rule Type
field is assigned a value of S. The ROPROLL process allows for the rules to be rolled from
aid year to aid year. While it may be that a school’s SAP rules do not change from year to
year, in some cases they will. As a result, to allow for those situations where these rules do
change, the aid year remains a part of the key for the rule, and the SAP rules will be treated
as all others in rolling from aid year to aid year. If there are no changes, you can just
continue processing, as the roll process now rolls the compiled versions of the rules from
RORRULE to the new aid year.
If your institution calculates SAP status on a specific term results rather than cumulative
results, the form will not automatically add the appropriate terminal variable of :TERM.
You will need to add this variable at the end of the rule by using the Substitution button
from the expert mode rules and selecting :TERM. This will then allow the Calculate From
term value to replace this in the rules when they are executed. This works the same as the
:PIDM and :AIDY values, except that you must manually add this to your rules when
initially creating them. By using this variable (:TERM) you will not be required to hard
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-165
code a term value into the rules and then make sure it is updated every time you want to
run SAP for a different term.
Note
Satisfactory Academic Processing is by term. Therefore, the substitution
variable of :PERIOD cannot be used as part of a rule used for SAP

processing.
Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP)
This form allows the assignment of a SAP status online. The process involves the use of
two term codes. The first term code, Calc From, points the assignment process to the term
from which you want to calculate the newest SAP status. This Calc From term code is
required and automatically defaults the current term code as defined on the Global
Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form and can be changed. Although this
value is required, the field is only utilized by those rules which are term-specific and for
those schools that perform a term-specific SAP calculation. This Calc From term code
must belong to the aid year in the key block of the form. The validation on this term code
will restrict the options to only those terms which exist in the aid year.
The second term code, Effective, which is also required, directs the process to the term in
which to post the results (the New SAP Status on the ROASTAT form). The term for
which the new SAP code is being posted will not be validated against the aid year in the
key block of the form.
For example, suppose that it is the end of the Spring term and you want to determine SAP,
and you want the result to be posted to the Fall term. The Spring term code (Calc From)
would need to belong to the aid year in the key block of the form, while the Fall term,
where the results will be posted (Effective term) would not need to belong to that year.
The Effective term must be later than the Calculate From term. The validation on this term
restricts the options to only those terms which are later than the Calc From term.
Logic within these terms prevents you from posting the results of the SAP calculation to
the term for which the calculation was just done, or any prior term. In this way, the process
ensures that you are posting the new SAP code to a term later than that from which the
calculation originated. In other words, the form will make sure that you do not calculate
the New SAP code from the spring term and then accidentally update the Spring SAP
code, when you meant to update the Fall SAP code. This same logic applies to the
parameters in job submission.
The SAP process on the ROAIMMP form differs from the other group assignments
process for tracking, budgeting, and packaging. The SAP process uses the same process
from online and from job submission to assign the SAP codes. The name of this process is
ROPSAPR, or the SAP Assignment Process. Also, the only option for the Action
Indicator is I (Immediate), therefore eliminating any need for the Current Status and
Completion Date columns. Check the SAP field option to perform this calculation.
2-166
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Applicant Status (ROASTAT)
The Satisfactory Academic Progress block on the ROASTAT form displays the SAP code
assignment process history and all related information for the student on a term-by-term
basis. This form captures the following information.
The Term is the effective term code that was used by the ROAIMMP form (using the
ROPSAPR Process) or as a parameter in job submission. The Calculated SAP Status is
the status that the SAP Assignment Process determined the student qualified for at this
point in time based on the rules from RORRULE.
However, the New SAP Status is the status that has gone through the additional
translation process from the Satisfactory Academic Progress Translation Rules
(RORSTRF) form, if applicable. If the RORSTRF form is not used, the New SAP Status
will always be the same as the Calculated SAP Status. The Lock Indicator field allows
you to lock a new SAP status code from any further changes. You cannot update the
calculated SAP Status with this form. Only the SAP Assignment Process can update the
calculated SAP status.
The Lock Indicator, when set, prevents all manual and automated updates. You must
remove the lock before any further updates are allowed. If a SAP status is not locked and
there is another SAP calculation run for the same term, the old record is replaced with the
latest result. In all cases, the User ID and Activity Date default into the appropriate fields.
The Term, Calculated SAP Status, and New SAP Status fields utilize the List of Values
function, which allows you to access to the full description for each of the codes
displayed. The description for each SAP status displays as the cursor moves to that field.
Note
The Calculated SAP Status field will be null for all terms where there is a
SAP status prior to utilizing the ROPSAPR process. This field is only
populated through the ROPSAPR process. Therefore any other means of
posting an SAP code, manual batch posting, or through an outside
process will not populate this field.
Batch posting a SAP code will automatically set the lock indicator.

SAP Translation Rules (RORSTRF)
There is a need at many institutions to allow the SAP process to go through a final rule
process beyond just the calculation of the current SAP status. This process uses the
student’s current (calculated) SAP status and their last SAP status to determine their real
SAP status at the current time.
An optional rules form can be used to support the additional process that defines the actual
SAP status code that you want to post to the RORSAPR record. The name of the form is
the Satisfactory Academic Progress Translation Rules form (RORSTRF). Banner takes
the calculated value from the SAP Assignment Process and compares the results to the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-167
following rules form. The process then determines and posts the appropriate new SAP
status. In all cases, these are the same SAP statuses that were defined on the RTVSAPR
form.
This is a repeating rules form allowing for the definition of as many status combinations
desired. It also allows for the definition of the Letter Code to be posted to the GURMAIL
table as a pending letter for anyone with this combination. The SAP Letter Code is
validated against GTVLETR and the other three columns against RTVSAPR. The SAP
Letter Code field is optional if you use this form.
If the appropriate combination is defined on RORSTRF, the calculated status, which is
assigned as a result of the ROPSAPR process, is not the student's New SAP status, but
rather is just the status that has been determined from this recent calculation. It is the SAP
status that the student qualifies for - given the results of the rules. However, the calculated
SAP status will go through one more process to determine what is the correct SAP status
to post to the RORSAPR table and to be used by the packaging and disbursement
processes. The ROPSAPR process will see if the combination of Previous SAP status and
Calculated SAP status exist on RORSTRF. If they are present, the student will be assigned
whatever New SAP status the rules dictate.
If your school chooses not to use this rule form, the status code that is derived from the
ROPSAPR Process is the code that is posted to the New SAP status field and posted to the
RORSAPR table. However, if your school chooses to use this form and only wants to
build certain combinations of SAP statuses on this form, rather than the complete
exhaustive list of all possible options, the process will support that also. This means that if
there is a combination of Previous SAP Status and Calculated Status present on this form
that matches a student, the appropriate New SAP status and Letter Code are posted
accordingly.
However, if the SAP Status combination is not present on the rule form, the Calculated
SAP Status will be the status posted to the New SAP Code and updated to the RORSAPR
table. For example, suppose the Previous Status is X and the Calculated Status is PROB1.
Given the above example, this combination is not present, therefore PROB1 becomes the
New SAP status and gets posted to RORSAPR.
The SAP Assignment Process will always look at the RORSTRF form first to see if the
student’s combination of Previous SAP status and Calculated SAP status exist. If they do
exist on the rule form, the ROPSAPR process will post the appropriate values to the
RORSAPR table (visible on the ROASTAT form) and the GURMAIL table (visible on the
RUAMAIL form). If the student’s combination does not exist on RORSTRF, the
Calculated SAP status will also be the new SAP status. If there is a letter code associated
with that status on the Satisfactory Academic Progress Validation form (RTVSAPR), it
will be posted to the GURMAIL table as a pending letter.
Note
Only one pending letter will be created for any specific letter. Until that
letter code has been printed, the same letter will not be posted as pending
for the same aid year. However, other pending letters can be created at

the same time for different letter codes.
2-168
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Group Inquiry (ROIGRPI)
This form is a tracking, budgeting, packaging, and SAP group assignment query form
used to view the results of the assignment process and to see if rules exist. When you enter
a value of SAP in the Group Type field and a term code in the Term field, the form
returns the count of how many applicants have a specific SAP code for that particular
term. The form also enables you to see if rules exist for that SAP code for the year in
which the term is associated. The sort order on the form is by Group Priority. Remember,
if you choose to assign SAP codes, regardless of the existence of a RORSTAT record,
these numbers reflect the counts in the RORSAPR table, not RORSTAT.
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
The Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) uses a six-character SAP code
field. The Initial SAP Status remains as the SAP code that is assigned to a student/
applicant when the initial RORSTAT record is created. The Exception SAP Status field is
used when the applicant falls through all of the SAP rules defined on RORRULE and does
not fit into any of the predefined rules. This is the SAP code of last resort, much like the
default group codes assigned in tracking, budgeting, and packaging. This field is also six
positions in length and is validated against the RTVSAPR values.
Determining satisfactory academic progress using periods
When creating periods with multiple terms, you are required to select the term to be used
when evaluating if the student is making satisfactory academic progress. The
disbursement process will look for the most recent term in the satisfactory academic
progress table (RORSAPR) which is less than or equal to the term with the SAP indicator
checked for the period being disbursed. You should consider your institution’s policy and
evaluate how setting the SAP indicator will impact the evaluation of making satisfactory
academic progress.
Example
Satisfactory Academic Progress
Period
Term Codes
within Period
SAP Indicator
Checked
Spring 2011
2011200
Y
201130
Y
Summer 2011
201140
201150
• SAP for 201120 exists as Making Satisfactory Academic Progress
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-169
• Disbursement is run for Summer 2011 period
• Disbursement looks for most recent term where SAP indicator checked for
period being disbursed = 201120
• Making Satisfactory progress – funds disburse
• SAP process is run for 201130 term and results posted with 201130 as Probation
(eligible)
• Disbursement is run for Summer 2011 period
• Disbursement looks for most recent term where SAP indicator checked for
period being disbursed = 201130
• Probation (eligible) - funds disburse
• SAP process is run for 201140 term and results posted with 201140 as Failing SAP
• Disbursement looks for most recent term where SAP indicator checked for
period being disbursed = 201130 (201140 does not have SAP indicator
checked)
• Probation (eligible) - funds disburse
SAP processes
The applicant’s SAP code is used throughout Banner. Banner looks at this value when
packaging and disbursing the aid for the student.
SAP Assignment Process (ROPSAPR)
This process utilizes the rules established on the RORRULE form with a Rule Type of S.
Unlike other Banner Financial Aid jobs, you must select which group of students to
process through rules using parameters 05, 06, or 07 through 10.
The process will not default to only those with RORSTAT records for the aid year as many
of the other Financial Aid processes do. In fact, this process will allow students to be used
who do not have RORSTAT records. This will allow those institutions who wish to
calculate and maintain SAP statuses on all students to do so, whether or not they are
currently receiving financial aid funds.
The parameters for this process include:
• 01 Aid Year Code (Required).
The aid year value is used to validate the Term Code for the calculation (must be
defined as belonging to that aid year).
• 02 Term Code For Calculation (Required).
This value is used for those schools who want to calculate SAP on a specific term
set of values rather than the cumulative statistics of an applicant. This parameter is
not used by schools that do not specify a term value in their rules. This value is
2-170
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
only utilized in the rules if there is a terminal value in the compiled rule :TERM. It
must be defined as a part of the aid year in Parameter 01.
• 03 SAP Effective Term Code (Required).
This is the term code that is associated with the results of the process. The process
requires this term to be later than that used for Parameter 02. This term also
identifies the aid year that all letters will be posted to in the GURMAIL Table
(RUAMAIL form).
• 04 Student ID.
This option cannot be used when running the process from job submission.
• 05 Use All with RORSTAT for Aid Year (Required - default of N).
This option allows for the process to run on only those applicants with RORSTAT
records for the aid year (as defined in Parameter 01).
• 06 Use All Enrolled for Term (Required - default of N). This option allows for the
process to run on only those students who have enrollment records for the Term
Code for Calculation (as defined in Parameter 02).
• 07 Application Code.
This parameter is utilized in population selection.
• 08 Creator ID of Selection ID.
This parameter is utilized in population selection.
• 09 Selection Identifier.
This parameter is utilized in population selection.
• 10 User ID.
This parameter is utilized in population selection.
• 11 Create RORSTAT Record Y or N (Required).
If there were applicants who went through the process and did not already have
RORSTAT records, do you want RORSTAT records created?
The first term code parameter, Term Code for Calculation (Parameter 02), validates
against the Aid Year Code (Parameter 01) to ensure it is defined for that aid year code.
The second term code parameter used in the process, SAP Effective Term Code
(Parameter 03), is the term to which the results of the SAP process are posted. This term
code is not validated against the aid year code parameter, as it may fall outside the range of
the aid year. For example, SAP is being calculated at the end of the Spring term for the
Fall. The Effective SAP Term Code would be the Fall term code, while the aid year
parameter for the process would be the prior year.
The goal in requiring you to define these separate terms as input to the process up front is
to minimize the need for you to hardcode specific term codes into the rules themselves.
This would require you to maintain this data every time you need to run the rules.
The part of this process that has always caused confusion has been deciding which term
the SAP has been calculated for and what term should be used in posting this SAP code.
For example, if the student status at the end of the Spring semester is being reviewed, the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-171
code must be posted for the next term. Therefore, when running the SAP process, the term
that should be used as the Effective term is not the Spring term, but rather the Fall term
code (or possibly the Summer), as that is the term you want the results to affect. The
packaging and disbursement processes will look at the Fall term code and will apply any
and all logic for that SAP code to activity for the Fall; therefore, the Fall term code will be
the Effective Term.
The first step of the SAP Assignment Process is the determination of what is the student’s
Calculated SAP status from the logic defined by the rules on RORRULE. This result will
be posted to the RORSAPR table and displayed on the ROASTAT form. From here, the
ROPSAPR process must determine if there are rules present on the RORSTRF form. If
there are rules present and the combination of Previous SAP Status and Calculated SAP
Status is present and matches that combination with a student, the process will pick up the
New SAP Status as defined on RORSTRF and post that status as the New Status to the
RORSAPR table which will again display on ROASTAT. If there are no rules on the
RORSTRF form or the combination for Previous SAP Status and Calculated SAP Status is
not defined, the Calculated SAP Status will become the New SAP Status and be posted as
such.
Finally, the process must determine if there is a letter code defined for the New SAP Status
anywhere. The processes will look at the RORSTRF rules form first. If there is a letter
code defined for the combination of Previous Status and Calculated Status, the process
will post that code to the GURMAIL table as a pending letter, using the aid year code
associated to the Effective term. If the combination is not present on RORSTRF, the
process will then look at the RTVSAPR rules form. If there is a letter code defined for the
student’s New SAP Status, that letter code will be posted to the GURMAIL form. If there
is not a letter code in either location, no letter code will be posted.
In the previous examples, the SAP status was being determined from the Spring term and
posted to the Fall term. In this case, the Calculate From term is the Spring and the
Effective term is the Fall. The letter code will be posted as a pending letter to the aid year
associated with the Effective term - or the Fall. Since this will impact the Fall term
eligibility, it was determined that this was the appropriate year in which to attach the letter.
The ROPSAPR output files, the .log and .lis files, will identify the number of students
that were processed through the SAP rules and if there are any locked records which could
not be processed. The output will itemize those students who were not processed due to
locked records.
SAP Status Codes View (ROVSAPR)
This view is intended to provide a method for selecting the maximum value SAP code for
any student at any point in time. This view can be used as a tool for writing population
selection rules, batch posting rules, or any other set of rules that is appropriate.
2-172
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Process flow
1. Set up all rules associated with this function (ROAINST, RTVSAPR, RORRULE,
RORSTRF).
2. When appropriate, run the ROPSAPR process from job submission for the desired
group of students.
3. On an individual basis, the SAP process can be run online from the ROAIMMP form
or the SAP code may be updated manually on the ROASTAT form. It is on this form
that results may also be locked. (The batch posting process can also be used).
4. Run letters that were posted to the GURMAIL table as pending. When you run the
GLBLSEL process, respond to the first question, Print All Pending? with No. Select a
specific letter code. Then you will be asked again, Print Pending Letters for this
Letter Code ?. Answer Yes and all letters with that letter code will be selected to be
run. Once you have run these letters through the GLRLETR process, the print date
will populate and they will no longer be pending.
5. If there was a change to the SAP Status for the term and a pending letter has already
been created, but not yet printed, you will need to review the RUAMAIL form for
accuracy.
Note
For those institutions which use an aid year counter (or term counter) in
their rules, this data can be stored in a user-defined field and accessed in
your rules.
The same is true for those schools who require a specific number of
hours to be completed within an academic year. This data can be
collected and stored in a user-defined field. This data is then available for

use in your SAP rules.
Note
Those clients who plan to take advantage of the latest enhancements in
SAP processing will need to notify their Database Administrator to pay
particular attention to the rate of growth of the Satisfactory Academic
Progress Rules Table, RORSAPR. It it becomes too large, the table may
need to be resized. The General utility script gurrddl.sql (found in the
plus subdirectory of Banner General) can be useful in accomplishing this
task. This will particularly be true for those schools who choose to start
maintaining SAP data on all students who are enrolled, not just those with
RORSTAT records.
The batch posting process will not use the rules established on the
RORSTRF form since there will not be a calculated SAP status
determined. It will act the same way as a manual update to the SAP
status, and impact only the effective SAP status code. However, batch
posting will work differently than manually updating or posting an SAP
status, in that it will create a pending letter if the status code being posted
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-173
is defined with a letter code on the RTVSAPR form. It should also be
noted that SAP records will be locked through the batch posting process.
If you are writing term-specific rules and you wish to test the results while
still on the RORRULE form by pressing Execute, you must replace your
:TERM variable with a specific term code so the rule can know which term
to look for. However, remember to change this back to the :TERM variable
before leaving the form as the appropriate term code will pass into this
rule from the job parameters at run time.
For those institutions who wish to run the ROPSAPR process from the

command line, the following are the instructions to do so.
On the Process Parameter Entry form (GJAPCTL), enter the required parameters for
ROPSAPR. Select the Hold radio button of the Submission Block and press commit. Note
the sequence number that returns to the screen. Go to the command line and enter:
For Unix: ropsapr.shl <enter>
For VMS: ropsapr <enter>
You will then be prompted for a User ID, a password, and the sequence number from
above.
Sample rules
Below are some examples of rules that might be useful when trying to develop your own
rules. It is helpful to note that the SHRTGPA table stores term-specific data about
students, while the SHRLGPA table stores cumulative data. In the SHRTGPA table, there
are options of whether to choose all data for a term-related to Institution coursework (I) or
all data related to transfer work (T). In the SHRLGPA table there are three options.
Institution (I), Transfer (T), or Overall (O).
1. A term-specific rule that does not require a RORSTAT record. Would have to be
written in expert mode.
select DISTINCT(spriden_PIDM) from spriden, sgbstdn x, shrtgpa
where sgbstdn_degc_code_1 in ('BA','BBA','AS','AA') and
shrtgpa_levl_code = 'UG' and
sgbstdn_majr_code_1 in
('ACCT','ANTH','CHEM','BUSI','ENGL','PSYC','SOC','BIOL') and
(shrtgpa_gpa_type_ind = 'I' and
((.60*shrtgpa_hours_attempted) <= shrtgpa_hours_earned)) and
sgbstdn_term_code_eff =
(select max (y.sgbstdn_term_code_eff)
from sgbstdn y
where y.sgbstdn_pidm
= x.sgbstdn_pidm and
y.sgbstdn_term_code_eff <= :TERM) and
2-174
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
sgbstdn_pidm = spriden_pidm and
shrtgpa_pidm = spriden_pidm and
spriden_pidm = :PIDM and
shrtgpa_term_code = :TERM
2. A cumulative rule which requires a RORSTAT record. Can be written in simple or
expert mode. This rule will also have to be updated every year as it uses the rovst99
view.
Simple rule:
shrlgpa_levl_code = ‘UG’ and
rovst99_degc_code_1 in (‘BA’,’BBA’,’AS’,’AA’) and
rovst99_majr_code_1 in (‘ACCT’,’ANT’,’CHEM’,’BUSI’,’ENGL’) and
(((shrlgpa_hours_attempted > 0 and
shrlgpa_hours attempted <= 44) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.60 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=45 and
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=89) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.75 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=90 and
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=134) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.90 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=135 and
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=275) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=2.00 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’))
and
((.75*shrlgpa_hours_attempted) <= shrlgpa_hours_earned)
3. Example of the same rule as #2 without the rovst99 view. Would not require
updating, but will require expert mode rules. This rule contains the same logic within
it that the view does.
Select distinct(spriden_pidm) from spriden, sgbstdn x, shrlgpa
where
sgbstdn_degc_code_1 in (‘BA’,’BBA’,’AS’,’AA’) and
shrlgpa_levl_code = ‘UG’ and
sgbstdn_majr_code_1 in (‘ACCT’,’ANT’,’CHEM’,’BUSI’,’ENGL’) and
(((shrlgpa_hours_attempted > 0 and
shrlgpa_hours attempted <= 44) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.60 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=45 and
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-175
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=89) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.75 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=90 and
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=134) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=1.90 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’) or
((shrlgpa_hours_attempted >=135 and
shrlgpa_hours_attempted <=275) and
shrlgpa_gpa >=2.00 and
shrlgpa_gpa_type_ind = ‘O’))
and
((.75*shrlgpa_hours_attempted) <= shrlgpa_hours_earned) and
sgbstdn_term_code_eff =
(select max(sgbstdn_term_code_eff)
from sgbstdn y,
robinst
where y.sgbstdn_pidm = x.sgbstdn_pidm and
y.sgbstdn_term_code_eff <=robinst_current_term_code and
robinst_aidy_code = :AIDY) and
sgbstdn_pidm = spriden_pidm and
shrlgpa_pidm = spriden_pidm and
Funds Management procedures
Funds Management implementation
1. Determine the various fund types your funds may have on the Fund Type Validation
form (RTVFTYP).
Fund types include: Loan, Work, Grant, or Scholarship.
2. Determine the various fund sources for your funds on the Fund Source Validation
form (RTVFSRC).
Fund sources include: Federal, State, Institutional, or Other.
3. Define all potential funds on the Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) form.
If the fund is able to be disbursed to the student account, relate an A/R detail code to
the fund. From the Financial Aid Fund Type Validation (RTVFTYP) form and the
Fund Source Code Validation (RTVFSRC) form, determine the type and source of
each defined fund. Relate a Federal Fund ID to those Federal funds to which Federal
2-176
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
hard-coded rules should apply. (Use the List function to determine valid values for
these fields.)
Determine the print order of the funds. Note that this print order only determines the
order of the funds for letter-generation printing purposes. This does not affect the
order of the funds on this form.
Note
You can use the GTIV (General Title IV Rules) code to subject the hardcoded federal rules to any non-Federal funds to which you wish them to

apply.
4. For each fund, define any awarding rules that may apply using Rule Type Fund
Awarding on the Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
These rules are interrogated during the packaging process when the fund is to be
packaged.
5. For each fund, define any disbursement rules that may apply on the Financial Aid
Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
These rules are interrogated during the packaging process when the fund is to be
disbursed.
6. Define the award and disbursement schedules by aid periods in the Default Award
and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA) form.
Note that the default rules are not by fund, but only by aid period. You may use the
Insert Record function to bring in the valid periods for both the Award and the
Disbursement Schedule for the aid period identified in the Key Information section.
• In the Award Schedule section, the Award Percent for all periods must equal
100%. Define valid memo expiration dates for each period. The Grant Award
Percent must also be defined for all periods and must total at least 100%, but
may total up to 200%.
• In the Disbursement Schedule section, the disbursement date will default to
the cut-off date defined by period on the Packaging Options (RPROPTS)
form. The disbursement percent for each period must equal 100%.
7. Access the Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRASCH) form.
Use this form for any funds whose award and disbursement rules differ from the
defaults set up on the RFRDEFA in Step 6. If no rules are defined specifically for the
fund, the default rules will be used when the award and disbursement schedules are
created in the student’s packages.
8. Access the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form.
Use this form to define aid-year specific budget information, packaging and
disbursement options budget and detail code rules, and tracking and message
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-177
assignment rules for each particular fund. Refer to Dynamic Help for specific
information on the use of the fields.
Fund balance reconciliation
The fund balances on the Fund Budget Inquiry (RFIBUDG) form are stored in the
RFRASPC Table. The balances in the RFRASPC Table are updated whenever a student’s
award for the year changes, when the status of the award changes, or when the amount of
the memo, authorization, or payment changes. These balances are the summary of all
activity for the year for awards made to all students. Individual student award information
is stored in the RPRAWRD Table.
Note
If a fund is out of balance, Banner may stop awarding or disbursing funds
to students because it erroneously thinks that the fund is out of money.
Running this reconciliation process will restore the fund balances to their

proper level.
From time to time the totals that display in the RFIBUDG form and those stored in the
RPRAWRD table get out of sync. Therefore, it is recommended that the SQL* PLUS
scripts, rupfndbl.sql and rslfndbl.sql, are run regularly to keep them in sync. Note
that the same logic as rupfndbl.sql can be executed from the ROAMGMT form. You
can select to reconcile only one fund, or all funds for the Aid Year in the key block.
Warning
Original Offer totals are not updated by these scripts nor by the RECON

FUND/RECON ALL buttons on ROAMGMT.
Calculating fund balances - setting and using
overcommitment levels in packaging
You enter the number of real dollars available to award students from each fund on the
Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form. You also use the RFRMGMT form to set an
overcommitment level. This overcommitment level is based on the expected number of
students who decline their awards, never enroll, become ineligible before payment, or in
the case of work programs - never appear for a job assignment or do not work the total
authorized hours.
Based on past experience, you can estimate the amount of specific awards that you can
safely overcommit during packaging because you know that all awards are not actually
paid; a percentage of awards are either canceled or declined before payment.
When Banner determines if available funds exist for new or additional awards to students,
Banner previously used the Available to Offer Amount (based on the overcommitment
level) minus the amount of current (active) offers already made to other students. If there
was no money left, the award was rejected by the award validation process.
2-178
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
However, as the financial aid office canceled and declined awards, the balance of funds
available to award to other students increased because the declined and canceled funds
were taken out of the current offers. These funds were available to be rewarded to other
students. Banner continued to allow awards to students until the amount of current offers
reached the Available to Offer amount. Unless you continuously monitored the amount of
canceled and declined awards and reduced the Available to Offer amount to eventually
match the real allocated dollars, you could begin the year with current offers exceeding the
number of real dollars available to pay.
To remedy this potential problem, Banner includes the amount of canceled and declined
awards in the formula that determines the fund balance for packaging. When testing to see
if the fund has enough money available to make new or additional awards, it now takes the
Available to Offer Amount (overcommitment level) and subtracts the current offers,
declined amounts, and canceled amounts.
When an award is canceled or declined, the Available to Offer amount does not change
because the canceled/declined amount is still being used to reduce the balance. The
numbers displayed on the Fund Budget Inquiry (RFIBUDG) form as the Amount
Remaining to Offer and the Percent Remaining to Offer now use this formula. All reports
that display the Amount Remaining to Offer also use this formula (RFRBUDG,
RFRSBAL).
In addition to this formula, an amount is displayed on the Fund Budget Inquiry
(RFIBUDG) form. Next to the Percent Remaining to Offer field is the Actual Remaining
Amount. This is the Total Allocated (real dollars) minus the Current Offers.
This process works best when the aid office’s procedure is to cancel or decline a student’s
award if the student is no longer eligible, rather than by deleting the award from the
student’s package. By canceling and declining awards you no longer need to continuously
reduce the Available to Offer amount for each fund. If your overcommitment projection is
correct, the final current offers will eventually equal the total allocated. Banner still cannot
save you if you overcommit too much and your final current offers exceed your total
allocated. The total amount of canceled and declined awards in one year will be a good
measure of what the overcommitment level for the next year should be.
Packaging and disbursement procedures
Packaging implementation
1. Set up your packaging groups and create a group priority on the Packaging Group
Validation (RTVPGRP) form.
Remember that the lower the number, the higher the priority. You may want to leave a
range between groups for ease in adding groups at a later time. Create an award
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-179
priority. This priority is used in the awarding process to select the order in which
packaging groups will be awarded funds.
Note
Remember to add your default Packaging Group onto RTVPGRP before

entering it on ROAINST.
2. Define all possible award statuses in the Award Status Validation (RTVAWST) form.
Check the appropriate values to the Offered, Accepted, Cancelled, and Declined
indicators for each status.
Note
Only one indicator may checked for each award status, but multiple
award statuses can have the same indicator checked. Remember to
assign the appropriate statuses built here to each fund on RFRMGMT. 
3. Access the Packaging Options (RPROPTS) form.
Use this form to select options that control the method in which certain functions
perform in the packaging module. Complete the Packaging Options, Exemptions/
Contracts Options, and Disbursement Options sections. Determine institutional policy
on enrollment cut-off dates for the periods within the aid year you are defining.
Note
If the Disburse If Charges Not Accepted box is not checked and the
student's charges have not been accepted, then the disbursement
process will not process any payments directly to the student's account.
However, process authorizations and memos can be processed.
If the Disburse If Charges Not Accepted box is checked, the
disbursement process can post payments directly to the student's
account whether or not the student's charges have been accepted.

4. Open the Default Packaging Rules (RPRDEFR) form.
Determine institutional policy on Gap, Equity, and Self-Help Packaging Rules.
Equity Packaging can use one of three methods:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Percentage of Gross Need,
Percentage of Budget, or
Equity Amount.
This form is used only as a default for those rules which may be used for individual
packaging groups. Gap Packaging can be accomplished by using either a Percentage
of Gross Need or a Gap Amount.
Self-Help Packaging can be accomplished through:
2-180
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
(1)
(2)
(3)
Percentage of Gross Need,
Percentage of Budget, or
Self-Help Amount
5. Access the Packaging Rules (RPRPCKR) form.
Assign your Gap, Equity, and Self-Help rules to Packaging Groups to which they may
apply. To default in the rules from RPRDEFR, use the Create Record function. To
view the default rules on RPRDEFR, use the Count Query Hits function.
Note
If rules do not exist for a group, then no Gap, Equity, or Self-Help rules will
be used for that group. The packaging routine will not use the rules

defined on RPRDEFR.
6. Open the Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
Define your packaging group assignment rules for each packaging group in the aid
year you are defining. These rules are optional if you will not be performing automatic
packaging. The Packaging/Disbursement Rules types include:
• Packaging Group Assignment
• Fund Awarding
• Fund Disbursement
• Packaging Group Fund Awarding
7. Categorize your funds into packaging groups in the Packaging Group Fund Rules
(RPRGFND) form.
Define a minimum, maximum, and percentage of unmet need that the fund should
meet. Also identify the methodology to be used for the awarding of that fund within
the group (F - Federal or I - Institutional). Each fund code should be given a priority.
This controls the sequence by which the funds are interrogated during the packaging
process.
Note
Any fund with a Federal Fund ID of Pell cannot be associated with a
packaging group. The Pell awarding process is separate from the fund
awarding process.
Any fund with an unchecked Automatic Packaging indicator on
RFRMGMT cannot be associated with a packaging group.
The same fund can be included in the packaging group multiple times
with differing priorities.
May 2012

Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-181
Packaging/simulation
For successful batch packaging, an applicant must:
1. Have a packaging complete date that is null (RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, ROARMAN).
2. Not have any outstanding tracking requirements that prevent packaging.
(RPAAREQ).
3. Have a packaging group (RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, ROARMAN).
4. Meet all hardcoded rules (Award Validation Rules). The fund must also meet any
locally developed notes on the RORRULE form such as a Fund Award Rule or
Packaging Group Fund Award Rule.
Packaging in actual or simulation mode should follow this procedure:
1. Run RPEPCKG.
The packaging process run will be based on the mode identified in GJAPCTL. The
action indicator should be set to S for Simulation mode or A for Actual mode.
Running these processes will produce the rpepckg.log file. Check this file for error
messages to ensure that the processes were completed successfully. Use the Print
Report parameter to select your report output prior to the process run.
The possible packaging reports created by this process when the Action Indicator is
set to either A (Actual) or S (Simulated) includes the following:
rpbawrd.lis – Packaging Award Report
rpbfund.lis – Packaging Fund Report
Note
Although you are no longer required to use the Packaging Print Process
(RPBPDRV) during a normal run of the RPEPCKG Process, you can use
RPBPDRV to reprint existing extract files.
RPBPDRV requires that the rpepckg.ext file is present in your jobsub
directory. If you want to re-print an already extracted .ext file, you must
rename the rpepckg_job#.ext you want to report on to rpepckg.ext. You
can run RPBPDRV on any rpepckg_job#.ext you want as long as you

rename the file.
2-182
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Packaging process definitions
Initialization process (run as part of RPEPCKG)
The initialization process takes any pre-awarded funds that are on the student’s award
record in an offered or accepted status and, if the award was system generated, refunds the
dollars to the appropriate fund management account.
Warning
This process will not delete and redeposit any funds or portion of funds if:
(1) the fund was manually added; (2) the award has been memoed,
authorized, or paid; or (3) the fund is locked. Following this process, the
new fund balances can be seen by running a Simulation Fund Balance
Report (RFRSBAL), or by viewing the Fund Budget Inquiry (RFIBUDG)

form.
Simulated packaging
First, the Action indicator on the GJAPCTL form for this process must be set to S
(Simulation). Then, to get a true picture of the funds available to be awarded, the
initialization process needs to be run. In simulated packaging, online results cannot be
viewed as the database is not being updated. Also in simulation, if the fund runs out of
money, the fund will continue to be packaged. The amount of insufficient funds will then
be indicated in a separate column on the fund report.
Actual packaging
To run actual packaging, the Action indicator on the GJAPCTL form for this process must
be set to Actual. The actual packaging mode will go through the initialization process, then
the packaging process, and then it will post the packaged awards to the student's award
record. Following the actual packaging routine, the applicant award report can be run to
show the packaged awards, in order, by student (rpbawrd.out).
Using NSLDS data
The following sections explain how Banner provides the capability to utilize the NSLDS
source data in determining financial aid eligibility. The Financial Aid processes utilize the
cumulative loan-limit checking features.
Award validation
Generally, a student is not eligible for U.S. Federal Student Aid funds if the student is in
default on a Federal student loan or owes an overpayment on a Federal grant or loan and
has not made a repayment arrangement for the default or overpayment. When the FAFSA
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-183
is processed, the CPS matches the student against the National Student Loan Data System
(NSLDS) to check for defaults, overpayments, and exceeded loan limits. Due to NSLDS
matching, the use of Financial Aid Transcripts (FAT) became redundant beginning with
the 2001-2002 aid year when the mandatory use of the NSLDS was required. Banner still
contained logic to examine the FAT table if the option was set to use Banner history. For
this reason, a change was made in Banner to exclude the old logic for default and
overpayment processing to only use NSLDS information when packaging U.S. Federal
funds, creating Federal loan applications, and disbursing Federal funds.
Often institutions award aid early in the processing year, but do not create loan
originations until a later time. During this time lapse, it is possible for default and/or
overpayment information to be received from NSLDS which then makes the student
ineligible. The creation of a loan origination, whether a Direct Loan or Electronic Loan,
will be prohibited if the student is now in default. An institution may override the status of
default and/or overpayment when sufficient documentation has been received, by
manually creating a current NSLDS record or using the NSLDS Override field on the
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form. When an override has been performed, a loan
origination may be created; however, the Loan Default field (RPRLAPP_IN_DEFAULT) is
updated to N (No) to reflect the current situation of the student.
When NSLDS data became available to schools in the EDE data load files many years
ago, Banner implemented a Source of Award History option on the Packaging Options
form (RPROPTS) to allow schools to select either N (NSLDS) data or B (Banner) data. All
schools must now use NSLDS data for this purpose. Starting with the 2006–2007 aid year,
N (NSLDS) is the only valid source of award history.
The Packaging and Disbursement processes will use NSLDS data for validation purposes.
The Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP) and Direct Loan Record Creation
(RPRLORC) processes will use the NSLDS Match indicator values to determine if a
student is in default or overpayment. Loan records are not created if the student is in
default and/or overpayment, unless the NSLDS Override field is set in the following
manner on the Federal Match Indicators window of the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx)
form.
NSLDS Match field (RNASLxx)
NSLDS Override Field Must Be (RNARSxx)
2=Default
D=Default tests or A=All tests
3=Overpayment
O=Overpayment tests or A=All tests
4=Default and Overpayment
A=All tests
Award validation prior to receipt of NSLDS data
It is possible that Stafford and/or Perkins awards could be made prior to the receipt of
NSLDS data for the year. In this event, cumulative limit or default/refund checking could
not be performed against current year data in packaging. Default/refund checking would
2-184
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
instead be performed at disbursement time. No federal aid would be disbursed until the
Official Source indicator was set to Official, but cumulative limit tests could not be done.
In this case, for Stafford Loans, Banner will use the Aggregate Outstanding Balances from
the most recent NSLDS record from the prior year. We should assume that no current year
loans are included in the prior year NSLDS data. The formula to use in validation would
be (NSLDS Aggregate Outstanding Balance + Prior Banner amount for the current year +
Award Difference) must be less than or equal to the aggregate limit for the federal fund ID
in RPRFEDR for the current year.
Perkins Loans (Cumulative Amount from NSLDS + Prior Banner amount for the current
year + Award difference) must be less than or equal to the aggregate limit for Perkins
loans in RPRFEDR. If the ELO Indicator on the NSLDS record = Y, use the rows in
RPRFEDR where the ELO Indicator = Y.
Award validation after receipt of NSLDS data
Original awards
When an original award is made for the year, it can be assumed that the NSLDS amounts
do not include any current year amounts. Stafford loans (NSLDS Total Loan Amount +
New Award for the year) must be less than or equal to the cumulative amount from
RPRFEDR. The Total Loan Amount differs from the Aggregate Outstanding Balance in
that the total already includes any pending disbursements whereas the Outstanding
Balance does not include pending disbursements. Any pending disbursements present at
this time would have to be for the prior year since the new award has not been made for
the current year yet so NSLDS cannot know about it yet. Pending disbursements from a
prior year will be included in the aggregate test. Also, Outstanding Balances could include
capitalized interest on unsubsidized loans but Total Loan Amount would not. Capitalized
Interest does not reduce the remaining amount available to borrow so the total will be
used.
Modifying existing Stafford, Direct or Perkins awards
Stafford/Direct loans
For Stafford/Direct loans, Banner determines if a current year loan is included in the
current NSLDS record.
• The first check is of the recent loans table (RCRLDS6) where the NSLDS
Program Code matches the type of loan being validated (Direct Sub = D1, Unsub
Direct = D2, Sub Stafford = SF, Unsub Stafford = SU).
• If the Begin Date is between the Aid Year Start Date and the Aid Year End Date,
Banner assumes that the current year amounts are already included in the NSLDS
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-185
aggregate amounts. Otherwise, Banner assumes that the current year amounts are
not included.
If the assumption is Yes, Banner validates that (Total Amount from NSLDS + Award
Difference only) is less than the cumulative limit from RPRFEDR.
If the assumption is No, Banner validates that (Total Amount from NSLDS + Prior Banner
amount for the year + Award Difference) is less than the cumulative limit from
RPRFEDR.
Perkins loans
For Perkins loans, Banner validates that ((NSLDS Cumulative Amount - NSLDS Current
Year Amount) + Prior Banner amount for the year + Award Difference) is less than the
cumulative limit from RPRFEDR.
Default/refund information and financial aid eligibility
Banner provides the capability for Banner to utilize NSLDS source data for default/
overpayment information in determining eligibility for financial aid.
Validating awards against defaults/refunds
Previously, the Award Validation routine (UVARTN) checked the NSLDS default/refund
statuses on the current RCRAPP4 record (RCRAPP4_NSLDS_MATCH). Banner now checks
the current NSLDS record (RCRLDS4_MATCH_IND) for the information. The RCRAPP4
check is available to maintain prior year compatibility.
For students who resolve default/refund problems during the aid year: If a default or
refund problem is resolved by a student during the year, the student regains eligibility for
FFEL and Direct loans for the entire aid year (loan period). The student only regains
eligibility for other Title IV aid programs for the current payment period (period) and for
future payment periods in the same aid year, but not for prior payment periods in the same
aid year.
Since NSLDS only has one summary default/refund status field (NSLDS Match
Indicator), Banner cannot perform separate edits by payment period. Banner uses the
single indicator and assume that value for the entire year. This must be done since:
• There is no way to tell if the match indicator changed to correct an NSLDS data
problem or if the status actually changed,
2-186
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• There is no way to tell the effective date of that change to determine which
payment period the change became effective, and
• It is possible that the first and only NSLDS record received by the school for the
year shows a satisfactory default/refund status; the school would never know that
the status for a previous payment period was unsatisfactory.
Validating disbursements against defaults/refunds
Disbursement validation also uses RCRLDS4_MATCH_IND for checking defaults and
refunds on overpayments.
For Perkins loans, the disbursement process works so that if NSLDS data indicates a
default or overpayment condition and a previous payment had been made to the student,
the previous payment of a Title IV fund will not be backed out - even if
RFRASPC_INEL_BEF_CUT_DATE_IND or RFRASPC_INEL_AFT_CUT_DATE_IND
indicators are set to B (Back Out).
This is necessary because if you received information about the default/repayment after
the payment was made, then your school is not responsible for recovering the money. No
new money will be paid but no money will be backed-out. You could still reduce the
amount of the award (even to zero) and the recoup feature will still return the funds.
(Recoup comes into play when no disbursement rejects are found.)
Since Stafford Loans are never backed-out, Banner prevents the payment of additional
loan proceeds. The processing of returned checks is still allowed.
Using NSLDS
Forms related to the NSLDS process provide easy identification and query of data from
the various data sources (between manual entry and ISIR/NSLDS Data Load). The query
provides an overall picture of the applicant’s records in the aid year that supports both
daily inquiry and point in time audits.
Student Loan Data (RNASLxx)
The RNASLxx form allows the manual creation of records. Manual records can be
updated and other records (such as those with an INFC code of EDE or AFSA) cannot.
Manual records cannot be created unless the student already has a RORSTAT record and
at least one RCRAPPx record for the aid year.
All manually entered records become Current. Multiple manual records can exist per
student per year. The Sequence number would be one higher than the old current record.
The Processed Date field must be entered when creating manual records. The NSLDS
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-187
Transaction Number on a manual record will be set to the same transaction number as the
previous current record. The transaction number will display when you query the form.
When you create a manual record and an NSLDS record already exists, Banner copies all
the data from the previous NSLDS record into the new manual record. This includes
summary data, defaulted loan data, and recent loan data. This process allows you to easily
update the necessary fields without re-entering the entire record.
You cannot change the current record designation on records. If data in the current record
is incorrect, you can use overrides to negate the adverse consequences of the incorrect
data, or create a new manual current record with the appropriate data.
Applicant Student Loan Data Inquiry (RNINSLD)
The Applicant Student Loan Data Inquiry form queries all NSLDS records. You can
access this form from the Need Analysis menu. You can also access this form if you select
Count Query Hits from the Source or Sequence No fields on the Student Loan Data
(RNASLxx) form. This form is similar in layout to the Applicant Need Analysis
Application Inquiry (RNIAPPL) form and contains the following information:
• NSLDS Source
• NSLDS Sequence Number
• NSLDS Current Record Indicator
• NSLDS Transaction Number
• NSLDS Match Indicator
• NSLDS Results Flag
• NSLDS Processed Date
• NSLDS Created Date
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx)
Banner provides an override capability to override NSLDS data that may be preventing
the awarding/disbursement of financial aid or the creation of Direct or FFEL loans. This is
important in cases where NSLDS data cannot be updated by the original data provider in a
timely manner for disbursement of funds. An example would be if the ISIR comes in
indicating that the student is in default, but the institution has documentation that the
student has made satisfactory arrangements to pay and is therefore eligible to receive Title
IV money.
Additional Override information includes:
• The Overrides that you enter will be used in both Award and Disbursement
Validation or the creation of Direct or FFEL loans.
2-188
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Two levels of Overrides are available: Overall for the student/year and by student/
year/period/fund.
• The Overall Override applies to all federal funds for all periods within the aid year.
• The period-specific overrides are specific to a fund/period combination and are
used in disbursement validation only.
• Each override is specific to each type of validation test:
• L
Limit tests (aggregate)
• D
Default tests
• O
Overpayment tests
• A
All tests
Annual limit overrides are not necessary because they already exist in the current
award validation process.
Award forms (RPAAWRD)/(RPAAPMT)/(ROARMAN)
Details on these forms include:
• A field, Override Indicator, is part of the RORSTAT table for the overall NSLDS
override. This field displays with the Federal Match Indicators on the Results form.
Valid values are L, D, O, and A. You can log changes to this field if Need Analysis
or Packaging Logging is activated.
• The award and disbursement validation processes checks the RORSTAT override
first, and if present, uses that value for all funds and periods for the year. Only
disbursement validation utilizes a period. Since Banner does not package by
period, the period override option has no meaning for packaging.
• In disbursement processing, if no overall override exists, the validation processes
checks the period specific override on the RPRATRM table for the fund/period
being processed.
• Existing overrides (at either level) will not be automatically removed when a new
NSLDS record is loaded to Banner. The Data Load process will include an NSLDS
Discrepancy Report of Summary Data to show which NSLDS data elements have
changed. In this way, you can identify whose overrides might need to be reviewed.
• You should enter comments on the Applicant Comments (RHACOMM) form
whenever an override is entered or changed.
• As an alternative to using overrides, you can manually enter a complete new
NSLDS record on the RNASLxx form. This new record will become the current
NSLDS record and award/disbursement validation will use the data in this manual
record.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-189
Output population selection with financial aid
Dataload Part 3
NSLDS information entered via Data Load informs you as to whether a student is in
default. This information may affect the award process. If you use Early Decision
Processing, your school may package awards before you receive NSLDS information.
This process allows you to revalidate previously processed awards based on NSLDS
information received after packaging.
Banner Financial Aid Fund Specific
Packaging options
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
When you offer an award
to a student, what award
status code do you want
Banner to assign when
you package the award?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Offer Status
Valid Award
Status Code
defined as
Offered
When the packaging program
offers the fund, Banner uses
this award status code for the
specific fund.
What award status code
do you want to use when
Banner accepts an award
for a student?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Accept Status
Valid Award
Status Code
defined as
Accepted
Banner uses this defined
status when the fund is set to
auto-accept. It also uses this
status when you accept the
fund through the Award
Acceptance Mass Entry
(RPAMACC) form.
What award status code
do you want to use when
Banner declines an
award for a student?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Decline Status Valid Award
Status Code
defined as
Declined
Banner uses this decline
status when you decline the
award with the Award
Acceptance Mass Entry
(RPAMACC) form.
Do you want to
automatically package
the fund through batch or
online auto packaging?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Auto Package
If you do not check this box,
you cannot use the fund on the
Packaging Group Fund Rules
(RPRGFND) form for the aid
year.
2-190
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
a checked box
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Once you award the
fund, do you want to
schedule it between the
periods in the student’s
aid period?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Auto Schedule a checked box
If you do not check this box,
the fund is not scheduled
between periods in the aid
period. There will be award
letter implications to consider
if you don’t check this option.
There will also be
disbursement implications. It
is recommended this is
always checked.
When you offer an award
as part of the student’s
package, do you want
Banner to automatically
accept it?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Auto Accept
a checked box
If you check this field and you
enter the fund with an Offered
status, the status
automatically changes to an
Accepted status as defined for
this fund and aid year. Do not
check the Auto Accept field
for any funds which you
require a student to accept
(that is, via an award letter).
Note that funds cannot be
disbursed until Accepted.
When the award is
packaged (whether in
batch or online), do you
want to package the
award even if it exceeds
the student's need?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Override Need a checked box
Note that you cannot override
the overaward edit in Award
Validation regardless of how
this indicator is set if any Title
IV monies already exist in the
student’s package.
Do you want to allow
Banner to disburse a fund
to a student without
regard to his/her
academic standing? If
you set this option to Y,
the award and
disbursement validation
routines skip the
academic progress
check.
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Override
SAPR
For example, you may want to
package or disburse a
particular institutional
scholarship to a student not
making satisfactory academic
progress, despite the fact that
the student is not eligible for
any other institutional or
federal aid.
May 2012
a checked box
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-191
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
When the award is
packaged (whether in
batch or online), do you
want to package this
award regardless of
whether or not any
general unsatisfied
tracking requirements
which prevent packaging
exist?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Override
Rqmt
a checked box
A general tracking
requirement is defined as a
requirement which is not fund
specific, that is a requirement
that gets assigned as part of
the group assignment process.
For Actual packaging, if
unsatisfied general
requirements exist that
prevent packaging, a fund will
not be packaged unless the
Override Requirement field
is checked on RFRMGMT.
Should the award be used
to replace the student’s
EFC in the calculation of
Need?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Replace EFC
a checked box
Field will replace EFC first.
When it has replaced 100% of
EFC, it will start to reduce
need. Banner reduces need if
the EFC replacement award is
greater than the EFC.
Should the award be used
to reduce the student’s
need in the calculation of
Need?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Reduce Need
a checked box
Will reduce need by amount
of award. The Replace EFC
and Reduce Need fields are
mutually exclusive. You
cannot check both options.
Should the fund be
processed through the
Loan Module?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Loan Process
a checked box
If you check this field, you
can create fund rules in the
loan module for the key aid
year. If this field is checked,
you must not check the
Disburse field since loan
disbursement occurs from
within the Loan Module.
In order for the fund to be
packaged, is a Need
Analysis record required
to be on file?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Need Analysis a checked box
2-192
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
A warning message alerts you
during packaging if a student
does not have a need analysis
record for the aid year in
which the fund is packaged.
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
When you add or change
the award in the student's
package, do you want
Banner to automatically
set the award letter
indicator on the student’s
record for award letter
selection?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Award Letter
Ind
a checked box
You can use this indicator
with population selection to
select those students who
need an award letter. Once
you generate the award letter
through the Letter Generation
Process, the RLRLETR
Process changes the award
letter indicator on the
RPAAPMT, RPAAWRD, and
ROARMAN forms back to N
for the selected students.
If you use the Equity
packaging philosophy,
do you want this fund to
count in the computation
of the student's equity
level?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Equity Fund
a checked box
Note that you must set up the
Pell fund code as an Equity
fund. Any fund with this
indicator checked reduces the
student’s calculated equity
level in the packaging
process.
Do you want to identify
this fund as a fund that
you to count for NCAA
regulations?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Count for
NCAA
a checked box
Banner does not perform any
processing on this data. It is
available for use in
conjunction with your
institutionally defined rules.
The Fund Aid Year Specific
Table (RFRASPC) contains
the RFRASPC_NCAA_IND
field.
Should applicants be
able to accept/decline
this fund via the Web?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Web Accept
Flag
a checked box
This allows the applicants to
do self-service on their award
package. They can only
accept or decline the entire
amount of the fund. They
cannot accept a partial
amount.
Rebate Fee
Percent
Percentage
amount of the
rebate
This percentage will be used
when processing the loan to
determine the correct amount
to award to the student.
Is this fund a Direct Loan RFRMGMT
fund with a Rebate Fee
(Packaging
Percent?
Options
window)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-193
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Loan Fee
Percent
Percentage of
fees to be
deducted from
the gross loan
amounts.
This percentage defaults into
the Loan Application records
created for the fund, but you
can override the percentage
on an individual student basis
on the RPAELAP and
RPALAPP forms. You can
use the calculated net amount
to memo the net amounts of
the anticipated checks and to
anticipate the receivable
amount.
What is the interest rate if RFRMGMT
this is a Direct Loan?
(Packaging
Options
window)
Interest Rate
The percentage
of the Direct
Loan interest
rate.
The amount of the interest
rate for the direct loan.
What type of loan is this
Direct Loan?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Direct Loan
Indicator
Sub
Unsub
PLUS
Other
This field is used to determine
how to process the loan.
If the fund is a grant or
scholarship, and you use
self-help packaging, do
you want to use any
portion of the fund to
reduce the student’s
self-help level?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Self - Help
Reduction %
Percentage of
the award which
should reduce
self-help level
If the student has a preawarded fund with a self-help
reduction %, Banner uses that
percentage of the student’s
award to reduce the calculated
self-help level for the student
during packaging.
Is this an Alternate Loan
fund?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Alt Loan
Prog Type
Three-character
code to indicate
if this fund is an
alternative loan
fund as defined
by NCHELP.
Used by Packaging and Loan
processes to determine correct
edits to use.
When you package the
fund, how do you want to
round the aid year
award?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Round Award
001 = $1
010 = $10
025 = $25
050 = $50
100 = $100
Note that Banner rounds
down all awards to the nearest
specified dollar amount.
If you process the fund
through the loan module,
what is the total
percentage of origination
and agency fees that you
want to deduct from the
gross loan amount for
calculating net expected
check amounts?
2-194
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
If the award is scheduled
between periods (if the
Auto Schedule field is set
to Y (Yes)), how do you
want to define the
rounding rules in
scheduling the award by
periods and for use in
fund disbursement?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Round
Schedule
RC Rd Cents
RD Round $
TC Trun Cts
TD Trun $
Round Cents
Round Dollars
Truncate Cents
Truncate Dollars
Does the fund have a
limit on how much
Banner can award to a
student based on
estimated tuition and
fees, etc.?
RFRMGMT
Budget
Component
Rules
window
Valid Budget
Components
Banner only packages the
fund up to the sum of the
defined budget components,
or to the eligible packaged
amount - whichever is less.
Tracking
Requirements
window
Valid Tracking
Codes
When you package the award,
Banner posts these tracking
codes to the student’s tracking
record. You cannot enter
tracking codes that prevent
packaging here. Banner posts
these tracking requirements
with a system indicator of F
Fund. If you delete the award
that is associated with the
tracking requirement, Banner
also deletes the tracking
requirement provided the
requirement has not already
been satisfied.
When you award a fund RFRMGMT
to a student, are there any
additional requirements
which the student must
satisfy before you memo
or disburse the fund?
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-195
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
When you award a fund RFRMGMT
to a student, are there any
specific messages you
would like to appear on
the award letter
regarding the specific
award?
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Message
Assignment
window
Valid
Message
Codes
When you generate award
letters and the student has the
specific fund in their package,
the message prints on the
letter. A Letter Generation
variable for fund messages
must exist in the letter
definition in order for the
messages to print.
Do you have any
institutional specific
awarding rules for the
fund?
RORRULE
(using Rule
Type Fund
Awarding)
Define valid
conditions
The Award Validation
process checks to assure that
the student meets these
defined conditions for the
fund.
Are any of the
institutionally specific
awarding rules for the
fund specific to a group
of students?
RORRULE
(using Rule
Type
Packaging
Group Fund
Awarding)
Define valid
conditions
The Award Validation
process checks to assure that
the student meets these
defined conditions for the
fund based on the student’s
specific packaging group.
Banner only validates these
rules when you automatically
package the fund in batch or
online modes.
2-196
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid Global Packaging
options
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Do you want to use the
student's reported expected
enrollment for various
packaging functions if the
student reported an expected
enrollment?
RPROPTS
Use
Estimated
Enrollment
a checked box
If you do not check this box,
Banner uses the Default
Estimated Enrollment value.
Estimated enrollment is used
in packaging, exemptions &
contracts, Pell awarding, etc.
What default enrollment
would you use to package a
student if the student did not
report an expected
enrollment, or if you chose
not to use the student’s
expected enrollment in the
preceding option?
RPROPTS
Default
Estimated
Enrollment
1 = Full-time
2 = ThreeQtr
3 = Halftime
4 = Less-half
This is a required field. You
must enter one of the
indicated values.
Do you wish to package a
student if the student’s EFC
is an estimate?
RPROPTS
Package
Using
Estimated
EFC
a checked box
If you do not check this box,
the student will not be
packaged if the EFC is
estimated for the current Need
Analysis record.
Do you wish to package a
student if a SAR C-Flag
exists?
RPROPTS
Package if
SAR C Flag
Exists
a checked box
If you check this box, the
student will be packaged if
there is a SAR C-Flag on the
current Need Analysis record.
Do you wish to default
RPROPTS
increased amount of Stafford
Loan?
Additional
Stafford
Elig
Default
a checked box
When this indicator is set (that
is, checked), independent
students will automatically be
eligible to receive the higher
amount of the unsubsidized
Stafford loan.
Where to get information for
packaging?
Source of
Award
History
B = Banner
N = NSLDS
This is a required field. When
determining award
cumulatives, where should
that come from.
May 2012
RPROPTS
Only N is valid
for 0607 and
beyond
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-197
If Yes, then
use form
Policy Question
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
By setting this indicator to
checked, the user can mass
accept awards for an applicant
from the RPAMACC form.
Do you wish to allow the
user to mass accept awards
for student?
RPROPTS
Allow Award
Mass Accept
a checked box
Do you wish to limit the
amount of time an applicant
has to respond to an offer of
aid?
RPROPTS
Offer
Expiration
Days
Number of Days Once the number of days
specified in this field has
expired, you have the
opportunity to automatically
cancel all unaccepted awards
or simply to get a report of
them by running the
RPRCNCL report.
Do you wish to assign any
tracking requirements
specific to a fund when it is
awarded?
RPROPTS
Tracking
Requirement
Status
The appropriate
Tracking
Requirement
Status
This is a required field. The
value will default when the
fund is awarded.
Do you want to interface
selected exemptions from
the Banner Student
Accounts Receivable
Module so that you can
count the exemptions as a
resource in the student’s aid
package?
RPROPTS
Interface
Exemptions
a checked box
Exemptions will only be
interfaced for students who
are authorized for the
exemption on TSAEXPT. If
estimated amounts are desired
prior to actual A/R postings,
use the Exemption Rules
(RPREXPT) form.
Do you want to interface a
selected third-party contract
from the Banner Student
Accounts Receivable
Module so that you can
count it as a resource in the
student's aid package?
RPROPTS
Interface 3rd
Party Cont
a checked box
Contracts will only be
interfaced for students who
are authorized for the contract
on TSACONT. If estimated
amounts are desired prior to
actual A/R postings, use the
Third Party Contract Rules
(RPRCONT) form.
2-198
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
If you choose to interface
RPROPTS
exemptions and/or contracts,
do you want to always use
the estimated amount of the
exemption or contract as a
resource in the student’s aid
package?
Always Use
Estimated
a checked box
If this field is unchecked,
Banner uses the estimated
amount as a resource until the
actual amount is paid. When
paid, Banner uses the actual
amount.
If you choose to interface
RPROPTS
exemptions and/or contracts,
do you want to assume that
the student is enrolled fulltime for the purposes of
estimating the amount of the
exemption or contract prior
to its payment?
Assume Full
Time
a checked box
If this field is unchecked,
Banner uses the proration
percentages based on the load
to calculate the estimated
amount. If this field is
checked, the estimated
amount comes from the rules
(RPREXPT or RPRCONT).
If you decided in the
RPROPTS
previous option not to
assume full-time for the
purposes of estimating the
amount of the exemption/
contract, how do you want to
prorate the estimated amount
based on the student’s
expected load?
3/4 Time Pct
1/2 Time Pct
Less 1/2
Time Pct
Enter
Note that when you calculate
Percentages for the estimated amount based
each load option on the load, the student’s load
comes from the reported data
first, (if you check the
Estimated Enrollment - Pell
field); it will then default to
the Default Estimated
Enrollment value.
Factors determining whether an online/
batch award is packaged
The list that follows itemizes the validation criteria used in the batch/online award
validation process with the reject messages which would appear online if the validation
condition failed.
May 2012
Reject Message
Award Validation Condition
Award Not Packaged - Applicant
Has Holds
Award Not Packaged Outstanding Requirements
Holds cannot exist on the ROAHOLD form that prevent
packaging.
Check if there are any unsatisfied tracking requirements
that prevent packaging on the RRAAREQ form.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-199
Award Not Packaged - Violates
Group Min or Max
If you are performing automated packaging, the award
must fall within the minimum and maximum award
levels set for the packaging group on the RPRGFND
form.
Award Not Packaged - Violates
Group Award Rules
If you are performing automated packaging, the
packaging group awarding rules cannot be violated by
the applicant or by the award on the RORRULE form
(Packaging Group Fund Award Rule Type).
Award Not Packaged - Must
Reduce Need
The award must reduce the calculated need if a federal
fund (except Pell) has been previously awarded.
Award Not Packaged -Cannot Be
a Federal Fund
The award cannot be a federal fund (except Pell) if an
award that does not reduce need has been previously
awarded.
Award Not Packaged -Exceeds
Unmet Need
If the award reduces need, the need must still be
available.
Award Not Packaged - Exceeds
EFC
If the award replaces EFC, EFC and/or unmet need must
still be available.
Award Not Packaged -Violates
Fund Matching Rules
The applicant or the award cannot violate the fund rules
on the RORRULE form using Fund Award Rule Type.
Award Not Packaged - Money Not
Available for Fund
The fund must have the amount of the award available
to offer. Use the RFIBUDG form to display fund
balances and the RFRMGMT form to update fund
balances.
Award Not Packaged - Violates
Fund Min or Max
The award must be within the minimum and maximum
fund award levels on the RFRMGMT form.
Award Not Packaged - Unsat Prog The student is not making satisfactory academic
(Institutional)
progress for an institutional program. Review the
student’s status in the Satisfactory Academic Progress
window of the Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form.
Award Not Packaged -Unsat Prog
(State Aid)
The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for at the state aid level. Review the student’s
status in the Satisfactory Academic Progress window of
the Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form.
Note
All of the award validation conditions that follow are only checked if the

fund is associated with a federal Fund ID.
2-200
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Reject Message
Award Validation Condition
Award Not Packaged -- Applicant
Not US Citizen
The RNANAxx form must indicate that the applicant is
a citizen or eligible non-citizen.
Award Not Packaged -Unsat
Progress (All Aid)
The ROASTAT form must indicate that the applicant is
making satisfactory academic progress with a code that
permits packaging.
Award Not Packaged Applicant in Default
The RNANAxx, RNARSxx, RNASLxx or RHATINF
form must indicate that the applicant is not in default on
a Title IV loan.
Award Not Packaged -- Applicant
Owes Refund
The RNANAxx, RNARSxx, RNASLxx or RHATINF
form must indicate that the applicant does not owe a
refund on a Title IV grant.
Award Not Packaged -Exceeds
Allowable Maximum
The award amount cannot be greater than the calculated
budget minus the sum of the resources and other aid.
Award Not Packaged -- Exceeds
Cumulative Amount
The new awarded amount, plus the previously awarded
amounts, cannot exceed the hard-coded cumulative
maximum amounts on the Federal Rules Inquiry
(RPIFEDR) form.
Award Not Packaged -- Load
Invalid For Fed Fund ID
The applicant’s load and class cannot violate the
Federal rules on the RPIFEDR form.
Award Not Packaged - Class
Invalid for Fed Fund ID
May 2012
Award Not Packaged - Violates
Fed Fund ID Limits
The award must fall within the minimum and maximum
award levels on the RPIFEDR form.
Award Not Packaged - - Prior
Bachelor Degree
If the fund has a Federal Fund ID of Pell, the applicant
cannot have a prior degree on the RNANAxx form.
Award Not Packaged - Pell EFC
Not Determined
If the fund has a Federal Fund ID of PERK, SEOG, or
STFD, the applicant must have a Pell EFC on the
RNARSxx form.
Award Not Packaged -- SAR CFlags Exist
The award is not packaged since SAR C Flags exist.
Award Not Packaged -- Ind.Stu
Ineligible For PLUS
The award is not packaged since the individual student
is ineligible for a PLUS loan.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-201
Reject Message
Award Validation Condition
Award Not Packaged - No Pell for
Profs or Grad
The award is not packaged since Pell is not available for
professional or graduate students.
Award Not Packaged - Est EFC/
Pell Ineligible
The award is not packaged since the estimated EFC for
Pell is ineligible.
Award Not Packaged -- No Pell
Budget
The award is not packaged since no Pell budget exists
for the student.
Award Not Packaged - Unsat.
Progress
(Title IV)
The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for a Title IV program. Review the student’s
status in the Satisfactory Academic Progress window of
the Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form.
Award Not Packaged - Unsat
Progress (Federal Aid)
The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for Federal aid. Review the student’s status in
the Satisfactory Academic Progress window of the
Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form.
Award Not Packaged - Override
Need Exceeds Budget
The award is not packaged since the need override
exceeds the budget.
Award Not Packaged - No Need
Analysis Record
The award is not packaged since a need analysis record
has not been established.
Manually scheduling awards
Banner initially distributes awards by periods according to rules set on the Fund Award
and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRASCH) form or the Default Award and
Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA) form in the Funds Management Module. You
can change the award schedule for a specific student and fund on the second page of the
Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form, on the Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form,
or on the Financial Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN) form.
Award Amount Change - When you manually change the amount of an award, it is
scheduled according to the distribution percentages previously entered for the fund on
page two, rather than the schedule defined on one of the award schedule rules forms.
Therefore, if a student should receive an award with the unique pattern of 25% in the Fall
and 75% in the Spring and the amount of the award changes, the new amount will still be
scheduled at 25% in the Fall and 75% in the Spring.
Aid Period Change - If you change the student’s aid period, both new awards and revised
awards will be scheduled according to the rules on the Fund Award and Disbursement
Schedule Rules (RFRASCH) form or the Default Award and Disbursement Schedule
2-202
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Rules (RFRDEFA) form. A change in the student’s aid period is determined by comparing
the list of periods in the fund's award schedule to the list of periods for the student’s
current aid period.
Note
An award status code change by itself does not cause the award to be

rescheduled.
Adding periods to an award schedule
The only time you can manually add a new period to a student’s award schedule is when
that new period is valid for the student’s current aid period but it wasn’t part of the
student’s aid period when the award schedule was originally created. When you add a new
period record to the award schedule, Banner does not change the way the other periods
were scheduled.
Instead, Banner sums up all the periods for the fund, puts the new total through the award
validation process and places the new total in the RPRAWRD table and then displays it in
the Fund Awards section of the Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form, the Package
Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form, and the Financial Aid Record Maintenance
(ROARMAN) form. This is the only situation which will cause the total award to change
due to a change in one of the period amounts. Normally, the total in the Fund Awards
section needs to be changed and the new total between periods in the award by period
detail needs to be rescheduled.
The function to add a new period record is used, for example, when a student who was
originally in one aid period later decides to also attend a Summer period. If the Summer is
the last period for the aid year, the student’s aid period can be changed to include that
period. To give the student an award for the new Summer period, insert a new period
record into the student’s award schedule in the award by period detail section with the new
Summer award amount.
This will not change the way other periods have been scheduled (and possibly already
paid). Banner will automatically add up all period amounts and calculate the new
distribution percents for each period based on the new total, and will package the new
total. If the total in the Fund Awards section is changed first, Banner might change the way
other period amounts have been scheduled.
The override indicators in the award by period detail of the Award form and Package
Maintenance form are used if the new total fails the award validation process for one of
the reasons that can be overridden. The override options available in the award by period
detail are the same as in the Fund Awards section; enter a Y to override the specific reason
for the validation failure or an A to override all possible reasons.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-203
For the override to work, you must package the fund and save first. These overrides
include: Unmeet Need; Replace TFC; Trck Req; Fed Limit; and Fund Limit.
Warning
Entering an override prior to a commit will not yield the expected results.
Award by period procedure
A quick award process exists which makes it easier to maintain awards which need to be
changed due to:
• a student’s change in anticipated course load affecting only one period, or
• a student’s change in enrollment plans so as not to be enrolled for all periods as
previously expected.
Consider the following two award maintenance scenarios and the current Banner Financial
Aid operational steps, either of which allow you to change the award to the desired
amount.
A student changes enrollment to half-time Fall and full-time Spring. The steps to change
the award were:
For Option 1
1. Change the student’s budget on the Applicant Budget (RBAABUD) form.
2. Change the total award in the Funds Award section of the Award Maintenance
(RPAAWRD) form.
3. While still in the Funds Award section of the RPAAWRD form, save the change and
wait for award validation to accept the new award.
4. While on the RPAAWRD form, go to the Award Schedule window and change the
award by period records to reflect a half-time Fall award and a full-time Spring
award, ensuring that the sum of the period awards exactly equals the total that was
entered in the Funds Award section (or else the period changes will be rejected).
For Option 2
1. First enter the changed period award amounts on the Award Schedule window of the
Award form or Package Maintenance form.
2-204
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
2. Save the changes and Banner proceeds as follows:
• The sum the period awards for the changed fund is compared to the existing total
award (that would initially have been displayed in the Funds Award section).
• If the sum of the period awards differs from the (existing) award total, a pop-up
window is displayed with a warning message requesting verification that the award
total is to be changed to the sum of the changed period awards.
To position your cursor on the proper choice you can use the Enter key or the Tab key.
Once you select your choice, press the Accept (Save) key.
• If you indicate that you want to change the award, the award is repackaged using
the new total which includes a validation against awarding rules, and all changes
are committed.
• If you do not want to change the award, the attempted period changes will be rolled
back.
• Banner recalculates the award percents for each period based on the new period
amount and updates those fields.
• The newly packaged amount can now be seen in the Funds Award section of the
Award form or the Package Maintenance form.
When you use the Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form, you can make changes to
multiple periods and multiple funds with a single Save. Since the Award Schedule
Window on the Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form only deals with one fund at a
time, multiple periods can be done only for the selected fund.
Updating awards when locked
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
The ROAINST form allows institutions to setup various financial aid options. Enter the
name of the financial aid director and the director’s phone number on the Institution
Demographics Tab. You can also enter campus demographic information in that area of
this window.
Award lock
The Allow Award Status Updates When Locked field was added to the ROAINST Form.
The Allow Award Status Updates When Locked indicator is delivered with a default value
of unchecked (No). Check this indicator (Yes) to allow the status of an award to be
updated in Banner and Self-Service if an award or period lock exists for a fund. No
updates to other fund criteria such as award amounts are allowed with this indicator
checked.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-205
Identifying students needing new or
revised award letters
It is possible to identify students who may need a new or a revised award letter. The
Packaging Group Information section of the Award form (RPAAWRD), Packaging
Maintenance form, (RPAAPMT), and Financial Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN)
form display an Awrd Ltr field.
This field (RORSTAT_AWD_LTR_IND) is set to Y whenever the offered amount changes on
any fund in the student's package when you want changes to the fund to cause the award
letter indicator to be set. If you want changes to a particular fund to cause the indicator for
the student to equal Y, you must check the Award Letter field on the Fund Management
(RFRMGMT) form. Do not check this option if you do not want changes to a particular
fund to set the award letter indicator to Y.
You can use the Award Letter indicator (RORSTAT_AWD_LTR_IND) in population
selection to choose students who need a printed copy of an award letter. You could use the
following sample selection statement for this purpose: RORSTAT_AWD_LTR_IND = Y.
You can manually change the award letter indicator on the three packaging forms. For
example, you may not want to send a new award letter to a student if an award only
changes by a small amount. You could change the indicator back to N so that you do not
select the student for a new award letter. Or, if you want a particular student to receive a
duplicate copy of his latest award letter, change the indicator from N to Y. Banner now
selects the student for a new letter even though there were no changes to his award
package.
To create a population of students who should receive an award letter you should run the
GLBDATA process to find the students whose award letter indicator = Y. When you run
the letter extract process (GLBLSEL) for your award letter, you should use the population
just created. To reset the award letter indicator back to N you should run a report called
RLRLETR immediately following the letter print process (GLRLETR). The parameters
for this process must be the same as the population you just used to print the award letters.
It also asks for an aid year code so it knows which award letter indicator to reset. This
report will reset the award letter indicator back to N so the student will not be reselected
for another award letter unless there have been subsequent changes to the award package.
2-206
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid Global Disbursement
options
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option
To
Comments
If the student has not RPROPTS
accepted their
charges for the period
in which the
disbursement is run,
do you want to allow
the student to receive
the financial aid
credit on their
account?
Disburse If
Charges Not
Accepted
a checked
box
If you do not check this box, the
fund is not paid if the student has not
accepted their charges for the period
in which you run disbursements. In
this case, the financial aid could be
authorized but not paid.
If the student has an
unresolved SAR C
flag, do you want to
pay the student?
RPROPTS
Disburse if
SAR C Flag
Exists
a checked
box
If you do not check this box, the
fund is not paid.
Do you want to allow
the fund that was
previously paid to
memo?
RPROPTS
Allow
Memos
When
Previously
Disbursed
a checked
box
If checked, it will allow a fund that
has previously paid for the period
you are trying to disburse, to
memo.This includes memoing
amounts that have paid or
authorized then backed out to zero.
It also includes memo amounts that
are for future scheduled
disbursements when earlier
scheduled disbursements have been
paid or authorized and not backed
out.
When you disburse
an award, which
enrollment do you
want to use to
determine the
student's load at the
point of the
disbursement as the
default value?
See Below
See Below
See Below
The value entered in this field will
only be used if there is not a
disbursement enrollment option
entered for the period of
disbursement on the Enrollment Cut
Off Dates Rules Window.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-207
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option
To
Comments
.... Expected
Enrollment?
RPROPTS
Enrollment
E xpected
Option for
Disbursement
Banner uses the student load from
the student reported expected
enrollment from the current Need
Analysis record, (if you check the
Estimated Enrollment - Pell field).
If this information does not exist, or
if you do not check the Estimated
Enrollment - Pell field, Banner uses
the Default Estimated Enrollment.
.... Adjusted
Enrollment?
RPROPTS
Enrollment
Adjusted
Option for
Disbursement
Banner calculates the student’s
adjusted enrollment as the student
billing hours for the term minus any
courses listed on the Audit Grading
Mode (RPRAUDT) form, minus
any courses in the student’s
schedule where the course
registration status indicates that the
course should not count in
enrollment.
This means that dropped or
canceled courses for the term are not
counted in enrollment, but noncredit remedial courses are counted
even though these courses do not
carry real credit hours. Banner uses
adjusted financial aid hours if this
information exists, otherwise it uses
current adjusted hours. The adjusted
hours are converted to load based on
the credit hour rules specified on the
ROAINST form.
.... Actual
Enrollment?
2-208
RPROPTS
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Enrollment
Billing
Option for
Disbursement
Banner uses the student’s financial
aid billing hours for the period of
disbursement if it exists, or else
Banner uses the current billing
hours. The billing hours are
converted to load based on the credit
hour rules found on the ROAINST
form.
May 2012
Policy Question
Would you like to
setup different values
of enrollment to be
used when disbursing
funds on a period-byperiod basis?
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option
To
RPROPTS Period and
Period for
(Enrollment Disbursement this specific
Cut Off
Enroll Option enrollment
Dates Rules
status and
window)
the
enrollment
status you
wish to have:
Comments
If a rule exists on this window for a
period, it will override the
Enrollment Status window on the
prior window of the form.
Expected
Adjusted
Billing
At what date in the
period do you wish to
treat aid that has been
paid differently than
at the beginning of
the period?
RPROPTS Cut Off Date
(Enrollment
Cut Off
Dates Rules
window)
Do you want to
ROAINST
perform repeat
(Options
course checking
window)
which will allow only
one repeat of a
previous passed
course to be included
in the calculation of
enrollment hours?
May 2012
Allow use of
Repeat
Course
Checking for
Aid Year
Date to be
used
This is a required field.
a check box
When checked (Yes), the
calculation of enrollment hours will
include verification against
academic history and registration
that only one repeat of a course
previously passed may be counted
towards enrollment. You must also
establish by fund (RFRMGMT) if
the enrollment calculation should
use repeat course checking in the
determination of enrollment.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-209
Banner Financial Aid Fund Specific
Disbursement options
Policy Question
Do you want to give
the student anticipated
credit for the fund
prior to payment of the
fund?
If Yes, then
use form
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Memo Credit
Accepted
or
Offered
If this field is set to
Accepted, the memo goes
out only if the student
accepts the award and all
memo validation criteria
have been met.
If this field is set to
Offered, the memo goes
out if the status of the
award is either Offered or
Accepted and the student
has met all memo
validation criteria.
How do you want to
disburse the fund to
the student's account?
RFRMGMT
(Packaging
Options
window)
Disburse
System
or
Manual
If this field is set to
System, Banner
automatically creates the
disbursement (from either
RFRDEFA or RFRASCH)
schedule when the student
accepts the award.
If this field is set to
Manual, Banner does not
automatically create a
schedule, but does allow
you to manually create a
disbursement schedule for
the student and fund.
If the student is
enrolled, at the point
of disbursement, for
less hours than what
you anticipated when
you packaged, do you
still want to disburse
the fund?
2-210
See Below
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
See Below
See Below
May 2012
Policy Question
...No, do not disburse.
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
RFRMGMT
If Disb Load
(Disbursements Code > Pckg
Option
Load Code
window)
Set Option To
Comments
N = No
Disbursement
By setting the option to No
Disbursements when the
Disb Load Code > Pckg
Load Code, a
Disbursement Error/
Reject is created and no
disbursement will occur.
If an amount has already
been paid, it may be
backed out based on the
back out options set in the
If Ineligible Before CutOff Date and Ineligible
After Cut-Off Date fields.
...Yes, disburse the
amount of the award.
RFRMGMT
If Disb Load
(Disbursements Code > Pckg
Option
Load Code
window)
D = Disburse
100%
Disburse the amount of the
award in the student’s
package despite the load.
...Yes, but prorate the
amount of the award
that you want to pay
based on the load.
RFRMGMT
If Disb Load
(Disbursements Code > Pckg
Option
Load Code
window)
P = Prorate
The amount of the award
in the student’s package is
prorated based on the
payment percentages for
the student’s load (load is
determined based on the
Enrollment Option for
Disbursement field).
If an amount greater than
the prorated amount has
already been paid, you
may back out the
difference based on your
back out options as set in
the Ineligible Before
Cut-Off Date and
Ineligible After Cut-Off
Date fields.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-211
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Payment%
for 3/4 Load
Payment%
for 1/2 Load
Payment%
for Less 1/2
Load
Enter
When Banner calculates
percentages for the prorated amount based
each load option on the load, it determines
the student’s load based on
the Enrollment option for
Disbursement option.
If you choose to
prorate the amount of
the award when the
student is enrolled at
less than the
anticipated amount
during packaging,
how do you want to
prorate the award?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursements
Option
window)
If an award is
scheduled for
disbursement in
multiple payments
within a period, and
the student’s load
changes between
scheduled
disbursements, how
do you want Banner to
calculate the amount
of the subsequent
disbursement?
RFRMGMT
Change Load
(Disbursements During
Option
Period
window)
Do you want to
disburse based on the
enrollment calculated
for only classes which
have begun for the
student?
RFRMGMT
Use
(Disbursements Attending
Option
hours
window)
2-212
Based on the
A - (Award
Scheduled)
or on the
S - (Scheduled
Disbursement)
Comments
If the Disb Load Code >
Pckg Load Code field is
either D or P, this indicator
calculates the
disbursement amount. If it
is set to A, the scheduled
award for the period is
multiplied by the payment
percentages based on the
student's load and the
result is paid.
If it is set to S, the
scheduled disbursement is
multiplied by the payment
percentages based on the
student’s load and the
result is paid.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
a checked box
When the indicator is
checked, the student’s
enrollment will be
calculated based on the
number of billing/adjusted
hours which have a class
start date less than or equal
to the date the
Disbursement Process is
run.
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
The Attending Hours is
calculated for either
adjusted or billing hours
based on the disbursement
options defined on the
RPROPTS form. If the
Expected Hours is chosen
for the Disbursement
Option, the Attending
Hours will not be used.
You may also establish the
number of days prior to or
after the earliest class start
date. To allow
disbursement to pay the
student prior to the student
beginning attendance for
the calculated enrollment
load, you will enter a
positive number. To
withhold disbursement
until after the student
begins attendance, you
will enter a negative
number.
Do you want to
perform repeat course
checking which will
allow only one repeat
of a previous passed
course to be included
in the calculation of
enrollment hours for
the fund?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Are there any
institutional specific
disbursement rules for
the fund?
RORRULE
(using Rule
Type Fund
Disbursement)
May 2012
Use Repeat
Course
Checking
a check box
When checked (Yes), the
calculation of enrollment
hours will include
verification against
academic history and
registration that only one
repeat of a course
previously passed may be
counted towards
enrollment.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-213
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Do you want to apply
the same enrollment
edits that are used for
disbursement for
determination of what
can be memo’d?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Use Disb
Enroll Edits
for Memo
a checked box
When this box is checked,
it will prevent aid from
memoing if this student is
not enrolled. It will use all
of the same edits for
enrollment as the
disbursement process,
including at least half time
for loans.
If a student has
received a payment for
financial aid and
subsequently the aid
office reduces the
amount of the
student’s award, do
you want to reverse
the difference between
the paid award and the
new award amount on
the student's account?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Recoup when a checked box
Award
Reduced
Use this option to recoup
aid from the account when
the award amount is less
than the amount which has
already been paid. The
disbursement process
places a negative payment
amount on the student
account for the difference.
If a student has
received payment and
their enrollment
changes, but the
student is still eligible,
do you want to pay
that portion of
eligibility to the
student account?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Recoup
D = Disregard
Proration rules are used
when the student has no
disbursement errors.
If a student has
received payment but
now has disbursement
errors (for example,
Student Not Enrolled,
Outstanding Tracking
Requirement) and you
want to leave existing
disbursements?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Recoup
D = Disregard
Disregard will make no
adjustment to student
account.
2-214
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Recoup
B = Backout
Disbursement
Backout will reverse
credit to student account
If a student has
See Below
received a payment for
an award in a specific
period, and the student
becomes ineligible for
the award after it is
paid, do you want
Banner to back out the
payment which has
been made?
See Below
See Below
...No, do not back out
the payment that has
already been made.
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
If Ineligible
D = Disregard
Before CutOff Date
If Ineligible
After Cut-Off
Date
The disbursement process
does nothing if the student
becomes ineligible after a
payment has been made.
Ineligibility is defined as
failing any of the
disbursement validation
criteria. (You can set this
option differently based
on if it is on or before or
after your system defined
cut-off dates on the
RPROPTS form.)
...Yes, backout funds
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
If Ineligible
B = Backout
Before Cutdisbursements
Off Date
If Ineligible
After Cut-Off
Date
If the student is ineligible,
regardless of why, funds
will be backed out with the
B option.
If a student has
received payment but
now has disbursement
errors (for example,
Student Not Enrolled,
Outstanding Tracking
Requirement) and you
want to bring
disbursements for
period back to zero?
May 2012
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-215
Policy Question
If Yes, then
use form
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
...Yes, back-out the
entire amount of the
payment which has
been made for the
period.
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
If Ineligible
B = Backout
Before CutDisbursements
Off Date
If Ineligible
After Cut-Off
Date
The disbursement process
backs out the entire
amount of the payment for
the period. Ineligibility is
defined as failing any of
the disbursement
validation criteria. (You
can set this option
differently based on if it is
on or before or after your
system defined cut-off
dates on the RPROPTS
form.)
...Yes, but back-out
only the amount of the
payment which has
not been applied to a
charge.
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
If Ineligible
P = Payment not
Before CutApplied
Off Date
If Ineligible
After Cut-Off
Date
The disbursement process
backs out the amount of
the payment which has not
yet been applied to a
charge through the
application of payments
process. This option is
designed to reverse the
amount of the payment
that you could potentially
refund back to the student
without changing the
amount that you already
used to pay the charges.
If you run disbursements
online, this option puts out
a request to include the
student in the next run of
the application of
payments process. This
option only performs a
back out when it is run in
batch mode.
2-216
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Policy Question
If the student’s
enrollment changes
and they are eligible
for additional funds
and you want to apply
Proration rules to
these funds
If Yes, then
use form
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
Use Option
Set Option To
If Ineligible
D = Disregard
Before Cutchecked
Off Date
If Ineligible
After Cut-Off
Date.
Comments
If no disbursement errors
exist and disbursement
options are set to Recoup
and Disregard, proration is
applied for enrollment
changed.
Recoup when
award is
reduced.
If a student has been
selected for
verification, and the
student’s verification
has not yet been
completed, do you
want to disburse the
aid to the student
anyway?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
If a student has any
general unsatisfied
tracking requirements
on their tracking
record which prevent
disbursement, do you
want to pay the nonFederal fund anyway?
RFRMGMT
(Disbursement
Options
window)
May 2012
If Selected
for
Verification
but
Verification
is not
complete
Y = Yes, allow
disbursement
N = No do not
allow
disbursement
W = Incomplete
with a
verification
status, allow
disbursement
Override
General
Tracking
Requirements
a checked box
For students who are
selected for verification,
you may select Yes, to
allow disbursement of the
fund when the verification
process has not been
completed. If you select
No, Banner will not allow
disbursement of the fund
to the student. You may
select to allow
disbursement of the fund
pending verification for
those students where the
verification status has
been set to W (Without
documentation) on
ROAPELL by setting this
field to W-Incomplete
with verification status of
W, allow disbursement.
You can only use this
option for non-Federal
funds. (If the fund is a
Federal fund, you cannot
override general tracking
requirements which
prevent disbursement. A
general tracking
requirement is defined as
one which is not fund
specific.)
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-217
Policy Question
When you disburse the
award, is a promissory
note required for
disbursement?
Note: This option
should not be used
for Federal Perkins
and Federal Direct
Loans.
If Yes, then
use form
RFRMGMT
(Packing
options, Loan
Options sub
tab)
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Promissory
Note
Required
a checked box
If this field is checked, this
option creates promissory
note requirements for all
periods in which the
student receives the fund
when the award is
accepted in the student's
package.
The disbursement process
assures that the student has
signed (satisfied) that
requirement prior to the
payment of the fund.
Is there a period where RFRMGMT
all disbursement
Disbursement
activity should be
Locks
prevented or stopped
for a period of time?
Period
a checked box
Does the fund have a RFRMGMT
limit on how much
you can disburse to the
student based on the
actual tuition and fees,
etc.?
Detail Code
Rules
window
Valid Detail
When you disburse the
Codes defined as fund, Banner only pays an
charges
amount up to the sum of
the defined detail codes
for the period. These rules
only specify the maximum
amount you can pay to the
account and in no way
determine how to apply
the payment to specific
charges. This function
occurs in the Accounts
Receivable Application of
Payments Process.
2-218
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
When this box is checked,
all disbursement activity
for that period will be
prevented.
May 2012
If Yes, then
use form
Policy Question
Are there any fundspecific tracking
requirements that
should be created
when the fund is
awarded that should
prevent the
disbursement of this
fund?
RFRMGMT
Tracking
Requirements
Use Option
Set Option To
Comments
Tracking
Code
Appropriate
Tracking
Requirement
Code
If populated, a new
requirement will be
created when the fund is
awarded and will not
allow disbursement (setup
on RTVTREQ) of this
fund until satisfied.
Rules can be set on
RTVTREQ to prevent
memo or disbursement
until satisfied.
Note: If the fund is
removed from the
student’s award and the
requirement has not
been satisfied, it will
automatically be
removed.
Note
If an award is cancelled, declined, or reduced to a zero award amount,
the Disregard setting will be ignored and the previous payment will be

backed out.
Note
The Disregard setting will only affect awards which have been partially

disbursed.
Disbursement validation edits
The disbursement validation process checks user-defined rules, hardcoded rules, and
federal rules before Banner actually processes a payment or authorization. The following
list outlines the items that the disbursement validation process checks before processing a
payment or an authorization. The Disbursement Process (RPEDISB) process and the
Disbursement Validation Report (RPRVDIS) lists the reject messages associated with each
fund if the disbursement is not paid or authorized. The disbursement and memo reject
messages may also be viewed for a specific student using the Disbursement Results
(ROIDISB) form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-219
Reject
Number
Reject Message
Disbursement Validation Condition
2
Applicant has financial aid holds
3
Outstanding non-fund tracking
requirements
4
Outstanding fund tracking
requirements
5
Not in eligible degree program
6
Not a citizen or eligible non-citizen
7
Not Making Sat Acad Prog (All Aid)
8
Applicant in default
9
Applicant owes refund
10
Cannot get class code
Determines whether there are active holds that
prevent disbursements on the ROAHOLD form.
Checks for non-fund specific tracking requirements
that prevent disbursements on the RRAAREQ
form. (Also checks to see if the fund is supposed to
override non-fund specific tracking requirements.)
Checks fund-specific tracking requirements that
prevent disbursements for that fund on the
RRAAREQ form.
Checks that the student is enrolled in an eligible
major for the primary curriculum. The Major,
Minor, Concentration Code Validation
(STVMAJR) form defines the eligible programs for
financial aid.
Validates citizenship from RNANAxx (RCRAPP1
table) for the current record. Use the RNANAxx
form to view and update citizen information.
Checks the satisfactory academic progress of the
student. This is determined by the satisfactory
academic progress code for the highest term code
that is less than or equal to the term code where the
SAP indicator has been checked for the period (on
RORPRDS) which is being disbursed. Use the
ROASTAT form to view or update SAP codes.
Ensures that the student is not in default on a
Federal title IV loan. Banner uses the information
from NSLDS to determine if the student is in
default or owes a refund. Use RNASLxx and
RNARSxx to view and update this information.
You may also override default/refund errors by
fund and period on the period schedule window of
the award forms RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT.
Ensures that the student does not owe a refund on a
Federal title IV grant. Banner uses the information
from NSLDS to determine if the student is in
default or owes a refund. Use RNASLxx and
RNARSxx to view and update this information.
You may also override default/refund errors by
fund and period on the period schedule window of
the award forms RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT.
Unable to determine the class code for the student.
Verify the appropriate class code translations have
been established on RPRCLSS.
2-220
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Reject
Number
Reject Message
11
Cannot get federal rules
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
May 2012
Disbursement Validation Condition
Verifies the Federal Rules exist for the aid year
(RPIFEDR/RPRFEDR).
Applicant is not enrolled
If the institutional option is set to disburse using
actual enrollment (Code A - Adjusted hours or B Billing hours on RPROPTS), Banner checks for the
actual enrollment of the student. If there is no actual
enrollment, the Disbursement Load is set to 5. If the
institutional option is set to use expected
enrollment, then it uses the expected enrollment
from the RCRAPP1 table. If there is no expected
enrollment in RCRAPP1 then it uses the default
enrollment from the RPBOPTS table (Packaging
Options form- RPROPTS).
Enrollment invalid for federal fund id Verifies that the minimum required enrollment for
the fund has been reached (as defined on the Federal
Rules Table - Federal Rules Inquiry [RPIFEDR]
form).
Student has or will have a prior degree If the fund is Pell, the disbursement validation
process verifies the non-receipt of a degree by
7/1/xx in the RCRAPP1 table. Use the RNANAxx
form to view this information.
SAR received date not present
If the fund is Pell, Banner searches for the receipt of
a SAR (SAR certified date on the Applicant Pell
Grant [ROAPELL] form) if you are not auto
accepting Pell.
SAR EFC not equal to System EFC
If the fund is Pell, Banner checks that the Primary
SAR-EFC matches the Primary System-EFC. Use
the ROAPELL form to view this information
PELL eligibility has not been
If the fund is SEOG, Perkins, Stafford, the
determined
validation process checks whether or not Pell Grant
eligibility has been determined (System-EFC is not
null). Review Pell Grant eligibility information on
the RNARSxx form.
Violates fund disbursement rules
Violates user-defined fund disbursement rules
(Fund Disbursement Rule Type) on the Financial
Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
Verification required but incomplete
Determines if verification is required/completed. If
for fund
the fund disbursement rule on the Fund
Management form (RFRMGMT) is set to not
disburse with an incomplete verification and
verification is incomplete, then a disbursement will
not take place. Otherwise, the verification of the
required/completed information is ignored and the
disbursement takes place.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-221
Reject
Number
20
21
Reject Message
Disbursement Validation Condition
Fund disbursement rule cannot be
executed
Award has not been accepted
There is a problem with your fund disbursement
rule on RORRULE
Ensures that the award is in an accepted status. Use
the RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, or RPAMACC form
to update the award status.
If the fund is a Title IV Federal fund, Banner
ensures that the student and parent contributions are
official. Review student and parent contribution
information on the RNARSxx form.
Checks for the receipt of a promissory note for the
period being disbursed if the fund requires a
promissory note. Promissory notes are listed on
RPAPROM, ROASMRY, and the Additional
Requirements tab of RRAAREQ.
The disbursement process compares a student’s
enrollment load at the time of disbursement to the
enrollment load assumed at the time of packaging if
the institutional option is set to disburse using
actual enrollment. If the code for the student's load
at the time of disbursement is greater than the code
for the expected load at packaging time, the
disbursement process does not disburse the fund if
the If Disbursement Load Code greater than
Package Load Code field is set to N (No
Disbursement) on the RFRMGMT form.
During the validation of Title IV Federal funds,
Banner requires data from the General Student
Table (SBGSTDN) such as the Level Code, Major
Code and Student Type Code. Banner displays the
ERROR - BASIC STUDENT DATA message
when a general student record does not exist for the
student in the Student System.
If the fund is a Title IV Federal fund, Banner
ensures that the Official Source Indicator on the
RNARSxx form is set to 1 for Official. Check the
value of this field on the RNARSxx form.
Origination record not acknowledged.
22
Student/Parent contribution is
estimated
23
Promissory note requirement is not
satisfied
24
Disbursement load is greater than
packaging load
25
Error retrieving basic student data
26
Unofficial source for Title IV funds
27
Origination Record not acknowledged
by servicer
Promissory Note not acknowledged by
servicer
PLUS loan requires approved credit
check
No Authorization for EFT
Disbursement
28
31
32
2-222
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Promissory Note not acknowledged.
PLUS credit check is not in approved status.
Review on RPALORG
No authorization for EFT disbursement.
May 2012
Reject
Number
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
43
44
45
46
47
May 2012
Reject Message
Disbursement Validation Condition
Loan Status is Held/Inactive - No Disb The loan status is on hold or inactive, no
disbursements.
Loan Award Status is Cancel/Decline - Award status for loan has been canceled or declined
No Disb
without disbursements.
Award not Disbursed - SAR C-Flags
Award was not disbursed; SAR C flags exist.
exist
Not Making Sat Acad Prog
The student is not making satisfactory academic
(Institutional)
progress for an institutional program. Review the
student’s status in the Satisfactory Academic
Progress window of the Applicant Status
(ROASTAT) form.
Not Making Sat Acad Prog (State Aid) The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for a state program. Review the student’s
status in the Satisfactory Academic Progress
window of the Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form.
Not Making Sat Acad Prog (Title IV)
The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for a Title IV funded program. Review the
student’s status in the Satisfactory Academic
Progress window of the Applicant Status
(ROASTAT) form.
Not Making Sat Acad Prog (Federal) The student is not making satisfactory academic
progress for a Federal program. Review the
student’s status in the Satisfactory Academic
Progress window of the Applicant Status
(ROASTAT) form.
Disburse Rule = (N)ever;
On RPROPTS the Pay Grant if Disb Amt differs
Disbursement Zeroed
from Award Amt is set to Never Disburse.
Level/Period Data Missing from
The educational level of the student does not exist
RORCRHR (ROAINST)
in the Credit Hours window of ROAINST for the
period being disbursed. Verify the appropriate
level/period record exists.
Disbursement Amount is Greater than The disbursement amount is greater than the loan
Loan Amount
amount. The indicator to prevent disbursement if
the disbursement amount is greater than the loan
amount is checked on RPRLOPT for the fund.
Charges have not been accepted
Charges have not been accepted. If the institutional
option is set to not disburse unless charges have
been accepted, Banner checks to see if the student's
charges have been accepted.
COD rejected disbursement record
The disbursement record was rejected by COD.
Disbursement Requires Approval from Disbursement requires approval from COD.
COD
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-223
Reject
Number
48
49
50
51
53
54
55
56
57
58
Reject Message
Disbursement Validation Condition
Disbursement Reference No. System
Generated or MRR blocked
A previous DL disbursement number is
undisbursed
A disbursement with earlier date is
undisbursed
Pell not disbursed, Pell award percent
not defined
Disb not processed - Sum of
disbursements exceeds Endorser Amt
Disbursement not processed Borrower's PLUS MPN not accepted
Award period does not exist in aid
period
NSLDS Indicates Aggregate Limits
Exceeded
Student required to complete Perkins
MPN
Disc Stmt has not been requested from
COD or printed by school
No hours currently attending
Disbursement reference number 91-99 or MRR
block.
A previous Direct Loan disbursement number is
undisbursed.
A disbursement with an earlier date is undisbursed.
Pell percent must be defined on either RFRASCH
or RFRDEFA
You cannot disburse more than the amount
endorsed
Borrower's MPN must be accepted on the Direct
Loan Origination (RPALORG) form.
Check your aid period setup on RFRDEFA/
RFRASCH.
Check RNASLxx for aggregate overages
Perkins not complete on RRAAREQ
The disclosure statement must be requested from
COD or printed by school
You have RFRMGMT set to disburse only on
attending hours. Attendance has not yet started per
ROAENRL.
Attending hours invalid for Federal
Not enough class hours have started per ROAENRL
Fund ID
for this fund.
Attending hours < packaging hours
Attendance hours are less that the hours at which
student was packaged.
Must have a Pell disbursement for this Pell must have disbursed in order to disburse this
aid year
fund.
Not a citizen
The student has indicated that they are not an
eligible citizen nor eligible non-citizen
Requires rigorous high school program Program on ROAHSDT must be eligible
Must be associate or baccalaureate
Degree not aid eligible for ACG
degree
Major does not qualify for SMART
Major does not qualify.
grant
Graduate class level invalid for Parent Student has indicated they are a graduate level.
PLUS loan
Undergraduate class level invalid for Student indicated they are an undergraduate level
Graduate PLUS loan
Must be baccalaureate degree
Must be in a baccalaureate degree for SMART grant
59
60
61
62
63
65
67
68
69
70
71
2-224
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Reject
Number
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
100
999
Reject Message
Disbursement Validation Condition
RFRBASE A/R detail code for fund is
invalid or inactive
RPRLOPT A/R detail code for fund is
invalid or inactive
Award violates federal fund ID limits
Detail Code is invalid or is inactive in A/R
Award invalid; Student has received
higher grade level ACG/SMART
Major does not qualify for TEACH
Degree does not qualify for TEACH
Student does not have a valid ATS
Disbursement violates federal fund ID
limits for enrollment level
Major not eligible for 5th Year SMART
grant
Class level invalid for TEACH level
Detail code on RPRLOPT is either invalid or
inactive in A/R
Award exceeds the Federal Fund ID limits. Review
the fund limits on RPIFEDR
Cannot receive award, as higher level was received.
See RPRMAJR. Teach column must be checked.
See RPRDEGR. Teach column must be checked.
Agreement To Serve (ATS) must be accepted.
Review RPATATS for status of ATS
Check fund limits on RPIFEDR
See RPRMAJR. 5th year Smart column must be
checked.
Class level does not match level on RFRMGMT for
fund.
Pell disbursement not allowed after
Pell disbursements may not be made after the
crossover cutoff date
crossover cutoff date. Review date on RPROPTS
Fund has been locked
The disbursement validation process checks that
sufficient funds are available to process the
disbursement. If these funds are not available,
Banner places a lock on the fund for the period. You
must add more money to the fund and manually
remove the lock on the Disbursement Locks
window of the Fund Management (RFRMGMT)
form.
Fatal disbursement validation error for Review disbursement (RPEDISB) output.
award; see disb report.
Note
If the fund is associated with detail codes on the Detail Code Rules
window of the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form, Banner determines
whether or not the student has those detail codes on his accounts
receivable record for the period. The process may reduce the amount of
the authorization/disbursement so that it does not exceed the sum of the
detail codes on the student's account that are associated with the fund. 
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-225
Other disbursement considerations
Regulatory compliance for Stafford disbursements
Banner disburses all financial aid based on the enrollment option selected on the
RPROPTS form. You decide whether to disburse aid based on expected enrollment,
billing hours, or adjusted hours. Along with this option is the decision of whether to freeze
hours at a specific point in time. The decision to capture hours at a specific time, most
likely at the census date, allows your institution the opportunity to set a constant
enrollment load for the determination of all aid disbursements, without continually
recouping monies every time a student drops a class.
• In the case of the Stafford loans, the actual enrollment of the student must be
checked at the time of disbursement — requiring the use of Student system hours.
However, the process must take into account the consortium students who will not
have these hours for the periods in which they are in a consortium agreement.
Banner Student enrollment hours are maintained as records in the SFBETRM table.
The student could be attending another institution and should still get paid by the
local school.
The Consortium Indicator field on the ROAENRL form allows your institution to
flag a student as a consortium student for any one period. By setting the consortium
indicator flag, the Disbursement Process always checks the RORENRL hours for
all funds, and does not check for the flag for Charges Accepted.
Disbursement edits for loans to match edits for other
funds
• The Stafford disbursement process ensures that the award amount is not less than
the disbursement amount. No other funds disburse more than the award amount.
However, since these are loans and it is possible to have loans without awards, the
edit checks the loan amount instead of the award amount.
In those cases where you review this loan disbursement and determine that you still
want to disburse this loan, an override can be added on a loan disbursement by
disbursement basis to allow this to occur.
• There is also an edit for allowing you to determine whether to disburse or not when
the Package Load is greater than the Disbursement Load.
One of the fields in the Aid Year Specific Data - Disbursement Options window on
the RFRMGMT form, If Disbursement Load Code greater than Package Load
Code, functions and description for option D D - Do not Prorate to D - Disburse
100%. The option is effective for loan funds for the options of D - Disburse 100% and
N - Do not Disburse.
2-226
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Memo
This allows those funds, which have been disbursed in a period, and then for some reason
the disbursement is completely recouped, to allow that fund to continue to be a memo as
long as it meets the conditions for a memo. This can be set based upon an option on the
RPROPTS form.
Loan authorization to net returned amounts
Banner lets you create a return check record (sequence 2) on the RPALDSB form, prior to
having disbursed the loan proceeds in the sequence 1 record. This was not a problem, as
many times it was known prior to the first disbursement that some of the monies would
need to be returned to the lender due to some change in eligibility.
However, when determining the amount of the loan to display as an authorization record,
the disbursement process only checked the sequence 1 transaction to determine the
amount to authorize. When, in fact it should have netted the amounts together from all
sequence records that met the conditions to allow authorization.
Using enrollment disbursement edits for funds in
memo status
Banner makes use of enrollment disbursement edits for funds in memo status. The
resulting memo funds are posted only in the amount to be paid. Banner’s enrollment
disbursement edits ensure that aid awards are applied accordingly, regardless of a
student’s enrollment status. Use the Memo Actual Loan Amount option on the Loan
Options (RPRLOPT) form to control this.
Recognition of pell payment cell to disbursement
process
An option is available to allow Pell to disburse if the SAR EFC and System EFC differ but both are within the same Payment Cell. You may set this option on RPROPTS.
Part-Time proration
The disbursement process compares a student’s enrollment load at the time of
disbursement to the enrollment load assumed at the time of packaging if the institutional
option is set to disburse using actual enrollment.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-227
• If the code for the student’s load at disbursement time is less than or equal to the
code for the expected load at packaging time, the disbursement process will
process the amount packaged for the period without any adjustments.
• If the code for the student’s load code at disbursement time is greater than the code
for the expected load at packaging time, the disbursement process performs one of
the following options.
N
No Disbursement (do not process any disbursement for the fund for the
period),
D
Disburse 100% (process the amount packaged for the period and do not
prorate the amount), or
P
Prorate (prorate the amount packaged for the period by multiplying the
packaged amount by a user specified percentage).
The choice to use one of the preceding options is determined by your institution on a
fund-by-fund basis.
The enrollment code in this comparison is the code that means full-time (1), three-quartertime (2), half-time (3), less than half-time (4), and no enrollment at all (5). The code for a
student enrolled on a half-time basis (3) is greater than a student enrolled on a full-time
basis (1). This is an important distinction since it is the opposite of when you compare the
number of credit hours for which a student is enrolled.
For example, if you package a student under the assumption of full-time enrollment (code
1) and that student is actually full-time at the time of the disbursement (code 1),
disbursements will process the amount of the award that was packaged for the period
without any proration because the two enrollment codes are equal. If you package the
student under the assumption of half-time enrollment (code 3) and that student actually
enrolls as a full-time student (code 1), disbursements processes the amount of the award
that was packaged for the period without any proration because the disbursement code (1)
is less than the packaged code (3).
However, if you package the student as a full-time student (code 1) and that student
actually enrolls as a half-time student (code 3), the disbursements process uses one of the
three options as stipulated by your institution for the fund because the disbursement code
is greater than the packaged code. The three options are N - do not disburse anything (and
possibly back out any previous disbursements for the fund and period), D - disburse 100%
the amount of the award and allow a disbursement, or P - prorate the amount of the
disbursement by multiplying the scheduled amount for the disbursement by the proration
percentage entered on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form based on the student’s
actual enrollment load.
The Disbursement Load Code greater than Package Load Code field on the Fund
Management (RFRMGMT) form collects your option if the disbursement load is greater
than the packaged load. The Packaging Load field on the Award Maintenance
(RPAAWRD) form and the Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form identifies how a
2-228
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
particular fund was packaged for a specific period. The packaged load field for each
period in the student’s schedule initially defaults to the load you select for the calculation
of Pell Grants. The Packaging Options (RPROPTS) form establishes this rule. The
defaulted load is derived from either the student’s expected enrollment load as reported on
the need analysis application or the default estimated enrollment on the Packaging Options
form.
You must remember to manually change the packaged load indicator for the appropriate
period and fund whenever you change the student’s award based on a different enrollment
status. For example, assume that John was originally packaged as a full-time student
(packaged load = 1). At the time of the disbursement, John is enrolled as a half-time
student (disbursement load = 3). If the option set on RFRMGMT was set to N (Do not
disburse), John would not receive a disbursement from the fund since the disbursement
load is greater than the packaged load. Assume that you now access the Budget form and
recalculate John’s budget as a half-time student, and later access the Award form to
repackage John with half-time awards based on a half-time need. If you fail to also change
the packaged load to a code 3, John will still not get the half-time awards just packaged
since the disbursement load is still greater than the packaged load. The half-time awards
will be paid when you change the packaged load to a code 3 since the disbursement load is
now equal to the packaged load.
Memos processed after scheduled disbursement date
If the calendar date is past the scheduled disbursement date and the student was not
eligible for a real payment to the account because the payment fails one or more of the
disbursement validation rules, the student can receive a memo. If you do not want to
process memos after the scheduled disbursement date, you can set the memo expiration
date to be the same as the scheduled disbursement date.
VA Chapter 30 - prior to the 2010-2011 aid year
A provision of the 1998 reauthorization of Title IV financial aid is the treatment of VA
Chapter 30 and AmeriCorps Educational Benefits in determining subsidized student loan
eligibility. This provision requires that Chapter 30 and AmeriCorps benefits be excluded
as resources when determining eligibility for subsidized loans.
The maximum exclusion is equal to the amount of the subsidized loan, but the budget can
never be exceeded. Although these benefits must be excluded in the determination of a
subsidized loan, they must still be used as resources when determining other federal needbased aid, such as SEOG, FWS, and Perkins Loans. If they so choose, schools may award
other federal aid first utilizing 100% of the above benefits as resources.
The award validation for a Stafford Subsidized loan checks the amount entered in the
Subsidized Loan Exclusion Amount field and uses the amount to automatically calculate
the amount of Subsidized Stafford loan for the student. Enter the exact amount of VA
Chapter 30 or Americorps benefits in the Subsidized Loan Exclusion Amount field on
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-229
the Packaging Group tab of the RPAAWRD form at any time prior to awarding the
Stafford Subsidized loan to ensure the correct calculation.
Note
This provision does not affect unsubsidized or PLUS loans.

If other federal aid is awarded, the order of the awards will affect the amount that can be
considered as a subsidized loan.
Voiding excess payments for students no longer
eligible
Banner has a fund disbursement option to void a financial aid payment previously paid to
a student who is now ineligible for the fund. The options on the Fund Management
(RFRMGMT) form are to:
• Back out the full amount of the payment.
• Disregard the fact that the student is now ineligible (do nothing).
• Payment Not Applied - void the amount of the payment that has not yet been
applied to a charge through the application of payments process.
The last option is designed to cancel the amount of the award that is to be paid back
directly to the student without changing the amount that has already been used to pay the
student’s bill.
When the Back out option is used, a reversal for the full amount of previous financial aid
payments for the fund is generated. When the Payment Not Applied option is used, the
disbursement process calculates the total of previous financial aid payments for the fund
which have not yet been applied to Accounts Receivable charges, and generates a reverse
payment for that amount. If disbursements are run online from the Student Payment form,
the form puts out a request for the student to be included in the next run of the application
of payments process. If the fund disbursement option is set to B or D on RFRMGMT, the
requested function works as usual when disbursements are run online or in batch.
Disbursement validation reject messages
You can run online disbursements from the Applicant Immediate Process (ROAIMMP)
form in the Financial Aid System, or from the Student Payment (TSASPAY) form in the
Accounts Receivable module of the Student System. Whenever you run the disbursement
process, the program creates a log file with information about the execution of the
program. The online disbursement process places messages in the log file
(RPEDISB.log) for funds that could not be disbursed or to see the reject messages online,
using the Disbursement Results (ROIDISB) form.
2-230
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Disbursement reports generated by disbursement
process
The Disbursement Report (RPBDISB) is created if you enter Y for the Print Report
parameter. No report is created when you enter N for the Print Report parameter. You can
sort this report either by student name or ID. The sort option is selected via the Disb
Report Sort parameter. You enter N for name sorting or I for ID sorting. That report prints
the period in the heading of all pages and includes a special message in the comment
column to indicate if the amount disbursed was different from the amount awarded.
Other disbursement reports include the Student Award and Disbursement Report
(RPRAWDB) which prints the summary by fund of the accepted amount, memoed
amount, authorized amount, and disbursement amount, as well as the Applicant
Disbursement Report (RPRADSB), which provides detailed information on applicant
disbursements.
Final Disbursement - optional processing
Final Disbursement processing can be used for end of year or end of period clean up. In
addition there may be times that you want to finalize disbursements for an individual
student; for example, a student who has been processed for Return of Title IV funds.
Final Disbursement processing can only be used in batch and not from the on-line forms.
A disbursement can only become “final” when it has already been paid using
disbursement validation. Once the disbursement has been finalized for a fund, the
disbursement process will not automatically adjust the amount paid. It must be manually
updated at that point on the disbursement tab of RPAAWRD.
Running the Disbursement Process in Final Mode will delete all remaining Memos and
Authorizations that exist for the period entered in the parameter. It will also set the
Finalized indicator on the options tab of the Award Schedule tab of the RPAAWRD form
to Y.
Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing
“Listener” mode online processing performance
enhancement using Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing
Note
Oracle Pipes and Advanced Queuing are currently only supported on
Unix platforms.
May 2012

Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-231
Several commonly used immediate processing jobs support a mode of operation called
“listener” mode that can substantially improve performance. These jobs are:
• Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
• Need Analysis Process (RNEINxx)
• Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL)
The performance improvement is achieved by running these jobs continuously, in the
background, in “listener” mode. When configured this way, these jobs are always running
and available to process immediate requests from forms such as ROAIMMP.
Note
Batch, or job submission instances of these jobs still run as normal, and

are not affected by this configuration.
Two methods of operation are provided for running and communicating with jobs
operating in “listener” mode:
• Oracle Pipes
• Oracle Advanced Queuing, with support for Oracle Real Application Clusters
(RAC)
Note
Support for Oracle Advanced Queuing requires, at minimum, Banner
General 8.3.

What is the difference between Oracle Pipes and
Oracle Advanced Queuing?
Both technologies provide bidirectional communication between processes that can
connect to an Oracle database. Oracle Pipes only provides this capability within a single
instance of a running database. This does not provide the necessary level of
communication for databases using Oracle’s RAC technology, where multiple instances of
Oracle all service the same database.
Oracle Advanced Queuing makes it possible to communicate between multiple instances
of Oracle when using Oracle’s RAC technology. Even though Oracle Advanced Queuing
was provided by Oracle to support the RAC technology, you do not need to have a RAC
database installation to use Oracle Advanced Queuing.
Note
Oracle Advanced Queuing is the recommended configuration for new
installations, regardless of whether your site uses Oracle’s RAC
technology.
2-232
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing

May 2012
Tip
Up to and including the Banner Financial Aid 8.12 release, RNEINxx jobs
are not compatible with Oracle Advanced Queuing. These jobs can,

however, be used in “listener” mode.
Configuring supported processes to use Oracle Pipes/
Advanced Queuing
Jobs that support “listener” mode operation can have multiple copies running
simultaneously. Typically, two running “listeners” is adequate. However, for a higher
volume immediate processing needs, additional, simultaneous, “listener” processes can be
started to reduce response time.
Use the following steps to configure “listener” mode jobs to use Oracle Pipes or Oracle
Advanced Queuing:
Note
To configure jobs for Oracle Pipes “listener” mode, perform steps 1 and 2,
for each job To configure jobs for Oracle Advanced Queuing “listener”
mode, perform steps 1 through 3, for each job.
Once you have configured jobs for “listener” mode operation, be sure to
start the “listeners” by running RNRPINI. Refer to Starting and Stopping
Listener Mode Processes, later in this section, for additional information.
Note
The RNRPINI process is not designed to function in a Windows NT or
Linux environment to use Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing.

1. Each job that supports “listener” mode operation must be configured on form
GTVSDAX. To do this, update or create a row for each job you wish to configure for
“listener” mode operation.
GTVSDAX Field
Value
Code
One of the jobs supported for Pipes/Advanced Queuing:
• RPEDISB
• RNEINxx RNEINxx (RNEINxx jobs are not
currently supported for Advanced Queuing)
Group
External Code
May 2012
• RPEPELL
PIPE PROCESS
A number indicating how many simultaneous listening
copies of the job to start. Enter 0 to disable listener
mode operation.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-233
In the following screen sample, the RPEDISB process is configured to start two
“listeners”.
2. Immediate processing via jobs running in “listener” mode do not generate output in
the same way as they do when run from job submission. Instead of producing output
in uniquely named files for each run of the job, “listener” mode jobs concatenate their
output onto a single file. This can make it difficult for users to identify the results of
their particular immediate run of a process. To resolve this problem, “listener” mode
jobs can be configured to store their output directly to the database, so that users can
review this output via the Saved Output Review (GJIREVO) form.
Note
This step is optional. However, it is recommended to enable database
output for “listener” mode jobs.

To configure a “listener” mode job to store its output directly to the database, you
must update or create a row (for the job) on the GTVSDAX form.
GTVSDAX Field
Value
Code
One of the jobs supported for Pipes/Advanced Queuing:
• RPEDISB
• RNEINxx RNEINxx (RNEINxx jobs are not
currently supported for Advanced Queuing)
Group
External Code
• RPEPELL
FINAID LOG TO DB
Y (Yes) or N (No)
Enter a Y in this field to configure the listener mode job
to store its output directly to the database each time it is
run for immediate processing.
In the following screen sample, the RPEDISB process is configured to store its output
directly to the database for “listener” mode immediate processing.
2-234
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3. If you are using Oracle’s Pipe technology to run your immediate processing jobs in
“listener” mode, this step is not required.
If you are using Oracle’s Advanced Queuing technology to run your immediate
processing jobs in “listener” mode, you must also enable the Advanced Queuing
queues on the GTVSDAX form.
Each job must be configured on GTVSDAX to enable a send and a return queue. To
enable these queues, you must update or create a corresponding row (for the job) for
each queue on the GTVSDAX form.
GTVSDAX Field
Value
Code
Group
AQ4PIPES
One of the jobs supported for Pipes/Advanced Queuing:
• RPEDISB
External Code
• RPEPELL
Y (Yes) or N (No)
Enter a Y in this field to enable this “send” queue for use
with the corresponding “listener mode” process.
GTVSDAX Field
Value
Code
Group
AQ4PIPES
One of the jobs supported for Pipes/Advanced Queuing:
• RPEDISB_RTN
External Code
• RPEPELL_RTN
Y (Yes) or N (No)
Enter a Y in this field to enable this “return” queue for
use with the corresponding “listener mode” process.
In the following screen sample, the RPEDISB process is configured to run in
“listener” mode, using Oracle Advanced Queuing.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-235
Warning
Both queues must be enabled for each job or Oracle Pipes will be used

instead.
Starting and stopping “listener” mode Processes
Regardless of whether you use Oracle Pipes or Oracle Advanced Queuing, you are
required to manage “listener” mode processes with the RNRPINI process. The RNRPINI
process is a small program designed to be run from the command line by your site’s
administrator(s). The RNRPINI process allows an administrator to start and stop Financial
Aid “listener” mode processes.
Note
The RNRPINI process is not designed to function in a Windows NT or
Linux environment to use Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing.

Starting “listeners”
• Start “listeners” by running RNRPINI with a parameter of START.
• Example: rnrpini user/password START
• (For UNIX) rnrpini.shl userid START
When prompted, enter the appropriate password.
Note
A single run of RNRPINI will start or stop all “listeners” for each process
configured for “listener” mode operation (as specified on GTVSDAX with
an External Code > 0). Refer to Configuring Supported Processes to use
Oracle Pipes/Advanced Queuing for details on configuring jobs in

“listener” mode).
2-236
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Note
The userid can be any valid User ID that currently executes RPEPELL,
RNEINxx, or RPEDISB. The userid also needs select, insert, and
update permission to the GUBOUTP table, and insert permission to the
GUROUTP table. Finally, the userid does not need to be a DBA or

system level login.
Stop “listeners”
• Stop listener mode processes by running RNRPINI with a parameter of STOP
• Example: rnrpini user/password STOP
• For UNIX) rnrpini.shl userid STOP
When prompted, enter the appropriate password.
Configuring time-out for “listener” mode processes
Processes running in “listener” mode will operate, waiting for message, for a pre-defined
amount of time (in seconds). If no processing message is received within the specified
time-out window, the job will halt (stopping the “listener”). Previously, this time-out
window was fixed at 4 days (345600 seconds). However, this value is now configurable,
on a per-job basis, from the GTVSDAX form.
To configure this time-out value, create or update a row corresponding to the process.
GTVSDAX Field
Value
Code
Group
IDLEWAIT
One of the jobs supported for Pipes/Advanced Queuing:
• RPEDISB
External Code
• RPEPELL
345600 (default – 4 days)
Enter any number, in seconds, you wish to use for the
idle time-out value for the job.
The following screen sample, shows a RPEDISB process configuration that is set to wait
for up to 30 days without a message before halting.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-237
Default/refund processing
Levels of default/refund administration
1. Award Packaging
When you execute the Award Validation process either through automatic packaging
(online or batch), or manual online packaging, Banner checks to ensure that when you
package Federal monies, or non-Federal funds which have a Federal Fund ID of GTIV
(General Title IV) associated with them, that the student is not in default on a Federal
Title IV Loan, or owes a refund on a Federal grant.
If a student is in default, or owes a refund as indicated from information received from
NSLDS, the award validation process fails and any funds in which the default criteria
is invoked is not packaged.
2. Award Disbursement
When you execute the disbursement validation process in either online or batch
mode, Banner checks to ensure that when you disburse Federal funds, or non-Federal
funds which have a Federal Fund ID of GTIV (General Title IV) associated with
them, that the student is not in default on a Federal Title IV Loan, or owes a refund on
a Federal grant.
If a student is in default, or owes a refund as indicated from information received from
NSLDS, the disbursement validation process fails and an error message is provided.
Sources of default/refund information
System Use of Data: Both the award validation and disbursement validation processes use
the default/refund information reported from NSLDS data when Banner awards and
disburses Federal funds, or when it awards and disburses non-Federal funds in which
Federal rules apply (the Federal Fund ID equals GTIV).
1. Incoming ISIR records
This data is reported to the institution through the ISIR. It is maintained in the Banner
database and is accessed using the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form, the
Federal Match Indicators window, in the Title IV Match Indicator drop-down list and
on the Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) form.
2. NSLDS Transfer Student Monitoring and Financial Aid History Files
• The Transfer Student Monitoring (TSM) Alert files received when a request for
monitoring has been sent to NSLDS are maintained in the database and accessed
using the Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) form. You may also submit a request to
NSLDS to receive a Financial Aid History record in electronic format for a student
which also will be maintained in the database and accessed using the Student Loan
2-238
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Data (RNASLxx) form. Both of these types of files will contain the most recent
default and refund information on the student.
• Data Storage: Banner stores Federal Match indicators for a student in the student’s
Applicant NSLDS Table Part 1 in the RCRLDS4_MATCH_IND column. The value of
this column is displayed on both the Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) form and the
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form, the Federal Match Indicators window.
• Maintaining and Overriding Default/Refund status: There are three options for
overriding a default or refund status which has been received. You may create a
manual NSLDS record on Student Loan Data (RNASLxx) form and update the
NSLDS Match indicator as well as any other data necessary. This new record will
become the current record and will be used by the award and disbursement
validation processes. You may optionally update the NSLDS Override indicator on
Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form.
• Match Indicators window to override all tests or specific tests for eligibility used in
the award and disbursement validation process. Both of the award forms, Award
Maintenance (RPAAWRD) and Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT), allow you to
override NSLDS default and/or refund information as well as the limit for Federal
loans on a period basis by using the NSLDS Override indicator.
Title IV refund/repayment process
Please see the Title IV Handbook for information on this process.
Pell grant award and disbursement
processing
• You determine in the Packaging Options section on the Packaging Options
(RPROPTS) form whether to package with the estimated enrollment reported by
the applicant or to package an estimated Pell with the default enrollment for all
applicants.
• You can run the Pell Calculation Process (RPEPELL) by itself, either online or in a
batch, or as an option when running the Packaging Process RPEPCKG in batch.
When you initially package Pell Grants for the year, run the batch Pell Grant
Calculation Process after you perform Batch FM Need Analysis calculations and
budget assignments since the creation of the Pell Expected Family Contribution
(EFC) and Pell Budget in batch does not automatically trigger a Pell Grant
Calculation.
• There are many fields in the database which impact a student’s eligibility for a Pell
Grant. Therefore, when the information in one of those fields changes, Banner
performs the routine to calculate the amount and validate the student’s eligibility
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-239
for a Pell Grant. When any of the following database fields change, Banner
performs RPEPELL, the Pell calculation and award validation routine.
Fields that trigger a Pell when changed include:
Form
Field/Column Name
Need Analysis Result
(RNARSxx)
Primary Calculation Sys EFC
Applicant Budget
(RBAABUD)
Aid Period
Supplemental Need Analysis
(RNASUxx)
Expected Enrollment Status for the Yr
Need Analysis (RNANAxx)
Prior Bachelor's Degree
Class Code
Citiz. Status
Applicant Pell Grant
(ROAPELL)
SAR Certified Date
• You cannot add or accept a Pell award manually in the student’s aid package. If
you need to delete the Pell award from the student’s aid package, you must first set
the dollar amount to zero.
• During the disbursement process, the Pell Grant is recalculated based on the option
to disburse using an actual enrollment. If the award is calculated differently at that
time, the award amount is not updated. The new Pell award will only be used
during the disbursement process.
Note
If the Pell award is locked in the student's package, it is not recalculated

during disbursement.
• A Pell award will never be disbursed if the student is picked for verification, a SAR
EFC has not been received, and verification is not performed.
• Set the Equity Fund field to Y on the Funds Management (RFRMGMT) form for
the Pell fund code.
• If the Pell fund code is already included in the student’s package and is
recalculated to a zero (0) amount, it will remain in the package with a 0 dollar
amount unless the setting for Delete Award if Zero is checked on the Grant
Options window of the Packaging Options (RPROPTS) form. This amount is also
included in the student’s award letter. If the Pell Grant is initially calculated as a
zero amount, it is not normally added to the student’s package at all. The exception
to this is when the SAP calculation or NSLDS default, overpayment or limit tests
result in some or all term awards being zero. In this case, the award is created with
2-240
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
a zero amount so that the individual term errors can be overridden on the Award
Maintenance (RPAAWRD) or Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) forms.
• Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form considerations include:
• If you check the Auto Accept indicator for an award, Banner automatically
changes an offered status for a fund to an accepted status.
• The Change Load During Period, Payment Percent for Three Quarter
Load, Payment Percent for Half Load, and Payment Percent for less
than Half Load Disbursement Option indicators do not apply to Pell Grant
processing.
• The Pell Grant Disbursement Process does use the If Ineligible Before Cut
off Date, If Ineligible After Cut off Date, If Selected for Verification but
is Not Complete, and Recoup When Award Reduced indicators.
• If you need to manually change a Pell grant amount for the year:
• Change the award offered/accepted amounts on the Award Schedule section
of the Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form or the Package Maintenance
(RPAAPMT) form.
• Lock the fund in the Fund Award section of the RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, or
the ROARMAN form.
Note
The award amount is never changed by the disbursement process.

Note
The Pell fund is the only fund in which the disbursement process can
disburse more than the scheduled amount.

• Applicant Pell Grant (ROAPELL) form considerations include:
• The Scheduled Award is based on the student’s Pell budget and the full
year, full time Pell Grant Payment Schedule that the RPEPELL process uses.
• The Expected Disbursement prorates the amount in the Scheduled Award
field if the student is a part-time or part-year student based on the student’s
enrollment load.
• The Amount Paid to Date field indicates the Pell payments that have
already been disbursed for the student.
State grant award processing
In many states, the state grant program is handled by a state financial aid agency. This
agency processes state grant applications, calculates award amounts, and disburses the
funds directly to students or to schools for payment to students. Though the amount of the
grant is calculated by the state agency, financial aid offices may need to estimate the award
amount prior to the actual awarding by the state grant agency. Since this award can affect
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-241
the student’s need for other aid, aid officers typically try to estimate the amount of the
state grant prior to its official calculation by the state grant agency.
Although it is disbursable, schools would not want to disburse an estimated award. They
need to make sure that only the official amount calculated by the state grant agency for the
period is disbursed.
These concerns can be handled by Banner in the following manner:
1. On the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form, set up the fund accepted award status
code to be something such as ESTD (Estimated). The Disburse indicator should be
set to System. The Memo Credit indicator can be set either way, and the Automatic
Acceptance indicator can be either checked or unchecked.
2. On the Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form, create a disbursement rule
that says:
RPRAWRD_AWST_CODE = CERT (Award Status Code = CERT)
This will prevent the fund from being paid or authorized unless the award status code
is intentionally changed to CERT (a code meaning accepted on RTVAWST). The
normal processes of awarding or accepting the award would post different status codes
so the fund could be packaged and memoed, but not disbursed.
3. When the official award is known, then the actual amount is posted, replacing the
estimated award, and the status code is changed to CERT. The award is then eligible
for disbursement and only the actual/official amount will be paid.
If actual/official state grant award data is received electronically, a customized process
to post the data to the student’s award record (RPRAWRD) and award by period
record (RPRATRM) can be developed. A customized process should also change the
award status code to identify the amount as the official amount and make it
disbursable.
Resources, contracts, and exemptions
Contracts
Note
To interface third-party payments from Banner Student to Banner
Financial Aid, the Interface Third Party Cont indicator must be checked
on the Packaging Options (RPROPTS) form for those aid year you wish

to interface.
2-242
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
1. Contract Authorization (TSACONT).
To interface contracts, the contract must first exist on SPRIDEN as a Non-Person
record and on TSACONT for authorization. The Person Authorization window of
TSACONT provides for the authorization of contracts for specific students.
2. Third Party Contract Rules (RPRCONT).
Define the valid third party contracts which will be in effect for the specified terms.
Estimate a standard amount for each contract within the defined terms.
Note
On RPROPTS, if the Always Use Estimated field is checked, then the
estimated amount will always be used as a resource for students
authorized for the contract. If the Always Use Estimated field is not
checked, the estimated amount will be used until the actual amount is
available from Banner Accounts Receivable.
If the Assume Full Time field is checked, the full estimated amount will
always be used regardless of estimated enrollment. If Assume Full-Time
is set to N, then the percentage specified will be used to prorate the
estimated contract amount.
RPIARPY – The Contracts and Exemptions Payment Inquiry form allows
you to view Third Party Contracts that have been applied to the student's
account.
RPAARSC – The Exemptions and Contracts window of the Resource
Maintenance form enables you to view a student's exemptions and third

party contracts for an aid year.
Exemptions
Note
To interface Exemptions from Banner Student to Banner Financial Aid,
the Interface Exemptions indicator must be checked on the Packaging
Options (RPROPTS) form for the Aid Year in which you want to

interface.
1. Exemption Authorization (TSAEXPT).
To interface exemptions, the exemption must be set up on TSAEXPT in Banner
Student. The Person Authorization window of this form provides for the authorization
of exemptions to specific students.
2. Exemption Rules (RPREXPT).
Define the valid exemption codes which will be interfaced for specified terms.
Estimate a standard amount for that exemption within the defined terms.
• On RPROPTS, if the Always Use Estimated field is checked, the estimated
amount of exemption will always be used as a resource for students
authorized for exemptions. If the Always Use Estimated field is not
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-243
checked, then the estimated amounts will be used as a resource until the
actual amount is available from Banner Accounts Receivable.
• The estimated amount can be prorated based on estimated enrollment. If the
Assume Full Time field is checked, the full estimated amount will be used.
If the Assume Full Time field is unchecked, then the percentage specified
will be used to prorate the estimated amount of the exemption.
• RPIARPY – Contracts and Exemptions Payment Inquiry form allows you to
view exemptions that have been paid to the student’s account.
• RPAARSC – The Exemptions and Contracts window of the Resource
Maintenance enables you to view a student’s exemptions and third party
contracts for an aid year.
Excluding contracts and exemptions
The Higher Education Reconciliation Act of 2005, HERA, changed the way Coverdell
education savings accounts, prepaid tuition plans offered by a State, and qualified tuition
programs (known as 529 prepaid tuition plans and 529 savings plans) were treated in the
determination of a student’s financial aid package.
Previously, prepaid tuition plans were treated as an adjustment to the student’s cost of
education, estimated financial aid, or as a resource. Many institutions used Third Party
Contract processing in the Accounts Receivable system of Banner to process students who
benefited from these plans. By using the Third Party Contract process, the benefits
received by the student were then reported as a resource for financial aid and properly
reduced the student’s need.
The changes made by HERA require that prepaid tuition plans no longer be treated as
adjustments to the cost of education, estimated financial aid, or resources. All qualified
educational benefits or education savings accounts are now treated as assets of the owner
of the plan in the calculation of the student’s EFC, unless the plan is owned by a
dependent student.
• Even if the beneficiary of the plan is someone other than the student (for example,
a sibling) it is counted as an asset belonging to the plan’s owner.
• The value (refund value for 529 prepaid tuition accounts) of all plans owned by the
parent of a dependent applicant must be reported as an asset of the parent.
• The value (refund value for 529 prepaid tuition accounts) of all plans owned by the
independent student applicant or spouse must be reported as an asset of the student.
• If the dependent student owns the plan, it is not included on the FAFSA nor is it
included as an adjustment to the COA or considered as a resource or estimated
financial assistance.
2-244
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Specific resources identified as a qualified tuition program must be excluded from being
considered as resources when they have been processed using Third Party Contracts in the
Accounts Receivable system.
Previously, if you opted to interface Contracts and/or Exemptions on the Packaging
Options (RPROPTS) form, when a student was authorized and received payment from a
Third Party Contract or Exemption, the amount paid on the student's account was included
in the determination of actual resources for financial aid.
The resource amount was interfaced into the Resource Maintenance (RPAARSC) form
and included in the calculation of need for financial aid in the following award forms:
Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD), Packaging Maintenance (RPAAPMT), and Financial
Aid Record Maintenance (ROARMAN) with the resource amount displaying in the
Resource field.
In response to the changes required by HERA, Banner Financial Aid allows you to
exclude specific contracts and/or exemptions from being counted as a Financial Aid
Resource. In addition, you can roll contracts and exemptions from one term to a new term.
To properly process contracts and exemptions from being excluded as resources, you
must:
• establish a contract record on the Third Party Contract Rules (RPRCONT) form,
for a contract.
• establish an exemption record on the Exemptions Rules (RPREXPT) form, for an
exemption.
• select the new Exclude as Resource checkbox on RPRCONT or RPREXPT.
• set the estimated amount, or, if you choose not to use estimates, leave the amount
blank.
Note
If a Third Party Contract or Exemption is excluded as a resource, it will not
be visible on the Resource Maintenance (RPAARSC) form. However, all
Third Party Contracts and Exemptions which have been paid to a student,
including those that have been excluded, may be viewed on the Contracts
and Exemptions Payment Inquiry (RPIARPY) form which uses the
RPVARPY view. You can view Third Party Contracts or Exemptions paid

on the student's account.
The calculation of estimated resources for both contracts and exemptions uses the
maximum amount established on the student authorization for the contract and/or
exemption if it exists in Accounts Receivable (TSACONT/TSAEXPT). If no maximum
amount has been established, the calculation for estimated resources will continue to use
the estimated amount defined on RPRCONT for contracts and RPREXPT for exemptions.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-245
Maintaining resources and calculation in unmet need
Resource Maintenance (RPAARSC)
Other Resources, Contracts, and Exemptions are created and maintained by term and will
display for terms that are associated with a period or crossover period for the aid year in
the key block.
Example
Term 201030 is associated with PERIOD SUMMER 0910 which has and aid year of 0910
and a crossover aid year of 1011.
A Resource, Contract, or Exemption for the 201030 term will be displayed for both the
0910 and 1011 aid years.
Other Resources block
The block’s Other Resources Calculated Total field has been modified to allow mouse
navigation and will represent the total amount of all resources displayed including
crossover terms and resources for the aid year (null term).
For example, a student has other resources entered for the fall, spring, and summer terms
and a resource which does not have a term and is for the aid year. The Other Resources
Calculated Total value will show the sum of all records displayed (fall, spring, summer
terms + record without term attached). However, only the term which belongs to a period
that is part of the student’s aid period plus the resources for the aid year (no term exists)
will be used in the calculation of resources for need.
Field
Description
Other Resources
Calculated Total
The total of all Other Resources for the aid year
(RPRARSC_CALC_TOT_AMT).
Additionally, “Other Resources” for terms that are associated with the Aid year specified
in the key block or crossover terms for another aid year can also be displayed.
When displayed for the crossover year, that record cannot be updated (or deleted). The
following error messages are displayed, accordingly:
• On Update:
• “Resource exists in &RPRARSC_AIDY_CODE; update not allowed.”
• On Delete:
• “Resource exists in &RPRARSC_AIDY_CODE; delete not allowed.”
2-246
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Using details from the previous example, when RPAARSC is used for the 0910 aid year,
the resource for the 201030 term will be displayed and the record can be updated (or
deleted). However, when RPAARSC is used for the 1011 aid year, the resource for the
201030 term will be displayed but the record cannot be updated (or deleted).
Once a record exists in the RPRARSC table, update of the RPRARSC_TERM_CODE is not
allowed.
Note
When a record is inserted, the key block aid year is always used.

A record with a term code can only be inserted when the term code has been defined with
the STVTERM_FA_PROC_YR = key block aid year.
For example, Term 201030 has STVTERM_FA_PROC_YR = 0910.
From RPAARSC, enter “0910” in the key block along with a valid Student ID. The record
is allowed to be inserted into RPRARSC and will have RPRARSC_AIDY_CODE = ‘0910’
From RPAARSC, enter “1011” in the key block along with a valid Student ID. If an
attempt is made to add record with term code = 201030. The insert is not allowed, and in
this case would be followed by this error message:
• “Unable to create record. Use 0910 aid year for 201030 term.”
Summary block
The Summary block has been modified to provide the resource amount calculated from
Other Resources, Contracts, and/or Exemptions based on the aid period assigned to the
student for the aid year in the key block. See information provided in Resource
Calculation.
All fields in the Summary Block allow mouse over text help.
Resource calculation
Because periods allow the ability to combine terms and the potential of a student changing
from one period to another period but both periods contain the same term code, resources
entered on RPAARSC will remain by term.
Note
The information from Accounts Receivable for contracts and exemptions

will remain by term.
With the delivery of enrollment/payment periods, the calculation for the amount of
resources changed to only include the resources for the terms which are part of the periods
making up the student’s aid period. Resources, which are for the aid year and not defined
with a term, will be included in the calculation of resources.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-247
Example
• Period FALL/WINTR 1011 consists of terms 201110 and 201115
• Period SPRING 1011 consists of term 201120
• Aid Period FA/SPR consists of Periods FALL/WINTR 1011 and SPRING 1011
The Financial Aid office is provided information the student is going to receive an
outside scholarship for the upcoming 1011 aid year. The student is also receiving
training funds from SRS which are processed as contracts through Accounts
Receivable.
Scholarship
Term 201110
Term 201115
Term 201120
Total
300.00
200.00
500.00
1,000.00
250.00
550.00
750.00
1,550.00
SRS-Contract 300.00
Total
600.00
200.00
Resources calculated for the 1011 aid year would be 1550.00, the total of all terms that
exist for the aid year and this amount would then reduce the amount of need for the
student.
Budget
EFC
Resources
Gross need
10,000.00
0
1,550.00
8,450.00
The student later decides they will not be attending in fall so the Financial Aid office
changes his aid period from fall/spring to spring only. The Spring aid period consists
of period SPRING 1011 with the 201120 term. The resource calculation will now only
include the resources which exist for the 201120 term.
Budget
EFC
Resources
Gross need
2-248
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
5,000.00
0
750.00
4,250.00
May 2012
Exemptions and contracts
Exemptions and Contracts are displayed for all terms that are associated with a Period for
the aid year entered in the key block. If the term is included in a Period which has been
defined as a crossover Period, the contract and/or exemption will be displayed in both
years.
Note
The Calculated Grand Total of All Resources may no longer equal the
Resources in the Summary block. The Other Resources Calculated Total
and the Exemptions and Contracts Calculated Total are totals for the aid
year. The Resources in the Summary block reflect the total for the aid

period.
Loan processing
Manual loans
Disbursing manual loan checks through Banner
Occasionally a student’s eligibility for a Subsidized Stafford or Unsubsidized Loan
changes after the loan has been certified but before the check is disbursed. If the student is
no longer eligible for any of the loan, you simply return the entire check to the lender. If
the student remains eligible for an amount that is less than the amount of the check, then
the excess can be returned to the lender and only the proper amount disbursed to the
student.
1. On the Loan Disbursement (RPALDSB) form, enter:
the full amount of the check into Check/Net Amount.
the amount the student does not qualify into Returned Amount
2. After the check has been endorsed by the student, set the Feed indicator to Y
3. Run the disbursement process.
The process will disburse the difference between the full check amount and the returned
check amount to the student’s account.
For example, if a full loan check is for $500, but the student is only eligible for $400, enter
$500 into Check/Net Amount and $100 into Returned Amount. Only the difference of
$400 will be paid.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-249
To recover a partial or full loan amount after the full amount of the check has been paid to
the student account, use the Returned Amount field and change the feed indicator from F
to Y (the feed indicator previously read F to indicate that the loan check had already been
fed to the student’s account). When the disbursement process is run again for the student,
the process will put out an adjusting entry on the student’s account for the amount
returned.
Once a loan check has been fed to a student’s account, it will not be backed out
automatically if the student becomes ineligible for the fund. Other non-loan funds may be
“backed out” automatically as per rules on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form.
The only way to cancel a payment for a loan check that has been fed to the student’s
account is to use this Check Returned feature.
U.S. Specific Institution Financial Aid Options
(ROAUSIO)
Set the Loan Process Type drop-down box on the Institution Financial Aid Options II
window of this form to Electronic for Electronic only or Both if processing Electronic and
Direct loans. This box is accessed during online and batch processing.
Note
If your institution has an EL School code which is different than the Pell ID
and your school is not processing for multiple campuses, enter the
Electronic School Code and Electronic Branch ID in the Institution
Financial Aid Options II window. Loan applications will then be created
correctly with these values.
Conversely, if your institution will be processing Electronic loans for
multiple campuses, establish the Electronic School Code and Branch
ID for each campus on the Campus/EDE Defaults window. The loan
application records will then be created with the correct Electronic
School Code and Branch ID for the Campus code on the student’s
General Student record. Loan applications can then be extracted based

on individual Electronic School Codes and/or Electronic Branch IDs.
Aid Period Rules (RORTPRD)
Associate periods with aid periods on this form.
Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRDEFA)
Establish award distributions for each aid period. Memo expiration dates must be
established here for loan memos to work correctly. Dates entered here are used for loan
periods associated with an aid period.
2-250
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Detail Code Control Form - Student (TSADETC)
Ask Student Accounts personnel to establish loan fund detail codes as well as detail codes
to use in the refund process on this form.
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE)
Establish loan fund(s) and associate them with Federal loan identifiers.
Separate loan funds must be established for Direct, Electronic and Manual loans and must
be different for each loan type (Subsidized Stafford, Unsubsidized Stafford, Parent PLUS,
Graduate PLUS and Alternative).
Banner loan applications can be created and sent for all funds using electronic processes.
Codes for subsidized funds should precede unsubsidized funds in the RFRBASE listing,
since batch processes select funds in alphabetical order.
Funds Management (RFRMGMT)
1. Create a separate RFRMGMT form for each loan fund.
2. Allocate dollars to the fund on the first window.
3. Complete the following Packaging Options fields applicable to loans in the Aid Year
Specific Data - Packaging Options window:
• Enter the maximum loan that could be made to any student during the
combined periods of the aid year.
• Check Replace EFC for unsubsidized and PLUS Loans.
• Check Reduce Need for subsidized loans.
• Check Need Analysis Indicator.
• Check Loan Process for all Electronic loans.
• Complete Loan Fee Percentage.
• Select the correct Electronic Loan Indicator for electronic loans to process.
• Select the correct Direct Loan Indicator for direct loans to process correctly.
• Select the correct Manual Loan Indicator for manual loan processing to
work correctly.
• The Direct Loan Indicator, Electronic Loan Indicator and Manual Loan
Indicator are mutually exclusive.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-251
• Memo Credit block (optional). (1) To memo gross: RFRMGMT memo =
Offered, RTVLNST code = Approved, RPRLOPT Memo Actual Amount =
blank; (2)To memo net: RFRMGMT memo = Accept, RTVLNST code =
Approved, RPRLOPT Memo Actual Amount = checked.
• Set Disburse block to None if using the Loan Process Manual. Loans are
disbursed from RPALDSB by entering the information for checks received at
the school. Direct loan disbursement records are created by the RPRLORC
Direct Loan Record Creation process. Electronic loan disbursement records
are created by the RPRELAP Electronic Loan Application process.
4. Complete disbursement option fields applicable to loans in the Aid Year Specific
Data - Disbursement Options window.
For If Disbursement Load Code greater than Package Load Code, choose
Disburse 100% (disburses total amount available for the current disbursement) or No
Disbursement (no disbursement if the disbursement load code is greater than
packaging load code indicating that student has dropped hours). Proration is not
applicable to loan disbursement.
5. Set Use Disbursement Enrollment Edits for Memo field option. The checked field
works in conjunction with the Disbursement Load Code field option to create/not
create memos under the same condition as the Disbursement Load option. If
unchecked, this field results in memos at gross prior to creation of the loan
application and at net after the application is created.
6. Other required fields must be filled to exit the form, including those not used in loan
processing.
7. Optionally, enter any tracking documents or messages applicable to each fund.
Packaging Options (RPROPTS)
The expected annual enrollment on RNANAxx is used for loan awarding.
Check the Additional Unsubsidized box to control awarding of unsubsidized amounts
above the grade-level maximum to independent students.
Note
The override field for dependent unsubsidized professional judgment is

on the two award forms: RPAAWRD and RPAAPMT.
2-252
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Class Code Translation (RPRCLSS)
Equate Student System Class codes with Financial Aid class Codes as defined on
RNANAxx for Banner Year in College. A default Student Level code with a null Student
Class code should be established with a Financial Aid Class Code.
Note
Electronic certification and disbursement processes and direct loan
disbursement use the Student System’s class information.

Certification Initials Validation (RTVCINT)
This is an optional form used also in short-term credit processing.
Enter the initials of staff members authorized to certify loans on this form. Entering and
saving initials in the Loan Certification section of a loan application locks the form and
prevents additional editing.
Loan Status Validation (RTVLNST)
Enter status codes for loans here. An Initial status defaults when a loan application is
created. An Approved status may be posted during the response file upload. An Inactive
code prevents disbursement memos. A Hold code stops processing until resolved and
replaced with an Active code. Institutions may wish to create loans in an Inactive status
until an approval is received from the processor.
Lender Base Data (RPRLNDR)
This form is used to create a lender listing for use on manual and Electronic loans and to
associate a Lender ID with a Guarantor ID. Use official lender/guarantor identification
codes.
Loan Period Base Data (RPRLPRD)
Year-specific loan period names help you to distinguish loans on the RPALDSB
disbursement form. Memo expiration dates used for period-based loans should match
those used for the same period on RFRDEFA.
1. Create loan periods associated with regular aid periods in Loan Period.
2. Enter disbursement dates in Start Date and End Date.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-253
For Loan Periods that Match Aid Periods:
• Enter the Aid Period to be used for certification.
Note
A period schedule for each aid period must exist on RFRDEFA. Loan
applications will create automatically based on the student’s aid period.
The loan period may be changed to a period-based period once the

application is generated.
For Loan Periods that Do Not Match Aid Periods:
• Create additional loan periods associated with a period to be used for students in
multi-period aid periods who want one-period loans (for example, Fall/Spring aid
period; wants loan for Fall only).
• Enter disbursement dates. Costs for period-based loans must be established
manually.
Note
If Summer is counted in two different aid years, you must have two
Summer periods with one attached to each aid year to process Summer
only loans.
3. Create a disbursement schedule for each loan period. Up to four disbursements may
be entered per loan period; the total must equal 100 percent. Date(s) entered here will
be transmitted to the lender as the dates that funds are released to the school.
Note
The Number of Days for Memos field is used in the manual loan
process if the application is created prior to the award to indicate the
length of time from the scheduled disbursement date that memos should

expire.
Loan Options (RPRLOPT)
Values established on this form are used as defaults when applications are created.
1. Establish a null value for both Create Application options by checking each box,
saving, unchecking each box and saving. These options are used only for paper
applications.
2. Enter an Initial Loan Status.
3. Enter a Default Return ID (for refund checks), Default Lender ID (to receive loan
applications), and Default Guarantor ID (associated with Lender IDs) to be used as
defaults for new borrowers. For the guarantee only and guarantee/print options, a
lender/guarantor must be specified. When the print/guarantee is used, these fields
may be left blank or may be populated with the default Lender(s) ID information
from the school’s lender list. Some schools rotate preferred Lender IDs here.
2-254
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
For continuing students, Banner defaults the most recent lender/guarantor information
to the application. These fields may be left blank if the school has multiple lenders and
wishes to enter them manually after applications are created online or in batch.
Guarantors who require students to continue with the same lender may change the
Banner-supplied data, or new students may change it. The Lender ID will be loaded
during the response file update process.
4. Enter Y in the Satisfy Loan Application Requirement field and the specific
requirement and status codes if you wish to use this option.
5. Enter Y to memo the net loan amount (calculated as Disbursement Amount on
RPALDSB disbursement form) when the application is created. Packaged amount
will be memoed if box is set to N.
6. Enter Y to create loan authorizations for this year. For loans, authorization indicates
that a check or EFT funds have been received, but the check has not been endorsed
and /or the disbursement date has not arrived.
7. Check the Disbursement Amount greater than Loan Amount checkbox if you
wish to prevent disbursement if a loan amount is greater than the award amount. the
process uses net of all period disbursements up to and including period in which
disbursement is being made.
8. Check the Request Amount Required for Certification checkbox, if necessary. This
prevents entry of certification initials on the RPALAPP form unless a requested
amount is present. Not applicable for use with RPAELAP.
9. Refund detail codes may be established for automatic generation of return checks to
lenders through Banner Accounts Receivable as described below.
10. Complete the Student Charge or Payment code. A negative payment detail code
should be used to net down the payment to the student. A negative charge detail code
appears like a refund to the student.
11. Enter a Return Payment code to be used by RPEDISB that represents a payment to
the return lender’s account.
12. Enter the Return Refund code that represents the charge to the Refund account for
the return to the lender. This code must be set up as a Charge, and the Refund code
must be set to Y on TSADETC.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-255
Lender/Disbursing Agents Rules (RPRLNDA)
This optional form links a lender code with service provider code to expedite transmission
of hold/release records directly to the service provider rather than to the lender or
guarantor.
1. Enter the Lender ID.
2. Enter the Guarantor ID (optional)
3. Enter the Disbursing Agent ID.
First-year, first-time borrower loan rule
Overview
Stafford loan processing was changed in the 7.2 release to implement a Federal
requirement for a 30-day delay in disbursement for certain loans. This requirement is
called the first-year, first-time borrower loan rule. It specifies that the disbursement of
Stafford loan proceeds to a student in their first year of an undergraduate program of study
who has not previously received a Federal Subsidized, Unsubsidized, or SLS loan must be
delayed 30 calendar days from the date the student begins his/her program of study.
Previously, Banner used student reported data from the FAFSA, the Campus
Undergraduate Level Code Rules form (RPRCLVL), and the existence of academic
history to determine if the 30-day delay should be used when scheduling the
disbursements for Federal Stafford loans.
As an example, if the student is enrolled in the first semester (running from September 1,
2005 to December 14, 2005) of a program that is made up of three 5-week modules, but
the student is not enrolled in the first two modules of that semester, the school has to wait
to disburse the funds until 30 days after classes from the third module begin.
To implement this rule, Banner must determine whether the student is in a first year
undergraduate program of study and whether the student has previously been disbursed
Federal Stafford or SLS loan funds. To determine if a student has previously been
disbursed Federal Stafford or SLS loan proceeds, NSLDS records from the ISIR record
and Transfer Student Monitoring Alert files are queried. A check for Federal Stafford
loans paid in Banner is also performed.
To determine if a student is in the first year of an undergraduate program, the financial aid
class translation rules are used to identify first year students using the financial aid class
for Banner year in college of 1 (first-time freshman, no prior college) or 2 (freshman, prior
college).
2-256
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
An option to turn off the function to determine a first-year, first-time borrower is provided
at the campus level (on the Campus Defaults window of the ROAUSIO form) and as a
default for the institution (on the Loan Options window of the ROAINST form). After the
install of release 7.2, the rule to apply the first-year, first-time borrower check is used. If
your institution does not want to apply the first-year, first-time borrower rule, you must
uncheck the appropriate campus and institution Apply First-Year, First-Time Borrower
Rule indicators on the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
Note
First-year, first-time borrower rule processing is not supported for manual
loans. When processing a loan manually, you must determine if the
first-year, first-time borrower rule applies and set the disbursement date

accordingly.
First-year, first-time borrower function
With the 7.2 Banner Financial Aid release, functionality to determine first-year, first-time
borrowers using FAFSA reported data and the Campus Undergraduate Level Code Rules
form (RPRCLVL) is no longer used.
The F_FIRST_TIME_BORROWER function supports the determination of a first-year,
first-year borrower for Stafford loans. The Electronic Loan Application form (RPAELAP)
and the Direct Loan Origination form (RPALORG) use this function to determine if the
30-day delay is applied when the loan period is changed.
The Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP) process and the Direct Loan Record
Creation Process use the F_FIRST_TIME_BORROWER function to determine if the student
is a first-year, first-time borrower and the 30-day delay is applied.
Determination of a first-year, first-time borrower
The F_FIRST_TIME_BORROWER function determines if the Apply First-Year, FirstTime Borrower Rule indicator is checked (Yes) for the campus on the most recent
student record where the effective term is less than or equal to the first period of the loan
period being processed. If no corresponding campus has been defined or there is no
General Student or Admissions record, the institution default for Apply First-Year, FirstTime Borrower Rule is used.
If the option to turn off the function has not been indicated, the following steps to
determine a first-year, first-time borrower are used:
1. Determine if the student has been disbursed a prior Stafford, SLS, Direct Subsidized,
or Direct Unsubsidized loan using:
Current NSLDS record
Banner award record
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-257
If the student has received a Stafford, SLS, Direct Subsidized, or Direct Unsubsidized
loan, no 30-day delay will be processed.
If the student has not received a prior Stafford, SLS, Direct Subsidized, or Direct
Unsubsidized loan, go to the next step.
2. Determine if the student is an undergraduate first-year student using the class
calculation and class translation rules.
If the student’s financial aid class is calculated as 1 (1st time freshman, no prior
college) or 2 (freshman, prior college), the 30-day delay will be applied.
If no student record exists, the 30-day delay will be applied.
Crosswalk Validation (GTVSDAX)
Electronic loan processing requires that foreign country addresses contain the State code
of FC and zip code of 99999. To correctly identify which addresses are foreign when
addresses are not created with a country code of US, you must establish the crosswalk
validation of GTVSDAX. Without GTVSDAX being populated, the null nation code on
RPAELAP will be converted to FC for foreign country and transmitted in the datafile.
GTVSDAX should be populated with 157 for the US Nation code or the appropriate value
as established by your institution.
Application Creation, Extract, and Response Processing
The annual Spring Banner Financial Aid release contains updates for federal loan
processing. It is best to process loans for the coming year after this release is installed.
This section discusses each process followed by a section showing fields that update on
RPAELAP as a result of each process.
(A) Creating and Certifying Electronic Loan Applications)
forms involved in creating and certifying Electronic loan applications include:
Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ)
This form lists tracking requirements that could prevent disbursement packaging if not
satisfied.
2-258
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Award/Package Maintenance (RPAAWRD)/(RPAAPMT)
This form is used to award loan(s) to a student. Loans must be in an accepted state to
create an electronic application. Banner awards based on expected enrollment level from
RNANAxx.
Note
Parameters for the online RPRELAP process must be created for each

user authorized to create loan application records.
Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP)
Electronic loan applications must be created online (through the Create App button on
RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT) or in batch mode.
Note
Parameters for the online RPRELAP process must be created for each

user authorized to create loan application records.
1. Access the GJAPDFT form and enter parameters for the process.
Warning
Leave the Parameter Set field in the Key block blank. The online process

may not be run with a parameter set.
2. Once the parameters have been established for one user, use the Copy function on
GJAPDFT to establish the default parameters for all users who will be using the
online process.
3. The following parameters for batch RPRELAP should be established and saved by
each user as a parameter set:
• Aid Year Code.
• Fund Code. Applications for multiple funds may be created simultaneously.
Use the Insert Record function to enter additional 02 Fund Code parameter
lines.
• Default Process Type. This parameter varies by school (for example,
GP - Guar/Print; GO - Guarantee only, and so on). If a school has paper
applications on hand for some students, then award the loan, generate the
application, change this option to guarantee only, and mail the certified paper
form to the lender.
• Application Code, Report Selection Query ID, and Creator ID of Selection
ID. These parameters may be used in batch mode.
• Process Indicator. Enter Batch. The online process will ignore this parameter.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-259
• Permanent Address Type Default and Local Address Type Default. These are
Student-system addresses. Use the address hierarchy as in letters (for
example, 1PR, 2MA, and so on).
• Loan Status Default. Enter a default initial loan status.
• EL (Electronic) Application Status Default. Enter Ready to send or N if
applications must be reviewed prior to transmission to the lender.
Note
PLUS Loans are not ready to send until parent data has been entered on
the resulting RPAELAP form. This status must be changed from R to N to

use the Delete/Replace function.
• EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) Authorization Default. Enter Y if the
majority of students choose this option. Can be changed for individual
students before records are sent.
• Lock Indicator Default. This parameter can be set if you wish to stop the
Delete/Replace function so that manually entered data is not lost. If award
amounts are changed on the award form, Banner will delete/replace amounts
on an application unless it is locked or has a status of Sent. The application is
recreated during this process and previous data is removed.
• References Default. Enter N for the Reference parameter if your lender/
guarantor will mail notes to the student. Enter Y if you have collected the
references.
• Deferment Request Default and Capitalize Interest Default. Enter Y if the
majority of your students use these options. May be changed individually on
RPAELAP form.
• Default Lender ID, Default Guarantor ID, Default Return ID. Defaults may
be specified here.
• Default Loan Period. Leave this blank to use the loan period associated with
the student’s aid period. This parameter is only valid for Batch processing.
• Default PN (Promissory Note) Delivery Code. Specify an Email, Paper, or
Web PN Delivery code as guarantor method of promissory note delivery to
the student.
• Default Federal Application form Code. Enter B Old PN, MPN (all
applications processed as combined, request amount set to 99999),or Plus.
• Default Serial Loan Code. Enter New note for each loan or Serial MPN.
PLUS loans will be created with a value of None.
• Default Hold/Release Status. Initial status may be HR (Hold Request) or RR
(Release Request). Status may be updated individually on RPAELAP.
2-260
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Source of Lender ID. Use NSLDS or prior Banner as source for student’s
lender.
• User ID. The ID of the person using the sub-population rule.
Note
Regarding the Delete/Replace function, applications that are not locked
or sent may be deleted or replaced as awards are adjusted or canceled.
Change the Application Status to N (Not Ready to Send), adjust the
award, and recreate the application by clicking the Create Application
button.
New applications will be created for additional award amount(s) after an
application is sent.
Parent Loan demographic data from a prior application is transferred to
the new application during the replace function. The application number is
updated with each replacement and is not to be used as a counter. The
batch RPRELAP process will delete applications where awards have

been cancelled.
RPAELAP fields updated by RPRELAP process
RPAELAP displays the latest loan application first. Arrow down to see additional
applications. Windows updated on this form include:
Application window
• Loan ID. RPRELAP generates a temporary Loan ID for each subsidized,
unsubsidized, and PLUS loan in the batch being run. It has a B (for Banner) in the
Loan Type field within the number and S, U, or P following the B to indicate the
type of loan.
The S is replaced with O in the combined subsidized Loan ID during the
RPRELAX process.
• Fee Percent.
• Lock (if selected). This locks the application from getting deleted and replaced
when an award is changed or canceled.
• Fund Code/Name.
• Process Type.
• Aid Year.
• Lender/Return/Guarantor ID. Official federal Lender ID is used and is left
justified. Do not fill in remaining spaces.
• Record Type. A indicates a new application.
• Loan Period Start/End Dates. This can be changed manually.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-261
• Loan Status.
• System Indicator. It is set to B for online and batch processes.
• Recommended and Requested Amounts. These come from the RPAAWRD,
RPAAPMT, and ROARMAN award amounts. The recommended amount stays the
same, but the requested amount will update.
• Maximum Eligibility Amount. This is calculated from certification data (that is,
Cost - EFC = Estimated Aid) but not sent to the guarantor.
• Expected Amount. This is the amount the student is eligible to receive based on
amount awarded and student’s grade level.
Promissory Note/Miscellaneous Information window
• Promissory Note Delivery. Choices are: Email, Paper, Web
• Federal Application form. Choices are: B Old PN, Master PN, PLUS note.
• Serial Loan. Choices are: New MPN, Serial Note.
• Electronic Funds Transfer Authorization.
• References.
• Deferment Request.
• Capitalize Interest.
Certification Data window
Note
The RPQLELG form may be accessed from this window to check
certification data.

• Budget.
• Estimated Financial Aid. This includes all aid except this fund.
• Expected Family Contribution. This is derived from the RNARSxx form.
Budget, Estimated Aid, and EFC for period-based loans must be entered manually.
• Maximum Eligible Amount.
• Adjusted Gross Income.
• Expected Amount. This is the amount the student will receive. Use the lesser of
maximum eligibility from delivered rules table, calculated maximum amount, or
requested amount.
• Grade Level. Uses Student System class level (translated on RPRCLSS).
• Expected Grad Date. Accesses Student system data first. If there is no data,
Banner adds years to FAFSA class level and uses hardcoded date of 5/31; for
example, 2000-01 FAFSA class 1 + 3 years = 5/31/2004 graduation date.
2-262
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Enrollment Status. From the annual expected enrollment on RNANAxx.
• Dependency status. From the RCRAPP record.
Student Data window
• Social Security Number
• Address
• Local Address
• Date of Birth
• Citizenship
• Driver’s License Number
• Loan Default
• Dependency
Parent Data window
Enter parent data in this window. Banner will carry forward parent data to revised
applications.
Period Schedule window
Data defaults into this window. The Memo Amount displayed is for the period.
Note
The optional Certified Hours field may be populated manually with the
number of hours used as a basis for loan certification. Hours entered here

will appear on the RPALDSB form.
Disbursement Schedule window
The net amount will display if Memo Actual was chosen. Adjustments will result in
additional disbursement transactions. Initial HR (Hold Request) or RR Release Request)
status in the Hold/Release Status field.
Loan Parent Inquiry (RPILPAR)
Use this form to view parent names associated with a student. This form may be accessed
from the ROASMRY or RPALDSB forms.
Extracting Loan Applications from Banner
The following forms are used for extracting loan applications:
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-263
Unmatched COD Records (RPAUCOD)
The RPAUCOD form displays the data loaded via RERIMxx from the SP, AC and EC
document types for which a match is not found in Banner. The data on this form includes
the following information:
• Direct Loan PLUS Applications
• Direct Loan Entrance Counseling
• Teach Entrance Counseling
Note
Information on this form may be viewed or manually matched to records

in Banner.
Unmatched PLUS Application records are loaded to the RPTUAPP table through the
RERIM11 process. They can be loaded to the table with a pidm if a matching student was
found or without a pidm if no matching student record was found. In either case, the
records are displayed on this form.
On the second page of the form, you can match to a student if necessary by using the
Student ID field and saving the record. If the record has already been matched to a student
and the Student ID is displayed, you can match the record to an existing PLUS origination
record. If the record is matched, once the match is saved the record is removed from the
RPTUAPP table and the RPAUCOD form and the data is updated in the RPRLAPP table
and displayed on the RPALORG form.
Unmatched TEACH and Direct Loan Entrance Counseling records are loaded to the
RPTUECS table through the RERIMxx process. Records loaded to RPTUECS have not
been matched to a student and are displayed on this form. From the second page of
RPAUCOD, you can match the Entrance Counseling record to an existing student by using
the Student ID field. When the match is saved, the record will be removed from the
RPTUECS table and the RPAUCOD form and the data will be updated in the RPRLECS
table and displayed on the RPILECS form.
Options menu
The following forms have been included in the options menu for the RPAUCOD form:
• Direct Loan Origination (RPALORG)
• Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD)
• Electronic Counseling Status (RPILECS)
• Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ)
• Applicant Comments (RHACOMM)
• Applicant Messages (ROAMESG)
2-264
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Electronic Loan Appl Extract (RPRELAX)
1. Check loan applications prior to transmission. Applications will extract if:
• The loan is not canceled.
• The loan status is Ready to Send.
• The Batch ID is null.
• The Loan ID is not null.
• The student is in the population selection (if used).
2. Select the printer on the GJAPCTL form. Output can be viewed on GJIREVO when
saved to a database. Funds may be entered individually or as a multiple entries
3. Establish parameters on GJAPCTL form as below:
• Aid Year Code.
• Fund Code. Funds may be entered individually or as multiple entries.
• Enter the File Identifier parameter as Production or Test.
• Spell out the school name in the School Name parameter.
• Recipient Name and Recipient ID. These identifiers are placed in the Header
record of the file to direct the electronic file to the proper guarantee/lending
agency for processing. Check with the provider of your vender software to
see if it will insert this information after the FTP process.
• Select Media type. It usually is PC.
• Select population selection identifiers.
• Combine Sub/Unsub Stafford. All loans with Application Code of M process
as combined loans.
• Version Number. Extract changes supported with Version 4.
• EL (Electronic) School Code. Enter the code for the loan applications to be
extracted if you are multi-campus and want each campus extracted correctly.
• EL (Electronic) Branch ID. Enter the corresponding Branch ID for the EL
School Code to be extracted.
Review Output window
This window displays:
• RPRELAX.log, when the process is completed.
• RPRELAX.lis includes student ID, name, and loan fund(s) extracted.
Parameters used and a summary of total applications are included. Report
shows loans selected for transmission as well as missing data.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-265
Note
ELAPxxIN_xxxxx.DAT data file is produced to be transmitted to the
guarantor/lender.

Batch Control (RPIBATC)
This form is used to view a record of Electronic loan batches created.
RPAELAP fields updated by the RPRELAX process
Application window
• Loan Status changes to Sent.
• Version Number checkbox.
• Submission Date.
• Cross Reference Loan ID. The subsidized Loan ID is used on combined loan
applications. The cross-reference loan ID links the unsubsidized loan to the
subsidized loan and is the Loan ID assigned to the subsidized loan. The cross
reference ID of the subsidized loan will be updated with the Loan ID of the
unsubsidized loan. The Loan ID is given a unique one-up number when RPRELAX
extracts the loan application.
Electronic Loan Response Upload (RPRELRU)
1. Run the RPRELRU process after setting the single parameter to the desired Approved
loan status.
2. Review output in the Review Output window:
• RPRELRU.log will show process completion.
• RPRELRU.lis shows all records loaded with adjustment indicators if the
amount certified or requested was changed along with error messages. Error
code descriptors are found in the Electronic Loan Manual.
Note
Uploading loan response files is not required for disbursement. Schools
that wish to memo loans based on an Active status may wish to upload
response files to identify approved loans and response files containing
records with special status notifications.
Responses are received at the individual loan level (subsidized and
unsubsidized) for combined loans.
2-266
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
More than one response record may be received for the same loan
application (one per batch). The Application Status field is updated.
To upload data to Banner, the files received electronically must be moved
to the same directory used for all other data uploads (DATAHOME).
The incoming file name expected by the RPRELRU process is
elupdtop.dat. Once processed by Banner, the first nine characters of
the Header records are changed to Processed to prevent accidentally

reloading the same data again.
RPAELAP fields updated by the RPRELRU process
Application window
• Loan Status. This field updates with the loan status defined in the parameter of
RPRELRU.
• Application Status. This field shows latest guarantor statuses including:
• Submitted
• Guaranteed
• PN received/approved
• Pending
• Denied/Rejected
• Modified
• Cert. Request.
• Terminated
• Not Ready
• Ready
• Sent
• Application Accepted.
Note
Certification requests and modification records are not loaded into
Banner. These records will appear in the output with a message of the

type of record received.
• Application Phase Code.
• Approved Amount.
• Approval Date. Approval amount and date can be updated manually if school does
not load response files.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-267
• Lender ID. If no non-person record exists for lender, error message appears in
.lis file.
Promissory Note/Miscellaneous Information window
• Master Promissory Note Confirmation Code. This indicates the MPN existed at
the time of certification.
• Borrower Confirmation Code. This indicates borrower confirmation of loan was
received.
Disbursement Schedule window
• Hold/Release Status updates to HA (Hold Accepted), RA (Release Accepted).
Parent Data window
• Parent data will be returned including Social Security Number, name, and date of
birth (check Electronic Loan Manual for additional information).
Note
The RPRELRU process does NOT update the RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT,
and ROARMAN award amounts or change the requested amount or

certification record.
Disbursement/Adjustment
Banner CommonLine Electronic processing includes EFT, Master Check, and individual
check record upload capability. An EFT file may contain any or all of these types of
disbursements. Banner Hold/Release may be used to update the initial Hold/Release status
to permit or prevent the receipt of scheduled loan disbursements depending upon the
option of the school.
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
• Run the disbursement process online or in batch to generate memos, authorizations,
and disbursement error messages if the disbursement edit optional parameter is
being used for the RPRHDRL process.
For Revised Disbursement amount processing:
1. Enter changes to disbursement amounts on RPAELAP as net amounts. Banner will
convert it to the gross amount if the revision is included with the RPRHDRL record.
Loan memos will use Revised Disbursement amounts if present in RPAELAP
Disbursement window.
2. Review disbursement error messages on the disbursement report or on ROIDISB.
2-268
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Hold/Release Process (RPRHDRL)
This process captures changes to the initial Hold/Release status and creates a data file for
transmission to the service provider or lender.
1. Run the process after receiving the response file. The Guarantor sequence number is
needed.
2. Batch update of status by fund/period updates all available undisbursed records or use
Disbursement Edit.
Note
The Disbursement edit (which is optional) requires at least one
disbursement reject in the Disbursement Results Table to hold a loan, and
that no rejects be found to release a loan. Revised Disbursement dates
and /or revised Disbursement amounts will be included in Hold/Release

transmissions if present.
3. Update the Hold/Release Status field on RPAELAP to HS Hold Sent or RS Release
Sent.
4. Output files include the RPRHDRL.xxxxx.DAT data file and .lis file with the
Control Report and records not processed (with reasons).
Electronic transfer
EFT/Disbursement Roster Upload (RPREFTL)
This process should be run to load student detail data to the temporary RPREFTD table
and cash data to the RPREPMT table.
To transferring file(s) to the Banner dataload directory:
Note
Multiple files may be placed in the directory, but will be processed one at

a time.
1. Rename each file to eftxxx.dat where xxx is a school-maintained sequence
number. After the file is processed, the first nine characters of the Header are changed
to Processed to prevent a duplicate upload.
2. Enter the single parameter file name and run the process.
Electronic Payment Receipt (RPAEPMT)
1. Review summary cash information.
• Single record for all EFT payments in the file.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-269
• Single record for all Netted EFT payments in the file. If netting is used, the
school retains and recycles funds recovered from loan adjustments. Student
records in the file which represent the netted fund total will have a file code
of A.
• Single record for all Master Check payments in the file.
• Individual records for each Individual Check payment in the file. If the check
number field is blank on the incoming file, Banner will generate a Reference
ID number. Banner Reference IDs will have the @ sign.
2. Contact the Accounting Office to confirm that EFT funds have been received in the
bank account.
3. Confirm receipt of checks/master checks.
4. Enter a checkmark by the summary EFT, master check, or netted amount to indicate
receipt of funds so that records will upload during the posting process.
Note
Be certain to mark the receipt flag on $0 payment rosters if netting so that

funds will post to student(s).
5. Enter a checkmark by each individual check received so that the amounts will post.
EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP)
This process matches student records using the unique loan identifier and uploads the data
to the RPRLDSB table. If the record loads successfully, it is deleted from the temporary
table.
1. Enter parameters and run the RPREFTP process.
2. Select a Distribution Method (that is, E, I, M, N) or leave blank to post all types of
student detail records at once.
3. Enter a specific Reference ID or leave blank to process all records.
4. Review output. Verify the process completed by viewing the .log file. The .lis file
will show all students processed in the run including error messages for those that did
not load to the permanent tables.
5. Re-run RPREFTP to generate a report listing the names of only those students whose
records did not match. Resolve on RPAELDB suspense form.
Note
If there are multiple records for the same student in the file, additional
record(s) will be inserted on RPALDSB.
2-270
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing

May 2012
RPAELAP fields populated by RPREFTP process
In the Disbursement Schedule window, the Confirmation Flag indicates the service
provider has borrower confirmation of loan request (for Loan Pilot Program schools). The
Confirmation Flag will be used during the RPEDISB process for non-PLUS loans when
the Direct Loan indicator is not null.
Electronic Loan Disbursement (RPAELDB)
To resolve suspended loan records, blank out the ID in the key block to enter a query. You
can sort on the record types shown on RPAEPMT (that is, E, M, I, N).
We recommend performing a Print Screen for each suspended record and comparing it to
the loan application.
• If the Loan ID is incorrect, change the Loan ID on the RPAELDB record and rerun RPREFTP.
• If there is a Social Security Number mismatch, manually enter data on RPALDSB
and delete the loan record from the temporary tables.
• If there is a Birthdate error (most common), correct the Birthdate and re-run
RPREFTP.
• If the EFT authorization block is not checked on RPAELAP, for funds received via
EFT, obtain authorization from the student, check the RPRELAP block, and re-run
RPREFTP.
• If the EFT block is checked on RPAELAP and funds were received as a paper
check, remove the EFT indicator on RPAELAP and re-run RPREFTP. If you have
separate funds for paper checks, you must cancel the EFT fund application and
award, reaward/recreate the application from the paper check fund, and re-run the
posting process.
• If the record is not your student, use the Print Screen of RPAELDB as authorization
for the Finance Office to cut a check from the EFT account back to the lender.
Delete the record on RPAELDB.
1. Rerun RPREFTP after data correction or deletes.
Note
Multiple records for the same student in the same batch will result in
multiple disbursement records on RPALDSB.

To determine fees subsidized by the guarantor/lender, you must verify that:
• Response files include fees to be subsidized by the guarantor/lender for each loan
disbursement.
• Fee subsidies are loaded to the Loan Disbursement (RPRLABD) table and are
visible in the Fees Paid field on RPAELDB only while the Response records are in
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-271
the temporary tables. Schools may wish to write a program to capture the fees and
calculate a new net amount for memos.
Disbursement form field population
Loan Disbursement (RPALDSB)
This form displays the historical loan record for a student. Disbursement data populated
by the Electronic Loan Application Process (RPRELAP) include:
• Fund
• Period
• Schedule Date
• Sequence Number
Disbursement data populated by the EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP) include:
EFT Records
• Reference ID (from the roster)
• EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) Amount/Date
• Electronic Funds Transfer Indicator checked
• Feed Indicator set to Y
• Individual Checks
• Reference ID (check number)
• Check Amount/Date
• Feed Indicator IS NULL (must sign check)
Master Check
• Reference ID (master check number)
• Amount/Date
• Feed Indicator IS NULL (must sign for proceeds)
When checks/master check forms are signed:
• Feed Indicator (manual)
• Feed Date
By the RPEDISB disbursement process:
2-272
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Transaction Number from the Student Account posting.
• Disbursement Load (load code) and Option (type of hours used for calculation)
Due to non-enrollment/withdrawal adjustments:
• Returned Amount for refund amounts calculated after the check is fed.
• Returned to Lender for return of unclaimed checks that have not been fed.
• Returned Date. (Date returned to lender).
Note
Create a separate disbursement record on RPALDSB using the Insert
Record function to post refunds/returns to the lender. Amounts to be
returned can be posted prior to receipt of funds.

Other:
• Certified Hours. This is the credit hours used for eligibility on the loan application
(entered manually on RPAELAP period schedule window)
• Student Received. An optional field populated manually to show date student
received balance of loan proceeds.
• Disbursement Bypass. Used with adjusting entries to correct data entry errors.
• Disbursement Override.Permits disbursement when the loan amount is greater
than the award amount. Edit uses total of all period disbursement amounts up to
and including the period in which the disbursement process is being run.
Disburse to student account
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
• Run the disbursement process online or in batch to release memos, authorizations,
and/or payment information to the student account. Disbursement may also be run
in the Student Accounting Office if loan checks or Master Check forms are signed
there.
2. Check error messages on report or on the ROIDISB form.
Note
This process uses the Financial Aid Consortium enrollment first if the
Consortium Indicator is checked. It uses the actual Student System
enrollment (billable or adjusted per RPROPTS option) as of date of
disbursement run.
RPEDISB/RPALDSB Disbursement/Authorization calculates from the net
of all loan disbursement records for period on the RPALDSB
disbursement form and allows Payment and Authorization in the same

period when two disbursements are scheduled.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-273
3. Process checks for EFT code or MPN Federal Application code of M.
4. Fees paid by the lender captured during the RPREFTL process are used to calculate
loan memos.
Note
Loan disbursements for students who have not accepted charges when
the Accept Charges field on RPROPTS is checked will be rejected. New

error message will appear.
Loan adjustments
Returning individual checks prior to the accounting feed
1. Access the appropriate period record on RPALDSB.
If the student is not enrolled, enter the check amount on the Retn’d Lndr line on the
Original disbursement period record.
If the student is enrolled, use the Insert Record function to create a new period record
for the adjusting entry. Enter the check amount on the Retn’d Lndr line and save.
Entry on the Retn’d Lndr line prevents any further disbursement. Previous memos will
be backed out.
2. Cancel the award on RPAAWRD.
3. Return check to lender.
Returning calculated refund amounts to lender
1. Access the appropriate period record on RPALDSB.
2. Use the Insert Record function to create a new period record for the adjusting entry.
3. Enter adjustment amount in Returned Amount field. If you are netting
disbursements, check the Disbursement Bypass field to prevent generation of a
refund check to the lender. Save the data.
4. Reduce the award amount on RPAAWRD so that future transcripts will be correct.
5. Run the RPEDISB process to back out excess loan funds.
Note
Banner does not support the return of refund amounts to lenders via EFT.
The posting to Finance for a refund check happens immediately when an
entry is made on RPALDSB and RPEDISB is run.The student ID is NOT

passed to Finance as part of the refund check process.
2-274
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Correcting loans - received amount less than awarded amount
Reduce the awarded offer and accepted amounts on RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT to the
Approved amount so that the financial aid transcripts will be correct.
Loan reports
Loan Proceeds Aging Report (RPRLNAG)
This report displays the number of days between receipt of the loan funds and the date of
the report as well as basic loan information.
RPRLNEX exceptions-students not fully funded report
The Loan Funding Exception Report lists those students whose received amounts are less
than the amount on the loan by period table.
Parameters include:
• Tolerance Amount ($1.00 is used if no tolerance is entered).
• Process Type compares Pending, Actual, or Both disbursements.
• Process EFT Only allows you to disregard paper checks.
• Reference ID allows you to restrict report by batch.
Setting the Exclude Flag on the individual RPAELAP form will prevent the line from
displaying for a student who has appeared on an earlier report even if a discrepancy
between award/disbursement amount exists.
Review and adjust award form as needed so that transcripts will be correct or so that future
loans for the year will generate correctly.
Loan Summary Report (RPRLSUM)
The Loan Summary Report lists loans for students and can be categorized in several ways
through report parameters.
CommonLine loan adjustment
• If the Approved loan amount is less than the recommended amount for adjustment
of RPAAWRD, create and run a population selection based on:
RPRLAPP_APPROVE_AMT < RPRLAPP_RECOMMENDED_AMT
RPRLAPP_APPROVE_DATE > & APPROVE_DATE
RPRLAPP_EL_STATUS = B
RPRLAPP_AIDY_CODE
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-275
• When canceling the Spring disbursement of a full-year loan (also may be used for
other funds on RPAAWRD):
1. Cancel the full amount to move award to the Cancelled column on RPAAWRD.
2. Change the status to ACPT and enter the Fall portion of the loan in the Offered and
Accept columns.
3. Adjust the Dollar Amount on RPAAWRD to the full amount Fall, $0 Spring.
4. Inactivate Spring loan disbursement (student not enrolled, no disbursement)
5. Access the period disbursement record on RPALDSB.
6. Enter the full, anticipated disbursement amount in the Returned to Lender field,
Save.
7. Recoup the Spring disbursement (loan disbursed).
8. Access the period disbursement record on RPALDSB.
9. Click Insert Record to duplicate the period record.
10. Enter the return amount in Returned Amount field, enter date, and set Feed
Indicator.
11. Run the disbursement to create a negative entry on the student account.
12. Cancel the disbursement with the guarantor.
• Delete/Replace Functions
Unsent Loan Application (create replacement application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Changed Loan Status to Not Ready to send
• Clicked Create App button. Original application
Unsent Loan Application (create second application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Left status at Ready to Send
• Clicked Create App button. Created second application with Ready status.
Sent Loan Application (create second application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
2-276
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Extracted Loan. Status Sent on original loan application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Clicked Create App button. Created second application with Ready status.
• Decline/Cancel Loan
Loan Not Disbursed
1. Enter CNCL or DECL status to move award to Cancel/Decline column.
2. Access RPAELAP form and enter CNCL status in left-hand status field to inactive.
3. Report cancellation to guarantor.
4. Watch for guarantor status on right hand side of RPAELAP to change to Terminate
Loan Disbursed
1. Reduce RPAAWRD Offer and Accept amounts to $0.
2. Recoup disbursement.
3. Access period disbursement record on RPALDSB
4. Click Insert Record to duplicate the period record.
5. Enter return amount in Returned Amt field, enter date, and set Feed Indicator.
6. Run disbursement to create a negative entry on the student account.
7. Cancel the disbursement with the guarantor.
Electronic loans as certification requests in common
response file
When a Loan application has been initiated by the student/parent with a Lender or
Guarantee Agency, the loan certification request is sent to the school in the CommonLine
Response file prior to the Electronic Loan application being created in Banner.
1. If possible, identify the loan from the third-party software report prior to running
RPRELRU. If no report is available, the loan will be identified on the report
generated by RPRELRU and will include the unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency.
2. After the loan has been identified and the student’s eligibility determined, award the
student the appropriate fund and create the loan application in Banner using either the
online process or batch RPRELAP process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-277
3. From RPAELAP, change the process type to C - (Certification Request) and the
record type to CR - (Correct the Submission). This will then allow you to access the
Loan ID field on RPAELAP.
4. Change the Loan ID to match exactly the Loan ID that has been assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender.
5. Commit the change.
6. If the loan is a certification request, change the Loan Status to R - (Ready), for the
RPRELAX process to extract the loan to send in the Application Send File. The Loan
ID will not be changed as long as the first six positions are not the School Code as
entered on ROAINST as the Main Campus Pell ID.
If the Certification Request is for a Combined Sub/Unsub, the Loan ID of the
subsidized loan should be updated to match the Unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender. For the unsubsidized loan, the Cross-reference Loan ID
will need to be updated using SQL* Plus to match the Unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender and the non-unique Loan ID can remain.
Future Response, Change Transaction, and EFT Roster files will recognize the Loan ID
and will correctly process without further manual intervention.
Note
Parent and student data contained in the Response file will not be loaded

into Banner. This information must be manually entered.
Alternative loans
This section addresses Banner’s Electronic loan processing that allow clients to create
applications and receive response and disbursement files for Alternative Loans.
Alternative loan processing flow
The basic steps to process a Electronic Alternative Loan in Banner include:
1. Receive the loan application from the student or receive Certification Request for the
loan via the RPRELRU Electronic Response Upload file.
2. Award the loan on one of the Banner award forms (RPAAWRD, RPAAPMT, and
ROARMAN).
3. Create the RPAELAP Electronic loan application. If the loan involves a Certification
Request, then you must update certain fields on the RPAELAP form and replace the
2-278
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Banner-generated unique loan ID to the unique ID created initially by the lender (sent
in the Response file).
4. Extract the loan application via the RPRELAX Electronic Loan Extract Process.
5. Receive a Response file via the RPRELRU Response Upload Process (this is optional
unless utilizing Certification Requests for Alternative Loans).
6. Receive EFT/individual check/Master Check payments via the RPREFTL/RPREFTP
processes.
Global Institutional Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
See the “Banner Electronic Loan Processing - Preliminary forms Setup” section for details
on setting up this form.
Fund Base Data (RFRBASE)
Establish a separate loan fund for any lender for whom you will process Alternative loans
using Electronic loan methodology.
Fund Management (RFRMGMT)
In the Aid Year Specific Data - Packaging Options window, enter the appropriate
Alternative Loan Program Type code for each Alternative loan fund. This code defaults
into the Electronic Loan Application form (RPAELAP).
Note
The Needs Analysis checkbox may be selected or deselected, depending
on the requirement for each lender. A checkbox in this field causes the
calculated Expected Amount on the RPAELAP Loan Application form to

be affected by EFC and prior aid received.
Loan Options (RPRLOPT)
Establish additional forms as needed for new Alternative loan funds. A separate form for
each federal and Alternative electronic loan fund is required. The Guarantor is known as
the Insurer for Alternative loans.
Loan Period Base Data Rules (RPRLPRD)
Create additional loan periods as needed to accommodate Alternative loans.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-279
Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP)
Enter Parameter 02 to include Alternative loan funds. If no needs analysis record is
present, the Social Security Number and Date of Birth are pulled from the SPBPERS
General Person table.
This process allows the creation of application with a negative or zero amount and prints
the message App created with an expected amount of zero or less in the .log file. These
will not extract.
The process also populates null values in the Fed App form and Serial Loan fields, since
an MPN is not required. It will not replace data in the Parent Alternative Loan Data
window during delete/replace.
Electronic Loan Application (RPAELAP)
The unique Loan ID includes the institutional EL School Code/Branch code or Pell code
after extraction.
If a Certification Request record is received, the Loan ID field should be updated to the
Loan ID established by the lender/servicer. To manually update the Loan ID field, change
the process type to CR and the record type to C. You can then manually update the Loan
ID field.
Note
The RPRELAX process will not convert the Loan ID if positions 1-6
(agency code) do not match the School ID.

In the Alternative Loan Data window (which is accessible only if the Alternative Loan
Program Type code is populated on RFRMGMT form), the data incorporated as the
CommonLine @4 record is sent with the @1 record which includes basic CommonLine
loan information.
The Program Type code defaults from RFRMGMT according to the fund awarded. The
Total Student Debt is required if the Loan Process Type = GO, GP, PG. The remaining
fields must be entered manually if applicable to student.
In the Cosigner Information section, cosigner data may be blank. If it is required, you must
manually enter it.
Note
If the lender requires this data, be sure to enter all of it. Partial data entry

may cause the loan to reject.
In the Parent Loan Demographic Data window, populate the parent fields with third-party
borrower data if the parent is not actual alternative loan borrower.
2-280
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Electronic Loan Appl Extract (RPRELAX)
Uses the Student/Bor Ind to extract either student or parent/third-party demographic
data. This process extracts @4 Alternative loan record data, and incorporates Campus and
EL School code data into unique loan ID. The process also ignores Hold/Release codes for
Alternative Loan funds.
Electronic Loan Response Upload (RPRELRU)
Certification Request records are identified via the message Cert Request, not processed.
The Load Alternative Loan Approved Amount and Date If Guarantee fields are not
populated.
This process also processes @4 record data and loads data to relevant list fields on
RPAELAP the Loan Application form (RPAELAP).
Electronic Loan Load/EFT Posting Processes (RPEFTL/
RPREFTP)
This process posts EFT, individual check, or Master Check data received in an electronic
file. Data is visible on the Loan Disbursement (RPALDSB) form. Checks received that are
not part of the roster must be entered on RPALDSB by you.
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
This process disregards Hold/Release codes.
Disbursement/adjustment
Banner Commonline Electronic processing includes EFT, Master Check, and individual
check record upload capability. An EFT file may contain any or all of these types of
disbursements. Banner Hold/Release may be used to update the initial Hold/Release status
to permit or prevent the receipt of scheduled loan disbursements depending upon the
option of the school.
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
• Run the disbursement process online or in batch to generate memos, authorizations,
and disbursement error messages if the disbursement edit optional parameter is
being used for the RPRHDRL process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-281
For Revised Disbursement amount processing:
1. Enter changes to disbursement amounts on RPAELAP as net amounts. Banner will
convert it to the gross amount if the revision is included with the RPRHDRL record.
Loan memos will use Revised Disbursement amounts if present in RPAELAP
Disbursement window.
2. Review disbursement error messages on the disbursement report or on ROIDISB.
Hold/Release Process (RPRHDRL)
This process captures changes to the initial Hold/Release status and creates a data file for
transmission to the service provider or lender.
1. Run the process after receiving the response file. The Guarantor sequence number is
needed.
2. Batch update of status by fund/period updates all available undisbursed records or use
Disbursement Edit.
Note
The Disbursement edit (which is optional) requires at least one
disbursement reject in the Disbursement Results Table to hold a loan,
and that no rejects be found to release a loan. Revised Disbursement
dates and /or revised Disbursement amounts will be included in Hold/
Release transmissions if present.

3. Update the Hold/Release Status field on RPAELAP to HS Hold Sent or RS Release
Sent.
4. Output files include the RPRHDRL.xxxxx.DAT data file and .lis file with the
Control Report and records not processed (with reasons).
Electronic transfer
EFT/Disbursement Roster Upload (RPREFTL)
This process should be run to load student detail data to the temporary RPREFTD table
and cash data to the RPREPMT table.
2-282
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
To transferring file(s) to the Banner dataload directory:
Note
Multiple files may be placed in the directory, but will be processed one at

a time.
1. Rename each file to eftxxx.dat where xxx is a school-maintained sequence
number. After the file is processed, the first nine characters of the Header are changed
to Processed to prevent a duplicate upload.
2. Enter the single parameter file name and run the process.
Electronic Payment Receipt (RPAEPMT)
1. Review summary cash information.
• Single record for all EFT payments in the file.
• Single record for all Netted EFT payments in the file. If netting is used, the
school retains and recycles funds recovered from loan adjustments. Student
records in the file which represent the netted fund total will have a file code
of A.
• Single record for all Master Check payments in the file.
• Individual records for each Individual Check payment in the file. If the check
number field is blank on the incoming file, Banner will generate a Reference
ID number. Banner Reference IDs will have the @ sign.
2. Contact the Accounting Office to confirm that EFT funds have been received in the
bank account.
3. Confirm receipt of checks/master checks.
4. Enter a checkmark by the summary EFT, master check, or netted amount to indicate
receipt of funds so that records will upload during the posting process.
Note
Be certain to mark the receipt flag on $0 payment rosters if netting so that

funds will post to student(s).
5. Enter a checkmark by each individual check received so that the amounts will post.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-283
EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP)
This process matches student records using the unique loan identifier and uploads the data
to the RPRLDSB table. If the record loads successfully, it is deleted from the temporary
table.
1. Enter parameters and run the RPREFTP process.
2. Select a Distribution Method (that is, E, I, M, N) or leave blank to post all types of
student detail records at once.
3. Enter a specific Reference ID or leave blank to process all records.
4. Review output. Verify the process completed by viewing the .log file. The .lis file
will show all students processed in the run including error messages for those that did
not load to the permanent tables.
5. Re-run RPREFTP to generate a report listing the names of only those students whose
records did not match. Resolve on RPAELDB suspense form.
Note
If there are multiple records for the same student in the file, additional
record(s) will be inserted on RPALDSB.

RPAELAP fields populated by RPREFTP process
In the Disbursement Schedule window, the Confirmation Flag indicates the service
provider has borrower confirmation of loan request (for Loan Pilot Program schools). The
Confirmation Flag will be used during the RPEDISB process for non-PLUS loans when
the Direct Loan indicator is not null.
Electronic Loan Disbursement (RPAELDB)
To resolve suspended loan records, blank out the ID in the key block to enter a query. You
can sort on the record types shown on RPAEPMT (that is, E, M, I, N).
We recommend performing a Print Screen for each suspended record and comparing it to
the loan application.
• If the Loan ID is incorrect, change the Loan ID on the RPAELDB record and rerun RPREFTP.
• If there is a Social Security Number mismatch, manually enter data on RPALDSB
and delete the loan record from the temporary tables.
• If there is a Birthdate error (most common), correct the Birthdate and re-run
RPREFTP.
2-284
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• If the EFT authorization block is not checked on RPAELAP, for funds received via
EFT, obtain authorization from the student, check the RPRELAP block, and re-run
RPREFTP.
• If the EFT block is checked on RPAELAP and funds were received as a paper
check, remove the EFT indicator on RPAELAP and re-run RPREFTP. If you have
separate funds for paper checks, you must cancel the EFT fund application and
award, re-award/recreate the application from the paper check fund, and re-run the
posting process.
• If the record is not your student, use the Print Screen of RPAELDB as authorization
for the Finance Office to cut a check from the EFT account back to the lender.
Delete the record on RPAELDB.
1. Rerun RPREFTP after data correction or deletes.
Note
Multiple records for the same student in the same batch will result in
multiple disbursement records on RPALDSB.

To determine fees subsidized by the guarantor/lender, you must verify that:
• Response files include fees to be subsidized by the guarantor/lender for each loan
disbursement.
• Fee subsidies are loaded to the Loan Disbursement (RPRLABD) table and are
visible in the Fees Paid field on RPAELDB only while the Response records are in
the temporary tables. Schools may wish to write a program to capture the fees and
calculate a new net amount for memos.
Disbursement form field population
Loan Disbursement (RPALDSB)
This form displays the historical loan record for a student. Disbursement data populated
by the Electronic Loan Application (RPRELAP) process include:
• Fund
• Period
• Schedule Date
• Sequence Number
Disbursement data populated by the EFT Posting Process (RPREFTP) include:
• EFT Records
• Reference ID (from the roster)
• EFT Amount/Date
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-285
• EFT Indicator checked
• Feed Indicator set to Y
• Individual Checks
• Reference ID (check number)
• Check Amount/Date
• Feed Indicator IS NULL (must sign check)
Master Check
• Reference ID (master check number)
• Amount/Date
• Feed Indicator IS NULL (must sign for proceeds)
When checks/master check forms are signed:
• Feed Indicator (manual)
• Feed Date
By the RPEDISB disbursement process:
• Transaction Number from the Student Account posting.
• Disbursement Load (load code) and Option (type of hours used for calculation)
Due to non-enrollment/withdrawal adjustments:
• Returned Amount for refund amounts calculated after the check is fed.
• Returned to Lender for return of unclaimed checks that have not been fed.
• Returned Date. (Date returned to lender).
Note
Create a separate disbursement record on RPALDSB using the Insert
Record function to post refunds/returns to the lender. Amounts to be
returned can be posted prior to receipt of funds.

Other:
• Certified Hours. This is the credit hours used for eligibility on the loan application
(entered manually on RPAELAP period schedule window)
• Student Received. An optional field populated manually to show date student
received balance of loan proceeds.
• Disbursement Bypass. Used with adjusting entries to correct data entry errors.
2-286
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Disbursement Override.Permits disbursement when the loan amount is greater
than the award amount. Edit uses total of all period disbursement amounts up to
and including the period in which the disbursement process is being run.
Disburse to student account
Disbursement Process (RPEDISB)
1. Run the disbursement process online or in batch to release memos, authorizations,
and/or payment information to the student account. Disbursement may also be run in
the Student Accounting Office if loan checks or Master Check forms are signed there.
2. Check error messages on report or on the ROIDISB form.
Note
This process uses the Financial Aid Consortium enrollment first if the
Consortium Indicator is checked. It uses the actual Student System
enrollment (billable or adjusted per RPROPTS option) as of date of
disbursement run.
RPEDISB/RPALDSB Disbursement/Authorization calculates from the net
of all loan disbursement records for period on the RPALDSB
disbursement form and allows Payment and Authorization in the same

period when two disbursements are scheduled.
3. Process checks for EFT code or MPN Federal Application code of M.
4. Fees paid by the lender captured during the RPREFTL process are used to calculate
loan memos.
Note
Loan disbursements for students who have not accepted charges when
the Accept Charges field on RPROPTS is checked will be rejected. New

error message will appear.
Loan adjustments
Returning individual checks prior to the accounting feed
1. Access the appropriate period record on RPALDSB.
If the student is NOT ENROLLED, enter the check amount on the Retn’d Lndr line on
the Original disbursement period record.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-287
If the student is ENROLLED, use the Insert Record function to create a new period
record for the adjusting entry. Enter the check amount on the Retn’d Lndr line and
save.
Entry on the Retn’d Lndr line prevents any further disbursement. Previous memos
will be backed out.
2. Cancel the award on RPAAWRD.
3. Return check to lender.
Returning calculated refund amounts to lender
1. Access the appropriate period record on RPALDSB.
2. Use the Insert Record function to create a new period record for the adjusting entry.
3. Enter adjustment amount in Returned Amount field. If you are netting
disbursements, check the Disbursement Bypass field to prevent generation of a
refund check to the lender. Save the data.
4. Reduce the award amount on RPAAWRD so that future transcripts will be correct.
5. Run the RPEDISB process to back out excess loan funds.
Note
Banner does not support the return of refund amounts to lenders via EFT.
The posting to Finance for a refund check happens immediately when an
entry is made on RPALDSB and RPEDISB is run. The student ID is NOT

passed to Finance as part of the refund check process.
Correcting loans - received amount less than awarded amount
Reduce the awarded offer and accepted amounts on RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT to the
Approved amount so that the financial aid transcripts will be correct.
Loan reports
Loan Proceeds Aging Report (RPRLNAG)
This report displays the number of days between receipt of the loan funds and the date of
the report as well as basic loan information.
2-288
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Loan Funding Exception Report (RPRLNEX)
The Loan Funding Exception Report lists those students whose received amounts are less
than the amount on the loan by period table.
Parameters include:
• Tolerance Amount ($1.00 is used if no tolerance is entered).
• Process Type compares Pending, Actual, or Both disbursements.
• Process EFT Only allows you to disregard paper checks.
• Reference ID allows you to restrict report by batch.
Setting the Exclude Flag on the individual RPAELAP form will prevent the line from
displaying for a student who has appeared on an earlier report even if a discrepancy
between award/disbursement amount exists.
Review and adjust award form as needed so that transcripts will be correct or so that future
loans for the year will generate correctly.
Loan Summary Report (RPRLSUM)
The Loan Summary Report lists loans for students and can be categorized in several ways
through report parameters.
CommonLine loan adjustment
• If the Approved loan amount is less than the recommended amount for adjustment
of RPAAWRD, create and run a population selection based on:
RPRLAPP_APPROVE_AMT < RPRLAPP_RECOMMENDED_AMT
RPRLAPP_APPROVE_DATE > &APPROVE_DATE
RPRLAPP_EL_STATUS = B
RPRLAPP_AIDY_CODE
• When canceling the Spring disbursement of a full-year loan (also may be used for
other funds on RPAAWRD):
1. Cancel the full amount to move award to the Cancelled column on RPAAWRD.
2. Change the status to ACPT and enter the Fall portion of the loan in the Offered and
Accept columns.
3. Adjust the Dollar Amount on RPAAWRD to the full amount Fall, $0 Spring.
4. Inactivate Spring loan disbursement (student not enrolled, no disbursement)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-289
5. Access the period disbursement record on RPALDSB.
6. Enter the full, anticipated disbursement amount in the Returned to Lender field,
Save.
7. Recoup the Spring disbursement (loan disbursed).
8. Access the period disbursement record on RPALDSB.
9. Click Insert Record to duplicate the period record.
10. Enter the return amount in Returned Amount field, enter date, and set Feed
Indicator.
11. Run the disbursement to create a negative entry on the student account.
12. Cancel the disbursement with the guarantor.
• Delete/Replace Functions
Unsent Loan Application (create replacement application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Changed Loan Status to Not Ready to send
• Clicked Create App button. Original application
Unsent Loan Application (create second application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Left status at Ready to Send
• Clicked Create App button. Created second application with Ready status.
Sent Loan Application (create second application)
• Awarded loan and created original application.
• Extracted Loan. Status Sent on original loan application.
• Increased award on RPAAWRD
• Clicked Create App button. Created second application with Ready status.
• Decline/Cancel Loan
Loan Not Disbursed
1. Enter CNCL or DECL status to move award to Cancel/Decline column.
2. Access RPAELAP form and enter CNCL status in left-hand status field to inactive.
2-290
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3. Report cancellation to guarantor.
4. Watch for guarantor status on right hand side of RPAELAP to change to Terminate
Loan Disbursed
1. Reduce RPAAWRD Offer and Accept amounts to $0.
2. Recoup disbursement.
3. Access period disbursement record on RPALDSB
4. Click Insert Record to duplicate the period record.
5. Enter return amount in Returned Amt field, enter date, and set Feed Indicator.
6. Run disbursement to create a negative entry on the student account.
7. Cancel the disbursement with the guarantor.
Electronic loans received as certification requests in
common response file
When a Loan application has been initiated by the student/parent with a Lender or
Guarantee Agency, the loan certification request is sent to the school in the CommonLine
Response file prior to the Electronic Loan application being created in Banner.
1. If possible, identify the loan from the third-party software report prior to running
RPRELRU. If no report is available, the loan will be identified on the report
generated by RPRELRU and will include the unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency.
2. After the loan has been identified and the student’s eligibility determined, award the
student the appropriate fund and create the loan application in Banner using either the
online process or batch RPRELAP process.
3. From RPAELAP, change the process type to C - (Certification Request) and the
record type to CR - (Correct the Submission). This will then allow you to access the
Loan ID field on RPAELAP.
4. Change the Loan ID to match exactly the Loan ID that has been assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender.
5. Commit the change.
6. If the loan is a certification request, change the Loan Status to R - (Ready), for the
RPRELAX process to extract the loan to send in the Application Send File. The Loan
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-291
ID will not be changed as long as the first six positions are not the School Code as
entered on ROAINST as the Main Campus Pell ID.
If the Certification Request is for a Combined Sub/Unsub, the Loan ID of the
subsidized loan should be updated to match the Unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender. For the unsubsidized loan, the Cross-reference Loan ID
will need to be updated using SQL* Plus to match the Unique Loan ID assigned by the
Guarantee Agency/Lender and the non-unique Loan ID can remain.
Future Response, Change Transaction, and EFT Roster files will recognize the Loan ID
and will correctly process without further manual intervention.
Note
Parent and student data contained in the Response file will not be loaded

into Banner. This information must be manually entered.
Direct lending
Please see the COD Handbook for detailed instructions for working with Direct Loans.
Financial Aid common functions
Aid year default
Banner uses the current calendar year to try to default the global aid year code to be used
when you first start a Banner session. The first time you call a financial aid form (a form
starting with the letter R), Banner runs a form called ROQMENU in the background. One
of the things that this form does is to look at the current calendar year (based on Banner
date) and looks at the ROBINST table for an aid year code where the aid year start year is
the same as the current calendar year and the aid year end year is the same as the current
calendar year plus 1. So, if you are in 2011 it looks for an aid year code that was defined as
starting in 2011 and ends in 2012. After the start of the new year (2012) it looks for an aid
year code that was defined as starting in 2012 and ends in 2013. If it doesn’t find one
(because you haven’t defined the 1213 aid year code yet) then you will get the message:
*ERROR* Could not calculate aid year code from today's date.
This error is not a serious one and will not prevent you from continuing your normal
activities. It just means that Banner could not determine a global aid year code. You would
have to manually set the global aid year code by entering it on a form that has aid year as a
key field or by calling any aid year specific form (like RNANAxx).
If you have defined your 1213 aid year code, Banner will use that aid year as the global aid
year code at start-up. If you wish to keep your global aid year code as 1112 you can
change the pivot date on the ROAINST form.
2-292
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
User-defined data
User-defined data is stored in a table called ROBUSDF. This table has 360 data fields
named ROBUSDF_VALUE_1 through ROBUSDF_VALUE_360 in addition to a field for aid
year, PIDM, and activity date.
Each data field is 20 positions long and is defined as a character field. Values entered may
be character, integer, numeric, or date according to how each field is being used, however
editing for the proper format of integer, numeric, or date fields will not occur.
The Applicant User-Defined Data (ROAUSDF) form allows you to view, enter, and
update each of the 360 fields for an individual student for a particular aid year.
Descriptions to define how the institution uses each field are maintained on a form and
table called RORUSER. The descriptions for each field entered on RORUSER are
displayed next to the field number on the applicant form to aid the user. Field descriptions
are maintained separately for each aid year so you do not need to use the same descriptions
for the same field numbers each year. Even though descriptions are associated with each
field, the data stored in the field for a student is still referred to by its field number when
used in selection statements.
This design permits multiple user-defined fields to be used in a selection statement by
making it simpler to reference the data being stored. You are not required to use the same
fields in the same order each year.
To use these values in your rules, it is suggested that you run the RORUSER Process on a
regular basis such as weekly and after each Data Load. This will create a record in the
ROBUSDF table for every applicant with a RORSTAT record for the aid year.
Batch posting process
The purpose of the Batch posting process is to allow you to post the same data to all
students who meet a common set of criteria at one time. For example, you can post a
tracking requirement for proof of citizenship status for all students who are permanent
resident aliens. Use of Batch posting can greatly reduce the number of budget or tracking
groups that need to be defined.
The generic population selection process is used to identify the students to receive batch
posted data. The Batch posting process requires three steps.
1. Create a Population Selection ID to identify the sub-population of students to receive
the batch posted data. This is done on the Population Selection Definition Rules
(GLRSLCT) form. The process to extract the IDs of the students who meet the
Population Selection ID criteria is called the Population Selection Extract
(GLBDATA) process. Individual student IDs can be inserted into or deleted from the
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-293
list of students generated by using the Population Selection Extract Data
(GLAEXTR) form.
2. Identify the type of data to be posted, the codes to be posted, and the information
showing where the IDs of the extracted students are being stored. This is done on the
Batch Posting Rules (RORPOST) form. The Batch Posting Type Indicator Validation
(RTVPTYP) form is used as a List form for the posting type code, but you cannot
update anything on this form. Multiple types of data can be set up to be posted during
the same run of the process.
For example, you can post tracking requirements, budget adjustments, and award
amounts all in the same run of the program. The Use Indicator field tells the batch
posting process which rules to execute during the next run of the program. You cannot
set the order in which multiple batch posting rules are executed. Therefore, if batch
posting of one type of data depends on the results of another type of batch posting, you
should run each batch posting rule by itself. This way you can control the order in
which they are processed.
3. Run the batch posting process itself. This is done with a standard process called the
Batch Posting Process (RORBPST). The process uses the batch posting rules
established on RORPOST. The batch posting process creates RORSTAT records
when posting awards for students who don’t already have RORSTAT records for the
aid year. The only parameters for the process are for Aid Year to process and Print
Report (Y/N). The optional printed report shows a listing of students who received
each type of batch posted data with comments about anything unusual.
Many types of student data can be batch posted, each one identified by a unique type code.
The codes are listed on the Batch Posting Type Indicator Validation (RTVPTYP) form and
are discussed below:
A - Aid Period
To batch post an Aid Period you enter A under the Type Indicator column and a valid aid
period code under the Code to Post column on the Batch Posting Rules (RORPOST)
form. EFC Proration is performed if institutional rules call for it. Students will be
rebudgeted if necessary, however, components with a system/manual indicator of Manual
or Batch will not have that component’s value changed. Awards in the student’s package
will not be rescheduled so batch posting of aid periods should be done before students are
packaged. Since changing a student’s aid period can change the amount of a Pell Grant,
users should perform a batch Pell Grant recalculation (RPEPELL) after batch posting a
new aid period. If you choose to batch post a new aid period, it is recommended that you
run that rule by itself before running other batch posting rules.
AA - Award Level Info Access Indicator
You may set the Award Level Info Access indicator to display (Yes) or to not display (No)
a specific fund on the Web for the population selection. Enter the fund code in the Code to
Post column. An update to the award table will not be made if the fund does not exist for a
student; an error message, Fund does not exist for student, info access indicator not
updated will be written on the output.
2-294
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
AP - Pell Aid Period Code
To batch post an Aid Period you enter A under the Type Indicator column and a valid aid
period code under the Code to Post column on the Batch Posting Rules (RORPOST)
form. Because changing a student’s Pell aid period can change the amount of a Pell Grant,
you should perform a batch Pell Grant recalculation (RPEPELL) after batch posting a new
Pell aid period.
AS - Student Info Access Indicator
You may batch post the Student Info Access Indicator to display (Yes) or to not display
(No) all award information for the population selection. The Student Info Access Indicator
is displayed on the Packaging Group Information tab on the award forms.
B - Budget Component/Amount
The batch posted component amount replaces the existing amount in the student's budget,
with the exception of manually assigned amounts. If the requested component does not
exist in the student’s budget, it is created. The student’s non-Pell budget type is updated
(unless the Pell type is the only budget type). The student’s gross and unmet need will be
updated. If the student has not been budgeted yet, then the process will not post the new
component/amount.
BA - Budget Level Info Access Ind
Use this batch posting type to update the Info Access indicator for an applicant’s budget.
BB - Borrower Based Indicator
This allows you to post a code to link students with the same Borrower-based loan periods
together. Can be seen on the Award forms.
BF - Budget Duration - FM
This allows the user to batch post a change to the student, number of months of attendance
for the Federal Methodology by calculation. Can be seen on RNAOVxx.
BI - Budget Duration - IM
This allows you to batch post a change to the student’s number of months of attendance
for the Institutional Methodology calculation. Can be seen on RNAOVxx.
C - Current Record Lock
This locks the need analysis record flagged as the Current Record from updates or
replacement until unlocked.
D - Packaging Completed Date
This process sets the existing date to null. A null packaging completed date allows
previously packaged students to be repackaged by the batch packaging process.
DD - Scheduled Disbursement Date
This allows you to post a disbursement date for a specific non-loan fund and period code.
E - Enrollment Status for Year
This allows you to post the enrollment status for the year used by the Packaging Process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-295
F - Fund Code/Amount/Status
All students will be packaged with the same amount and award status code. If a student
already has an award from the requested fund, its amount and status will be replaced with
the new amount and status. The information will not be posted if the student’s package is
locked or the fund is locked in the student’s package. The appropriate fund balances will
be updated. Award validation is performed on funds being packaged through batch
posting, so you should only batch post funds where all selected students are known to be
eligible. For example, it would be appropriate to batch post a scholarship for a student
regardless of the impact it might have on the rest of the awards in the package. Batch
posting funds may create overawards. The student’s unmet need will be updated. The
award will be scheduled into its period by period distribution and a disbursement schedule
will be created if called for. If the fund being posted is an auto accept fund then the fund
will be posted as accepted. You can use the batch posting process to cancel an award by
entering the amount as $0.00.
FH - HPPA Indicator
Identifies students who qualify for the increased Health Profession Programs Amount
(HPPA) loan amounts for Stafford loans.
FL - Fund Lock
Use this batch type to batch post a fund lock value to the Lock field on the Award
Maintenance - Locks/Indicators window of the RPAAWRD and RPAAPMT form. When
the Type Indicator is FL, valid values for Code to Post are:
Y - Always pay the locked amount
E - Adjust for enrollment decreases only (Pell only)
N - Award is not locked
FN - Fund/Amt/Status no validation
The FN batch type allows the batch posting of a fund code, amount, and status for a
population selection without going through the award validation process. The following
fields are required for the FN posting type:
• Code to Post (RORPOST_POST_CODE) is the Fund Code to be posted.
• Amount to Post (RORPOST_AMT) is the amount to be posted.
• Status (RORPOST_STATUS_CODE) is the award status to be posted.
FS - Fund Code Status
The FS batch posting type lets you cancel, decline, or accept a specific fund award in its
entirety. When you select the FS type indicator, do not enter an amount for the rule. You
can only enter an award status which has been designated as accepted, cancelled, or
declined on RTVAWST for the FS posting type. For rules of type FS:
2-296
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• The Code to Post is the fund code of the award. The list of values for the code is
drawn from the Fund Code Validation Table (RFRBASE).
• The Status is the award status. The list of values for the code is drawn from the
Award Status Validation Table (RTVAWST).
The Status is invalid for specified Post Type Code error message displays if you enter an
offered award status.
GL - Group Code Lock
The Group Code Lock allows you to post a lock to the any of the three group locks:
tracking, budgeting, or packaging. When the Type Indicator is GL, the Code to Post field
indicates whether to add (Y) or remove (N) a tracking, budgeting, or packaging group lock.
For example, when Type Indicator is GL and the Code to Post field is Y, a lock is posted
to whatever group type (T (Tracking), B (Budgeting), or P (Packaging)) is indicated in the
Miscellaneous Code field. If the Code to Post field is N, the lock is removed from
whatever group type is indicated in the Miscellaneous Code field.
H - Hold Code
A financial aid hold can be placed or removed for a student. Holds are removed by making
them inactive. To remove a hold, use the value of R (release) in the Miscellaneous Code 1
field.
HN -A Non-Aid Year Specific, Non-Period Specific Hold
Use this batch type to post a hold which is non-aid year specific and non-period specific.
Note
Ability to Batch Post a hold without specifying an aid year or period. The
Miscellaneous Code 2 field was added as an optional field that can be
used to Batch Post a hold that is not associated with an aid year or period
for a specific fund. An end date may also be specified when Batch

Posting a hold that is not associated with an aid year or period.
HT -Hold Code/Period Code, Period-specific Hold
Use this batch type to post a hold which is period specific.
Ability to Batch Post a hold for a specific period. The Miscellaneous Code 2 field
was added as an optional field that can be used to Batch Post a fund-specific hold for a
period. An end date may also be specified when Batch Posting a hold for a period.
Note
For all Hold Type Codes, if no end date has been entered, the
31-DEC-2099 date will be used. When Batch Posting a release date for
any of the Hold Type Codes, the system date will be used.
If you are releasing a hold, you must include the fund code to release a
fund specific hold. If no fund code is entered when a hold is released,

fund specific holds will not be updated.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-297
I - Institutional Housing Code
You can batch post codes of 1-4. The codes are defined each year on the FAFSA
application. Only Current Records are updated. The institutional housing code can be used
in budget group selection and budget construction.
L - Letter Code
You can assign a student a letter to be sent the next time letters are run.
LS - Lender Status
Use this batch posting type to update the lender status to active/inactive for the lender by
loan type on Student Lender History Data (RPASLND) form.
M - Applicant Message
This allows the user to specify a user-defined message to print on letters along with the
expiration date of that message.
MD - Memo Expiration Date
This allows the user to post an expiration date for a specific fund code and period code.
P - Package Lock
If a student’s package is locked, the student cannot be repackaged, either manually or in a
batch.
PB - Post BA Pell Override
This flags students who are eligible to receive Post BA Pell.
PBA - Period Budget Info Access Ind
This updates the information access indicator to allow or prevent the student’s budget
information to display in self-service
PBAA - All Types/All Periods
This inserts or updates a budget component to all budget types and all periods associated
with the student for the aid year.
PBAS - Comp-All types/One Period
This inserts or updates a budget component for all budget types for a specific period.
PBFI - Period Budget Freeze Ind
This updates the Freeze indicator for a specific period to freeze or unfreeze the budget for
recalculation of budget components.
PBPA - Comp-Pell/All Periods
This inserts or updates a budget component for the Pell budget type for all period’s
associated with the student for the aid year.
PBGL - Period Budget Group Lock Ind
This updates the Period Budget Group lock.
2-298
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
PBPS - Comp-Pell/One Period
This inserts or updates a budget component for the Pell budget type for a specific period.
PBSA - Comp-One Type/All Periods
This inserts or updates a budget component for a specific budget type for all periods
associated with the student for the aid year.
PBSS - Comp-One Type/One Period
This inserts or updates a budget component for a specific type and a specific period.
PI - Pell Process Indicator
Use this batch type to enable/disable the Prevent Automatic Pell Calculation field on the
Applicant Status (ROASTAT) form. This field prevents the automatic execution of the
Pell process from forms for a student.
PNA – Fund Period Prom Note/Access Ind
Use this batch posting type to update the Info Access Indicator for a non-Direct Loan
Promissory note for a fund and period. The period will be entered in the Period field and
the Fund Code will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field.
Note
You cannot use R, RF, RT, and RFT batch posting codes to update
existing requirements.

PO - Pell Origination Indicator
This allows you to post an indicator on the student to automatically create an updated Pell
Origination record.
PT - Prep or Teacher Cert Ind
Once you have identified a population of students who are undergraduates taking
preparatory coursework, graduates taking preparatory coursework, or students enrolled in
teacher certification, you may use the Batch Posting Process to update the Preparatory or
Teacher Certification indicator on the RPAAWRD or RPAAPMT forms. Once the
indicator has been updated, the award and disbursement validation process use the
appropriate annual limits for the student. Also, the Stafford loan records will contain the
indicator value once created.
R – Requirement Code/Status
This type code will only create a requirement when one does not already exist. You can no
longer use this type code to update an existing requirement. A message is provided in the
output file if the requirement already exists for the applicant and no update occurred.
RA – Requirement/Access Ind
This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info Access
Indicator for a tracking requirement. The requirement code to update will be entered in the
Miscellaneous Code 1 field.
RF – Fund Specific Requirements
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-299
This type code will only create a fund specific requirement when one does not already
exist. You can no longer use this type code to update an existing requirement. A message
is provided in the output file if the requirement already exists for the applicant and no
update occurred. When this requirement is created, the Batch Posting process no longer
checks that the fund exists in the applicant’s package.
RFA – Fund Req/Access Ind
This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info Access
Indicator for a fund specific tracking requirement. The requirement code will be entered in
the Miscellaneous Code 1 field and the fund code will be entered in the Miscellaneous
Code 2 field.
RFS – Fund Req Status
This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for both satisfied
and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use Batch Posting to post a
status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously satisfied. If the requirement has the
status code being posted, the status will not be updated. This type code cannot be used to
create requirements.
RFT – Fund Period Specific Reqs
Provides the ability to create a fund period specific requirement if it does not previously
exist. When this requirement is created, the Batch Posting process no longer checks that
the fund exists in the applicant’s package.
RFTA – Fund Period Req/Access Ind
This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info Access
Indicator for a fund and period specific tracking requirement. The period will be entered in
the Period field, the Requirement Code will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 1 field
and the Fund Code will be entered in the Miscellaneous Code 2 field.
RFTS – Fund Period Req Status|
This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for both satisfied
and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use Batch Posting to post a
status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously satisfied. If the requirement has the
status code being posted, the status will not be updated. This type code cannot be used to
create requirements.
RS – Requirement Status
This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for both satisfied
and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use Batch Posting to post a
status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously satisfied. If the requirement has the
status code being posted, the status will not be updated. This type code cannot be used to
create requirements.
RT – Period Specific Requirements
Provides the ability to create a period specific requirement if it does not previously exist.
2-300
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
RTA – Period Req/Access Ind
This type code provides the ability to check or uncheck a RRAAREQ Info Access
Indicator for a period specific tracking requirement. The Period Code will be entered in
the Period field and the Requirement Code to update will be entered in the Miscellaneous
Code 1 field.
RTS – Period Req Status
This type code will update the status of existing requirements. The status for both satisfied
and unsatisfied requirements will be updated. You can also use Batch Posting to post a
status code of unsatisfied to requirements previously satisfied. If the requirement has the
status code being posted, the status will not be updated. This type code cannot be used to
create requirements.
S – Satisfactory Academic Progress
If you batch post an SAP code you must also enter a term code under the Term Code field
on the RORPOST form. Satisfactory Academic Progress codes must first be defined on
the Satisfactory Academic Progress Validation (RTVSAPR) form.
SL – SAP Code Lock/Unlock
This allows you to lock or unlock a SAP code for a term.
TE – Term Enrollment Status
This allows the user the ability to batch post a term enrollment status to update the FAFSA
data.
TL – Period Lock
Use this batch type to batch post a period lock value to the Period field on the Award
Schedule - Options window of the RPAAWRD and RPAAPMT form. When the Type
Indicator is TL, valid values for Code to Post are:
Y - Always pay the locked amount
E - Adjust for enrollment decreases only (Pell only)
N - Award is not locked
U – User Defined Variable/Value
You can batch post to any of the 360 user-defined data fields. The field being posted to
must be referred to by its field number, not by its description. To identify which field is to
receive the batch posted data, enter a number from 1 to 360 without any leading zeros
under the Code to Post field on RORPOST. The information to post for that field is
entered in the Status Code field.
UN – Non Year User-Defined Data
You can batch post to any of the 360 non year user-defined data fields. The field being
posted to must be referred to by its field number, not by its description. To identify which
field is to receive the batch posted data, enter a number from 1 to 360 without any leading
zeros under the Code to Post field on RORPOST. The information to post for that field is
entered in the Period field.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-301
V – Verification Selection Message
You can use this posting type to institutionally select a student for Title IV verification.
You can also use this option to deselect a student for verification. The verification
message will be posted to the student’s current record only.
VS – Verification Status
You can post the student’s verification status code; the current values for the aid year are
available in the LOV. This value can be seen on ROAPELL.
Y – Banner Year in College
This option updates the Banner year in college which is used by all the processes. Only the
current record is updated. The values for Banner year in college are:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
1st time freshman, no prior college
Freshman, prior college
Sophomore, (2nd year undergrad)
Junior, (3rd year undergrad)
Senior, (4th year undergrad)
5th Year/Other undergrad
1st Year Graduate/Professional
Continuing Grad/Prof or beyond
1 – Federal Methodology Student Contribution Lock
This locks the FM-SC displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked.
2 – Federal Methodology Parent Contribution Lock
This locks the FM-PC displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked.
3 – Federal Methodology EFC Lock
This locks the Pell EFC displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked. This is the single
field loaded from EDE or AFSA tape where the SC and PC are not present. To lock the
Total where a SC and PC are both present, you must lock the SC and PC separately.
4 – System Pell EFC Lock
This locks the SYS-PGI displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked.
5 – Institutional Methodology Student Contribution Lock
This locks the IM-SC displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked.
2-302
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
6 – Institutional Methodology Parent Contribution Lock
This locks the IM-PC displayed on the Need Analysis Result (RNARSxx) form from
being updated or replaced. Only the field in the current record is locked.
Note
Batch posting allows you to specify that when a student has a specific
Reject or Comment code, you can batch post a requirement or message,
etc., to that group of students. This process requires a population
selection, but one that will be used in conjunction with the Comment code
or Reject code. You do not need to write and support different population
selections for each possible combination of Reject or Comment codes
that may exist for a student. For example, if the goal is to attach a new
tracking requirement to all students with a Reject code of 03, then the
population selection used could be for all students with a RORSTAT
record for the year, define the Type code as R for Reject, and the Code as

03, and the tracking requirement and status code to be posted.
Community source
The Update batch post categories (ROPPCAT) process, can be used to automatically
uncheck the Use Indicator for all records on RORPOST and check the Use Indicator for a
specific Category or like Category. Institutions with an automated batch scheduling
feature are now able to streamline their batch production by inserting this new process
between their existing batch post steps. For a given aid year, this process first resets or
unchecks all of the use indicators that have been checked on RORPOST. The process then
goes through and sets the use indicators that correspond to the category code defined by
the user in the job parameters. When the process is run, the Use Indicator is set to Y
(checked) for all batch posting rules that match the defined category code.
Depending on an institution’s naming standard, it is possible to group categories for one
batch posting. For these institutions, a parameter has been provided to process only a
single category code (equal) or multiple categories using the option of Like. If you are
using the option of Like, you may enter a partial category code and a wildcard % has been
appended to the end; i.e., like TRK would be TRK% when the Like option is used.
The following are the parameters and their description:
Note
The category code parameter is not validated for valid values on
RORPOST. If the category code entered for the parameter does not exist,
all Use Indicators have been reset to N (unchecked), and no updates

have been made to set the Use Indicators to Y (checked).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-303
Parameter
Required
Description
Values
Aid Year Code
Yes
Enter the aid year for which the use
indicators have been set and reset.
Aid Year Inquiry
(ROIAIDY)
Category Code
Yes
Enter the full or partial category code; the
batch post rules corresponding to the code or
code is set. If this is a partial category code
name, be sure to choose “Like” mode below.
Equal or Like
Yes
If your category code entered above is the
exact name of a category, enter an E.
Otherwise, if your category code is a partial
one, enter an L. The default is L.
E
Equal mode
L
Like mode
Enter A to produce an audit report or U to
update the database. The default is U.
A
Audit mode
U
Update mode
Enter the Application Code associated with
the population selection for the category
code(s) to be selected for update of the Use
Indicator.
Application Inquiry
(GLIAPPL)
If the “Like” option is chosen, there is an
assumed percent (%) at the end of the
category code.
Audit or Update
Application Code
Yes
Yes
Processing examples
For example, assume the following set of rules exist for a given aid year:
Use
Indicator
Category
Selection ID
TRK_VET
10_ACMLTY_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_BUR
10_BP_BUR_1932
PKG_FRESH
10_BP_NEW_ADMITS
SAP_LTR
10_BP_SAP_LTR_AUG_CA
NN_
UG
ISIR Type/
Value
C/254
C/260
Type
Indicator
Code to
Post
R
R
R
RF
U
L
ACMLTY
AGLLM
AGLLM
BUR10
59
R
If the process is run with parameters of “equals” and a category of “TRK_CC”, the result is:
2-304
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Use
Indicator
checked
checked
Category
Selection ID
TRK_VET
10_ACMLTY_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_BUR
10_BP_BUR_1932
PKG_FRESH
10_BP_NEW_ADMITS
SAP_LTR
10_BP_SAP_LTR_AUG_CAN
N_
UG
ISIR Type/
Value
C/254
C/260
Type
Indicator
Code to
Post
R
R
R
RF
U
L
ACMLTY
AGLLM
AGLLM
BUR10
59
R
If the process is next run with parameters of “equals” and “SAP”, the result is:
Use
Indicator
ISIR
Type/
Value
Type
Indicator
Code to Post
R
ACMLTY
Category
Selection ID
TRK_VET
10_ACMLTY_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
C/254
R
AGLLM
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
C/260
R
AGLLM
TRK_BUR
10_BP_BUR_1932
RF
BUR10
PKG_FRESH
10_BP_NEW_ADMITS
U
59
SAP_LTR
10_BP_SAP_LTR_AUG_CAN
N_
UG
L
R
Since there is no category that exactly matches (is equal to) “SAP”, nothing is set. If the
process is instead run with parameters of “equals” and “SAP_LTR”, the result is:
Use
Indicator
May 2012
Category
Selection ID
TRK_VET
10_ACMLTY_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
TRK_BUR
10_BP_BUR_1932
ISIR Type/
Value
Type
Indicator
Code to Post
R
ACMLTY
C/254
R
AGLLM
C/260
R
AGLLM
RF
BUR10
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-305
Use
Indicator
checked
Type
Indicator
Code to Post
10_BP_NEW_ADMITS
U
59
10_BP_SAP_LTR_AUG_CA
NN_UG
L
R
Category
Selection ID
PKG_FRESH
SAP_LTR
ISIR Type/
Value
If the process is run with parameters of “like” and “TRK”, the result is:
ISIR Type/
Value
Type
Indicator
Code to Post
R
ACMLTY
Use Indicator
Category
Selection ID
checked
TRK_VET
10_ACMLTY_NEW
checked
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
C/254
R
AGLLM
checked
TRK_CC
10_AGLLM_NEW
C/260
R
AGLLM
checked
TRK_BUR
10_BP_BUR_1932
RF
BUR10
PKG_FRESH
10_BP_NEW_ADMIT
S
U
59
SAP_LTR
10_BP_SAP_LTR_A
UG_CANN_UG
L
R
Processing holds
Holds may be created which are non-aid year specific, aid year specific, or period specific.
You also have the ability to associate a hold for a specific fund or specific aid type. When
a hold for a period exists for an applicant, the hold will be effective for award validation
when the period code exists in the applicant’s aid period. A hold for a term will be
effective for disbursement validation when disbursing for that term.
Hold Type Validation (RTVHOLD)
A number of new indicators were added to RTVHOLD. These fields can be used to
indicate that a hold should be associated with either specific types of funds or all funds.
The default value when the Banner Financial Aid 8.3.1 release was applied was All Funds.
The default value when a new hold is created will also be All Funds. If all the hold types
(All Aid, Title IV, Federal, State, and Institutional) are unchecked (No), the All Aid
indicator will be presumed to be Yes, and the hold will be in effect as indicated by the
Prevent Packaging, Memo, or Disbursement indicators.
2-306
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The Info Access indicator allows you to define if the hold should be displayed in
Self-Service.
Packaging process when holds exist
If a period specific hold exists and the period is part of the applicant’s aid period, funds
will not be packaged based on the type of aid indicated on RTVHOLD. Award validation
will evaluate the hold types to determine if the hold prevents packaging of All Aid, Title
IV, Federal, State, or Institutional when packaging a fund. If all hold type indicators are
unchecked (All Aid, Title IV, Federal, State, or Institutional), the hold All Aid indicator is
assumed to be Yes for the hold. A hold which is fund specific will only be applicable to
that fund.
Disbursement process when holds exist
Disbursement validation will evaluate the hold types to determine if the hold prevents
memo or disbursement of All Aid, Title IV, Federal, State, or Institutional when disbursing
a fund. If a fund-specific hold exists that prohibits memo or disbursement, only the
specific fund will be affected. If all hold type indicators are unchecked (All Aid, Title IV,
Federal, State, or Institutional), the hold All Aid indicator is assumed to be Yes for the
hold. A hold which is fund specific will only be applicable to that fund.
Applicant Holds (ROAHOLD)
A hold may be defined without an aid year or period, or it can be aid-year specific, or
period specific. You may not enter both an aid year and period for a hold. When a period
code is defined for a period that prevents packaging, the award validation process will
prohibit awarding (based on the aid type indicators) if the period for the hold is part of the
applicant’s aid period.
Example
When there is a packaging hold for the fall period and the all aid indicator is checked, it
would prohibit auto packaging of awards when the applicant’s aid period is fall/spring, but
would not prohibit packaging of awards for a spring only aid period. When a hold that
prevents memo or disbursement is defined for a specific period, the hold is effective for
only that period.
You may also define a hold for a specific fund by entering the fund code. When using a
fund specific hold, the hold type indicators (All aid, Title IV, Federal, State, and
Institutional) will not be evaluated; only the packaging, memo, and disbursement
indicators are evaluated for the fund specified.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-307
Repeat coursework processing
This section describes regulatory changes that became effective on July 1, 2011,
specifically identifying how Repeat Coursework must be taken into account by institutions
when defining “Full-Time” status for enrollment, as well as how that coursework is
counted in the Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP) calculation.
Note
The amended definition of Repeat Coursework can be found in section

§668.2 of the Federal Register.
The Notice of Proposed Rulemaking suggested that institutions pay for any coursework
previously taken. The final rule, as enacted, became effective on July 1, 2011 and
amended the definition of a “Full-time” student to include:
“including for a term-based program, repeating any coursework previously taken in
the program but not including either more than one repetition of a previously passed
course, or any repetition of a previously passed course due to the student failing other
coursework.” (34CFR Section 668.2)
The regulation provides further detail regarding “Three-Quarter time” and “Half-time”
with regard to the proration of “Full-time”.
To be more specific, the rule can be separated into multiple parts:
Part 1
An institution can pay a student for only one retake of any previously passed course or its
equivalency. The following two examples further describe this situation:
Example 1
2-308
Term
Course
Result
Full-Time Eligibility Status
Fall 2010
English 101
Fail
Eligible
Spring 2011
English 101
Pass
Eligible
Summer 2011 English 101
Pass (1st repeat of previously
passed course)
Eligible
Fall 2011
(future)
2nd repeat of previously
passed course.
Not Eligible to count toward
Full-time enrollment status.
English 101
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Example 2
Term
Course
Result
Full-Time Eligibility Status
Fall 2010
History 101
Fail
Eligible
Spring 2011
History 101
Pass
Eligible
Summer 2011 History 101
Fail (1st repeat of previously
passed course)
Eligible
Fall 2011
(future)
2nd repeat of previously
passed course.
Not Eligible to count toward
Full-time enrollment status.
History 101
Part 2
An institution can pay a student when repeating a course (of its equivalency) an infinite
number of times if all previous attempts were failures. The following example describes
this situation:
Term
Course
Result
Full-Time Eligibility Status
Fall 2010
Math 101
Fail
Eligible
Spring 2011
Math 101
Fail
Eligible
Summer 2011 Math 101
Fail
Eligible
Fall 2011
(future)
Allowed to be included in the
definition of Full-Time
enrollment status.
Eligible to count toward
Full-time enrollment status.
Math 101
This student can repeat this
course an infinite number of
times if all previous attempts
were failures, as long as those
failures are graded courses.
At the point in time when the
student finally passes the
course, they are only allowed
to repeat the course one time
within the definition of
Full-Time enrollment status.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-309
Part 3
An institution cannot pay a student for any repetition of a previously passed course due to
the student failing other coursework. The following example describes this situation:
The Student has enrolled in a medical program that requires enrollment in four specific
courses for the term:
Term
Course
Result
Full-Time Eligibility Status
Spring 2011
Anatomy 501
Pass
Science 501
Pass
Biology 501
Pass
The institution requires that
the student passes all four
courses before they can move
onto the next four courses in
the program.
Chemistry
501
Fail
In the Fall of 2011, the student decides to retake the same four courses above, hoping to
pass them all so they can move onto the next set of courses.
• The institution may count the one failed course in the definition of Full-Time
enrollment status.
• The institution may not count the three passed courses in the definition of
Full-Time enrollment status.
The example described in Part 3 requires exception processing (which will not be handled
by the Repeat Coursework logic). Institutions will need to develop methods to identity and
monitor these situations manually.
Repeat Coursework Processing is valid only for Aid Years where the Aid Year End Year
(ROBINST_AIDY_END_YEAR) => 2012.
Although the final regulation states that Federal Title IV aid must abide by the new
definition of “Full-time” as it relates to Repeat Coursework, Fund Codes with Title IV
Federal Fund ID’s are not mandated to use this functionality. In fact, all types of Fund
Codes are eligible to use this functionality, while none are mandated.
2-310
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
Options tab
The Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year indicator
(ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) provides the institution the ability to globally set whether
or not you wish to allow the use of Repeat Course checking for the aid year. The global
indicator will:
• Serve as a master control when attempting to update the Repeat Course Checking
indicator on individual fund codes.
• Reduce unnecessary system processing resources and time for institutions that do
not wish to implement Repeat Course Checking for the aid year.
Note
Several forms, processes, and reports will display repeated courses
and/or Repeat Coursework enrollment calculations regardless of the
setting in the Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year
indicator (ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) for that aid year. This behavior
occurs due to the processing of the packages, procedures, and functions

behind the Repeat Coursework logic.
Fund Management (RFRMGMT)
Disbursement tab
The Use Repeat Course Checking indicator (RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) should be
set for each fund in which the institution plans on using the Repeat Coursework
calculation. When checked, fund codes that use Repeat Course Checking enrollment
calculations in processes or reports (i.e. RPEPELL, RPEDISB, RORGRDE, etc.) will use
the Repeat Coursework calculation Billing or Adjusted hour calculations.
The form’s Use Repeat Course Checking indicator (RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND)
cannot be set to Y if the Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year indicator
(ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) is set to N for the same Aid Year. When this occurs, the
following error is displayed:
*ERROR* The Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year indicator must
be set to ‘Y’ before this fund can be used for Repeat Course Checking.
Note
The Use Repeat Course Checking indicator
(RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) can be checked manually per fund code
on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) and Funds Management
(ROAMGMT) forms, or on the Financial Aid Repeat Course Checking
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-311
(RFRRPCC) form manually or by group based on a query within the
form.

Note
Starting with the 2011-2012 aid year, the only two fund types that use the
load calculation for packaging are Pell and TEACH grants. Rather than
create another repeat coursework indicator, Pell and TEACH grant
processing will use the setting on the disbursement tab of RFRMGMT
(RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) and the repeat coursework indicator
(ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) on ROAINST. Both of these must be set
to Y in order for repeat coursework logic to be used during the packaging

of Pell and TEACH grants.
Funds Management (ROAMGMT)
Disbursement Options tab
Additional Rules tab
The Use Repeat Course Checking indicator (RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) should be
set for each fund in which the institution plans on using the Repeat Coursework
calculation for. When checked, fund codes that use Repeat Course Checking enrollment
calculations in processes or reports (i.e. RPEPELL, RPEDISB, RORGRDE, etc.) will use
the Repeat Coursework calculation Billing or Adjusted hour calculations.
The form’s Use Repeat Course Checking indicator (RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND)
cannot be set to Y if the Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year indicator
(ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) is set to N for the same Aid Year. When this occurs, the
following error is displayed:
*ERROR* The Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid Year indicator must be
set to ‘Y’ before this fund can be used for Repeat Course Checking.
Note
The Use Repeat Course Checking indicator
(RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) can be checked manually per fund code
on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) and Funds Management
(ROAMGMT) forms, or on the Financial Aid Repeat Course Checking
(RFRRPCC) form manually or by group based on a query within the form.
Note
Starting with the 2011-2012 aid year, the only two fund types that use the
load calculation for packaging are Pell and TEACH grants. Rather than
create another repeat coursework indicator, Pell and TEACH grant
processing will use the setting on the disbursement tab of RFRMGMT
(RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) and the repeat coursework indicator
(ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) on ROAINST. Both of these must be set
to Y in order for repeat coursework logic to be used during the packaging

of Pell and TEACH grants.
2-312
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Financial Aid Repeat Course Checking (RFRRPCC)
The RFRRPCC management form provides an easy way to see fund codes which have the
Use Repeat Course Checking indicator (RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) set to either N or
Y for an aid year. From the key block, you will be expected to enter the desired aid year
code. After an aid year is entered and a next block is performed, the form will query all
Fund Codes that exists for that aid year. The user can query by any combination or single
Fund Code, Fund Type, Fund Source, or Federal Fund ID. Once the query is executed, the
user can manually update the indicators for Fund Codes or update the indicators for the
group by using the Select All Indicators button or Deselect All Indicators button.
When an aid year is selected where the Allow Use of Repeat Course Checking for Aid
Year indicator (ROBINST_REP_COURSE_IND) is set to N for the same Aid Year, the
following warning will be displayed upon entering the form:
*WARNING* Repeat Course Checking is off for Aid Year, No Updates Allowed.
The form will still allow the user to navigate through Fund Codes, but none of the Use
Repeat Course Checking indicators will be updateable.
Note
The Use Repeat Course Checking indicator
(RFRASPC_REP_COURSE_IND) can be checked manually per fund code
on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) and Funds Management
(ROAMGMT) forms, or on the Financial Aid Repeat Course Checking
(RFRRPCC) form manually or by group based on a query within the form.
Financial Aid Repeat Course Exclusion (RORRPCX)
The RORRPCX form allows the institution to insert and update courses which will be
excluded from the Financial Aid Repeat Coursework enrollment calculations. Examples
of courses that would possibly fall into the category of legitimate repeats and ultimately
excluded from the Repeat Coursework calculation would be thesis courses, dissertation
courses, some physical education courses, and performance courses. Institutions may also
have individual courses outside of the examples listed above that they may want to include
as exclusions; that is permissible.
Subject, Course and From Term are required fields. Data must be populated for each of
these fields before the Description field will be populated. The Description used will be
the default Course Title (from SCBCRSE) for the course, not an individual Course Title
from the section created.
To determine the correct Course Title to populate as the Description field, the From
Term field’s value will be used.
• If a course exists (from SCBCRSE) for the same term entered in the From Term
field on RORRPCX, the Course Title will be used to populate the Description on
RORRPCX.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-313
• If a course does not exist (from SCBCRSE) for the same term entered in the From
Term field on RORRPCX, the Course Title (from SCBCRSE) will be chosen by
selecting the earliest From Term sequence (from SCBCRSE) and use the Course
Title that appears with that sequence record.
For each course and subject listed, a From Term and To Term must be entered to specify
the range of terms for which this course should not be included in the Repeat Coursework
calculation. The To Term field can be left blank. If the To Term field is left blank, an
understanding of infinity will be used to determine the To Term value. Once the term
range has surpassed, the course listed will be subject to consideration in the Repeat
Coursework calculation.
Identical courses may be entered in this form, providing their term ranges do not coincide
nor do they exist in a previously established term range for an existing row matching the
same Subject and Course. Also, there is no stipulation on length of the term range; it can
be as short as one term and as long as infinity.
Once a record is committed, the Subject, Course, and From Term are not updateable. The
To Term may be updated. If the Subject, Course, or From Term must be updated, you
must perform a record remove on the current record and insert a new record.
Repeat course checking functionality
The business logic used to determine Repeat Coursework is housed within the Financial
Aid Repeat Course Package (ROKRPTS). This package contains logic to determine if a
course is considered a repeat based on numerous sets of criteria.
Using the settings mentioned in the sections below, the ROKRPTS package will determine
if a course is considered a repeat and included or excluded from the Repeat Coursework
calculation based upon whether that repeat violates the regulatory limit towards the
calculation of “Full-time” enrollment, using courses that are graded, not graded, rolled to
history, and not rolled to history. This logic holds true for both institutional and transfer
courses.
Repeat/Multiple Course Rules (SHARPTR)
This package uses the institution’s defined settings in the Repeat/Multiple Course Rules
(SHARPTR) form for the Level Indicator, Title Indicator, Schedule Type Indicator,
and Transfer Course Indicator fields when determining if a course is considered a repeat
and included or excluded from the Repeat Coursework enrollment calculation. These four
indicators are the only fields used on this form for the Financial Aid Repeat Coursework
functionality.
To ensure proper and accurate processing, it is recommended that your Financial Aid
office coordinate with the Registrar’s office to ensure these indicators are set according to
both institutional policy and in accordance with the repeat coursework federal regulation.
2-314
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Although required by federal regulation, using transfer coursework in repeat coursework
processing is optional at the institutional level. If your institution does accept transfer
credits towards the students program of study, the Transfer Course Indicator on the
SHARPTR form should be checked to include those courses in repeat coursework
processing. When doing so, the Equivalency Detail block of the Transfer Course
(SHATRNS) form must have the courses’ equivalency information completed.
Using transfer courses in repeat coursework processing will be successful, providing the
transfer course is entered manually on the SHATRNS form or via the Transfer Articulation
module in the Banner Student system. Please refer to the Banner Student User Guide for
additional information regarding transfer coursework data entry.
Course Detail Information (SCADETL)
The Equivalent Course block of this form is used to indicate course equivalencies or
“course inclusions”. Course equivalencies are typically built when subject/course
numbering is different for grade levels yet the course content is identical, or when the
course life cycle is expired and a new course subject/course number is created in its place.
Course equivalencies may already be defined by institutional policy or course expiration.
To ensure proper and accurate processing, it is recommended that your Financial Aid
office coordinate with the Registrar’s office to make certain that all course equivalencies
are entered correctly and in a timely fashion.
Grade Code Maintenance (SHAGRDE)
The Grade Code Maintenance (SHAGRDE) form contains institutional control used to
determine which Grade Codes are to be included in repeat coursework processing. This is
accomplished by checking the form’s Repeat Indicator. Without this option being
hardcoded, institutions have an additional method to control which Grade Codes will be
used in repeat coursework processing and which will not be used. All grade codes which
are to be used in processing must have the Repeat Indicator checked. If the Repeat
Indicator is changed at any time, the repeat coursework enrollment calculations will be
affected, dynamically.
Control over which grade codes are considered “passing grades” is housed in the Count in
Passed Indicator. This indicator must be checked for the grade code to be considered a
passing grade.
As grading policies vary among institutions, ensuring that these settings are accurate will
prevent incorrect enrollment calculations and avoid invalid aid disbursements.
Course Registration Status Code Validation (STVRSTS)
The Status Code used for courses enrolled must have the Count in Enrollment indicator
checked if the status code is to count in the enrollment calculation of both total hours and
repeat coursework hours. For withdrawn status codes to be considered in the repeat
coursework enrollment calculation, the Count in Enrollment indicator must be checked.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-315
Institutional policy will typically dictate if withdrawn courses count in the enrollment
calculation. For the repeat coursework enrollment calculation to accurately account for
withdrawn courses counted in enrollment, the course should not have a grade code
populated.
Transfer Course (SHATRNS)
For transfer coursework to be included in the repeat coursework calculation, the transfer
course must have any and all Equivalency Detail completed on the Transfer Course
(SHATRNS) form. Along with entering the equivalent courses, the Count in GPA
indicator must also be checked.
It is important to remember that the Repeat indicator on the Grade Code Maintenance
(SHAGRDE) form should be checked for the Grade Code used as well as ensuring the
Transfer indicator on the Repeat/Multiple Course Rules (SHARPTR) form is checked.
The repeat coursework calculation works with transfer courses entered manually on the
Transfer Course (SHATRNS) form or via the Transfer Articulation module in the Banner
Student system.
Additional institutional setup considerations
Repeat Coursework processing will exclude a course from being considered a “repeat” in
the Repeat Coursework enrollment calculation if:
• The Student Level or Course Level is marked for exclusion on the Global
Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
or
• The Grading Mode or Registration Status has been listed on the Audit Grading
Mode (RPRAUDT) form.
or
• The section is labeled as unavailable for aid on the Section Unavailable for Aid
(ROASECT) form.
This functionality is optional and can be implemented at any time by your institution.
When in effect, enrollment calculations will reflect the exclusion of the course based on
the form entries above.
Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL)
The ROAENRL form maintains the display of enrollment calculated by the student’s
registration in the Student system as well as the enrollment entered in the Financial Aid
System. The Repeat Coursework calculations will display for crossover terms, just as the
Total Hour columns do.
2-316
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
At times, Credit, Bill, and Adjusted Hour values will be present in the Repeat Coursework
columns even though Repeat Course Checking has not been turned on for the aid year.
This is due to the necessary processing within the corresponding views, packages, and
functions, as well as the necessity of using freeze hours during the year.
Financial Aid Enrollment window
Both the Financial Aid Hours and Current Hours blocks display the Repeat Coursework
calculations, if there are any, along with the Total Hours calculations.
Financial Aid Hours block
The Financial Aid Hours columns will continue to be updated manually or by executing
the Financial Aid Enrollment Hours (RSRENRL) process. If the user attempts to enter
values in the Financial Aid Hours Repeat Coursework columns when Repeat Course
Checking has not been enabled for the aid year, then the following warning will display:
*WARNING* Repeat Course Checking is Not Enabled For This Aid Year.
Once you bypass the warning, the columns can be updated if necessary.
Current Hours block
When Repeat Course Checking is enabled for the aid year, the rokmisc_period package
will total the Credit, Bill, and Adjusted hours for funds that use Repeat Course Checking.
Thus, excluding any course that is considered a repeat, except for those courses listed on
the Financial Aid Repeat Course Exclusion (RORRPCX) form, if:
• The Student Level or Course Level is marked for exclusion on the Global
Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
or
• The grading mode has been listed on the Audit Grading Mode (RPRAUDT) form.
or
• The section is labeled as unavailable for aid on the Section Unavailable for Aid
(ROASECT) form.
Financial Aid Enrollment by Date window
This window displays both Repeat Coursework and Total Hours enrollment calculations
by Term and Attend Date. Hours will be populated in this window when a Fund Code has
been marked to use Attending Hours functionality.
The possibility exists on this window that a student may have multiple Attend Dates and
different enrollment calculations for Repeat Coursework and Total Hours enrollment
calculations for each term and within the same term. That determination falls back to the
settings for the Fund Code(s).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-317
Both the Repeat Coursework and Total Hours enrollment calculations and Attend Dates
continue to be updated manually or by executing the Financial Aid Enrollment Hours
(RSRENRL) process.
Financial Aid Enrollment by Period window
Within both the Financial Aid Hours by Period and Financial Aid Attending by Period
blocks, enrollment will be displayed for the period, which includes enrollment for the
terms which make up the period. If Fund Codes have been designated to use Attending
Hour functionality, the Attending Date and respective enrollment calculations will display
in the Current Attending by Period Block.
The fields in this window are not updatable manually, only by executing the Financial Aid
Enrollment Hours (RSRENRL) process.
Current Enrollment by Date window
This window displays both Repeat Coursework and Total Hours Current Enrollment
calculations by Attend Date, as delivered from the Student system. Hours will be
populated in this window when a Fund Code has been marked to use Attending Hours
functionality.
The possibility exists on this window that a student may have multiple Attend Dates and
different enrollment calculations for Repeat Coursework and Total Hours enrollment. That
determination falls back to the settings for the Fund Code(s). If there are no Fund Codes
set to use Attending Hour functionality for the aid year, no data will display in this
window.
Note
The fields in this window are not updatable.

Current Enrollment by Period window
Within both the Current Hours by Period and Current Attending by Period blocks,
enrollment will be displayed for the period, which includes enrollment for the terms which
make up the period. If Fund Codes have been designated to use Attending Hour
functionality, then the Attending Date and respective enrollment calculations will display
in the Current Attending by Period Block.
Note
The fields in this window are not updatable.

Enrollment by Course window
The ROKRPTS package will determine if a course is determined to be an “Excluded
Repeat Course” by calculating if the number of repeats taken exceeds the allowed limit, as
stated in the Federal Regulation. If the course is determined to be so, the Excluded
Repeat Course indicator will be set to a Y (checked). This course is then deemed
2-318
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
ineligible for disbursement and will be excluded from the Repeat Coursework enrollment
calculations.
A check in the Excluded Repeat Course indicator will only occur for a course that is
excluded in the Repeat Coursework enrollment calculation. This indicator will not be
checked for any course that is considered a repeat using any other definition than the one
listed in the introduction of this Repeat Coursework Processing chapter.
The Excluded Repeat Course indicator will be set to Y (checked) when an Excluded
Repeat Course is found, regardless if Repeat Course Checking has been turned on for the
aid year. This functionality provides the user with an easy way to determine which
course(s) has been removed from the Repeat Coursework enrollment calculation due to
violating the regulatory limit on repeat attempts.
This window continues to also display if the course is excluded for Financial Aid based
upon the Exclude Section and Course Level settings.
Multiple enrollment calculations
The use of Repeat Course Checking allows institutions to have multiple enrollment
calculations running simultaneously for Fund Codes using and not using the Repeat
Course Checking logic. The outcome of this functionality may result in a different
enrollment calculation for fund codes that use Repeat Course Checking versus fund codes
that do not use Repeat Course Checking. At the time of disbursement, one fund code or
category of fund codes may disburse based on a different number of credits compared to
fund codes with a larger number of credits which do not use Repeat Course Checking.
Many processes and reports have been updated to accommodate this type of processing
and the proper calculations will display on the Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL)
form, respectively.
Non U.S. institutions
Although U.S. Federal Regulations state that Federal Title IV aid must use the Repeat
Coursework regulations, the overall use of Repeat Course Checking functionality is not
limited to U.S. based institutions only. Non U.S. institutions may use this functionality for
any Fund Code(s) desired.
Calculation of repeated coursework for SAP & transfer
credits applied towards the student’s academic program
In the Student system, functionality exists for handling the Calculation of Repeated
Coursework for Satisfactory Academic Progress (SAP). The Registration Repeat
Checking and Academic History Repeat Processing module is where the logic resides.
Functionality also exists for handling the processing of Transfer Credit(s) which are
Applied towards a Student’s Academic Program. The setup and processing of this
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-319
functionality is located within the Transfer Evaluation and Transfer Articulation modules
of the Student system.
Note
Information regarding setup and processing for both of these can be
found in the Banner Student User Guide, chapters 12 & 13.

Display and maintenance of student
enrollment
The Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL) form maintains Banner Financial Aid hours
and displays Banner Student hours.
This form maintains Attending Hours by date for the student both for Financial Aid hours
and Current Hours from registration. You can view the student’s registration for the term.
When an Aid Year has been entered in the key block, the terms associated with the aid
year or a crossover year are displayed. You may only insert manual Financial Aid hours
when an Aid Year has been provided.
The Aid Year in the key block may be left blank to view all enrollment hours for a student.
When the Aid Year in the key block is left blank, the form acts as a query form to display
the enrollment terms in descending order for the student.
If necessary, you can select the ID button or List to search for existing applicants with the
Person Search (SOAIDEN) form or the SSN/SIN Alternate ID Search (GUIALTI) form.
Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL)
The Financial Aid Enrollment (ROAENRL) form also provides an option to view an
applicant’s financial aid hours and student hours by period. This information is based on
the aid period and Pell aid period (if they exist), that have been assigned to the applicant
for the aid year in the form’s key block. The attending hours for the period will also be
provided to allow the number of hours to be viewed when disbursing on the number of
hours currently attending. This allows you to view the term and attending hours for all
terms within the applicant’s period.
Example
Financial Aid and Current Student Hours (page 1 of ROAENRL)
Summer 2011 period has been created with a financial aid year of 1011 and a crossover aid
year of 1110 and has terms 201130 and 201145 belonging to the period.
When the 1011 aid year is entered for the ID, Financial Aid hours if they exist and Current
Student hours for the terms 201130 and 201145 will be displayed. Since the period
2-320
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Summer 2011 has been designated as a crossover period for the 1112 aid year, both the
201130 and 201145 Financial Aid and Current Student hours will also be displayed when
accessing ROAENRL for the 1112 aid year for the ID.
Financial Aid Hours by Period and Current Student Hours by Period
(By Period and By Current Period buttons)
When accessing either the Financial Aid Hours by Period or the Current Student Hours by
Period, the sum of the hours for the 201130 and 201145 terms will be reflected in the
enrollment for period Summer 2011. This will be the enrollment used by the disbursement
process when disbursing for the Summer 2011 period. The Summer 2011 period
enrollment will be displayed when the Summer 2011 period is included in the student’s aid
period or Summer 2011 is included in the student’s pell aid period.
• 1011 aid period of Fall/Spring/Summer will display Summer 2011 period
enrollment when aid year is 1011 in key block
• 1112 Pell aid period of Summer/Fall/Spring will display Summer 2011 period
enrollment when aid year is 1112 in key block
The display of Financial Aid Attending by Period and the Student Current Attending by
Period will display the calculated enrollment as of the Attend Date displayed for each
period in the student’s aid period or Pell aid period.
In the example below, for the Summer 2011 period, the student’s calculated enrollment is
3 hours as of May 1st, and calculated enrollment of 6 hours on June 15th.
Period
Attend Date
Credit Hours
Billing Hours
Adjusted Hours
Summer 2011
15_JUN-2011
6
6
6
Summer 2011
01-MAY-2011
3
3
3
Only the Financial Aid term and attending hours fields will be updateable. Enrollment will
remain by term and the enrollment load will be calculated based on the hours enrolled in
each term of a period. If the applicant is not enrolled in all terms of the period, the
enrollment load will be calculated based on the terms which the student is enrolled. If the
Consortium Indicator has been checked for only one term in a period which contains
multiple terms, the functionality for the Consortium Indicator will only apply to the term
where the Consortium Indicator = Y.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-321
Financial aid hours
When the By Period button is selected, the Financial Aid Enrollment by Period window
is displayed.
Note
If an aid year has not been defined in the form’s key block, the new By

Period button is disabled (de-emphasized).
Current hours
The Charges Accepted indicator displays if the charges have been accepted for the term
based on the values from the Student System (SFBETRM_AR_IND).
When the Current By Period button is selected, the Current Enrollment by Period
window is displayed.
Note
If an aid year has not been defined in the form’s key block, the new By

Period button is disabled (de-emphasized).
Financial aid hours by period
Only terms that have been associated with periods included in the student’s aid period will
be displayed. If the student does not have hours for a term, the term will still be listed
however, the hours will be blank.
Financial aid attending by period
The Financial Aid Attending By Period is display only. For each Period in the student’s
aid period, the total number of hours for the period as of the Attend date are provided.
Current hours by period
Only terms that have been associated with periods included in the student’s aid
period will be displayed. If the student does not have hours for a term, the term
will still be listed however, the hours will be blank.
Current attending by period
The Current Attending By Period is a display of the attending hours from the student
system. For each Period in the student’s aid period, the total number of hours for the
period as of the Attend date are provided.
2-322
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Calculating enrollment
Enrollment calculation using periods
Because periods can consist of multiple terms, the possibility of the financial aid hours
existing for one term and no financial aid hours existing for another term but the student is
registered for courses in the term could occur. To address this possibility, Banner will
calculate the enrollment for the period, evaluating each term separately to determine
financial aid hours/student hours and then perform the sum to determine enrollment for the
period.
1. Identify all terms associated with the period.
2. For first term in period, if financial aid hours exist, select those – if not, use student
hours – hold this value.
3. For second term in period, if financial aid hours exist, select those – if not, use student
hours – hold this value.
4. For third term in period, if financial aid hours exist, select those – if not, use student
hours – hold this value.
5. Sum the hours from each of the terms for the period to determine hours for the period.
Period
Summer
2010
Terms in
Period
FA
Hours
Student
Hours
Hours used in calculated
201030
3
3
3 - FA hrs.
201040
3
3
3 - FA hrs.
6
6 - Stu Reg hrs.
201050
Total
enrollment
for period
12 - Combined FA and
Stu Reg hrs.
If the student does not have financial aid or student hours in a term(s) for the period, no
errors or warnings will be provided and enrollment will be calculated based on the terms
which have hours using the above logic.The ability to view the financial aid and student
hours based on the periods which make up the student’s aid period, has been added to the
ROAENRL form. This will represent the enrollment used for the enrollment calculation in
the disbursement process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-323
Determining ½ time enrollment (required for Federal loan
disbursement)
The enrollment edit for Federal loans requires that the student is at least ½ time when the
fund(s) are actually disbursed.
Example
The student is actively registered ½ time and Financial Aid hours are frozen at ½ time.
The student withdraws and is < ½ time (registration status that does not count in
enrollment).
When disbursing a Federal fund, the disbursement process checks to validate the
student is currently enrolled at least ½ time. In this case, the disbursement process will
reject the enrollment, providing the following error message:
“Enrollment invalid for federal fund ID”
Banner will calculate the enrollment for the period evaluating each term separately for
determining the hours the student is actively registered and then perform the sum to
determine the enrollment for the period.
Period
Summer
2010
Total
enrollment
for Period
Terms in
Period
Consortium
FA Hours Ind.
Student
Hours
Hours used
in enrollment
calc. for
non-Federal
loan fund
201030
6
N
0-withdrawn
6
0
201040
3
N
3
3
3
201050
3
N
0-withdrawn
3
0
12
3disbursement
edit fails with
current
registration at
3
12
Hours used
in enrollment
calc. for
Federal
loan fund
Enrollment calculation using periods for consortium
students
It is possible for a period consisting of multiple terms to not have the Consortium
Indicator checked for all terms in the period. Banner will calculate the enrollment for the
period, evaluating each term separately to determine financial aid hours/student hours and
2-324
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
then perform the sum. If the Consortium Indicator is checked, only financial aid hours
for that term will be used.
The following is an example of calculation of enrollment using periods with the
Consortium Indicator checked for one term of a period.
Example
The Summer 2010 period consists of 3 terms: 201030, 201040, and 201050. In the
table below, the student has the Consortium Indicator checked for only 1 term
(201040). Financial Aid hours have not been frozen for the last term (201050). Each
term will be evaluated separately, using financial aid hours only for the term where the
Consortium Indicator is checked.
Period
Summer
2010
Terms in
Period
Consortium
FA Hours Ind.
Student
Hours
Hours used
in enrollment
calc. for
non-Federal
loan fund
201030
3
N
3
3
3
201040
3
Y
3
3
2
2
8
8 - passes
disbursement
edit
201050
Total
enrollment
for Period
N
2
Hours used
in enrollment
calc. for
Federal
loan fund
Attending hours functionality using periods
Funds set to use Attending Hours are disbursed based on the calculation of the number of
hours which have begun for the student using the class start date at the time the
disbursement process is run. Banner will calculate the enrollment for the period evaluating
each term separately for determining financial aid hours/student hours and attending
hours. Disbursement will look at the enrollment load for all terms within the period based
on the date disbursement is run. When using attending hours, if no attending hours exist
for the term the start date of the term will be used to determine the attend date. If the
Consortium Indicator is set for a term and attending hours are being used, financial aid
attending hours/date will be used if they exist, otherwise, the start date of the term will be
used to determine the attend date of the hours entered for the term.
The ability to view the financial aid and student hours based on the periods which make up
the student’s aid period has been added to the ROAENRL form. This will represent the
enrollment used for the enrollment calculation in the disbursement process.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-325
Example
This example demonstrates using attending hours where the Consortium Indicator is
“No” for all terms within the period:
• If disbursement is run on June 1st, the attending hours will be 3
• If disbursement is run on June 15th, the attending hours will be 6
• If disbursement is run on June 20th, the attending hours will be 9
• If disbursement is run on July 1st, the attending hours will be 12
Attending hours with consortium Indicator no for all terms within the period
Period
Summer
2010
Attending
hours
date
Hours
used in
enrlmnt.
calc. by
term
Hours
calcd. for
disb. for
the period
Terms in
Period
FA
Hours
Consortium
Ind.
Attending
Hours
201030
6
N
3
01-JUN2010
3
3
6
15-JUN2010
6
6
201040
3
N
3
20-JUN2010
3
9
201050
3
N
3
01-JUL2010
3
12
Example
This example demonstrates using attending hours where the Consortium Indicator is
“Yes” for one term within the period and financial aid attending hours have been
entered manually for that term:
• If disbursement is run on June 1st, the attending hours will be 3
• If disbursement is run on June 15th, the attending hours will be 6
• If disbursement is fun on June 20th, the attending hours will be 9
• If disbursement is run on July 1st, the attending hours will be 12
2-326
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Attending hours with consortium indicator yes, attending hours exist
Period
Attending
hours
date
Hours
used in
enrlmnt.
calc. by
term
Hours
calcd. for
disb. for
the period
Terms in
Period
FA
Hours
Consortium
Ind.
Attending
Hours
201030
6
N
3
01-JUN2010
3
3
6
15-JUN2010
6
6
Summer
2010
201040
3
Y
3
20-JUN2010
3
9
201050
3
N
3
01-JUL2010
3
12
The example below demonstrates using attending hours where the Consortium Indicator
is “Yes” for one term within the period and no financial aid attending hours have been
entered for that term. The term start date will be used to determine the attend date for
hours entered for the term.
Example
This example demonstrates using attending hours where the Consortium Indicator is
“Yes” for one term within the period and no financial aid attending hours have been
entered for that term. The term start date will be used to determine the attend date for
hours entered for the term:
• If disbursement is run on June 1st, the attending hours will be 3
• If disbursement is run on June 15th, the attending hours will be 6
• If disbursement is run on June 20th, the attending hours will be 9
• If disbursement is run on July 1st, the attending hours will be 12
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-327
Attending hours with consortium indicator yes for one term and term start date used
Period
Attending
hours
date
Hours
used in
enrlmnt.
STVTERM calc. by
Start Date term
20-MAY2010
Terms in
Period
FA
Hours
Consortium
Ind.
Attending
Hours
201030
6
N
3
01-JUN2010
6
15-JUN2010
Summer
2010
201040
3
Y
201050
3
N
3
01-JUL2010
Hours
calcd. for
disb. for
the period
3
3
6
6
20-JUN2010
3
9
30-JUN2010
3
12
Using the +/- number of days for attending hours
The option for disbursing based upon the number of hours which have begun for a student
is at the fund level on RFRMGMT/ROAMGMT. The option, +/- Days for Attending
Hours, allows you to pay the fund either prior to or after the date the calculated number of
hours begins. If you want to pay prior to the date the calculated enrollment begins, you are
expected to enter a positive number. If you want to pay after the date the calculated
enrollment begins, you are expected to enter a negative number.
Example
• For the fund, the number of days entered is 5, to pay five days prior to the
attendance start date.
Attend Date
Number of Hours
10-AUG-2010
6
20-AUG-2010
12
The disbursement process will allow the student to be paid (providing all other criteria
is met):
• Based on 6 hours, 5 days in advance, on 05-AUG-2010
• Based on 12 hours, 5 days in advance, on 15-AUG-2010
2-328
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Rescheduling disbursement date using
periods
When using the option to reschedule the disbursement date for non-loan funds based upon
the student’s earliest class start date either for the aid period (RFRDEFA) or for a specific
fund/aid period (RFRASCH), Banner will evaluate the class start dates for all terms within
the period to determine the earliest class start date.
If a student has the Consortium Indicator set to “Yes” for a term within the period, the
earliest class start date for the term will be determined by the earliest attending hours start
date, if they exist. Otherwise, the term start date will be used.
Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE)
Using parentheses in selection statements
When constructing selection statements on the RORRULE form or when defining a
population selection ID, it’s always a good idea to surround selection statements
connected with an OR with an open parenthesis and a closed parenthesis. This is
recommended even if it appears to be unnecessary. Without the parenthesis, Banner may
be forced to make assumptions on how to process the data. Be sure to enter the data in a
way that Banner will know for sure how you wanted it to be processed.
Hints for RORRULE form use
The following are suggestions for improving RORRULE performance:
• If you use RCRAPP2, 3, 4 or RCRESAR, the first rule on the simple mode form
should use one of these tables to ensure that the correct join will be done behind the
scenes.
• If you use RCRAPP1, 2, 3, 4 or RCRESAR, you should include the rule:
AND RCRAPP1_CURR_REC_IND = Y
It does not have to be last, but should not be first. This is done so that the rule will use the
unique index on the RCRAPP1table and not a non-unique index.
• Do not use a view as the first rule on the simple rule form. The table or view of the
first rule is used to join all of the other tables. This may cause performance issues.
• If you only want to use a view as part of your rule, use one of the following as the
first rule to improve performance:
RORSTAT_AIDY_CODE= &AIDY_CODE or RORSTAT_PIDM IS NOT NULL
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-329
• Before using Expert mode, create as much of the rule as possible in Simple mode
and compile it. Then go to Expert mode and modify it. This will show the joins
which Banner generally expects and the format of them.
• In Expert mode, use UPPER CASE.
• In Expert mode, make sure that you have at lease one space following :AIDY,
:PIDM, :PERIOD, and :TERM. If you just hit carriage return at the end of the line,
the rule will not work correctly in the COBOL program although it will appear to
be fine when the <EXECUTE> button is pressed.
• The execute button will give you an idea about syntax errors, but does not execute
exactly the way that the COBOL program will. To test grouping rules and see what
is really being executed, the technical person can get the test student's PIDM, set
the priority on the group to 1 on RTVPGRP and then put RORGRPS on hold on
GJAPCTL.
The full rule (the grouping process selection statement plus the compiled rule) will appear
in the log.
This can also be done by putting the student in a single person population selection and
running RORGRPS in debug mode. Please note, however, that RORGRPS will currently
hang if it hits any group without rules, so the user will need to either press Y <ENTER>
several times until they get back to a prompt or <N> ENTER to exit the job at that first
error.
• There are many factors when it comes to tuning. Unless you are using one of our
views which uses the RORVIEW table, views must populate for the entire database
before returning a single row. This is why it is inadvisable to use a view as the first
rule because all joins will be performed against it. Also, to determine which index
to use, Oracle reads from the bottom up. The first index which it completes is the
one which it will use whether it is the desired one or not. There are many other
factors as well including size of table, extents, etc. Factors related to tuning are
documented in Oracle's documentation.
Student employment procedures
Student employment implementation
1. Referral Status Validation (RTVRFST) form
This form maintains the various statuses of job referrals. Define all possible statuses
which referral records may have.
2. Employment Authorization Status Validation (RTVAUST) form
This form maintains various statuses of work authorizations. Generally, work
authorizations are used to define those students who are authorized to be paid for a
2-330
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
specific time period and pay period. Define all possible statuses for work
authorizations; indicate whether or not the status means the authorization is Active or
Inactive. Examples may include statuses such as Authorized, Terminated, Resigned,
etc.
3. Placement Basic Data (RJAPLBD) form
This form stores name and address information for all locations (both on- and offcampus) that employ students. The supervisor is the name of the person responsible
for supervising the student employees at that job location. This is also the form that
you use to define the placement codes.
4. Placement Rules (RJRPLRL) form
This form maintains placement information regarding allocation, employee class,
position, chart of account code, and organization code.
Note
If you use Banner Human Resources, then the List function is available
for indicating valid values for these fields. If you do not use Banner
Human Resources, these fields are free-format and have no validation. It
will be necessary to meet with your HR and GL colleagues to determine

appropriate coding for accounting purposes.
5. Student Employment Default Rules (RJRSEDR) form.
This form maintains information which is defaulted into student authorization
records. Define the common start and end dates of authorizations, common start and
end pay dates, and default authorization status.
6. Payroll Load Control (RJRPAYL) form.
Note
This form is necessary only when Banner Human Resources is used.

Identify those payrolls which are to be interfaced to the Student Employment Module.
The Payroll Year, ID, and No. can be brought forward from the Calendar Rules form
via List.
7. Job Title Base Data (RJRJOBT) form.
This form defines the individual job titles that you use when you refer or authorize a
student for a particular job. The Job Title Code controls the default pay rate and
eligible range of pay rates for the job title.
8. Job Title Requirements (RJRJREQ) form.
Use this form to identify the job skills/levels that are required for a Job Title Code.
9. Student Employment Referral (RJASERF) form
Complete this form for a student when he or she is referred to a job location for
possible employment. (The use of this form is optional.)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-331
10. Student Employment Authorization (RJASEAR) form.
Complete this form for students that you have determined to be eligible to work at a
particular job. You can automatically create this data from the Student Employment
Referral form (if you completed this optional form).
11. Student Employment Mass Entry (RJASEME) form.
Use this form to enter payroll data if your institution does not utilize Banner Human
Resources, or if you do not choose to run the process that automatically loads payroll
data from the Human Resources System to Banner Financial Aid.
12. Payroll Load Process (RJRLOAD).
Use this process to interface payroll data from Banner Human Resources to Banner
Financial Aid.
The ability to run RJRLOAD in Audit mode is provided so you may view any
potential issues with loading the payroll. You will enter the Period as part of the
parameter options for RJRLOAD to specify the Period to post to the student's award
record.
Note
Parameter 05, Ignore Missing Period record, allows you the ability to load
the payroll to only the award table (RPRAWRD) if you do not
automatically schedule Work Study funds. If you select this option as Yes,
and the Period that you have entered into the parameter for RJRLOAD
does not exist for the student, the payroll will only be posted to the award
table (RPRAWRD) and not the Award by Period table (RPRATRM) nor

will the Period be posted to the workstudy table.
Note
You can use the Student Employment Work History (RJISEWH) form to

verify a student's work history.
Algorithmic packaging
Overview
Packaging is a fundamental activity for all Financial Aid offices in the administration of
financial aid. Key to leveraging scarce financial resources to attract the targeted incoming
class each year, as well as successfully supporting the enrollment management retention
goals, is the ability to systematically package students according to an institution’s
awarding philosophy. A cornerstone of Enrollment Management, packaging should
provide the ability to match the institution’s awarding philosophy directly to the actual
awards offered to the prospective students to successfully harvest the ideal class and
award returning students accordingly. If an institution cannot package according to their
awarding philosophy, they are forced to sacrifice their philosophy and yield rates based on
the limitations of software functionality or perhaps continue to package students manually.
2-332
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Manual packaging is not reasonable for most institutions since it is a cumbersome process
and lends itself to errors.
Algorithmic packaging allows clients to use a business rules engine to automatically
package students in accordance with the institution’s awarding philosophy. In addition to
the algorithmic packaging business rules solution, many other changes have been made to
enhance the packaging process.
Algorithmic packaging features
This feature is designed to facilitate the use of algorithmic packaging with the Banner
Financial Aid baseline product. forms and processes have been added or modified to
provide a more complete means of automatically packaging students through the use of
algorithmic packaging forms in conjunction with pre-existing Banner Financial Aid rules
forms. The information that follows summarizes these features.
Algorithms
Banner Financial Aid includes an algorithmic packaging solution in the baseline product.
Algorithms can be performed at the fund level in addition to the packaging group level.
Algorithmic packaging
• Enables predictive modeling to support an institution’s enrollment.
• Provides a management strategy to help an institution manage complex
calculations to award the right funds to the right students.
• Allows an institution to package multiple financial aid awards based upon
configurable rules and calculations that support an institution’s awarding
philosophies.
• Includes the functionality to allow the use of algorithms as part of the fund
awarding sequence within the current packaging process.
Algorithmic packaging definition
End user creation of a set of ordered rules or steps for the automatic packaging of financial
aid funds. The rules or steps allow the use of mathematical expressions as part of the
awarding rules and logic for a particular fund within a packaging group based upon data
elements within the student and/or financial aid system.
Example
Award Fund 1 with a maximum of $1,000 and minimum of $200 not to exceed unmet need
Award Fund 2 up to 50% of Fund 1, not to exceed unmet need
Award Fund 3 up to 25% of Fund 1 total + 25% of Fund 2 total, not to exceed unmet need
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-333
Award Fund 4 up to 70% of remaining unmet need, not to exceed the total of Fund 1
Award Fund 5 up to 100% of remaining unmet need
Note
All the rules and steps utilize the fund award rules as the overall master

rule for fund eligibility.
Forms
Algorithmic Packaging Rules (RPRALGR)
The RPRALGR form enables you to use algorithmic packaging rules to award funds. On
this form, you write SQL statements to define algorithmic packaging rules, which are
arranged by rule code and sequence number.
Once you’ve validated the rule, you can test the rule by entering values for any
substitution parameters used in the rule and execute the rule in test mode. The system uses
your need analysis data in the testing of your algorithmic rules and temporarily stores the
simulated results in the Temporary Packaging Need Table (RPTNEED). The results
display in the Calculated Amount field. This allows you to verify that the rule will return
the expected results when used by the Packaging Process.
Algorithmic Packaging Rule Code Validation (RTVALGR)
The RTVALGR form enables you to define algorithmic packaging rule codes for use on
the Algorithmic Packaging Rules (RPRALGR), Packaging Rules (RPRPCKR), and
Packaging Group Fund Rules (RPRGFND) forms.
Algorithmic Support (RORALGS)
The Algorithmic Support (RORALGS) form allows you to define a specific amount to be
returned by an algorithmic rule, based on the applicant meeting the criteria entered as the
value for the keys which will be used as part of the algorithmic rule. If you are using this
form to assist with algorithmic packaging rules, determine the criteria and amounts to be
entered for calculating the fund award.
2-334
KEY 1 = Fund
KEY 2 = Year in College
status from RNANAxx
AMOUNT to be returned
MERIT
MERIT
MERIT
MERIT
MERIT
MERIT
0
1
2
3
4
5
1000.00
1000.00
1500.00
2000.00
2500.00
2500.00
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Packaging functions
Using algorithms and parameters, functions include calculations based upon:
• a percentage of a fund award,
• a fixed dollar amount of a fund award
• a data value housed in the Banner system (less than, equal, greater than, not equal)
and
• a value that falls within a range of values housed in the Banner system (Between).
Awarding based on other funds
Using algorithms and parameters, you can limit funds to specific amounts based upon
other funds, fund sources, or fund groups. Refer to the Sample Algorithmic Packaging
Rules section for examples.
Award a fund based on a percentage of another fund
You can award a fund based on a percentage of other funds within a packaging group.
Simplification of rules creation and maintenance
Algorithms can be performed at the packaging group level, in addition to the fund level.
Ability to store and reference internal interim values in
packaging rules
The Algorithmic Packaging Rules (RPRALGR) form allows you to reference internal
interim values in SQL statements. These internal interim values are created and referenced
in the Temporary Packaging Need Table (RPTNEED). The RPTNEED table is a
temporary table which temporarily stores need analysis data for use in algorithmic
packaging rules. A row is inserted into the table for each student that is processed prior to
packaging the student and is deleted after the student is processed.
Packaging simulation options
The Packaging Process (RPEPCKG) includes parameters that allow the process to:
• bypass tracking requirements during Simulated Packaging only,
• to award Pell in both Simulated and Actual mode, and
• to stop the awarding of an individual fund during simulated packaging, when that
fund's available amount has been exhausted.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-335
Related fund features
Forms
Packaging Group Fund Category Maximums Rules (RPRFCAT)
The Packaging Group Fund Category Maximums Rules form allows you to place fund
category maximums on packaging groups.
Fund Category Validation (RTVFCAT)
This form enables you to define fund categories for use on the Fund Base Data
(RFRBASE) form.
Fund Award Inquiry (RPIFAWD)
The Fund Award Inquiry form enables you to view all students who have a particular fund
for a particular aid year.
Fund Award Period Inquiry (RPIFTRM)
The Fund Award Period Inquiry form enables you to view all students with a particular
fund for a particular period.
Group fund limits
You can use group fund limits which supersede individual fund limits.
For example, suppose a student has total need of $10,000 and tuition of $7,000. Fund #1
has an individual award cap of $5,000 and Fund #2 also has a cap of $5,000. However,
Funds #1 and #2 are defined in a group, and the group rule is that total aid from all funds
in the group cannot exceed tuition.Therefore, the award from Fund #1 would be $5,000
but Fund #2 is limited to $2,000 because of the group cap. The remaining $3,000 of unmet
need must be met from funds outside the group.
Ability to apply a percentage to all the funds in the package
as a group
If the original unmet need or gross need is not being used throughout the packaging
process, you can take a defined percentage of remaining need or gross need and award the
funds so the original percentage is not exceeded. For example, if remaining need is 5,375
and the percentage of remaining need to award is 85%. The sum of the funds packaged
should not exceed 4,568.
2-336
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Rounding options for awards
The Round Award field on the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form enables you to
specify how you want to round the award.The RPEPCKG process rounds the award down
to a multiple of this amount to prevent an overaward. This field had fixed rounding
amounts of 10, 25, 50, or 100. The valid values for this field are 1 – 99999.
Ability to inactivate fund codes, groups, and rules
The Fund Active field on the Fund Base Data (RFRBASE) form and Funds Management
(ROAMGMT) form allows you to inactivate a fund code.
You can globally inactivate a budgeting group (RTVBGRP), packaging group
(RTVPGRP), requirements tracking group (RTVTGRP), or satisfactory academic progress
group (RTVSAPR).
The Rule Active field on the Financial Aid Selection Rules (RORRULE) form allows you
to inactivate fund awarding, budget group assignment, fund disbursement, packaging
group fund awarding, packaging group assignment, satisfactory academic progress and
requirements tracking group rules.
Ability to override a fund rule for a specific student
The Fund Award Rule Override feature on RPAAWRD and RPAAPMT allows you to
override a Fund Award Rule, if one exists, for the aid year.
The Fund Disbursement Rule Override feature on RPAAWRD and RPAAPMT allows
you to override a Fund Disbursement Rule, if one exists, for the period.
Fund category and fund cross-reference fields for packaging
and reporting
The Fund Cross Reference field enables you to cross reference IDs used for funds by
another office.This field is a user-defined field with no validation.
The Fund Category field allows you to group fund codes by a user-defined category.
Fund Balance Roll Process (RFPFBRL)
The RFPFBRL process provides the ability to optionally roll fund balances from one aid
year to the next aid year.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-337
Ability to display all recipients of a particular fund code by
aid year or period
The Fund Award Inquiry (RPIFAWD) form enables you to view all students who have a
particular fund for a particular aid year.
The Fund Award Period Inquiry (RPIFTRM) form enables you to view all students with a
particular fund for a particular period.
Sample algorithmic packaging rules
The examples that follow demonstrate how you might use the Algorithmic Packaging
Rules (RPRALGR) form to set up business rules for your institution.
Refer to Banner Online Help for detailed form and field information.
Example 1 - Institutional grant with amounts based on GPA and IM EFC ranges
The following information provides an example of the calculation of an institutional grant
with amounts based on GPA and IM EFC ranges.
The rule uses three mutually exclusive sequences to award $5000 to the student if their
EFC is <10,000 and their GPA is at least 4.0, $2500 if their EFC is <10,000 and GPA is at
least 3.5, and $1500 if their EFC is <10,000 and their GPA is at least 3.0. Subsequent
sequences are evaluated only if the prior sequences fail.
This example uses the Temporary Packaging Table (RPTNEED). The RPTNEED table is
populated for a financial aid recipient by the Packaging Process (RPEPCKG) prior to
packaging the student. Any row created on this table is inserted for a student, used, and
then deleted. The table is also populated when you use the Test Rule button on the
Algorithmic Packaging Rules (RPRALGR) form.
The f_get_gpa function is for illustrative purposes only. This function is not a “system
delivered” function; the f_get_gpa function illustrates the use of a client-created
function within the rules.
2-338
Field
Value
Rule
GPA_EFC_RULE
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 5000 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’ FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_IM_EFC < 10,000)
AND f_get_gpa(:AIDY, :PIDM) >= 4.0
Field
Value
Rule
GPA_EFC_RULE
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 2500 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’ FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_IM_EFC < 10,000)
AND f_get_gpa(:AIDY, :PIDM) >= 3.5
Field
Value
Rule
GPA_EFC_RULE
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT 1500 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’ FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_IM_EFC < 10,000)
AND f_get_gpa(:AIDY, :PIDM) >= 3.0
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-339
Example 2 - SEOG award calculation based on Pell award amounts for the year
This case illustrates how you can create a rule for a fund which is based on another fund
award for the year. For example, you can base the calculation of an SEOG award on Pell
award amounts for the year. This example assumes you use a single fund code for all Pell
awards.
In this example, $2000 is awarded for SEOG when the student’s Pell award is less than or
equal to $4300 but more than $3000; $1500 SEOG is awarded when the Pell award is less
than or equal to $3000 but more than $1500; and $1000 SEOG is awarded when the Pell
award is less than or equal to $1500 but greater than 0.
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_1
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT <= 4310
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT > 3000
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE = ‘PELL’)
2-340
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_1
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 1500 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT <= 3000
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT > 1500
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE = ‘PELL’)
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_1
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT 1000 FROM DUAL
WHERE EXISTS
(SELECT ‘X’
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT <= 1500
AND RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT > 0
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE = ‘PELL’)
Example 3 - SEOG award calculation based on Pell award amounts for the year
while using baseline database functions
This case illustrates how you can create a rule for a fund which is based on another fund
award for the year. For example, you can base the calculation of an SEOG award on Pell
award amounts for the year.
This example is similar to Example 2 but uses baseline database functions delivered with
Banner Financial Aid. This example uses the Temporary Packaging Table (RPTNEED).
Inserts to the RPTNEED table are done automatically by the RPEPCKG process during
packaging. During that insert, the Simulate Switch (RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) is set,
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-341
depending on whether you are performing Actual or Simulated packaging. The Simulate
Switch indicates whether or not this row was created during simulated packaging.
This allows you to write an algorithmic rule that is based on the RPRAWRD Award table
during Actual packaging, and based on the RPTAWRD Temporary Award table during
Simulated packaging. The f_get_fund_offer function uses the
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW to determine which table to use for the calculation.
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_2
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 4310
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 3000
2-342
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_2
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 3000
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 1500
May 2012
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_2
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-343
Field
Value
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT 1000 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 1500
AND rpkalgr.f_get_fund_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 0
Example 4 - SEOG award calculation based on Pell award amounts for the year
while using multiple Pell fund codes
This example creates a rule for a fund which is based on the total award for a federal fund
ID for the year. For example, you can base the calculation of an SEOG award on Pell
award amounts for the year. This example assumes the institution uses multiple Pell fund
codes.
In this example, $2000 is awarded for SEOG when the student has funds awarded with
federal fund IDs of PELL whose total amount is between $3001 and $4310; $1500 is
awarded for SEOG when the student has funds awarded with federal fund IDs of PELL
whose total amount is between $1501 and $3000; $1000 is awarded for SEOG when the
student has funds awarded with federal fund IDs of PELL whose total amount is between
$1 and $1500.
2-344
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_3
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000 FROM DUAL
WHERE
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
<= 4310
AND
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
> 3000
May 2012
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_3
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-345
Field
Value
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 1500 FROM DUAL
WHERE
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
<= 3000
AND
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
> 1500
2-346
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_3
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT 1000 FROM DUAL
WHERE
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
<= 1500
AND
(SELECT SUM(NVL(RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT,0)
FROM RPRAWRD
WHERE RPAWRD_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPRAWRD_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPRAWRD_FUND_CODE IN
(SELECT RFRBASE_FUND_CODE
FROM RFRBASE
WHERE RFRBASE_FED_FUND_ID = ‘PELL’))
> 0
Example 5 - SEOG award calculation based on Pell award amounts for the year
while using multiple Pell fund codes and while using baseline database functions
This case illustrates how you can create a rule for a fund which is based on another fund
award for the year. For example, you can base the calculation of an SEOG award on Pell
award amounts for the year. This example assumes you use multiple Pell fund codes.
This example is similar to Example 4 but uses baseline database functions delivered with
Banner Financial Aid. This example uses the Temporary Packaging Table (RPTNEED).
Inserts to the RPTNEED table are done automatically by the RPEPCKG process during
packaging. During that insert, the Simulate Switch (RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) is set,
depending on whether you are performing Actual or Simulated packaging. The Simulate
Switch indicates whether or not this row was created during simulated packaging.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-347
This allows you to write an algorithmic rule that is based on the RPRAWRD Award table
during Actual packaging, and based on the RPTAWRD Temporary Award table during
Simulated packaging. The f_get_ffid_offer function uses the
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW to determine which table to use for the calculation.
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_4
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 4310
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 3000
2-348
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_4
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 1500 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 3000
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 1500
May 2012
Field
Value
Rule
SEOG_CALC_4
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-349
Field
Value
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT 1000 FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 1500
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 0
Example 6 - Calculating Perkins loans as a percentage of Pell
This case illustrates how you can create a rule for a fund which is based on another fund
award for the year. For example, this rule calculates a Perkins loan as a percentage of Pell.
In this example, Perkins would be awarded for 75% of the student’s Pell award if the
student’s Pell award was between $3001 and $4310; 50% of the student’s Pell award if the
student’s Pell award was between $1501 and $3000; 25% of the student’s Pell award if the
student’s Pell award was between $1 and $1500.
2-350
Field
Value
Rule
PERK_CALC
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT .75 *
rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 4310
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 3000
May 2012
Field
Value
Rule
PERK_CALC
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-351
Field
Value
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT .50 *
rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 3000
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 1500
2-352
Field
Value
Rule
PERK_CALC
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT .25 *
rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW)
<= 1500
AND rpkalgr.f_get_ffid_offer
(:AIDY,
:PIDM,
‘PELL’,
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) > 0
Example 7 - Calculation for a state fund which has a range of offer amounts based
on a percentage of need and various ranges of Cost of Attendance and EFC
This case illustrates how you create a rule for a fund which has a range of offer amounts
based on a percentage of need and various ranges of Cost of Attendance and EFC. In this
example, the rule also has defined minimum and maximum amounts. If the calculated
award falls below the minimum amount defined for the rule, no award is made. If the
calculated award is greater than the maximum amount defined for the rule, the maximum
amount is awarded, rather than the calculated amount.
In this example, the student would receive a State grant of 47% of their unmet need at the
time the packaging process begins (minimum of $500 and maximum of $4300) if the EFC
is between $1 and $4000 and their Budget is between $18001 and $24000; 37% of their
unmet need at the time the packaging process begins (minimum of $500 and maximum of
$4300) if the EFC is between $4001 and $6000 and their Budget is between $18001 and
$24000; 27% of their unmet need at the time the packaging process begins (minimum of
$500 and maximum of $4300) if the EFC is greater than $6000 and their Budget is
between $18001 and $24000; 47% of their unmet need at the time the packaging process
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-353
begins (minimum of $500 and maximum of $4700) if the EFC is between $1 and $4000
and their Budget is between $24001 and $26000; 37% of their unmet need at the time the
packaging process begins (minimum of $500 and maximum of $4700) if the EFC is
between $4001 and $6000 and their Budget is between $24001 and $26000; 27% of their
unmet need at the time the packaging process begins (minimum of $500 and maximum of
$4700) if the EFC is greater than $6000 and their Budget is between $24001 and $26000.
Also note in this example that the RPTNEED table has several Unmet Need Amount
columns. This example uses the RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT column. (The
beginning value of the student’s FM unmet need when the packaging process is run.) This
number is calculated when the packaging process starts processing a student, and remains
fixed. So the resulting calculated amount will be the same regardless of what priority the
STATE_CALC_1 fund has in the packaging group. If the rule had used
RPTNEED_UNMET_NEED_AMT, the resulting calculated amount would differ, depending on
which funds and amounts were awarded to the student during the packaging process
before the STATE_CALC_1 rule was executed.
Note
To keep algorithmic rules as simple as possible, only conditions which
determine the actual amount of an award should be included in
algorithmic rules. Conditions which determine the overall eligibility of the
student for an award should continue to be defined on the Financial Aid
Selection Rules (RORRULE) form.
For example, suppose an institution has a state grant which requires that
the student actually reside in the state. The residency condition could be
defined as a Fund Awarding rule on the RORRULE form, because it isn’t
actually required to determine the amount of the award (see state grant
Example 7, below).
Another institution may have a grant program which awards larger
amounts for in-state students. The residency condition would need to be
included in the algorithmic rule which calculates the amount of the grant

(see state grant Example 8, below).
2-354
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
1
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
SQL Statement
SELECT .47 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 0
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 4000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT >= 18001
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 24000
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4300
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT .37 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 4000
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 6000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT >= 18001
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 24000
May 2012
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4300
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
3
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-355
Field
Value
SQL Statement
SELECT .27 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 6000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT >= 18001
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 24000
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4300
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
4
SQL Statement
SELECT .47 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 0
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 4000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT > 24000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 26000
2-356
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4700
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
5
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Field
Value
SQL Statement
SELECT .37 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 4000
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 6000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT > 24000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 26000
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4700
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_1
Sequence
6
SQL Statement
SELECT .27 * RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT > 6000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT > 24000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 26000
Award Minimum
500
Award Maximum
4700
Example 8 - Calculation for a state fund which has a range of offer amounts based
on EFC and whether a student is in-state or out-of-state
This case illustrates how you create a rule for a fund which has a range of offer amounts
based on EFC and whether a student is in-state or out-of-state. (Assume the institution is
in Illinois.)
In this example, the student would be awarded a State grant for $2000 if their FM EFC
amount was $5000 or less and their state of residence was Illinois; $1000 if their FM EFC
amount was $5000 or less and their state of residence was not Illinois.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-357
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_2
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT 2000
FROM RPTNEED, RCRAPP1
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 5000
AND RCRAPP1_STAT_CODE = ‘IL’
AND RCRAPP1_AIDY_CODE = RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE
AND RCRAPP1_PIDM = RPTNEED_PIDM
AND RCRAPP1_CURR_REC_IND = ‘Y’
Field
Value
Rule
STATE_CALC_2
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT 1000
FROM RPTNEED, RCRAPP1
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT <= 5000
AND RCRAPP1_STAT_CODE <> ‘IL’
AND RCRAPP1_AIDY_CODE = RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE
AND RCRAPP1_PIDM = RPTNEED_PIDM
AND RCRAPP1_CURR_REC_IND = ‘Y’
Example 9 - Calculate an equity packaging amount based on both gross need and
budget
The preceding examples are all rules that might be defined for use on the Packaging Group
Fund Rules (RPRGFND) form to calculate award amounts for individual funds.You can
also define rules which you can use on the Default Packaging Rules (RPRDEFR) form and
the Packaging Rules (RPRPCKR) form to give additional flexibility in defining GAP,
Equity, and Self-Service amounts. In the past, you could only define fixed Amounts,
2-358
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Percent of Budget, or Percent of Gross Need on those forms. You can now use an
algorithmic rule for more complex calculations as in the following example.
If this rule was used on RPRPCKR, the equity level for the packaging group would be as
follows: 50% of FM gross need if FM gross need was greater than $5000 and the budget
$10000 or greater; 40% of FM gross need if FM gross need was greater than $5000 and
the budget was less $10000; 30% of FM gross need if FM gross need was $5000 or less
and the budget was greater than $10000; 20% of FM gross need if FM gross need was
$5000 or less and the budget was $10000 or less. This would set the overall equity level
for the student in a particular packaging group so any equity funds defined on RPRGFND
would not exceed these totals. Also, in this example, if the institution has used an
algorithmic rule on RPRGFND for one of the equity funds, the rule on RPRPCKR is
processed first then any rules on RPRGFND are processed.
Field
Value
Rule
EQUITY_CALC
Sequence
1
SQL Statement
SELECT .50 * RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT > 5000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT > 10000
Field
Value
Rule
EQUITY_CALC
Sequence
2
SQL Statement
SELECT .40 * RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT > 5000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 10000
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-359
Field
Value
Rule
EQUITY_CALC
Sequence
3
SQL Statement
SELECT .30 * RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT <= 5000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT > 10000
Field
Value
Rule
EQUITY_CALC
Sequence
4
SQL Statement
SELECT .20 * RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT
FROM RPTNEED
WHERE RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :AIDY
AND RPTNEED_PIDM = :PIDM
AND RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT <= 5000
AND RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT <= 10000
Columns defined on the Temporary Packaging Need
Table (RPTNEED)
The Temporary Packaging Table (RPTNEED) is populated for a financial aid recipient by
the Packaging Process (RPEPCKG) prior to packaging the student. Any row created on
this table is inserted for a student, used, and then deleted. The table is also populated when
you use the Test Rule button on the Algorithmic Packaging Rules (RPRALGR) form.
2-360
Column Name
Comment
RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE
AID YEAR CODE: The aid year associated with the need
data.
RPTNEED_PIDM
PIDM: The internal system generated student
identification number.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Column Name
Comment
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW
SIMULATE SWITCH: Indicates whether or not this row
was created during simulated packaging.
(See note below regarding this
column)
May 2012
RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT
BUDGET AMOUNT: The amount of the student’s cost of
attendance.
RPTNEED_RESOURCE_AMOUNT
RESOURCE AMOUNT: The total amount of outside
resources used in the applicant’s need calculation.
RPTNEED_REPLACE_EFC_AMT
REPLACE EFC AMOUNT: The total amount of the
student’s awards used to replace the expected family
contribution.
RPTNEED_REDUCE_NEED_AMT
REDUCE NEED AMOUNT: The total amount of the
student’s awards used towards gross need.
RPTNEED_EFC_IND
EFC INDICATOR: The expected family contribution
(EFC) to be used in the calculation of need. An “F”
indicates FM EFC will be used. An “I” indicates IM EFC
will be used.
RPTNEED_EFC_AMT
EXPECTED FAMILY CONTRIBUTION: The student’s
most recently calculated expected family contribution
(EFC).
RPTNEED_FM_EFC_AMT
FM EXPECTED FAMILY CONTRIBUTION: The
student’s most recently calculated expected family
contribution (EFC) using federal methodology (FM).
RPTNEED_GROSS_NEED_AMT
GROSS NEED: The gross need of the applicant defined
as budget minus expected family contribution (EFC),
minus resources.
RPTNEED_EXCESS_EFC_AMT
EXCESS EFC: The total amount of the student’s awards
which are designated as replacing EFC but instead are
used to reduce need.
RPTNEED_UNMET_NEED_AMT
UNMET NEED: The student’s unmet need which is the
gross need minus any awards.
RPTNEED_IM_EFC_AMT
IM EXPECTED FAMILY CONTRIBUTION: The
student’s most recently calculated expected family
contribution (EFC) using institutional methodology (IM).
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-361
Column Name
Comment
RPTNEED_IM_GROSS_NEED_AMT
IM GROSS NEED: The gross need of the applicant
defined as budget minus IM expected family contribution
(EFC), minus resources.
RPTNEED_IM_UNMET_NEED_AMT
IM UNMET NEED: The student’s unmet need which is
the IM gross need minus any awards.
RPTNEED_BEG_UNMET_NEED_
AMT
UNMET NEED: The beginning value of the student’s FM
unmet need when the packaging process is run.
RPTNEED_BEG_IM_UNMET_
NEED_AMT
IM UNMET NEED: The beginning value of the student’s
IM unmet need when the packaging process is run.
RPTNEED_FM_BUDGET_AMT
FM BUDGET AMOUNT: The amount of the student’s
FM cost of attendance.
RPTNEED_IM_BUDGET_AMT
IM BUDGET AMOUNT: The amount of the student’s IM
cost of attendance.
RPTNEED_IM_EXCESS_EFC_AMT
IM EXCESS EFC: The total amount of the student’s
awards which are designated as replacing IM EFC but
instead are used to reduce need.
RPTNEED_FM_DIRECT_COST_
AMT
FM DIRECT COST AMOUNT: The direct cost amount
of the student’s FM cost of attendance.
RPTNEED_IM_DIRECT_COST_
AMT
IM DIRECT COST AMOUNT: The direct cost amount of
the student’s IM cost of attendance.
RPTNEED_BUDGET_AMOUNT
BUDGET AMOUNT: The amount of the student’s cost of
attendance associated with the EFC indicator.
RPTNEED_RESOURCE_AMOUNT
RESOURCE AMOUNT: Total amount of outside
resources used in the applicant’s need calculation. These
include contracts and exemptions which are not excluded
from counting towards financial aid resources.
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW Column
The RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW column is populated dynamically based on whether
RPEPCKG is run in A (Actual) or S (Simulated) mode. If run in A (Actual), the value is N.
If run in S (Simulated), the value is Y. When using functions, you can use the
RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW so the packaging process can look at the RPRAWRD
(permanent) or RPTAWRD (temporary) tables.
The example below demonstrates how to utilize this column in a rule.
2-362
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Select 1500 from RPTNEED
Where RPTNEED_AIDY_CODE = :aidy
and RPTNEED_PIDM = :pidm
and RPKALGR.F_GET_FUND_OFFER
(:AIDY,:PIDM,'PELL',RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW) <4310
When RPEPCKG is run in A (Actual), the packaging process examines the permanent
tables to obtain the Pell value (this assumes that the Calculate Pell Award parameter is set
to Y or Pell has already been awarded).
When RPEPCKG is run in S (Simulated), the packaging process looks at the temporary
tables to obtain the Pell value (this also assumes that the Calculate Pell Award parameter is
set to Y).
Examples 3, 5 and 6 in the Sample Algorithmic Packaging Rules section also demonstrate
how this switch can be utilized in rules.
Warning
It is recommended that you do not use RPTNEED_SIMULATE_SW = 'Y' as
a hard-coded value in a rule since inaccurate results could occur if you
are packaging in Actual Mode and the temporary tables are not available,

or have different values than that which is in the permanent tables.
Functions defined in the rpkalgr package
The following section lists the functions defined in the rpkalgr package that you can use in
algorithmic packaging rules.
F_GET_FUND_OFFER
Function to calculate award offer amounts for an aid year, student, and fund code.
f_get_fund_offer
( p_aidy_code,
p_pidm,
p_fund_code,
p_simulate_sw)
F_GET_FFID_OFFER
Function to calculate award offer amounts total for an aid year, student, and federal fund
ID.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-363
f_get_ffid_offer
( p_aidy_code,
p_pidm,
p_fed_fund_id,
p_simulate_sw)
F_GET_PRIOR_YEAR_FUND_OFFER
Function to calculate prior year award offer amounts for an aid year, student, and fund
code. (The p_aidy_code value is the current year.)
f_get_prior_year_fund_offer
( p_aidy_code,
p_pidm,
p_fund_code)
F_GET_PRIOR_YEAR_FFID_OFFER
Function to calculate prior year award offer amounts total for an aid year, student, and
federal fund id.
f_get_prior_year_ffid_offer
( p_aidy_code,
p_pidm,
p_fed_fund_id)
COD TEACH Calculation
This section addresses the calculation of load-based TEACH awards introduced for the
2009-2010 award year. The processing is modeled in a similar way to the existing Pell
Grant calculations.
To accomplish this, much of the existing rules data set up to support Pell processing is
used for TEACH awards. Pell Packaging Options on the Packaging Options (RPROPTS)
form, which were previously used exclusively for Pell award and disbursement
calculations, are now also used to calculate award and disbursement amounts for TEACH
awards.
2-364
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Pell Award Percent values found on the Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRASCH) form and the Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA)
form are now also used in the calculation of TEACH awards.
Note
Prior to the 2009-2010 aid year, ACG, SMART, and TEACH awards could
not be calculated based on period load values. They were packaged by
RPEPCKG and could be added and updated on the award forms just like
any other fund.
Starting with the 2009-2010 aid year, the period awards can be calculated
and disbursed based on a variety of award and disbursement load
options from the RPROPTS form, similar to the way in which Pell awards
have been calculated. To accomplish this, a new database package
(RPK_GRANT_CALC) has been created, and will be used by the
Packaging Process (RPEPCKG) to calculate ACG, SMART and TEACH
awards. In addition, a new Grant Calculation Process (RPRGRNT) has
been created and may be used to calculate these awards outside of the
packaging process.
It is strongly recommended that you use the RPEPCKG and RPRGRNT
processes to calculate ACG, SMART and TEACH awards starting with the
2009-2010 aid year. Creating, updating, or rescheduling of these awards
from the Award Maintenance windows of Award Maintenance
(RPAAWRD), Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT), and Mass Offer Mass
Entry (RPAMOFF) forms, or the creation or updating of these awards from
the Batch Posting Process (RORBPST) will not be prevented; however,
these forms and processes will bypass the new period load calculations
and use the standard Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRDEFA) and Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules
(RFRASCH) forms without regard to period load values, and may give

unexpected results.
Calculations
If the award option is not enabled on the Grant Options window of the Packaging Options
(RPROPTS) form, the calculation uses the values from the Packaging Options window of
RPROPTS. If the disbursement options are not set on the Grant Options window of
RPROPTS, the calculation uses the disbursement option from the Enrollment Cutoff Date
Rules window of RPROPTS. If disbursement options are not set on the Enrollment Cutoff
Date Rules window, the calculation uses the default Disbursement Options from the
Packaging Options window of RPROPTS.
Note
Disbursement options for crossover periods must be setup the same in
both aid years. If different options are used, unexpected results will occur.
The following is an overview of how the calculations are performed.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-365
• The new RPK_GRANT_CALC package calculates the correct TEACH grant award
for each period based on the student’s load (as defined on RPROPTS) and the
Grant Percentages as defined on RFRDEFA/RFRASCH.This new package is used
by Auto Packaging (RPEPCKG), the new RPRGRNT Process, and Disbursement
(RPEDISB).
• You can still enter TEACH awards manually on the award forms.This allows for
the use of the award overrides, if needed.
When you enter awards manually, the new RPK_GRANT_CALC package is not used.
Instead, award validation that uses the normal award percentages on RFRDEFA/
RFRASCH is used. This functionality is the same as before this enhancement.
• Batch Posting of TEACH awards is allowed.
However, just as with manual awards, Batch Posting does not use the
RPK_GRANT_CALC package and instead awards using the normal award
percentages on RFRDEFA/RFRASCH. This functionality is the same as before this
enhancement.
• Because the RPK_GRANT_CALC is used by the Disbursement Process (RPEDISB),
these awards are recalculated at the time of disbursement - regardless of the method
used to award the funds. This ensures that a student is not overpaid for any period
of enrollment.
• You can use the Award and Period Locks on the award forms in the same way as
you can for Pell. This allows you to make changes to awards for a period and lock
the awards so that the awards are not recalculated at the time of disbursement.
Examples
Below are some examples of how TEACH is calculated based on the changes in this
enhancement.
Student packaged full-time, enrolled ¾ time
Based on the options set on the Grant Options window of RPROPTS, the student is
awarded full-time ACG1 for both Fall and Spring periods.
At the time of disbursement for the Fall period, the student is only enrolled ¾ time.
RPEDISB calculates the eligible disbursement amount based on the disbursement options
on the Grant Options window on RPROPTS and only disburses a ¾ amount for the period.
Student packaged full-time, enrolled < ½ time
Based on the options set on the Grant Options window of RPROPTS, the student is
awarded full-time ACG1 for both Fall and Spring periods.
At the time of disbursement for the Fall period, the student is only enrolled < ½ time.
RPEDISB calculates the eligible disbursement amount based on the disbursement options
2-366
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
on the Grant Options window on RPROPTS which is 0. No disbursement is made for the
period.
Student packaged ¾ time, enrolled full-time
Based on the options set on the Grant Options window of RPROPTS, the student is
awarded ¾ time ACG1 for both Fall and Spring periods.
At the time of disbursement for Fall period, the student is actually enrolled full-time.
RPEDISB calculates the eligible disbursement amount based on the disbursement options
on the Grant Options window on RPROPTS and disburses a full-time amount for the
period.
Note
The award is not increased, only the disbursement is increased. Award
increases must be made by either running RPRGRNT or manually

updating the award.
Student receiving more than one TEACH grant scheduled
award within the aid year
Student is packaged with TCHU1 full-time for Fall and Spring.
Institution knows that the student will also be enrolled full-time for the summer period.
On the award form, you can manually add TCHU2 and use the Federal Limits Override to
award the proper amount for the second scheduled TEACH award for the aid year. This
override must be updated on both the TCHU1 and TCHU2 fund codes.
Note
Adjustments must be made on the period window to ensure the proper

amount is associated with the summer period.
Student with prior enrollment and payments
Student received $200 in ACG1 at a prior institution.
The student is anticipating full-time enrollment at your institution.
The student is auto-packaged.
Based on the calculations in the RPK_GRANT_CALC package, the student is awarded $375
for the Fall period, and $175 for the Spring period.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-367
Student that received all Pell payments for the aid year at
another institution
NSLDS shows all Pell eligibility has been paid for the aid year at another institution.
ACG1 can be awarded manually on the award form using the No Pell award override.
Note
Adjustments must be made on the period window to ensure the proper

amount is associated with the period(s).
ACG1 is batch posted to a student using the F batch posting
type
Warning
This method is not recommended for TEACH grants.

Student passes award validation and ACG1 is added to the student’s award.
Note
Adjustments must be made on the period window to ensure the proper

amount is associated with the period(s).
When Disbursement is run, the RPK_GRANT_CALC package calculates whether or not the
student is eligible for the scheduled disbursement and only pays the eligible disbursement
amount.
ACG1 is batch posted to a student using FN batch posting
type
Warning
This method is not recommended for TEACH grants.

Award validation is not used, so the ACG1 is added to the student’s award.
Note
Adjustments must be made on the period window to ensure the proper

amount is associated with the period(s).
Note
The award must be reviewed to ensure that the student is actually eligible

for the award.
When Disbursement is run, the RPK_GRANT_CALC package calculates whether or not the
student is eligible for the scheduled disbursement and only pays the eligible disbursement
amount.
2-368
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Student in a 150% aid period
Student is awarded 50% of ACG1 in the Fall period, 50% of ACG1 in the Spring Period,
and 0% in the Summer period as all of ACG1 has been awarded.
Student in a 50% aid period
Student is only awarded 50% of ACG1 as that is the maximum for the aid period.
Awards are locked on the period window
Locks are treated by Disbursement just as the locks are for Pell.
If the award lock is Y, the fund pays for the period being disbursed, regardless of any
recalculation by the RPK_GRANT_CALC package.
If the award lock is E, the fund is recalculated for the period being disbursed, but only for
the lower enrollment.
If the period lock is Y, the fund pays for the locked period, regardless of any recalculation
by the RPK_GRANT_CALC package. Any additional periods will not be affected by the
lock.
If the period lock is E, the fund is recalculated for the locked period, but only for the lower
enrollment. Any additional periods are not affected by the lock.
Additional examples
For the remaining examples, assume the student is in a Fall, Spring, Summer aid period
and there are no other factors such as prior school awards affecting the Banner award.
Also assume the following values on RPROPTS, RFRDEFA/RFRASCH, RNANAxx, and
ROAENRL:
RPROPTS
Grant Award Enrollment Option is I (Estimated ISIR / FAFSA enrl) for all periods
Grant Disbursement Enrollment Option is A (Adjusted hours) for all periods
RFRDEFA/RFRASCH
May 2012
Period
Award Percent
Grant Award Percent
Fall
50
50
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-369
Period
Award Percent
Grant Award Percent
Spring
50
50
Summer
0
50
RNANAxx
Student’s Expected Enrollment Status is 1 (Full Time)
Student’s Expected Period Enrollment Status
• Fall
2 (3/4 time)
• Spring
2 (3/4 time)
• Summer
2 (3/4 time)
ROAENRL
Financial Aid Adjusted Hours
• Fall
6 (1/2 time)
• Spring
6 (1/2 time)
• Summer
12 (Full Time)
Manually enter a $4000 SMART award on RPAAWRD (not
recommended)
The RPAAWRD form will not use the new rpk_grant_calc database package, which
calculates grants based on period load, and will not use the RPROPTS Grant Award
Enrollment Percent options.
Based on RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Award Percent values, the student receives the full
$4000, with period amounts as follows:
Fall$2000(FT Expected Enrollment, 50% Award Percent)
Spring$2000(FT Expected Enrollment, 50% Award Percent)
Summer$0 (FT Expected Enrollment, 0% Award Percent)
Batch post a $4000 SMART award using RORBPST (not
recommended)
The RPAAWRD form will not use the new rpk_grant_calc database package, which
calculates grants based on period load, and will not use the RPROPTS Grant Award
Enrollment Percent options.
2-370
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Based on RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Award Percent values, the student receives the full
$4000, with period amounts as follows:
Fall$2000(FT Expected Enrollment, 50% Award Percent)
Spring$2000(FT Expected Enrollment, 50% Award Percent)
Summer$0 (FT Expected Enrollment, 0% Award Percent)
Use the RPEPCKG or RPRGRNT process to calculate the
SMART award (recommended)
The rpk_grant_calc package will calculate the SMART grant by period, based on
RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment Options, RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Grant Award
Percent values, and the student enrollment load for each period,
The award will be calculated as $4000, with period amounts as follows:
Fall $1500(3/4 time ISIR enrollment, 50% Grant Award Percent)
Spring$1500(3/4 time ISIR enrollment, 50% Grant Award Percent)
Summer$1000(3/4 time, 50% Grant Award Percent, remaining amount)
Use the RPAAWRD Reschedule Indicator to reschedule the
periods when aid period did not change (not recommended)
Assume the existing award is $4000, and had been calculated by RPEPCKG as:
Fall $1500
Spring$1500
Summer$1000
The form will not use the new rpk_grant_calc database package which calculates
grants based on period load and will not use the RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment
options.
The award is rescheduled based on RFRDEFA_AWARD_PCT or RFRASCH_AWARD_PCT.
Fall$2000
Spring$2000
Summer$0
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-371
Use the RPAAWRD Reschedule Indicator to reschedule the
periods when aid period changed (not recommended).
Assume the existing award is $3000 FA/SPR and had been calculated by RPEPCKG using
the new rpk_grant_calc package and ISIR Term expected enrollment as:
Fall $1500
Spring$1500
The student changed from FA/SPR to FA/SPR/SUMMER. The student ISIR term
enrollment for summer is 2 (¾ time). RPAAWRD reschedules the award based on
RFRDEFA_AWARD_PCT or RFRASCH_AWARD_PCT.
Fall$2000
Spring$2000
Summer$0
Use the RPRGRNT process to recalculate the award when
aid period changed (recommended).
Assume the existing award is $3000 FA/SPR and had been calculated by RPEPCKG using
the new rpk_grant_calc package and ISIR Term expected enrollment as:
Fall $1500
Spring$1500
The student changed from FA/SPR to FA/SPR/SUMMER. The student ISIR term
enrollment for summer is 2 (¾ time). RPRGRNT reschedules the award using the
rpk_grant_calc package and calculates the SMART grant by period, based on
RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment Options, RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Grant Award
Percent values, and the student enrollment load for each period,
Fall$1500
Spring$1500
Summer$1000
Use the RPRGRNT process to recalculate the award when
aid period changed (recommended).
Assume existing award is $3000 FA/SPR, and had been calculated by RPEPCKG using
the new rpk_grant_calc package and ISIR Term expected enrollment as:
2-372
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Fall $1500
Spring$1500
The student changed from FA/SPR to FA/SPR/SUMMER. The student ISIR term
enrollment for summer is 2 (¾ time). Assume by the time this occurred, the school had
chosen to change the RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment Percent values to A (Adjusted
hours). RPRGRNT reschedules the award using the rpk_grant_calc package and
calculates the SMART grant by period, based on RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment
Options, RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Grant Award Percent values, and the student enrollment
load for each period,
Fall$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Spring$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Summer$2000 (based on Full Time Adjusted hours)
Disbursement
Assuming the RPROPTS Grant Award Disbursement Percent values were also set to A
(Adjusted hours) for all periods, the student would be paid the same amounts as were
awarded:
Fall$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Spring$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Summer$2000 (based on Full Time Adjusted hours)
Use the RPRGRNT process to recalculate the award when
the aid period changed (recommended).
Assume the existing award is $3000 FA/SPR, and had been calculated by RPEPCKG
using the new rpk_grant_calc package and ISIR Term expected enrollment as:
Fall $1500
Spring$1500
The student changed from FA/SPR to FA/SPR/SUMMER. The student ISIR term
enrollment for summer is 2 (¾ time). Assume at the time this occurred, the school had not
changed the RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment Percent values.They are still set to I
(ISIR Expected Term Enrollment). RPRGRNT reschedules the award using the
rpk_grant_calc package and calculates the SMART grant by period, based on
RPROPTS Grant Award Enrollment Options, RFRDEFA/RFRASCH Grant Award
Percent values, and the student enrollment load for each period:
Fall$1500 (based on ¾ ISIR Term Expected enrollment)
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-373
Spring$1500 (based on ¾ ISIR Term Expected enrollment)
Summer$1000 (based on ¾ ISIR Term enrollment and remaining amount)
Disbursement
Assuming the RPROPTS Grant Award Disbursement Percent values are set to A (Adjusted
hours) for all periods, the student is paid based on the setting on RPROPTS for Pay Pell if
Disbursement Amount Differs from Award Amount.
If the Pay Pell if Disbursement Amount Differs from Award Amount is A (Always
Disburse):
Fall$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Spring$1000 (based on ½ time Adjusted hours)
Summer$2000 (based on Full Time Adjusted hours)
If the Pay Pell if Disbursement Amount Differs from Award Amount is L (Lesser
Amount):
Fall$1000 (Lesser of 1500 award and 1000 calculated disbursement)
Spring$1000 (Lesser of 1500 award and 1000 calculated disbursement)
Summer$1000 (Lesser of 1000 award and 2000 calculated disbursement)
If the Pay Pell if Disbursement Amount Differs from Award Amount is N (Never
Disburse):
Fall$0 (1500 award amount differs from 1000 calculated disbursement)
Spring$0 (1500 award amount differs from 1000 calculated disbursement)
Summer$0 (1000 award amount differs from 2000 calculated disbursement)
Scholarship and athletics processing by
period
You can count scholarships by period and define how many periods a student can receive a
scholarship. Use the Scholarship Period Information (RPASTRM) form to view the
maximum periods, amount paid, loss of eligibility, and remaining periods of eligibility.
This form displays all periods for which the student received the scholarship.
2-374
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Use the Donor and Scholarship Demographics (RFADSCD) form to provide you with a
place to capture the following donor and scholarship information.
Donor Information
• Donor ID and Name
• Reception Invite
• Anonymous
• Thank you letter
• Primary Donor
• Deceased
• Grades to donor
• Donor selects recipient
• Link to address, telephone, and
e-mail information
Scholarship Information
• Minimum enrollment
• Tuition waiver
• Multiple donors
• Scholarship source
• Restricted
• Maximum number of periods
You can auto-populate or manually enter specific student athlete data by period on the
Sport Aid by Period (RAASPTM) form. In addition, use the Team Sport Period Aid
(RAITMTM) form to provide you with the ability to identify specific team sport
information by period.
Potential Athletic Grant Defaults (RAAPAGD)
Use this form to enter default award year values for potential athletic grant amounts. The
form is split up into two blocks. The first block allows you to enter potential athletic grant
default amounts for in-state and out-of-state athletes. The second block allows you to enter
sport-specific default amounts for in-state and out-of-state athletes. If a sport is defined in
the second block, then the appropriate default amount is used for the student on the Sport
Aid by Period (RAASPTM) form otherwise, the appropriate default amount from the first
block gets populated.
Sport Aid by Period (RAASPTM)
Use this form to view and enter student athletic aid information for a specific period.
Information on the Aid for Sport tab is a combination of manually entered and
system-populated data. Institutional award, outside award, resource and contract/
exemption information is populated when the Default Aid Values button is clicked.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-375
Team Sport Period Aid (RAITMTM)
This form displays and totals, within sport and period, the Potential Athletic
Grant - Year amount, Athlete's Actual Grant - Period amount and percentage of the
potential and actual amount based on data from RAASPTM.
Donor and Scholarship Demographics (RFADSCD)
Use this form to view and enter donor and scholarship demographic information. The
Scholarship Demographics block allows you to identify specific information related to the
Scholarship and the Donor Demographics block allow you to identify specific Donor
information.
Scholarship Period Information (RPASTRM)
The Scholarship Period Information (RPASTRM) form enables you to view scholarship
information for a student. The information on this form is obtained from various sources.
The Maximum comes from RFADSCD (Maximum Number of Periods), the Paid amount
comes from RPRATRM, the Loss of Eligibility number is manually entered, and the
Remaining number is a calculation of Maximum - Paid - Loss of Eligibility.
Athletic Aid Type Validation (RTVAATP)
This validation form allows you to set up the Athletic Aid Types to be used on
RAASPTM, for example: Medical Release, Injured Reserve, Redshirt.
Financial Aid Sport Validation (RTVFASP)
This validation form allows you to designate Financial Aid sport codes to be used on
RAASPTM, as they may differ from what is used in Banner Student.
Grades to Donor Validation (RTVGRDD)
This validation form allows you to designate specific categories of grades that a donor
wishes to receive, if any. For example, a donor may wish to receive grades only for the
freshmen students or only for students in a specific program.
Scholarship Source Validation (RTVSSRC)
This validation form allows you to designate the source of a scholarship, for example:
donor, gift, or institution.
2-376
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Reviewed Validation (RTVREVW)
This validation form allows you to designate the review status of an athlete’s institutional
award, outside award, resource, and/or contract or exemption. For example, you might use
this form to designate that the information for the fund, resource, and contract/exemption
has been reviewed and is complete.
Thank You Letter Validation (RTVTYLT)
This validation form allows you to designate specific categories of a thank you letter that a
donor wishes to receive, if any. For example, a donor may wish to receive a thank you
letter only from the freshmen students or only from students in a specific program.
Third Party Contract Rules (RPRCONT)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RPRCONT to indicate if a contract should be counted
for Athletic reporting purposes.
Exemption Rules (RPREXPT)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RPREXPT to indicate if the exemption should be
counted for Athletic reporting purposes.
Resource Code Validation (RTVARSC)
Use the Count for Athletics field on RTVARSC to indicate if the resource should be
counted for Athletic reporting purposes.
Athletic Grant Period Roll (RAPAGRL)
Use this process to roll athletic grant period information on RAASPTM from one period to
the next.
Athletic Aid Discrepancy Rpt (RARATAD)
Use this report to display the discrepant information between the actual fund/resource
amounts and the reported amounts on RAASPTM. This report should be used to
determine if a student’s award information has been updated since this information was
originally reported to Athletics.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-377
2-378
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Financial Aid Self-Service
Web access for financial aid provides students with direct information about their financial
aid status and educates the student on a number of important financial aid matters.
Additionally, the Web can provide other vital functions for financial aid such as applying
for aid and providing a communication vehicle with the financial aid office. Financial Aid
pages perform the following functions and may be tailored to provide the student with
additional information that is unique to your institution.
• Provides access to Banner Financial Aid data such as a student’s application/loan
status, current award package, outstanding tracking requirements, award history,
loan history, applicant messages, cost of attendance, fund messages, transcript
records, and disbursement information.
• Assists in the interaction between students and financial aid office staff. Examples
include a response to an institutionally-specified applicant message, the
confirmation of a completed requirement, and the providing of verification and
additional information to the financial aid officer.
• Provides links allowing the student to interact with other primary financial aid Web
sites to apply for federal aid (FAFSA on the Web page), complete the CSS
PROFILE registration/application, estimate financial aid eligibility, search for
available scholarships, and access federal financial aid information.
• Allows your institution to use the Banner Self-Service toolset to provide
information that explains the aid application process at your institution and to
describe what aid is available. Examples include how to apply for aid, how to find
a job, institutional application deadlines, what to do if unusual circumstances
occur, and where to find answers to frequently asked questions.
Unsecured access
An applicant or student may gain access to certain unsecured data without entering a
personal ID and PIN. Unsecured access enables students who do not currently have
financial aid records within the administrative system to initiate the financial aid process
by researching financial aid sources of funds and applying for financial aid. The Financial
Aid Links page provides numerous links to application materials, search tools, and
information sites. This page is an unsecured access page and available for public access.
Secured access
Institutions may select which query access items to activate. Links provide access to the
student’s overall financial aid status, messages, cost of attendance, eligibility, award
information, and external links.
After selecting the Enter Secure Area link from the home page, the student is prompted
for a student ID and personal identification number (PIN) for security purposes.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Self-Service:Financial Aid
2-379
If the ID and PIN entry is a match, the Main Menu is displayed. The student selects the
Financial Aid menu.
The Financial Aid menu provides the following options:
• The Financial Aid Status (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm) provides an overall
summary statement of the status of the student’s file for the aid year. The student
can obtain greater detail on a summary statement by clicking on an underlined
phrase. For example, if an estimated cost of attendance has been calculated for the
student, the student can click on the cost of attendance phrase to review all
elements of their estimated student budget. All of the pages in the Financial Aid
module can be accessed via other links, but this page provides a one-stop overview
and access to more detail information.
• The Eligibility (bwrkelig.P_DispEligReq) link displays the Eligibility
Requirements for Aid Year, which includes items informing the student of any
factors that may impact his or her financial aid status.
• The Student Requirements tab (bwrktrkr.P_DispTrkReq) displays the
tracking requirements that the student needs to submit or complete. These
requirements control whether the student is eligible to be packaged or receive
payment of aid. The page also lists those requirements that the student has
already satisfied.
• The Requirement Messages tab (bwrktmsg.P_DispTrkMsg) enables the
student to read and respond to tracking requirement messages with this page.
• The Holds tab (bwrkhold.P_DispHold) displays financial aid holds that
have been placed on a student’s financial aid application. You can use holds
to prevent packaging, memoing, and disbursements. Holds can be in effect
for an aid year or for a date range.
• The Academic Progress tab (bwrksaph.P_DispSAP) allows the student to
review his or her academic performance as it is evaluated for each term.
• The Award (bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu) menu items display elements of the student’s
award package.
• The Award for Aid Year page (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear) displays a
number of tabs with information regarding the general information about a
student’s award, an overview of their award, and the terms and conditions for
the acceptance of an award. It also provides a tab where students can accept
or reject their award, as well as tabs where students can provide additional
information to your institution and where your institution can include special
messages and questions for students to answer.
• The Award Payment Schedule page (bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched)
displays the student’s disbursement schedule and a record of payments made
to the student’s account.
• The Award History page (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst) displays the student’s
entire award history arranged by aid year, beginning with the most recent aid
year at the top of the page. It also includes other resources (that is,
2-380
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
supplemental aid that the student received in addition to the normal federal,
state, and institutional sources).
• The Loan Application History page (bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst) displays
the details of the student’s loan activity. The information is arranged by
financial aid year and includes the status and amount of the loan, in addition
to the amount paid to date.
• The Withdrawal Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw) page
displays withdrawal information if the student has withdrawn from your
institution for the selected term.
• The Financial Aid menu includes an e-mail link. You can specify your financial aid
contact’s e-mail address, if you choose to allow students to e-mail the financial aid
office.
• The General Financial Aid (bmenu.P_FAASecMnu) link displays the Financial
Aid Links page (bmenu.P_FAFormsMnu) provides the student with access to
institutionally posted documents as well as links to the federal aid application, the
CSS PROFILE registration application, loan sites, and scholarship search sites.
Set up Financial Aid on the Web
This section explains how to implement the Financial Aid module on the Web. Refer to the
Financial Aid User Guide for more information about Banner forms.
1. For each aid year that you want to be available on the Web, select the Information
Access Indicator field on the Web Processing Rules window on the Global
Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
2. For each requirements code that you want to be available on the Web, select the
Information Access checkbox on the Requirements Tracking Validation
(RTVTREQ) form.
3. For each message code you want to be available on the Web when it is associated
with a tracking requirement, select the Information Access checkbox on the Message
Code Validation (RTVMESG) form.
4. For each packaging group that you want to be available on the Web, select the Info
Access checkbox on the Packaging Group Validation (RTVPGRP) form.
5. For each hold type that you want to be available on the Web, select the Info Access
checkbox on the Hold Type Validation (RTVHOLD) form.
6. For each message code you want to be available on the Web, select the Info Access
Ind checkbox on the Message Code Validation (RTVMESG) form.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-381
7. For each message code that you want to associate with a requirement, enter the
message code (defined in RTVMESG) in the Message Code field on the Message
Rules (RORMESG) form.
8. For each requirement status code that will allow a requirement to be available on the
Web, select the Info Access checkbox on the Requirement Tracking Status Validation
(RTVTRST) form.
9. For each loan status you want to allow Loan Application History to be available or
allow the display of Promissory Note requirements for Direct Loans as a requirement,
select the Info Access indicator on the Loan Status Validation (RTVLNST) form.
For each fund that you want students to be able to accept or decline on the Web, select the
Web Accept Flag checkbox on the Aid Year Specific Data - Packaging Options window
of the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form or the Funds Management (ROAMGMT)
form.
Financial Aid Self-Service web pages
This section describes the Web pages included in Financial Aid module. As an
implementer or administrator of the Web system, it is important for you to review this
information.
Financial Aid Links (bmenu.P_FAAUnsecMnu and
bmenu.P_FAASecMnu)
The Financial Aid Links page displays a base set of financial aid application and
information links that you can customize through Web Tailor. It is accessible from both the
unsecured and the secured areas of your Web site.
• From the unsecure area, the package/procedure is bmenu.P_FAAUnsecMnu.
• From the secure area, the package/procedure is bmenu.P_FAASecMnu.
A link on the unsecured version of the page allows the student to log in to the secured area.
Both versions include a link to the Financial Aid Forms page (bmenu.P_FAFormsMnu),
which provides more links designed to help students complete their application materials.
The remaining links on both versions enable the student to access resources outside of the
school such as links to the federal aid application, the CSS PROFILE registration
application, loan sites, and scholarship search sites.
Financial Aid Forms (bmenu.P_FAFormsMnu)
When a student selects a form on this page, Adobe® Reader™ displays the form on a new
page in the browser. The student can then download the form. If the student does not
2-382
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
already have Adobe Acrobat Reader, he or she can select the Adobe Reader option on this
page to download the software.
The selection of forms on the Financial Aid Forms Page is determined by your institution.
The bmenu.P_FAFormsMnu page is a Web Tailor menu that can be accessed using your
Web Tailor account. You can view how the sample data is set up as menu items and then
use the same procedure to add your own menu items and customize the sample entries. All
the forms listed on the page must be stored in the resdocs directory on the Web server.
The sample PDF forms will already be stored in the resdocs directory. If you add other
forms to the menu, you must put the corresponding files into the resdocs directory. Each
link on the menu must point to the corresponding document in the format /resdocs/
[filename.ext].
Web Page Fields
This page does not contain any fields.
Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Back to General Financial
Aid Links
Goes to the Financial Aid Links page
(bmenu.P_FAAUnsecMnu)
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Links
May 2012
bmenu.P_FAAUnsecMnu
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-383
Student Tracking Requirements Channel (bwrcbre1.sql)
The channel displays the tracking requirements that a student needs to submit or complete.
These requirements control whether a student is eligible to be packaged or receive
payment of aid. The page also lists requirements that the student has already satisfied, as
well as the non-coded tracking requirements and MPN requirements, when the indicators
in Banner are checked.
In addition, the student can click on any underlined, incomplete requirement to go to the
Web page that will help to complete the requirement. The URL for the corresponding Web
page is defined in the Requirements Tracking Validation Table (RTVTREQ) and can point
to a Web page of information or the necessary document (such as a .PDF file). RTVTREQ
is used to maintain data for the URL. Only records with a value in the URL field are
displayed on the Web as a hyperlink.
Promissory Note requirements are also displayed as unsatisfied or satisfied requirements.
The description, URL, and any instructions are defined on RFRMGMT or ROAMGMT
for the fund code.
Note
Promissory note requirements are not displayed if they have a School PN

Status (RFRPROM_DL_NOTE_STATUS) = Denied.
Aid Year (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy)
A student selects a financial aid year on the Aid Year page. This aid year determines which
data will be used in processing and which data will be displayed on other pages. If the
student has been using one aid year and wants to use another, he or she can use this page to
change aid years.
Many, but not all, of the Financial Aid Web pages require an aid year. If no aid year has
been specified in a Web session, and the student is on a page that needs to use a specific
aid year, the system automatically displays the Aid Year page first. Once an aid year has
been chosen, it is active for the current Web session until the user selects another.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Select Aid Year
Available aid years from which the user can choose.
The values displayed in the pull-down list come from the
Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form.
This is the first level of validation before any aid-yearrelated information is displayed for the student on a
Financial Aid Web page.
2-384
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Global Institution Financial
Aid Options (ROAINST)
form
Select the Information Access Indicator field on the Web
Processing Rules window for each aid year that you want to
be available on the Web.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This page does not have links to other pages.
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for Aid bwrksumm.P_DispSumm
Year
May 2012
Tabs on Eligibility
Requirements for Aid Year
bwrkelig.P_DispEligReq
Tabs on Award Package for
Aid Year
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
Award Payment Schedule
for Aid Year
bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched
Cost of Attendance for Aid
Year
bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg
Messages for Aid Year
bwrkamsg.P_FAAppMsg
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-385
Financial Aid Status for Aid Year (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm)
A summarized status of the student’s financial aid package is displayed on this page. The
information is calculated based on the financial aid year, the budget group (students with
similar budgeting characteristics), and the aid period (full academic year, fall semester,
and so on).
Each summary statement provides the student with a key element of their overall status.
The summary statement is suppressed until relevant data is available for that key element.
For example, if the student does not have unsatisfied student requirements assigned in
Banner, the statement for unsatisfied student requirements is not displayed on this page.
Likewise, if period budgeting is not enabled (Options tab on ROAINST), the amount of
the aid year budget will be used. The value of the Period Budget Preferred EFC option
(Web Processing Rules tab on ROAINST) will be used to determine the budget type/
components to be used to display the total budget for the applicant.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Unsatisfied student
requirements
If the student has unsatisfied tracking requirements on the
Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ) form, the unsatisfied
tracking requirement statement is displayed.
The phrase student requirements is a hyperlink to the Student
Requirements tab (bwrktrkr.P_DispTrkReq) of the
Eligibility Requirements for Aid Year page.
Estimated cost of
attendance
If the student has budget components identified on the
Applicant Budget (RBAABUD) form for the aid year and
aid period (when using aid year budgeting) or on the
Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD) form for the period
budget groups for the aid year and aid period, the estimated
cost of attendance statement is displayed, indicating the
monetary amount of the student’s budget.
The phrase cost of attendance is a hyperlink to the Cost of
Attendance for Aid Year page (bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg).
2-386
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Financial aid award total
If the student has been awarded financial aid, the award total
statement is displayed. When the
RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is N, this line of text will not
be displayed.
When a crossover period exists, the Overall Financial Aid
Status page will show, “You have been awarded financial aid
which totals “$xx,xxx.xx”. The total will reflect the amount
of the Pell award for the applicable crossover period.
The word awarded is a hyperlink to the General Information
tab of the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab).
Outside resources
If awards do not exist for the student, but the student has
other resources specified on the Resource Maintenance
(RPAARSC) form, the outside resources statement is
displayed. (If the student has both awards and outside
resources, only the award total statement is displayed.)
The phrase outside resources is a hyperlink to the General
Information tab of the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab).
Academic progress
Student’s academic progress statement is displayed.
The phrase academic transcript is a hyperlink to the Banner
Student Self-Service Academic Transcript Options page
(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran), which the student can use
to access the Academic Transcript page
(bwskotrn.P_ViewTran).
The phrase academic progress is a hyperlink to the
Academic Progress tab (bwrksaph.P_DispSAP) of the
Eligibility Requirements for Aid Year page.
Holds
If holds exist for the student, the hold statement is displayed.
The word Holds is a hyperlink to the Holds tab
(bwrkhold.P_DispHold) of the Eligibility Requirements
for Aid Year page.
Messages
If messages exist for the student, the messages statement is
displayed.
The word messages is a hyperlink to the Messages for Aid
Year page (bwrkamsg.P_FAAppMsg).
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-387
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Account summary
Account summary statement is displayed allowing the
student to access his or her account summary.
The phrase account summary is a hyperlink to the Account
Summary by Term page (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).
Financial aid history
If the student has any financial aid history, the financial aid
history statement is displayed.
The phrase financial aid history is a hyperlink to the Award
History page (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst).
Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Student requirements
Goes to the Student Requirements tab
(bwrktrkr.P_DispTrkReq) of the Eligibility
Requirements for Aid Year page.
Cost of attendance
Goes to the Cost of Attendance for Aid Year page
(bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg).
Note: If the Display COA Detail indicator (Web Processing
Rules tab on ROAINST) is unchecked (No), budget status
is not displayed (Information Text from Web Tailor) and the
Cost of attendance information line and link will not be
displayed. This prevents the applicant from accessing the
Cost of Attendance web page.
2-388
Awarded
Goes to the General Information tab of the Award Package
for Aid Year page (bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab).
Outside resources
Goes to the General Information tab of the Award Package
for Aid Year page (bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab).
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Academic transcript
Goes to the Academic Transcript Options page
(bwskotrn.P_ViewTermTran).
Academic progress
Goes to the Academic Progress tab
(bwrksaph.P_DispSAP) of the Eligibility Requirements
for Aid Year page.
Holds
Goes to the Holds tab (bwrkhold.P_DispHold) of the
Eligibility Requirements for Aid Year page.
Messages
Goes to the Messages for Aid Year page
(bwrkamsg.P_FAAppMsg).
Account summary
Goes to the Account Summary by Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).
Financial aid history
Goes to the Award History page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst).
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Menu
bmenu.P_FinAidMainMnu
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
May 2012
Cost of Attendance for Aid
Year
bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg
All tabs on the Award
Package for Aid Year
bwrkrhst.P_DisplayTabs
Messages for Aid Year
bwrkamsg.P_FAAppMsg
Award History
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-389
Cost of Attendance (bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg)
The cost of attendance is the estimated cost the student can expect to incur for a year of
attendance at the school. This amount can include tuition, room and board, fees, books and
supplies, transportation, and personal expenses. These costs are affected by the financial
aid year, budget period, and budget group classifications assigned to the student in Banner
Financial Aid. The estimated cost of attendance is based on these assignments.
You can check the budget group and aid period that is assigned to the student for the aid
year on the Applicant Budget (RBAABUD) form if period budgeting is not enabled. This
information is extracted from the Banner database and inserted into the Information Text
as shown in the following example.
The following information is based on your status as a Undergrad Resident On Campus
student receiving financial aid for the Fall-Spring Semesters.
Note
If the student is not assigned to a budget group, but has budget
components, the page is displayed without the preceding sample text.

In the example above, the value Undergrad Resident On Campus comes from the Group
field and the value Fall-Spring Semesters comes from the Aid Period field of the Budget
Group Aid Period block of Applicant Budget (RBAABUD) form. The non Pell budget is
displayed if the Information Access Indicator is checked for the budget type. If the non
Pell budget is not available or does not exist, the Pell budget is displayed if the
Information Access Indicator is checked for the Pell budget type.
Additionally, if period budgeting is not enabled (on ROAINST), the amount of the aid
year budget will be used. The value of the Period Budget Preferred EFC option (Web
Processing Rules tab on ROAINST) will be used to determine the budget type/
components to be used to display the total budget for the applicant.
If period budgeting is enabled (on ROAINST), the period budget groups and aid period
assigned to the student for the aid year on the Applicant Period Budget (RBAPBUD) form
can be viewed, along with the total amount for all period budget groups for the student.
This data will be inserted into the Information Text in the following example.
The following information for enrollment in the Fall-Spring-Summer Semesters is based
on your status of:
• UG Dependent Fall
• UG Dependent Spring
• UG Independent Summer
In the preceding example, the value Fall-Spring-Summer Semesters comes from the Aid
Period field and the value for UG Dependent Fall, UG Dependent Spring, UG
Independent Summer comes from the Group Code field of the Applicant Period Budget
2-390
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
(RBAPBUD) form. The FM budget is displayed if the Information Access Indicator is
checked for the applicant.
The value of the Period Budget Preferred EFC option (Web Processing Rules tab on
ROAINST) will be used to determine the budget type/components to be used to display
the total budget for the applicant.
Aid Year Budgeting
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Budget Component
Description of the budget component.
The included components are defined for the student in the
Budget Components block of the Applicant Budget
(RBAABUD) form.
Amount
Monetary amount assigned to the budget component.
The value comes from the Amount field in the Budget
Components block of the Applicant Budget (RBAABUD)
form.
Period Budgeting
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Budget Category
Description of the budget category.
The included categories are defined for display in Self
Service in the Budget Categories tab of the Period Budgeting
Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR) form.
Amount
Monetary amount assigned to the budget category.
The value comes from the sum of all budget components
associated with a budget category as defined on the Budget
Components tab of the Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules
(RBRPBYR) form.
Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-391
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Overall Financial Aid Status Goes to the Financial Aid Status for Aid Year page
(bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).
Cost of attendance
Goes to the Cost of Attendance for Aid Year page
(bwrkbudg.P_DispBudg).
Note: If the Display COA Detail indicator (Web Processing
Rules tab on ROAINST) is unchecked (No), budget status
is not displayed (Information Text from Web Tailor) and the
Cost of attendance information line and link will not be
displayed. This prevents the applicant from accessing the
Cost of Attendance web page.
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for Aid bwrksumm.P_DispSumm
Year
Award Package for Aid Year (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear)
The Award for Aid Year page contains all of a student’s required Electronic Award Letter
information, including the ability to accept or decline awards. The page contains the
following tabs.
• General Information
• Award Overview
• Resources/Additional Information
2-392
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• Terms and Conditions
• Accept Award Offer
• Special Messages
Options have been provided on the Web Processing Rules page on the ROAINST form so
that you can define which of the tabs are displayed to students. The General Information
and Award Overview tabs will always be displayed on this page, but the other tabs can be
removed if you choose.
Each tab provides areas where you can insert your own text through Web Tailor and where
you can display student-specific text messages through the use of SQL rules set up on the
RORWTXT form. The data displayed on the tabs will depend on the Web Rules indicators
and options selected in Banner and by the Web Questions and Text the school has defined.
General Information tab
This is the first tab displayed when you initially access the Award for Aid Year Page.
Your institution-defined messages and student specific text are displayed on this page, if
available. This text will only display to the student if RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is
checked or if RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and you have selected the option on
ROAINST to treat the null value as checked.
You will enter the text for your institution-defined messages through Web Tailor, and
define the student-specific text in Banner on forms RTVWTXT, RORWTXT, and
RORWTAB. The following bullets outline a summary of the information you need to enter
on each form. You can find examples and further information in the Banner Financial Aid
8.2 Release Guide under each form description.
• The Web Text Rule code on RTVWTXT
• The SQL rules for the Web Text Rule code on RORWTXT. You must select a value
to be returned by the rule. The text to be displayed will be defined by the value
returned by the rule. Select the appropriate self-service tab for the text you would
like to display on the Select Value Rules Tab then enter the Heading and Text you
would like displayed for the possible values returned by your rule.
• The order which you would like the text to display on RORWTAB. For each tab in
self-service where you would like to display Student-specific text, you must define
the sequence for display.
The following must be true in order for the heading and/or text to display on the specified
tab in Self-Service.
• The text rule must be defined on the RORWTAB form, indicating the order in
which the rules should display.
• The text rule must have SQL rules defined on RORWTXT in the RORWSQL table
where RORWSQL_ACTIVE_IND = Y and RORWSQL_VALIDATED_IND = Y.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-393
• The text rule must have Select Value rules set up for the specified tab on the
RORWTXT form in the RORWTXT table where the RORWTXT_ACTIVE_IND = Y.
• The value returned by the SQL rule for the student must match an active
RORWTXT_SELECT_VALUE for the specified tab.
When all of the above are true the RORWTXT_HEADING (if not null) and the
RORWTXT_TEXT will be displayed on the tab. If there is no text to be displayed, the
remaining items on the page will be moved up appropriately.
If the student has awards offered for the aid year, the following default message is
displayed.
Click on each tab displayed on this page to view your financial aid award details for
this aid year. If you have questions regarding your award, please contact the
Financial Aid Office.
If the student does not have any awards offered for the aid year, or there are messages that
have been assigned to the student in RORMESG that stop electronic award processing, the
following default message is displayed.
No award information is available for you at this time. Please contact the Financial
Aid Office if you have questions.
Also, if the RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = N (or if the RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND
is null and you have not selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y), all
other tabs on the Award page are inaccessible.
These default messages are updateable through Web Tailor.
2-394
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students.
• DEFAULT, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab)
This default text will appear at the top of the General
Information Tab:
“Click on each tab displayed on this page to view your
financial aid award details for this aid year. If you have
questions regarding your award, please contact the
Financial Aid Office.”
• NOAWARD, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_GeneralInfoTab)
This message will appear at the top of the General
Information Tab in place of the DEFAULT text, if there are
no awards for the student:
“No award information is available for you at this time,
please contact your financial aid office if you have
questions.”
Award Overview tab
This tab displays institutionally defined messages and student specific text, if available.
Below the initial text section and the student specific text section the following
information is displayed.
• Need Calculation
• Cost of Attendance (COA)
• Enrollment Status
• Housing Status
• Cumulative Loan Data
• Award Information
The Award Overview tab will display Financial Aid Awards in the aid year for which they
were awarded.
Crossover Pell functionality will show an award amount > 0 for a period defined as a
crossover that exists in two aid years. For a crossover Pell award, the crossover period will
be returned with the aid year with which the period is normally associated.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-395
Additionally, the calculation of resources excludes resources, contracts, and/or exemptions
where the information access indicator is “No” (unchecked).
Whether each of these items is displayed is dependent on the indicators in the Web Rules
Table (RORWEBR) from the ROAINST form.
Field
When it is Displayed
Need Calculation
If RORWEBR_NEED_CALC_IND = Y
Cost of Attendance
(COA)
RORWEBR_COA_IND = Y and either
RBBABUD_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (when using aid year
budgeting) or RORSTAT_PBUD_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y
(when using period budgeting)
Enrollment Status
RORWEBR_ENROLLMENT_STATUS = T or F
Housing Status
RORWEBR_HOUSING_STATUS_IND = Y
Cumulative Loan
Data
RORWEBR_CUM_LOAN_IND = Y
Award Information
RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (or
RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and you have selected
the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y)
the student has awards offered for the aid year that are for an
amount greater than zero for at least one fund
Need Calculation information section
The Need Calculation displays even if a budget does not exist and is not dependent on the
info access indicator for the applicant on RBAABUD (aid year budgeting) or RBAPBUD
(period budgeting). The ability to control if the Need Calculation is to display is provided
under Web Processing Rules tab of ROAINST.
The hierarchy for which budget to display is the non-pell budget first and if one does not
exists then the Pell budget will be displayed. If no budget exists the EFC will still be
displayed.
Note
The Budget amount, Resources, Initial Need, and Need will be capped

with a value of 999,999,999.99.
The displayed EFC and the period budget associated with the EFC type will be determined
by the value stored for the Period Budget Preferred EFC option (Web Processing Rules tab
on ROAINST).
2-396
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
The tab’s budget categories and amounts are displayed in the print order established for
the aid year on the Period Budgeting Aid Year Rules (RBRPBYR) form.
Cost of Attendance information section
The detailed COA information is displayed. If your institution wants to display only the
total COA, it can be displayed through the Need Calculation detailed data.
Note
If you have selected to display the COA from the Web Processing Rules
tab of ROAINST but do not want to display the COA for a specific student
(or group of students using Batch Posting), the Information Access
Indicator may be unchecked on RBAABUD (aid year budgeting) or
RBAPBUD (period budgeting). For aid year budgeting, the non-Pell
budget should be updated since it is the non-Pell budget that is displayed
in Self-Service. For period budgeting, the FM budget will be updated
because every budget group requires an FM budget type to be

associated with it.
Award information section
The award information section will display Financial Aid Awards in the aid year for which
they were awarded.
Crossover Pell functionality will show an award amount > 0 for a period defined as a
crossover that exists in two aid years. For a crossover Pell award, the crossover period will
be returned with the aid year with which the period is normally associated.
If RORWEBR_TERM_ZERO_AWRD_IND = Y, all terms that exist in RPRATRM for the aid
year are displayed for the student, regardless of whether there are any awards greater than
zero.
If RORWEBR_TERM_ZERO_AWRD_IND = N, only those terms that have at least one fund
with an award greater than zero for the term are displayed for the student.
If RORWEBR_FUND_ZERO_AMT = Y, all funds in RPRAWRD/RPRATRM for the student
will be displayed, regardless of the award amount.
If the RPRAWRD_OFFER_AMT = 0, the fund will not be displayed for any period.
If RORWEBR_FUND_ZERO_AMT = N, only those funds that have an awarded amount greater
than zero are displayed for the student.
If an award message exists for any of the funds awarded and displayed to the student, the
award messages will be displayed through a pop-up window. If an award message is
available, the fund award description will appear as a highlighted link. To access the popup window, the user can click on the link. You can edit the text messages displayed on this
page through Web Tailor.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-397
A Print link is also available on this page so that students can print their award
information.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students.
• DEFAULT, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_AwardOverviewTab)
This text, which your institution defines, will appear at the
top of the Award Overview Tab.
• INFORMATION, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_AwardOverviewTab)
This text will appear at the bottom of the Award Overview
Tab: “If you have questions regarding the above
information, please contact the Financial Aid office.”
• DEFAULT, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_PrintAwardOverview)
This text, which your institution defines, will appear at the
top of the Printed Award Overview.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Print
Clicking on this link will display a pop-up window of a printready version of the student’s award information.
Resources/Additional Information tab
This tab displays the resource detail information and additional information available for
the student. This tab is accessible under the following conditions.
• RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (or RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and
you have selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y)
• RORWEBR_RESOURCE_TAB_IND = Y or
there are questions set up on RORWEBQ for the student to answer
2-398
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
This tab includes the Resource section, Additional Information section, and the
Unreviewed Information Previously Submitted section. Whether each of these sections is
displayed is dependent on the indicators on ROAINST.
Resource section
Detailed resource information is displayed in this section when
RORWEBR_DETAIL_RESOURCE_IND = Y. If RORWEBR_DETAIL_RESOURCE_IND = N, a
message will be displayed indicating that the student does not currently have any outside
resource information to display.
The Resources/Additional Information page will display resources (additional resources,
contracts, and exemptions) for the aid year/aid period. This corresponds to the amount of
resources that will be used as part of the student’s need calculation.
Additionally, the calculation of resources will exclude resources, contracts, and/or
exemptions where the information access indicator is “No” (unchecked).
Outside Resources that exist for the student on RPAARSC with the
RPRARSC_INFO_ACCESS_IND checked will be displayed.
Contracts and exemptions are displayed in this section as well, when
RPRCONT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y or RPREXPT_INFO_ACCESS_IND =Y.
Additional information section
This section is where students will answer the questions your institution has set up to ask
through Self-Service. It also provides a place for students to enter any additional resource
information.
Note
If the student is viewing an aid year that is inactive, this section will not be

displayed.
The questions displayed in this section are determined by your setup on RTVWEBQ and
RORWBQA. Only questions where RORWEBQ_ACTIVE_IND = Y for the aid year are
displayed.
After the student has answered all questions presented to them, they must press the Submit
Information button so that the answers are sent to the Financial Aid office. The
information is saved to the necessary Banner tables and may be reviewed on RPAINFO by
financial aid personnel.
If all required questions (RORWEBQ_REQUIRED_IND = Y) have not been answered when
the Submit Information button is clicked, an error message will display informing the
student that they have not completed all of the required questions. The answers to the
questions previously entered remain on the page so that the student does not have to reenter them.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-399
Some answers submitted by a student can stop the electronic award processing. Answers
that meet the following criteria will stop processing.
• RORWBQA_STOP_PROCESSING = A and any Not Null answer is given for the
question
• RORWBQA_STOP_PROCESSING = Z and the answer given is greater than zero for
the question
• RORWBQA_STOP_PROCESSING = S and the answer given for the question equals
RORWBQA_ANSWER_VALUE
When an answer stops award processing, the message code (RORWBQA_MESSAGE_CODE)
associated with the question is recorded in the RORMESG table. In addition, the
RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is set to N, so that the student can no longer access award
information in Self-Service. The student is returned to the General Information tab where
any message codes associated with their answer are displayed. If no message codes are
associated with the answer that stopped the processing, then a default error message will
be displayed.
The student will not have access to any of the tabs on the Award for Aid Year page until a
staff member reviews the student’s information on RPAINOF and resets the
RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND on the Packaging tab of RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
In addition to answering your institution-defined questions, students can enter information
about additional outside resources on this tab. They have up to 50 characters to enter
information in the Resource Description field and up to 2,000 characters to enter
comments. The information entered here will get populated on RPAINFO in Banner.
Unreviewed Information Previously Submitted section
If the student is viewing an aid year that is inactive, this section will not be displayed. This
section displays any information that the student has submitted, but the institution has not
yet reviewed. This is data is from RPRINFO where RPRINFO_REVIEWED = N or P. It can
be reviewed on RPAINFO or by executing RPPINFO for a report.
You can edit the text messages displayed on this page through Web Tailor.
2-400
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students.
• ADDRESINFO, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This text will appear before the Additional Resource
Section of the Resource/Additional Information Tab: “If
you have additional outside resources that are not
reflected above, please inform the financial aid office by
entering the information below and pressing Submit.”
• DEFAULT, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This text, which your institutionally defines, will appear at
the top of the Resource/Additional Information Tab.
• NORESOURCE, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This text will appear instead of the student’s Resources, if
there are no resources: “No outside resource information
is available for you at this time, please contact your
financial aid office if you have questions.”
• QAINTRUCTION, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
These instructions will be displayed in the Additional
Information section: “Please answer the questions
displayed below. Also, if you have additional outside
resources that are not reflected above, please inform the
financial aid office by entering the information below.
Once all answers and additional resource information are
entered, please press Submit to send this information to
the Financial Aid Office.”
• RESOURCEMSG, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This message will be displayed at the bottom of the
Resource/Additional Information Tab: “Additional
unlisted resources may exist. If you have questions
regarding the difference between the above total amounts
and your calculated total, please contact the financial aid
office.”
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-401
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
• TOTALWITH, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This message will appear after the student resources, if
any resources exist: “If you have questions regarding any
differences between the above total amounts and your
calculated total, please contact the Financial Aid office.”
• TOTALWOUT, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This message will appear after the student resources, if
resources exist, but cannot be displayed: “The Calculated
Resource Total is a total of those funds which have been
made available to you by resources other than the federal
government, state government, or the school you are
currently attending. If you have any questions concerning
the origin of this amount, please contact the Financial Aid
office.”
• UNREVIEWINFO, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_ResourceTab)
This text will appear before the Unreviewed Information
section: “Information you have submitted to the financial
aid office that has not been reviewed is displayed below.”
Terms and Conditions tab
This tab displays the text that details the terms and conditions of the award offer, as
defined by your institution. This text is entered through Web Tailor. The Terms and
Conditions tab is accessible under the following conditions.
• RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (or RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and
you have selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y).
• RORWEBR_TERMS_TAB_IND = Y
• Answers have been provided to all required questions
Your institution-defined messages and student specific text are also displayed on this page,
if available. Enter the text for your institution-defined messages through Web Tailor.
Define the student specific text in Banner on forms: RTVWTXT, RORWTXT, and
RORWTAB. The following bullets outline a summary of the information you need to enter
on each form. You can find examples and further information in the Banner Financial Aid
8.2 Release Guide under each form description.
2-402
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• The Web Text Rule code on RTVWTXT
• The SQL rules for the Web Text Rule code on RORWTXT. You must select a value
to be returned by the rule. The text to be displayed will be defined by the value
returned by the rule. Select the appropriate self-service tab for the text you would
like to display on the Select Value Rules Tab then enter the Heading and Text you
would like displayed for the possible values returned by your rule.
• The order which you would like the text to display on RORWTAB. For each tab in
self-service where you would like to display Student-specific text, you must define
the sequence for display.
The following must be true in order for the heading and/or text to display on the specified
tab in Self-Service.
• The text rule must be defined on the RORWTAB form, indicating the order in
which the rules should display.
• The text rule must have SQL rules defined on RORWTXT in the RORWSQL table
where RORWSQL_ACTIVE_IND = Y and RORWSQL_VALIDATED_IND = Y.
• The text rule must have Select Value rules set up for the specified tab on the
RORWTXT form in the RORWTXT table where the RORWTXT_ACTIVE_IND = Y.
• The value returned by the SQL rule for the student must match an active
RORWTXT_SELECT_VALUE for the specified tab.
When all of the above are true the RORWTXT_HEADING (if not null) and the
RORWTXT_TEXT will be displayed on the tab. If there is no text to be displayed, the
remaining items on the page will be moved up appropriately.
You must establish the tracking requirement for Terms and Conditions with the
appropriate status on the Web Processing rules tab of ROAINST, and the student must
have the requirement unsatisfied in order to be offered the option to accept or decline the
terms and conditions.
If your institution chooses, any award messages specific to the student can also be
displayed on this page. These messages can be edited through Web Tailor.
Setup Requirements
Item
Global Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAINST) form
May 2012
Description
Select the Award Messages with Terms and Conditions
Indicator under the Web Processing Rules Tab on
ROAINST to allow award messages specific to the
student will be displayed.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-403
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and
any information and/or instructions you want to
provide to your students.
• ACCEPTED, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_TermConditionTab)
This message will appear at the bottom of the Terms
and Conditions Tab, if the student has already
accepted the Terms and Conditions: “You have
accepted the Terms and Conditions.”
• DECLINE, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_TermConditionTab)
This warning message will appear in a popup
window if the student chooses to decline the Terms
and Conditions: “If you choose not to accept the
Terms and Conditions, then you will not be eligible
to receive aid.”
• DEFAULT, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_TermConditionTab)
This text, defined by your institution, will appear at
the top of the Terms and Conditions Tab.
Buttons/Icons on This Page
Button/Icon
Action
Accept
Clicking this button indicates that the student accepts the
Terms and Conditions of the award offer. Once this is
selected, the student will have access to the Accept Award
Offer tab.
Do Not Accept
If the student clicks on this button, a warning message will
display that lets the student know that they will not be
eligible to receive financial aid until they accept the Terms
and Conditions. This message text can be edited.
Note
After the student selects “Accept,” the Accept and Do Not Accept buttons

are no longer displayed on the page.
2-404
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Accept Award Offer tab (bwrkrhst.P_DisplayTabs)
This tab is used to respond to award offers. Once an award has been accepted, students
will have access to a Print link that allows them to print their award information.
This tab is accessible under the following conditions.
• RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (or RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and
you have selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y.)
• RORWEBR_AWARD_ACPT_TAB_IND = Y
• All terms and conditions tracking requirements assigned to the student are satisfied
(if you have selected the option to display Terms and Conditions)
• All required questions have been answered (if you have defined questions which
are required or defined answers which stop processing)
The information displayed on the Accept Award Offer tab includes your institutionally
defined messages and student specific messages. If there are messages associated with a
fund, the fund name will be a highlighted link. Clicking on the link will open a pop-up
window that contains the messages.
Display of the Award Decision information will show an award amount > 0 for a period
defined as a crossover that exists in two aid years. For a crossover Pell award, the
crossover period will be returned with the aid year with which the period is normally
associated.
Many awards offered to students, particularly self-help awards such as loans and work,
must be accepted by the student before further processing can occur. The student can
accept the full amount of all the awards, accept or decline individual awards, or accept a
partial amount of the award offered. In order to set up this functionality, use the Web
Processing Rules tab on ROAINST. The acceptance or rejection of awards immediately
updates the database.
• If an award requires acceptance, the decision fields: Award Decision and Accept
Partial Payment, are displayed, allowing the student to accept or reject the full
amount or to enter a partial award amount if he or she wants less than the total
offered. If the student enters a partial amount that exceeds the offered award, the
system displays an error message. If the student selects Decline from the pull-down
list in the Award Decision field and also enters an amount in the Accept Partial
Payment field, the system displays an error message.
• If an award does not require acceptance, the decision fields are not displayed.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-405
Note
The student must always select the Submit Decision button or Accept
Full Amount All Awards to save and process the changes. If the student
enters information but selects the Select Another Aid Year link before
selecting the Submit Decision button, the system does not retain the
changes when the page is redisplayed, and the changes are not

processed.
Note
Starting with aid year 2009-2010 (ROBINST_AIDY_END_YEAR > 2009),
you can no longer perform a partial acceptance of ACG, SMART, and
TEACH awards from Banner Financial Aid Self-Service. If the Federal
Fund ID is ACG, SMRT, or TCH, a student can accept the full award, but

cannot accept a partial award on the Accept Award Offer tab.
Note
An applicant can accept or decline an award if a lock exists for a fund
(RPRAWRD_LOCK_IND = Y or E) or if a lock exists on the fund for a period
(RPRATRM_LOCK_IND = Y or E) when the Allow Award Status Updates
When Locked (ROBINST_UPD_LOCKED_AWARD_IND) field on ROAINST
is checked for the aid year; if a lock exists either on RPRAWRD or
RPRATRM for the fund, Accept Partial Amount does not display for the
fund, preventing the applicant from accepting a partial amount for a

locked fund.
Once awards have been accepted, the database is updated and the Web page is redisplayed
without the decision fields. To make a change to a decision, the student must contact the
financial aid office; decisions cannot be changed on the Web.
No award validation is performed by updates to data on the Web. Since students either
accept or decline existing amounts, or they request partial amounts, there is no danger of
an overaward or no funds available. A student who is eligible for $1,000 is eligible for
anything less than $1,000 as well.
Note
Students cannot decline a previously accepted award because your
institution’s administrative system may have already processed the award
with external agencies, or the award may already have been disbursed to
the student’s account. These types of changes in award packages need

to be discussed personally with the financial aid office.
When displaying the outstanding tracking requirements, the promissory note requirements
are not displayed if they have a School PN Status (RFRPROM_DL_NOTE_STATUS) =
Denied.
The heading for Unsatisfied Disbursement Requirements will continue to display
“Term”, to be consistent with terminology used in other areas of Financial Aid
Self-Service for data displayed to the student. The data itself will be the value in the table
name_period column of the appropriate table.
2-406
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Lender Selection and Display of Current Lender
If the student currently has a lender on RPASLND, the lender is displayed for the loan
funds. If the student has not yet indicated their lender, active lenders will be displayed in a
drop-down list. This will only occur for funds where you have indicated to Allow Web
Lender Selection on RFRMGMT. The lenders listed will be the active lenders you have
indicated on RPRLNDR.
Note
The option to select a lender is only available until the decision to accept

the loan award is submitted.
Additional Comments
If you have selected the option on the Web Processing rules tab of ROAINST to allow the
student to submit Award Information, a comment field will appear for the student to enter
and submit award information. This information is then stored in the RPRINFO table and
may be viewed either from the form RPAINFO or by running the RPPINFO process.
Any requirements which are required for disbursement that are unsatisfied will also
display as well as messages associated with the requirement.
Information Submitted section
Once award information has been accepted, students will have access to the Information
Submitted section of this tab. From here, they can print their award information. This
section will be displayed under the following conditions.
• RORWEBR_AWARD_INFO_IND = Y
• The aid year is active
• The student has submitted award information to the school that has not yet been
reviewed by the financial aid office
Students can print their award information using the Print link. You may use Web Tailor
to format the print version and include graphics and text specific to your institution. You
may also set the option to print the terms and conditions as part of the Award letter by
selecting the option to Print Terms and Conditions from the Web Processing Rules tab of
ROAINST.
The messages displayed on this tab can be edited through Web Tailor.
Pell awards
Students cannot accept or decline Pell awards online. Pell awards are either auto-accepted
or accepted when an administrative system user enters a date in the SAR Certified Date
field on the Applicant Pell Grant (ROAPELL) form. If your institution auto-accepts Pell
awards, updates are prevented since awards are already in accepted status. If your
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-407
institution wants to retain control over placing Pell awards into an accepted status, you
should not auto-accept Pell awards.
Not allowing students to accept awards online
You do not have to allow students to accept/decline their awards online. The Web Accept
Flag checkbox on the Packaging window of the Fund Management (RFRMGMT) form
controls this activity. The Award Decision and Accept Partial Amount fields are
included on the Web page only for funds for which the Web Accept Flag checkbox has
been selected for the aid year being processed. This is in addition to the requirement that
the award status for the fund be Offered.
Locked award packages
Updates to award records are not permitted if a student’s award package is locked or the
aid year being processed is inactive. In either of these cases, the decision fields and the
Accept Full Amount All Awards and Submit Changes buttons are not displayed for any
awards.
If a specific fund in a student’s award package is locked, the decision fields are not
displayed for that fund.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
The following fields are displayed in the Award Decision section of page, if applicable.
Fund
Name of the fund associated with the award
Status
Status of the award.
The value comes from the Status field in the Fund Award
section of the Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form or
the Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form.
Term
The period associated with this award.
The heading will continue to display “Term”, to be
consistent with terminology used in other areas of Financial
Aid Self-Service for data displayed to the student. The data
itself will be the value in the table name_period column of
the appropriate table.
Description of terms will now display the description of the
period, as defined on the Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
form.
Total
2-408
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Total amount of other resources in the Additional Resource
area of the page.
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Accept Award
For awards with a status of Offered, a pull-down list is
available that the student can use to select a decision.
To accept an offer in full, the student selects Accept from the
pull-down list, then selects the Submit Decision button.
To accept a partial offer, the student selects Accept from the
pull-down list, enters the partial amount in the Accept Partial
Amount field, then selects the Submit Decision button.
To decline an offer in full, the student selects Decline from
the pull-down list, then selects the Submit Decision button.
Accept Partial Amount
Partial amount that the student wants to accept, if applicable.
Lender
If the student currently has a lender on RPASLND, the
lender is displayed for the loan funds. If the student does not
have a current lender in RPASLND, a drop-down list of
active lenders (Info Access checked on RPRLNDR) will be
available for students to select from for funds where you
have indicated to Allow Web Lender Selection on
RFRMGMT.
The following fields are displayed in the Unsatisfied Disbursements Requirements section
of page, if applicable.
Requirement
Requirement code.
The value comes from the requirement code on the
Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ) form.
Status
Status of the requirement.
The value comes from the Status field in RRAAREQ.
As of Date
Date of the last status change for this requirement.
The value comes from the Status Date field on RRAAREQ.
Fund
Name of the fund associated with the requirement.
The value comes from the Fund field in RRAAREQ.
Source
Description of the source of the fund.
The value comes from the RFRBASE table.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-409
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Terms
The period associated with this requirement.
The heading will continue to display “Term”, to be
consistent with terminology used in other areas of Financial
Aid Self-Service for data displayed to the student. The data
itself will be the value in the table name_period column of
the appropriate table.
Description of terms will now display the description of the
period, as defined on the Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
form.
Instructions
The instructions for satisfying this requirement.
This value comes from the Instructions field on the
Requirements Tracking Validation (RTVTREQ) form.
Setup Requirements
2-410
Item
Description
Fund Management
(RFRMGMT) form
Select the Web Accept Flag checkbox on the Aid Year
Specific Data - Packaging Options window for each fund
that you want students to be able to accept or decline on the
Web.
Global Institution Financial
Aid Options (ROAINST)
form
Select the Display Partial Amount field on the Web
Processing Rules tab on ROAINST to allow students to
accept partial award amounts.
Global Institution Financial
Aid Options (ROAINST)
form
Select the Display Accept Full Amount of All Awards field
on the Web Processing Rules tab on ROAINST to allow
students to accept the full amount of all awards offered.
Global Institution Financial
Aid Options (ROAINST)
form
Select the Display Periods with Zero Award Amount field
on the Web Processing Rules tab on ROAINST if you would
like to display awards with a zero amount.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students.
• DEFAULT, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_AcceptAwardOfferTab)
This text, defined by your institution, will appear at the
top of the Accept Award Offer Tab.
• INSTRUCTION, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_AcceptAwardOfferTab)
These instructions will appear after the DEFAULT text
and the Student Specific text.
“Options for Accept Award Offers include:
1. Accept the full award amount by selecting Accept Full
Amount of All Awards.
2. Choose Decline or Accept for each fund.
3. Accept a partial amount by selecting Accept and
entering the amount in the Accept Partial Amount field.”
• UNREVIEWINFO, Seq 1
(bwrkrhst.P_AcceptAwardOfferTab)
This text will appear before the display of any information
submitted by the student: “Information you have
submitted to the financial aid office that has not been
reviewed is displayed below.”
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-411
Updates to Banner
Item
Description
Accept Full Amount All
Awards
and
Submit Changes
When either of these buttons is selected, the system calls the
award API, which updates the award statuses and amounts in
the following forms:
• Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) form
• Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD) form
If a partial award is accepted, the system recalculates the
student’s unmet need and stores the information in the
student's RORSTAT record. This eliminates the need for an
administrative user to run the RORCALC report to perform
the same updates.
When an update is made to a student’s award record
(RPRAWRD), the RPRAWRD_LAST_WEB_UPDATE field is
set to the system date/time. This provides an audit trail of
when the student updated his or her record and identifies that
changes were made by the student rather than by an
administrator.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Financial Aid Office
Launches the user’s e-mail program with the e-mail address
and subject you defined in Web Tailor.
Overall Financial Aid Status Goes to the Financial Aid Status for Aid Year page
(bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).
2-412
Account Summary By Term
Goes to the Account Summary by Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).
Award for Aid Year
Goes to the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
Award Payment Schedule
Goes to the Award Payment Schedule for Aid Year page
(bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched).
Award History
Goes to the Award History page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst).
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Loan Application History
Goes to the Loan Application History page
(bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst).
Print
Clicking on this link will display a pop-up window of a printready version of the student’s award information.
Buttons/Icons on This Page
Button/Icon
Action
Accept Full Amount All
Awards
Redisplays the page with all offered awards updated to
Accepted status.
Submit Changes
Redisplays the page with all offered awards updated with the
student’s changes.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Special Messages tab
Use this tab to display messages to students after certain awards have been accepted. This
tab is accessible under the following conditions.
• RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND = Y (or RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null and
you have selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as Y.)
• RORWEBR_SPECIAL_MSG_TAB_IND = Y
• All Terms and Conditions tracking requirements assigned to the student are
satisfied
• All required questions have been answered
Two types of messages are displayed on this page when available, your institutionally
defined message and student specific text. Enter the text for your institutionally defined
messages through Web Tailor. Define the student specific text in Banner on forms:
RTVWTXT, RORWTXT, and RORWTAB. The following bullets outline a summary of
the information you need to enter on each form. You can find examples and further
information in the Banner Financial Aid 8.2 Release Guide under each form description.
• The Web Text Rule code on RTVWTXT
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-413
• The SQL rules for the Web Text Rule code on RORWTXT. You must select a value
to be returned by the rule. The text to be displayed will be defined by the value
returned by the rule. Select the appropriate self-service tab for the text you would
like to display on the Select Value Rules Tab then enter the Heading and Text you
would like displayed for the possible values returned by your rule.
• The order which you would like the text to display on RORWTAB. For each tab in
self-service where you would like to display Student-specific text, you must define
the sequence for display.
The following must be true in order for the heading and/or text to display on the specified
tab in Self-Service.
• The text rule must be defined on the RORWTAB form, indicating the order in
which the rules should display.
• The text rule must have SQL rules defined on RORWTXT in the RORWSQL table
where RORWSQL_ACTIVE_IND = Y and RORWSQL_VALIDATED_IND = Y.
• The text rule must have Select Value rules set up for the specified tab on the
RORWTXT form in the RORWTXT table where the RORWTXT_ACTIVE_IND = Y.
• The value returned by the SQL rule for the student must match an active
RORWTXT_SELECT_VALUE for the specified tab.
When all of the above are true the RORWTXT_HEADING (if not null) and the
RORWTXT_TEXT will be displayed on the tab. If there is no text to be displayed, the
remaining items on the page will be moved up appropriately.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
DEFAULT, Seq 1 (bwrkrhst.P_SpecialMsgTab)
This text, defined by your institution, will appear at the top
of the Special Messages Tab.
Award Messages (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdMsg)
The student can read and respond to award messages through this page. This page is
accessible only from the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
2-414
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Fund
Name of the fund.
Message
Message associated with the fund.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Message Code Validation
(RTVMESG) form
Select the Info Access checkbox for each message code you
want to be available on the Web.
Fund Management
(RFRMGMT) form
For each fund with which you want a message associated,
enter the message code in the Message Code field of the
Message Assignment window.
Fund Base Data
(RFRBASE)
Select the Information Access checkbox on RFRBASE for
the fund code associated with the message if you do want
messages for the fund to be displayed.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Respond
Launches the user’s e-mail program with the e-mail address
and subject you defined in Web Tailor.
Award for Aid Year
Goes to the General Information tab on the Award Package
for Aid Year page (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-415
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Award Package for Aid
Year
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
Account Summary By Term (bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct)
This page displays student account balance information grouped by term, in descending
order by term (most recent term first). If there are non-term items on an account (using the
term code ARTERM), they are displayed at the beginning and can be identified by the
heading “Items not related to a term”.
Within each term section, items are displayed in detail-code order, with charges listed first
and then payments. Entries are summarized by detail code (for example, two unapplied
cash payments of 50.00 and 200.00 net to one entry of 250.00). Only the unapplied
balance, not the original amount of the transactions, is displayed. A summary of total
charges, total payments, and term balance is displayed at the end of each term, and the
total account balance is displayed at both the beginning and the end of the list of account
entries. Memos and authorizations are not displayed on this page.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Account Balance
Student’s account balance.
Note: A negative value indicates a credit balance.
The value is calculated from entries stored in the Accounts
Receivable Detail table (TBRACCD) and is similar to the
information displayed on the Account Detail Review
(TSAAREV) form.
Term
Description of the term, displayed as a hyperlink to the
Account Detail for Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcctTerm).
Detail Code
Detail code associated with the item.
The value comes from the detail code in the Accounts
Receivable Detail table (TBRACCD).
Description
Description of the charge or payment.
The value comes from the detail code on the Detail Code
table (TBBDETC).
2-416
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Charge
Amount of the charge associated with the source.
The value comes from the amount in the TBRACCD table (if
the transaction is a charge).
Payment
Amount of the payment associated with the source.
The value comes from the amount in the TBRACCD table (if
the transaction is a payment).
Balance
For charges, this is the remaining balance of the charge after
application of payments. For payments, this is the remaining
balance of the payment that has not yet been applied.
The value is calculated using the Amount column minus
applied transactions.
Term Charges
Total charges for the term.
The value is calculated using the Amount column.
Term Credits and Payments Total credits and payments for the term.
The value is calculated using the Amount column.
Term Balance
Outstanding balance for the term.
The value is calculated using the Balance column.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Crosswalk Validation
(GTVSDAX) form
If you want detail codes to be displayed, enter Y in the
External Code field for the WEBDETCODE internal code
in internal group WEBACCTSUM.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-417
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Financial Aid Award
Information Menu
Goes to the Award menu (bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu).
Credit Card Payment
Goes to the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm) so that the user can select a
term before going to the Credit Card Payment page
(bwckcpmt.P_CreditCardPayment).
View Installment Plan
Goes to the Calculated Repayment Plan Summary page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewInstallments).
Statement and Payment
History
Goes to the Statement and Payment History page
(bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Student Account menu
bmenu.P_ARMnu
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Award Payment Schedule
for Aid Year
bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched
Loan Application History
bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst
Award Package for Aid Year bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
2-418
Award History
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst
Statement and Payment
History
bwsksphs.P_ViewStatement
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Eligibility requirements for Aid Year page
When you select the Eligibility Menu item from the main Financial Aid Menu, the
Eligibility Requirements for the aid year will display with tabs for Student Requirements,
Requirement Messages, Holds, and Academic Progress.
Your institution-defined messages and student specific text may be displayed on each tab
of the Eligibility Requirements page, if available. This text will only display to the student
if RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is checked or if RORSTAT_INFO_ACCESS_IND is null
and you have selected the option on ROAINST to treat the null value as checked.
You will enter the text for your institution-defined messages through Web Tailor, and
define the student-specific text in Banner on forms RTVWTXT, RORWTXT, and
RORWTAB. The following bullets outline a summary of the information you need to enter
on each form.
• The Web Text Rule code on RTVWTXT
• The SQL rules for the Web Text Rule code on RORWTXT. You must select a value
to be returned by the rule. The text to be displayed will be defined by the value
returned by the rule. Select the appropriate self-service tab for the text you would
like to display on the Select Value Rules Tab then enter the Heading and Text you
would like displayed for the possible values returned by your rule.
• The order which you would like the text to display on RORWTAB. For each tab in
self-service where you would like to display Student-specific text, you must define
the sequence for display. The following must be true in order for the heading and/or
text to display on the specified tab in Self-Service.
• The text rule must be defined on the RORWTAB form, indicating the order in
which the rules should display.
• The text rule must have SQL rules defined on RORWTXT in the RORWSQL table
where RORWSQL_ACTIVE_IND = Y and RORWSQL_VALIDATED_IND = Y.
• The text rule must have Select Value rules set up for the specified tab on the
RORWTXT form in the RORWTXT table where the RORWTXT_ACTIVE_IND = Y.
• The value returned by the SQL rule for the student must match an active
RORWTXT_SELECT_VALUE for the specified tab. The ability to control the display
of the HTML tables has been added for each of the new tabs. When all of the above
are true the RORWTXT_HEADING (if not null) and the RORWTXT_TEXT will be
displayed on the tab. If there is no text to be displayed, the remaining items on the
page will be moved up appropriately.
The display of data from Banner uses an HTML table to allow your institution the ability
to set borders, cell spacing, and cell padding for each tab on the Eligibility Requirements
for Aid Year page.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-419
Use the Miscellaneous Parameters (RORMPRM) form to change the settings for the
display in Self-Service. You can display data in a grid format to further separate and define
columns of data.
The initial settings for each of the Self-Service packages display content with a border of
0, cell spacing of 1, and a cell padding of 1.In order to change these settings on the
RORMPRM Form, you must first select an existing baseline record and use the Duplicate
Record function to create a new record; set the Source Indicator field to L=Local. You
can then adjust the border, cell spacing, and cell padding in the Data field to change the
display. You cannot update any fields for delivered baseline data. You can only modify the
Data field for a local source.
Student Requirements tab (bwrktrkr.P_DispTrkReq)
This page displays the tracking requirements that a student needs to submit or complete.
These requirements control whether a student is eligible to be packaged or receive
payment of aid. The page also lists requirements that the student has already satisfied, as
well as the non-coded tracking requirements and MPN requirements, when the indicators
in Banner are checked.
Requirement instructions are displayed through a pop-up window. If instructions are
available for the requirement, you will see the link, View Instructions, to the right of the
Fund column.
In addition, the student can click on any underlined, incomplete requirement to go to the
Web page that will help him or her complete the requirement. The URL for the
corresponding Web page is defined in the Requirements Tracking Validation Table
(RTVTREQ) and can point to a Web page of information or the necessary document (such
as a .PDF file). RTVTREQ is used to maintain data for the URL. Only records with a
value in the URL field are displayed on the Web as hyperlinks.
Promissory Note requirements are also displayed as unsatisfied or satisfied requirements.
The description, URL, and any instructions are defined on RFRMGMT or ROAMGMT
for the fund code.
Note
Promissory note requirements are not displayed if they have a School PN

Status (RFRPROM_DL_NOTE_STATUS) = Denied.
Automatic satisfaction of Award Letter Tracking Requirement
Frequently institutions record the need for a returned award letter as a tracking
requirement in Banner. If a student responds to an award offer electronically rather than by
paper, you can set up Student Self-Service so that it automatically updates the returned
award letter tracking requirement. Student Self-Service identifies and updates any tracking
requirement(s) used by your institution to indicate that students have accepted awards.
2-420
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
If your institution chooses this option, updates to the listed requirement codes are made if
all funds which may be accepted by the student in Self-Service (other than Pell) change
from Offered to Accepted or Declined status. The tracking requirement is updated with the
status code specified in the Web Processing Rules window of the Global Institution
Financial Aid Options (ROAINST) form. Multiple requirement codes are possible, since
your institution may use multiple codes for items such as the initial award offer, first
revised award offer, second revised award offer, and so on. When tracking requirement
statuses are updated by Web activity, the completion dates are also updated as necessary.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Outstanding Requirement
or
Completed Requirement
Description of the outstanding requirement(s) indicated on
the Applicant Requirements (RRAAREQ) form.
An outstanding requirement is indicated by the value N
appearing in the Satisfied checkbox of the Requirements
block or the Additional Requirements block (as applicable to
the requirement) of the Applicant Requirements
(RRAAREQ) form. A completed requirement is indicated
by the value Y appearing in the Satisfied checkbox.
Promissory Notes for Direct Loan funds or funds where a
promissory note requirement has been selected will be listed
as a requirement. The existence of a Promissory note for an
applicant come from the Promissory Note block of
RRAAREQ.
Status
Status of the requirement.
The value comes from the Status field on RRAAREQ.
As Of Date
The status date for the requirement from the Requirements
block or the Additional Requirements block (as applicable)
of RRAAREQ. For a Promissory note, the As Of Date is the
current date.
Fund
Fund code associated with the requirement.
The value comes from the Fund field in the Requirements
block or the Additional Requirements block (as applicable)
of RRAAREQ.
Source
The source associated with the requirement.
The value comes from the Source field in the Requirements
block or the Additional Requirements block (as applicable)
of RRAAREQ.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-421
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Term
The heading will continue to display “Term”, to be
consistent with terminology used in other areas of Financial
Aid Self-Service for data displayed to the student. The data
itself will be the value in the table name_period column of
the appropriate table.
Description of terms will now display the description of the
period, as defined on the Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
form.
Instructions
A Details Icon will display if instructions exist on
RTVTREQ for the Requirement.
Setup Requirements for coded and non-coded Requirements
Item
Description
Tracking Requirements
Validation (RTVTREQ)
Select the Information Access checkbox for each
requirements code that you want to be available on the Web.
Enter a URL to display the requirement as a hyper-link for
accessing another Web page. Enter Instructions to provide a
pop-up with additional information when the Detail Icon
associated with the requirement is selected.
Requirements Tracking
Status Validation
(RTVTRST)
Select the Information Access checkbox for each
requirement status code that you want to be available on the
Web. A requirement with the Information Access checkbox
checked on RTVTREQ will only display if the status of the
requirement has been defined with the Info Access indicator
checked.
Enter a Long Description for the Status if more characters
are needed to display the status of a requirement. The long
description will be displayed if it exists, otherwise the
description will be displayed in Self-Service.
Fund Base Data
(RFRBASE)
2-422
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
Select the Information Access checkbox each fund that you
want to be available on the Web.
May 2012
Setup Requirements for coded and non-coded Requirements
Item
Description
Applicant Requirements
(RRAAREQ)
Select the Requirements Information Access Indicator on
the Additional Requirements tab on RRAAREQ to display
the non-coded tracking requirements in the Unsatisfied
Requirements block of Student Requirements.
Note: A requirement which has the Info Access indicator
checked and the Info Access indicator for the status is
checked may be updated to not display for a specific
applicant by unchecking the Info Access indicator for the
requirement on RRAAREQ.
Setup Requirements for Promissory Notes
Direct Loan funds and funds set to create a Promissory Note when accepted may be set to
display as an unsatisfied/satisfied requirement in Self-Service.
Item
Description
Fund Management
(RFRMGMT)
Select the Display PN Requirement on Web Indicator on
the Loan Options Self-Service tab on the Packaging tab of
RFRMGMT. Enter the Description of the promissory note
you would like displayed in Self-Service, a URL for
directing the student to another Web site, and any
Instructions you would like to communicate to the student to
display the promissory note requirements in the “View
Instructions” pop-up window.
Funds Management
(ROAMGMT)
Select the Display PN Requirement on Web Indicator
under Loan Rules in the Fund Packaging options window of
ROAMGMT to display the promissory note requirements in
the Self-Service. Enter the Description of the promissory
note you would like displayed in Self-Service, a URL for
directing the student to another Web site, and any
Instructions you would like to communicate to the student.
Loan Status Validation
(RTVLNST)
Select the Info Access checkbox for all loan status codes you
want to display loan information in Self-Service. Only loans
with a status where the Info Access indicator has been
checked will have a Promissory Note display as a
requirement.
Note: For non-Direct Loan funds, you may uncheck the
Promissory Note info access indicator on the Promissory
Note block of RRAAREQ, on RPAPROM, or on
ROASMRY to prevent the display of a promissory note
requirement for an applicant.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-423
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
The Detail Icon will display Instructions for a requirement using a pop-up window when
the icon is selected. Instructions for a requirement are defined on RTVTREQ and
Instructions for a Promissory Note are defined on RFRMGMT/ROAMGMT.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Eligibility Menu
bwrkelig.P_DispEligReq
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
bwrktmsg.P_DispTrkMsg
Requirement Messages tab (bwrktmsg.P_DispTrkMsg)
The student can read and respond to tracking requirement messages with this page. This
tab is accessible from the Eligibility Requirements for Aid Year page
(bwrkelig.P_DispEligReq).
Messages are displayed only if a message has been associated with the tracking message
code on the Message Rules (RORMESG) form.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Requirement
Description of the requirement.
Message
Message Associated with the requirement code.
The message displayed is the one associated with the
requirement code on the Requirements Tracking Validation
(RTVTREQ) form.
2-424
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Message Code Validation
(RTVMESG)
Select the Info Access checkbox for each message code you
want to be available on the Web.
Requirements Tracking
Validation (RTVTREQ)
Select the Information Access checkbox for each
requirements code message you want to be displayed on the
Web.
Message Rules
(RORMESG)
Associate the message from RTVMESG to the Requirement
code from RTVTREQ.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
E-mail
Launches the user’s e-mail program with the e-mail address
and subject you defined in Web Tailor.
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for Aid Year (bwrksumm.P_DispSumm)
Holds tab (bwrkhold.P_DispHold)
This tab displays holds that have been placed on a student’s financial aid application. You
can use holds to prevent packaging, memoing, and disbursements. Holds can be in effect
for an aid year or for a date range.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-425
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Description
Description of the hold assigned to the student on the
Applicant Holds (ROAHOLD) form.
Reason
Reason for the hold.
The value comes from the Reason field on ROAHOLD.
Date Posted
Beginning date the hold is in effect.
The value comes from the From field on ROAHOLD.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Hold Type Validation
(RTVHOLD)
Select the Info Access indicator for each hold type that you
want to be available on the Web.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for Aid bwrksumm.P_DispSumm
Year
Academic Progress tab (bwrksaph.P_DispSAP)
The Academic Progress tab displays the student academic progress as it is evaluated for
each term.
2-426
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Status
Student’s academic status.
The value comes from the New SAP Status field in the
Satisfactory Academic Progress block of the Applicant
Status (ROASTAT) form.
Last Term Reviewed
Last term that the student’s academic performance was
evaluated.
The value comes from the Term field in the Satisfactory
Academic Progress block of ROASTAT.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Satisfactory Academic
Progress Validation
(RTVSAPR)
Define your satisfactory academic progress status codes.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for
Aid Year
bwrksumm.P_DispSumm
Messages (bwrkamsg.P_FAAppMsg)
This page can be used to display informational messages from the financial aid office to
the student. The purpose of sending messages to students is generally to resolve any
outstanding requirements in the student’s record and to validate any data necessary for
processing. If the Respond link is enabled on this page, the student can respond to the
message directly via e-mail.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-427
Some examples for the use of this page include a confirmation from the financial aid
office that the student completed his or her entrance/exit interview requirements, a request
for application materials by the student, a student response concerning an unsatisfied
tracking requirement, or the suggestion that a student complete an unusual circumstance
form.
It may be necessary to remind students to ensure that their Web browser displays their
return name and e-mail address, and that they sign any message that they send via e-mail.
As with any link, it is also possible to globally disable the Respond link via Web Tailor if
you do not want students to respond to these messages by e-mail.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Message
Text of a message assigned to the student on the Applicant
Messages (ROAMESG) form.
Note: The message is displayed on the Web until the
expiration date for the message passes. The default date
in the Expiration Date field is determined by adding the
number of days in the Activity Date field in ROAMESG to
the number of days in the Message Expiration Days field
on the Global Institution Financial Aid Options (ROAINST)
form.
Date Posted
Date the message was assigned to the student.
The value comes from the Activity Date field on
ROAMESG.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Message Code Validation
(RTVMESG)
Select the Info Access checkbox for each message code that
you want to be available on the Web.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
2-428
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Respond
Launches the user’s e-mail program with the e-mail address
and subject you defined in Web Tailor.
Overall Financial Aid Status Goes to the Financial Aid Status for Aid Year page
(bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Financial Aid Status for Aid
Year
bwrksumm.P_DispSumm
Award Payment Schedule for Aid Year
(bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched)
This page displays the student’s award disbursement schedule and a record of payments
made to the student’s account. It also displays the student’s loan payment schedule.
The Financial Aid Awards will display in the aid year for which they were awarded.
Crossover Pell functionality will show an award amount > 0 for a period defined as a
crossover that exists in two aid years. For a crossover Pell award, the crossover period will
be returned with the aid year with which the period is normally associated.
The system creates a disbursement schedule for an award provided that all of the
following conditions are met.
• The applicant’s acceptance of an award is entered on one of the following:
• Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT)
• Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD)
• The Disburse radio button for the fund is set to System on the Fund Management
(RFRMGMT) form,
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-429
• A disbursement schedule for the fund has been established on one of the following:
• Fund Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRASCH)
• Default Award and Disbursement Schedule Rules (RFRDEFA)
You can also manually enter a disbursement schedule when the system does not
automatically create a disbursement schedule if the Disburse radio button on RFRMGMT
is set to Manual. However, if the Disburse radio button is set to None, you cannot
maintain a disbursement schedule for the award.
The system creates a disbursement schedule for loan provided that all of the following
conditions are met. The received and paid amounts displayed here also appear on the Loan
Disbursement (RPALDSB) form.
• The loan application exists on the following forms.
• Loan Application (RPALAPP)
• Electronic Loan Application (RPAELAP)
• Direct Loan Origination (RPALORG)
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Term
The heading will continue to display “Term”, to be
consistent with terminology used in other areas of Financial
Aid Self-Service for data displayed to the student. The data
itself will be the value in the table name_period column of
the appropriate table.
Description of terms will now display the description of the
period, as defined on the Period Base Data (RORPRDS)
form.
Award
Description of the award assigned to the student on
RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
Expected Date
Scheduled disbursement date.
The value comes from the Schedule Date field in the
Disbursement Schedule section for the student on
RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
Expected Amount
Scheduled disbursement amount.
The value comes from the Schedule Amount field in the
Disbursement Schedule section for the student on
RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
2-430
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Paid to Date
Amount paid to the current date.
The value comes from the Disburse Amount field in the
Disbursement Schedule section for the student on
RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
Setup Requirements
This page has no setup requirements.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Select Another Aid Year
Goes to the Aid Year page (bwrkolib.P_SelDefAidy).
Account Summary By Term
Goes to the Account Summary by Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).
Award for Aid Year
Goes to the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
Award History
Goes to the Award History page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst).
Loan Application History
Goes to the Loan Application History page
(bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
May 2012
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-431
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Award Package for Award
Year
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
Award History
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst
Loan Application History
bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst
Award History (bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst)
This page displays the student’s entire award history arranged by aid year, beginning with
the most recent aid year. It also includes third-party contracts, exemptions and other
resources (that is, supplemental aid that is available in addition to the normal federal, state,
and institutional sources).
The Award History page will display resources (additional resources, contracts, and
exemptions) for the aid year/aid period. This corresponds to the amount of resources that
will be used as part of the student’s need calculation.
A student’s award history is tracked in the following Banner forms.
• The student has entries in the Fund Award section of one of the following:
• Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT)
• Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD)
• The Information Access checkbox for the student is checked in the Packaging
Group Information block of RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD, as applicable.
• The Web checkbox is checked for the fund in the Fund Award section of
RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD, as applicable
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Fund
Name of the fund associated with the award.
Status
Status of the award.
The value comes from the Status field in the Fund Award
section of the Package Maintenance (RPAAPMT) or the
Award Maintenance (RPAAWRD).
2-432
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Amount
Amount of the award.
The value comes from the Accepted Amount, Offered
Amount, or Declined/Cancelled fields in the Fund Award
section on RPAAPMT or RPAAWRD.
Paid to Date
Total amount of the awards in the Financial Aid Award area
of the page.
The following fields are displayed in the Additional Resources area only if the student has
both awards and other resources.
Additional Resource
Description of the aid received from third-party contracts,
exemptions, or other resources.
Other resources are assigned to a student on the Resource
Maintenance (RPAARSC).
Term
Term for which the aid from the other resource is available.
The value comes from the Term field on RPAARSC.
Expected Amount
Estimated amount of the aid from the other resource.
The value comes from the Estimated Amount field on
RPAARSC.
Actual Amount
Actual amount of the aid from the other resource.
The value comes from the Actual Amount field on
RPAARSC.
Total
Total amount of other resources in the Additional Resource
area of the page.
Calculated Resource Total
Calculated total of other resources.
The value comes from the Other Resources Calculated
Total field on RPAARSC.
Setup Requirements
Item
Package Maintenance
(RPAAPMT)
May 2012
Description
Select the Information Access checkbox for the student in
the Packaging Group Information block of RPAAPMT to
display the award.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-433
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Award Maintenance
(RPAAWRD)
Select the Information Access checkbox for the student in
the Packaging Group Information block of RPAAWRD to
display the award.
Global Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAINST)
Select the Information Access Indicator field on the Web
Processing Rules window for each aid year that you want to
be available on the Web.
Third Party Contract Rules
(RPRCONT)
Select the Information Access Indicator field on
RPRCONT to display third-party contracts or exemptions.
Exemption Rules (RPREXPT) Select the Information Access Indicator field on
RPREXPT to display third-party contracts or exemptions.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Overall Financial Aid Status Goes to the Financial Aid Status for Aid Year page
(bwrksumm.P_DispSumm).
Account Summary By Term
Goes to the Account Summary by Term page
(bwskoacc.P_ViewAcct).
Award for Aid Year
Goes to the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
Award Payment Schedule
Goes to the Award Payment Schedule for Aid Year page
(bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched).
Loan Application History
Goes to the Loan Application History page
(bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
2-434
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Award Package for Award
Year
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
Loan Application History
bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst
Award Payment Schedule
for Aid Year
bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched
Loan Application History (bwrklhst.P_DispLoanHst)
This page displays details of the student’s loan activity. The information is arranged by
financial aid year and includes the status and amount of the loan, in addition to the amount
paid to date.
Most of the information included on this page is maintained on more than one Banner
form.
• Direct loan information is maintained on the Federal Direct Loan Origination
(RPALORG).
• Electronic loan information is maintained on the Electronic Loan Application
(RPAELAP).
• All other federal loan information is maintained on the Loan Application
(RPALAPP).
• Disbursement detail information, such as loan amounts, paid to date amounts, and
the disbursement feed to Accounts Receivable status, can be found in the
Disbursement Detail section of the Loan Disbursement (RPALDSB) form.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Source
Description of the source of the loan.
The value comes from the RFRBASE table.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-435
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Loan Amount
Amount of the loan.
The value comes from one of the following:
• Federal Direct Loan Origination (RPALORG)
• Electronic Loan Application (RPAELAP)
• Loan Application (RPALAPP)
If there is a value in the Approved Amount field, this is the
amount that is displayed on the Web. If there is no approved
amount, the system displays the value in the Recommended
Amount field.
Paid
Amount of the loan that has been disbursed to the student.
The value comes from the Check/Net Amount field in the
Disbursement Details window. of the Loan Disbursement
(RPALDSB) form. The value in the Feed field in the
Disbursement Details window of RPALDSB must be F,
indicating that the disbursement transaction has been fed to
Accounts Receivable, for this amount be displayed on the
Web.
Returned
Amount of the loan that has been returned to the lender or
guarantor, if applicable.
The value comes from the Returned Amount field in the
Disbursement Detail window of RPALDSB. The value in the
Feed field must be F, indicating that the disbursement
transaction has been fed to Accounts Receivable, for this
amount be displayed on the Web.
School Status
Status of the loan.
The value comes from the Loan Status field on RPALAPP,
RPAELAP, or RPALORG, and indicates the status of the
loan in the school’s loan processing cycle.
2-436
Servicer
Name of the lender, guarantor, or servicer, displayed as a
hyperlink to the lender’s or guarantor’s Web site.
Loan Period
Duration for which the funds are borrowed. The value comes
from the Loan Period field on RPALAPP, RPAELAP, or
RPALORG.
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Lender
Institution from which funds were borrowed.
This value comes from RPALAPP_LENDER_PIDM.
Guarantor
Name of the Guarantor for the loan application.
Organization processing the loan application.
This value comes from RPRLAPP_GUARANTOR_PIDM.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Lender Base Data (RPRLNDR)
Use the URL Description and URL fields on the
RPRLNDR form to define the URL for each lender.
Global Institution Financial Aid
Options (ROAINST)
Use the Default Lender URL Description and Default
Lender URL fields on the Web Processing Rules Tab of
ROAINST to set up a default URL to be used when a
lender is not specified for the loan or the URL has not
been defined for the lender.
Note: Direct Loan applications will have a Servicer of
DL Servicer.
Loan Status Validation
(RTVLNST)
Select the Info Access checkbox for all loan status
codes you want to display loan information in SelfService. Only loans with a status where the Info
Access indicator has been checked will be displayed in
Loan History.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
May 2012
This Link
Action
Lender’s or guarantor’s
name
Goes to the lender’s or guarantor’s Web site.
Back to Top
Goes to the top of this page.
Award for Aid Year
Goes to the Award Package for Aid Year page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear).
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-437
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Award Payment Schedule
Goes to the Award Payment Schedule for Aid Year page
(bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched).
Award History
Goes to the Award History page
(bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst).
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Award Package for Award
Year
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdAidYear
Award History
bwrkrhst.P_DispAwdHst
Award Payment Schedule
for Aid Year
bwrkpays.P_DispPaySched
Withdrawal Information (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw)
This page displays withdrawal information if the student has withdrawn from your
institution for the selected term.
If there is no withdrawal information for the student for the selected term, the message You
are not being processed for withdrawal for the selected term is displayed.
If there are no student records and a student selects Withdrawal Information from the
menu, the message No terms are available for Registration processing. You are not being
processed for withdrawal is displayed.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Note: Fields are displayed on this page only if the student has withdrawn from your
institution in the selected term.
Withdrawal Reason
Reason the student withdrew from your institution.
The value comes from the Withdrawal Code field on the
Student Withdrawal Form (SFAWDRL).
2-438
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Enrollment Start Date
Start date of the enrollment period.
The value comes from the Enrollment Start field on
SFAWDRL.
Enrollment End Date
End date of the enrollment period.
The value comes from the Enrollment End field on
SFAWDRL.
Effective Withdrawal Date
Date the student’s withdrawal took effect.
The value comes from the Effective Withdrawal Date field
on SFAWDRL.
Percent Attended
Percentage of the enrollment period that the student was
enrolled.
The value comes from the Percent Attended field in
SFAWDRL, which is calculated based on the number of days
in the period and the number of days the student attended.
The following fields are included in the Title IV Aid to be Returned section, which is not
displayed if no refund calculation has been performed.
Amount of Title IV Aid
Disbursed
Amount of Title IV aid that has already been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the
Title IV Fund Detail page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).
The value comes from the Disbursed field of the Return of
Title IV Funds Calculation (RPATIVC) form.
Amount of Title IV Aid
Eligible to be Disbursed
Amount of Title IV aid that has not yet been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the
Title IV Fund Detail page.
The value comes from the Not Disbursed field of
RPATIVC.
Unearned Disbursed
Amount of Title IV aid that has been paid to the student’s
account and for which the student is no longer eligible.
The value comes from the Title IV Unearned field the Title
IV Calculation window of RPATIVC.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-439
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Title IV Aid to be Returned
Amount of Title IV aid that has been disbursed to the student
and that must be returned due to withdrawal.
The value comes from the Total Title IV Aid To Be
Returned field the Title IV Calculation window of
RPATIVC.
Institution’s Required
Return Amount
Amount of Title IV aid that your institution is required to
return.
The value comes from the Institution’s Required Returns
field of RPATIVC.
Student's Share.
Amount of Title IV aid calculated as the student’s share to be
returned.
The value comes from the Student Share field on the Title
IV Calculation window of RPATIVC.
Student’s Required Return
Amount
Amount of Title IV aid that the student is required to return.
The value comes from the Student Required Return field
the Title IV Calculation window of RPATIVC.
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following items for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students:
• DEFAULT, Sequence 1
The DEFAULT Information Text is displayed at the top of
the Withdrawal Information page.
• NOT_WITHDRAWN, Sequence 1
The NOT_WITHDRAWN Information Text is displayed
after the DEFAULT Information Text when a person has
no withdrawal records (SFRWDRL) for the selected term.
It tells the student that he or she is not being processed as
a withdrawn student for the term.
2-440
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
• NOTIFICATION, Sequence 1
The NOTIFICATION Information Text is displayed at the
end of the Withdrawal Information section and before the
Title IV Aid to be Returned section. It tells the student that
he or she is not being processed as a withdrawn student for
the selected term.
Use the Web Tailor Information Text option to update the
text, if desired.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Amount of Title IV Aid
Disbursed
If the Title IV Aid to be Returned section is displayed, goes
to the Title IV Fund Detail page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).
Amount of Title IV Aid
Eligible to be Disbursed
If the Title IV Aid to be Returned section is displayed, goes
to the Title IV Fund Detail page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).
Select Another Term
Goes to the Registration Term page
(bwskflib.P_SelDefTerm).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
Award menu
bmenu.P_FAAwdMnu
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
No other Web pages have links to this page.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-441
Title IV Fund Detail (bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail)
This page displays information about each Title IV fund the student was eligible to receive
for the selected term. The Amount of Title IV Aid Disbursed and the Amount of Title IV Aid
Eligible to be Disbursed links, when clicked, will supply the following information about
each Title IV fund.
Web Page Fields
Item
Description/Source Information
Fund Description
Description of the fund.
The value is the description associated with the fund code in
the Title IV Code field of the Return of Title IV Funds
Calculated (RPATIVC) form.
Disbursed Amount
Amount of Title IV aid that has already been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the
Title IV Fund Detail page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVDetail).
The value comes from the Disbursed field of RPATIVC.
Eligible to be Disbursed
Amount of Title IV aid that has not yet been disbursed to the
student. The field label is displayed as a hyperlink to the
Title IV Fund Detail page.
The value comes from the Not Disbursed field of
RPATIVC.
Unearned Title IV Aid
Disbursed
Amount of Title IV aid that has been paid to the student’s
account and for which the student is no longer eligible.
The value comes from the Title IV Unearned field the Title
IV Calculation window of RPATIVC.
Setup Requirements
2-442
Item
Description
Web Tailor Information Text
Review the text for the following item for clarity and any
information and/or instructions you want to provide to your
students:
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Setup Requirements
Item
Description
NOTE, Sequence 1
The NOTE Information Text is displayed after the Title IV
Fund Detail section of the page. It can be used to provide
information that clarifies the contents of the Title IV Fund
detail information. As delivered, it states that the Federal
Work Study totals displayed indicate eligibility rather than
the amount actually earned.
Use the Web Tailor Information Text option to update the
text, if desired.
Updates to Banner
This page does not update information in the Banner database.
Links to Other Web Pages
This Link
Action
Return to Withdrawal
Information
Goes to the Withdrawal Information page
(bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw).
Buttons/Icons on This Page
This page does not have buttons to other pages.
Web Menus With Links to This Page
No menus have links to this page.
Other Web Pages With Links to This Page
Withdrawal Information
May 2012
bwrktivw.P_TitleIVWithdraw
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-443
Web Snapshot system
Overview
Banner Financial Aid Self-Service supports a feature designed to allow non-Banner users
to access Banner data via the standard Self-Service web interface. The Web Snapshot
system was designed and developed by Western Governors University and provided to
Banner customers through the Community Source Initiative.
The Web Snapshot system is a Self-Service web tool for Financial Aid Advisors and other
customer facing staff to use to easily and quickly retrieve current data (a “Snapshot”) from
the Banner system for a particular student. Each user can configure multiple custom
Snapshot layouts for viewing retrieved data, and system administrators can easily build
new web “panes” to extract custom data to suit their users’ specific needs. Users can view
student info on a one-off basis or step through a pre-built population of students, which
can be useful for call center operations.
Web Snapshot system configuration
Adding the Web Snapshot system to a menu
The Web Snapshot system must be added to a WebTailor menu so that users can navigate
to it. Identify where you would like to add a link to the Web Snapshot system and then
have your WebTailor administrator add the following menu item to the corresponding
menu:
• bwrksnap.p_disp_fasnap
Managing access to the Web Snapshot system
Two distinctly different levels of access can be assigned to users of the Web Snapshot
system:
• Financial Aid Staff
• This access level allows a user to create custom Web Snapshot layouts and
view data for any defined Snapshot Pane for any ID entered.
Note
The user can enter and view data associated with any ID in the system.

There is no built-in security restricting user access to certain IDs.
• Financial Aid Admin
2-444
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• This access level allows a user to create custom Snapshot Panes, which are
defined by entering an SQL query which is executed when a user views the
Snapshot Pane on their Web Snapshot layout.
Note
The Web Snapshot Administrator can enter SQL that accesses any table
in the database. Administrator access should be carefully controlled by

the institution.
Web Tailor Administrator credentials are required to grant either level of access to
individual users.
WebTailor administration
Adding a new item to an existing menu
Identify the menu to which you wish to add the new item. Baseline Banner menus
typically begin with the name “bmenu”.
1. Navigate to the menu where you want to add the new item.
• Take note of the URL listed in your browser’s address line.
Tip
The menu name is usually the text between the right-most forward slash

and the question mark (?) or the end of the line.
2. Next, navigate to the main WebTailor Administration menu.
• Click the Menu Items link.
• Search for the menu you want to modify, and then click the link to customize the
menu.
• Click the Add a New Menu Item button.
Tip
If the menu chosen contains only Baseline entries, you will first need to
click the Copy Baseline to Local button before adding a new menu item.
• The Create a new Menu Item page will be displayed.
3. From the Create a New Menu Item page, enter the URL for the web page you wish
to add (bwrksnap.p_disp_fasnap).
• Enter a link text along with an optional “additional description” to display with the
link.
• Select (check) the Database Procedure checkbox.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-445
4. Once complete, your settings for the menu item should be similar to the following
screen sample:
5. Click Submit Changes to save this new menu item.
Assigning WebTailor user roles
1. Navigate to the WebTailor Administration main menu.
2. Click the User Roles link.
• Enter the ID of the person you wish to assign access.
• Click the Submit button.
3. Place a check next to each role you wish to assign to the user, as appropriate.
• The Web Snapshot Administrator role is labeled Financial Aid Snapshot Admin.
• The staff access role is labeled Financial Aid Staff.
Using the Web Snapshot system
Users of the Web Snapshot system must first be granted access by a Self-Service
WebTailor administrator. Refer to the Managing Access to the Web Snapshot System
heading, above for specific details.
Layout maintenance
Users of the Web Snapshot system must first configure their own personal view, or
“Snapshot Layout,” of the data.
2-446
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
Each user has a pre-defined Snapshot Pane Layout called STANDARD. The user can
customize this view and/or create new views of the available Snapshot Panes to suit their
needs.
Modifying a Snapshot Layout
To modify a Snapshot Layout, first, select the layout from the main Web Snapshot page,
then click the Edit my Snapshot Layout link:
Snapshot Layouts consist of a grid of cells, or Panes. Within each pane, a user can choose
to display a set of data, or a Snapshot Pane. The user can also change the width of each
pane and height of each row.
Note
Financial Aid Snapshot Administrators can define additional custom
Snapshot Panes for users to select for use in their Snapshot Layouts.

By default, each user has a Snapshot Layout named STANDARD. This layout begins with
three columns and three rows, but no Snapshot Panes are selected for any of layout panes.
To select a Snapshot Pane, use the drop-down box that appears with the pane, and select
the Snapshot Pane you wish to display in that location. You may also adjust the width of
the pane or the height of the row by clicking on the corresponding buttons.
Users can also add and delete columns and rows from their Snapshot Layout:
• The Add Row button will add a new row to the bottom of the current Snapshot
Layout.
• The Add Column button will add a new column to the right of the existing
columns of the current Snapshot Layout.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-447
• The Delete Row button will delete the bottom-most row of the current Snapshot
Layout.
• The Delete Column button will delete the right-most column of the current
Snapshot Layout.
Note
Panes set to “None” do not display anything when viewed from the main
Web Snapshot page. It is acceptable to leave them in your Snapshot

Layout.
Creating a New Layout
Navigate to the Snapshot Layout Editor page by clicking the Edit my Snapshot Layout
link on the main Web Snapshot page.
Note
If all panes of a custom layout are deleted, the entire layout will be
deleted. Furthermore, if you attempt to delete all panes from a
STANDARD layout, an error message will be displayed to indicate that all

rows/columns cannot be deleted from the STANDARD layout.
Type in a name for your new layout in the New Layout text box, then click the button
labeled Create New Layout. A new layout is created with a default number of rows and
columns. Edit the layout to your liking. Refer to the previous section titled Modifying a
Snapshot Layout for details on how to edit your new personal Snapshot Layout.
Save a Layout
Once you are done making changes to the layout:
• Click Save Layout:
This will save your changes and allow you to continue making additional changes.
OR
• Click Save Layout and Return:
This will save your changes and take you back to the main Web Snapshot home page.
Single student snapshot
To view a Web Snapshot for a single student:
1. Navigate to the main Web Snapshot page.
2. Select the appropriate aid year for which you want to see data in your Web Snapshot.
2-448
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3. Enter the student’s ID in the ID field.
4. Click the Find button
Using a population selection
To iteratively view Web Snapshots for each student in a list, use the Population Selection
feature.
1. Click the Show Popsel button to display the population selection parameters block, as
shown here:
2. Enter the appropriate values for each of the 4 population selection fields. Values
correspond to the key block values from the Banner GLAEXTR form.
3. Once all the values are entered, click the Go button. The number of records found in
the population selection will be displayed. If that number is greater than zero, a button
labeled Next Student will also be displayed.
4. Click the Next Student button to generate the Web Snapshot for the first student in
the population selection.
5. Navigation through the population selection can be done by using the Previous
Student and Next Student buttons.
Note
Records retrieved from the population selection are ordered by ID.

Creating and updating Web Snapshot Panes
Financial Aid Snapshot Administrators can create and modify Web Snapshot Panes.
Banner delivers three Snapshot Panes as examples of the Web Snapshot system
functionality.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-449
Web Snapshot Panes are SQL statements which are executed when a Web Snapshot page
is displayed, retrieving data from the Banner database and providing a simple layout of the
data.
From the main Web Snapshot page, click the link at the bottom labeled Snapshot Panes
Maintenance to create, modify, or delete Snapshot Panes.
To create a new Snapshot Pane:
1. Click the Create New Snapshot Pane button.
2. Sequence:
• Web Snapshot Panes can be composed of up to three separate queries. To create a
multiple-query Web Snapshot Pane, enter duplicate Snapshot Pane codes with
different Sequence numbers and queries. When rendered, the queries are executed
separately but their results are concatenated into the same Pane on the main Web
Snapshot page.
3. Enter a unique Snapshot Pane Code (up to 4 characters).
4. Enter a description for your new Snapshot Pane (up to 100 characters).
5. Enter a value for Columns:
• If you want a standard spreadsheet-like layout for your Snapshot Pane data, set
Columns to 0. This value will produce output with a single header row followed by
data rows.
• If you want a form-like presentation for your Snapshot Pane data, set Columns to
the number of Name-Value pair columns in which you want your data to appear.
6. Enter your SELECT query in the SQL column. Requirements for the query are
similar to the Banner RORRULE form’s advanced mode queries:
Query Requirements
• Your query must be an SQL SELECT statement. INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE/
ALTER/GRANT/etc. are not allowed.
2-450
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
• DO NOT end your query with a semi-colon (;).
• To specify the pidm for the ID being displayed on the main Web Snapshot page,
use the value “:PIDM” (all upper or lower case)
• To specify the aid year code that is specified on the main Web Snapshot page, use
the value “:AIDY” (all upper or lower case).
• Column aliases will be displayed as the report column headers on the main Web
Snapshot page when data is retrieved. You can specify case-sensitive column
aliases by placing your text after each column in the SELECT clause in
double-quotes.
Example: SELECT rorstat_tgrp_code “Tracking Group Code”…
• SQL queries are limited to 32,767 characters.
• Calling PL/SQL functions is allowed if the functions have the PRAGMA
RESTRICT_REFERENCES WNDS specified.
7. Once done entering/updating a Snapshot Pane:
• Click the Insert button if the Snapshot Pane is new.
• Click the Update button if you have modified an existing Snapshot Pane
Note
Upon Inserting/Updating a Snapshot Pane, the code will be executed to
check for errors. If there are code errors, they will be displayed and you
will need to correct them before re-entering your Snapshot Pane code. 
Note
Write and test your SQL in an Integrated Development Environment, such
as TOAD or PL/SQL Developer, then copy the code into the Web

Snapshot Pane Editor.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
2-451
2-452
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Processing
May 2012
3
Interfaces
This chapter discusses interfaces to other Banner modules. Modules discussed include:
• The Student Employment Module, which explains the application forms, reports,
and processes used to interface between the Financial Aid Student Employment
Module and Human Resources Systems. It includes instructions for performing
interfaced student employment and payroll transactions.
• The Accounts Receivable Module, which identifies and explains the application
forms, reports, and processes used to interface between the Financial Aid Module
and Accounts Receivable Systems.
• The Campus Loan Manager (CLM) Module, which provides information needed
for the (Plus system) CLM user to interface with Banner. The material provides
functional overviews to the interface in addition to information required to setup
and employ the interface. The document is to be used in conjunction with other
relevant Banner documentation and (Plus system) Campus Loan Manager
documentation.
Note
CLM has replaced LMS as the standard loan management solution.

Note
All forms associated with creating and maintaining employees in Human
Resources must be set up to the point where a student employee can be
paid. It is recommended that students and their positions be created in
such a way as to differentiate them from the non-student employees of

the school.
Student Employment module
The following is a checklist that you should follow when working with the Student
Employment module.
1. Define all work study funds in the Funds Management Module. Ensure that these
work study funds are added to each applicable student's financial aid package during
the packaging process. The Student Employment Module only processes college
work study awards with an Accept status in the student’s package. Refer to the
Banner Financial Aid Online Help for Funds Management and Packaging and
Disbursement form documentation.
May 2012
Banner Financial Aid 8.14.1
User Guide
Interfaces
3-1
2. If your financial aid office tracks earnings of non-awarded work study funds, identify
all other students with institutional employment. These students are considered
student employees, but have no impact on fund-related activity (for example,
institutional employment not awarded from